Microship PIC32MX - PDF - Farnell Element 14 - Revenir à l'accueil
|
|
|
|
![[TXT]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/icons/text.gif){kind=icon}
Farnell-ATMEL-8-bit-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:19 2.1M
Farnell-BYV79E-serie..> 10-Mar-2014 16:19 1.6M
Farnell-CIRRUS-LOGIC..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20 2.1M
Farnell-FICHE-DE-DON..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17 1.6M
Farnell-HUNTSMAN-Adv..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17 1.7M
Farnell-MOLEX-39-00-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:19 1.9M
Farnell-MOLEX-43020-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21 1.9M
Farnell-MOLEX-43160-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21 1.9M
Farnell-MOLEX-87439-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21 1.9M
Farnell-Molex-Crimp-..> 10-Mar-2014 16:27 1.7M
Farnell-NXP-74VHC126..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17 1.6M
Farnell-NXP-PBSS9110..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21 1.9M
Farnell-NXP-PMBFJ620..> 10-Mar-2014 16:16 1.7M
Farnell-NXP-PSMN1R7-..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17 1.6M
Farnell-NXP-PSMN7R0-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:19 2.1M
Farnell-OMRON-Master..> 10-Mar-2014 16:26 1.8M
Farnell-Pico-Spox-Wi..> 10-Mar-2014 16:16 1.7M
Farnell-Proskit-SS-3..> 10-Mar-2014 16:26 1.8M
Farnell-TEKTRONIX-DP..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20 2.0M
Farnell-Tektronix-AC..> 10-Mar-2014 15:52 1.5M
Farnell-The-essentia..> 10-Mar-2014 16:27 1.7M
Farnell-manual-bus-p..> 10-Mar-2014 16:29 1.9M
Farnell-uC-OS-III-Br..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20 2.0M
© 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. DS51775B-page 1 Overview The PIC32 USB Plug-In Module (PIM) demonstrates the capabilities of PIC32MX460F512 and PIC32MX795F512 microcontrollers using the Explorer 16 Development Board and the PICtail™ Plus Daughter Boards. This PIM supports USB device, embedded host, and On-The-Go (OTG) designs, when used in conjunction with the Explorer 16 and the USB PICtail Plus Daughter Board. The pinout for the PIC32 family of USB On-The-Go microcontrollers varies slightly from that of the General Purpose (GP) family. Therefore, on the USB PIM (MA320002), signals from the MCU are routed differently than those on the GP PIM (MA320001). This routing is intended to maximize the compatibility of the USB PIM with the Explorer 16 and its PICtail Plus daughter cards, therefore, some signals have changed location. See Figure 1 and Figure 3 for an overview of the PIM routing changes. Refer the PIM schematics (see Figure 2 and Figure 4 and the PIC32MX4XX (DS61143) and PIC32MX5XX/ 6XX/7XX (DS61156) family data sheets for additional details. FIGURE 1: USB PIM INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM FOR PIC32MX460F512 DEVICES RA14/SCL1 (66) *D-/RG3 (56) *VBUS (54) *USBID/RF3 (51) RB8/AN8 (32) *VBUSON/RB5 (20) *D+/RG2 (57) PIC32MX460F512 USB PICtail™ Plus RG2/SCL1 (57) D+ DVBUS USBID RA15/SDA1 (67) RA15 (67) RG3/SDA1 (56) RC4/*SDI1 (9) RC4 (9) RF7/SDI1 (54) RF8/*U1TX (53) U1TX/RF3 (51) RE8/INT1 (18) RE8/INT1 (18) RA14/INT3 (66) (32) [OVERCURRENT] (96) SHDN Explorer 16 (95) (89) (90) (1) (65) (60) (62) (68) (43) (67) J1/P1 P9/J4 RG15 (1) RD9 (69) RB2/C2IN-/AN2 (23) RB5/C1IN+/AN5 (20) RD9/SS1 (69) RB2/SS1 (23) RD0/*SDO1 (72) RF8/SDO1 (53) RD0 (72) *VUSB (55) VDD RG0 (90) NO CONNECT RG1 (89) NO CONNECT RG14 (95) NO CONNECT RG12 (96) NO CONNECT RD10/SCK1 (70) RD10 (70) RF6/SCK1 (55) RG13 (97) [PGOOD] (97) (66) RB6 (26) RB6 (26) Explorer 16 USB PIM RB0/CN2 (25) J10 RB0 (25) Legend: *xxx - Pin function changed from the PIC32MX3XX family. [xxx] - Pin function is optional, based on the USB PICtail™ Plus (xx) pin number. Pins not listed are unchanged from the PIC32MX3XX family. Revision History: REVB: Initial release REVC: Removed short between RB6 and RB8 REV1: Added Jumper J10 to allow CN2 to be used with PGOOD. PIC32MX PIC32 USB Plug-In Module for the Explorer 16 Development Board PIC32MX DS51775B-page 2 © 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 2: PIC32 USB PLUG-IN MODULE SCHEMATIC FOR PIC32MX460F512 DEVICES U1 PIC32MX460F512L © 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. DS51775B-page 3 PIC32MX FIGURE 3: USB PIM INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM FOR PIC32MX795F512 DEVICES RA14/SCL1 (66) *D-/RG3 (56) *VBUS (54) *USBID/RF3 (51) *RB8/AN8 (32) *VBUSON/RB5 (20) *D+/RG2 (57) PIC32MX795F512 USB PICtail™ Plus RG2/SCL1 (57) D+ DVBUS USBID RA15/SDA1 (67) RA15 (67) RG3/SDA1 (56) RC4/*SDI1 (9) RC4 (9) RF7/SDI1 (54) RF8/*U1TX (53) U1TX/RF3 (51) RE8/INT1 (18) RE8/INT1 (18) RA14/INT3 (66) (32) [OVERCURRENT] (96) [SHDN] Explorer 16 (95) (89) (90) (1) (65) (60) (62) (68) (43) (67) J1/P1 P9/J4 RG15 (1) RD9 (69) RB2/C2IN-/AN2 (23) RB5/C1IN+/AN5 (20) RD9/SS1 (69) RB2/SS1 (23) RD0/*SDO1 (72) RF8/SDO1 (53) RD0 (72) *VUSB (55) VDD RG0/C2RX (90) NO CONNECT RG1/C2TX (89) NO CONNECT RG14 (95) NO CONNECT RG12 (96) NO CONNECT RD10/SCK1 (70) RD10 (70) RF6/SCK1 (55) *RG13 (97) [PGOOD] (97) (66) Explorer 16 USB PIM RB0 (25) J10 RB0 (25) VCAP (85) C6 10 μF VCAP (85) Legend: *xxx - Pin function changed from the PIC32MX3XX family. [xxx] - Pin function is optional, based on the USB PICtail™ Plus (xx) pin number. Pins not listed are unchanged from the PIC32MX3XX family. Revision History: REV1: Initial release PIC32MX DS51775B-page 4 © 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 4: PIC32 USB PLUG-IN MODULE SCHEMATIC FOR PIC32MX795F512 DEVICES U1 PIC32MX795F512L © 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. DS51775B-page 5 PIC32MX REVISION HISTORY Revision A (October 2008) This is the original released version of the document. Revision B (April 2010) This revision includes the following updates: • Revised the “Overview” section • Updated Figure 1 and Figure 2 • Updated document to include information on the PIC32MX795F512 device • Added Figure 3 and Figure 4 PIC32MX DS51775B-page 6 © 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES: © 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. DS51775B-page 7 Information contained in this publication regarding device applications and the like is provided only for your convenience and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to ensure that your application meets with your specifications. MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at the buyer’s risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims, suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip intellectual property rights. Trademarks The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, dsPIC, KEELOQ, KEELOQ logo, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART, PIC32 logo, rfPIC and UNI/O are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. FilterLab, Hampshire, HI-TECH C, Linear Active Thermistor, MXDEV, MXLAB, SEEVAL and The Embedded Control Solutions Company are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, CodeGuard, dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, dsSPEAK, ECAN, ECONOMONITOR, FanSense, HI-TIDE, In-Circuit Serial Programming, ICSP, Mindi, MiWi, MPASM, MPLAB Certified logo, MPLIB, MPLINK, mTouch, Octopus, Omniscient Code Generation, PICC, PICC-18, PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICkit, PICtail, REAL ICE, rfLAB, Select Mode, Total Endurance, TSHARC, UniWinDriver, WiperLock and ZENA are trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their respective companies. © 2010, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the U.S.A., All Rights Reserved. Printed on recycled paper. ISBN: 978-1-60932-123-9 Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices: • Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet. • Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the intended manner and under normal conditions. • There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property. • Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code. • Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.” Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act. Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2002 certification for its worldwide headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and Tempe, Arizona; Gresham, Oregon and design centers in California and India. The Company’s quality system processes and procedures are for its PIC® MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs, KEELOQ® code hopping devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified. DS51775B-page 8 © 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. AMERICAS Corporate Office 2355 West Chandler Blvd. Chandler, AZ 85224-6199 Tel: 480-792-7200 Fax: 480-792-7277 Technical Support: http://support.microchip.com Web Address: www.microchip.com Atlanta Duluth, GA Tel: 678-957-9614 Fax: 678-957-1455 Boston Westborough, MA Tel: 774-760-0087 Fax: 774-760-0088 Chicago Itasca, IL Tel: 630-285-0071 Fax: 630-285-0075 Cleveland Independence, OH Tel: 216-447-0464 Fax: 216-447-0643 Dallas Addison, TX Tel: 972-818-7423 Fax: 972-818-2924 Detroit Farmington Hills, MI Tel: 248-538-2250 Fax: 248-538-2260 Kokomo Kokomo, IN Tel: 765-864-8360 Fax: 765-864-8387 Los Angeles Mission Viejo, CA Tel: 949-462-9523 Fax: 949-462-9608 Santa Clara Santa Clara, CA Tel: 408-961-6444 Fax: 408-961-6445 Toronto Mississauga, Ontario, Canada Tel: 905-673-0699 Fax: 905-673-6509 ASIA/PACIFIC Asia Pacific Office Suites 3707-14, 37th Floor Tower 6, The Gateway Harbour City, Kowloon Hong Kong Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 Australia - Sydney Tel: 61-2-9868-6733 Fax: 61-2-9868-6755 China - Beijing Tel: 86-10-8528-2100 Fax: 86-10-8528-2104 China - Chengdu Tel: 86-28-8665-5511 Fax: 86-28-8665-7889 China - Chongqing Tel: 86-23-8980-9588 Fax: 86-23-8980-9500 China - Hong Kong SAR Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 China - Nanjing Tel: 86-25-8473-2460 Fax: 86-25-8473-2470 China - Qingdao Tel: 86-532-8502-7355 Fax: 86-532-8502-7205 China - Shanghai Tel: 86-21-5407-5533 Fax: 86-21-5407-5066 China - Shenyang Tel: 86-24-2334-2829 Fax: 86-24-2334-2393 China - Shenzhen Tel: 86-755-8203-2660 Fax: 86-755-8203-1760 China - Wuhan Tel: 86-27-5980-5300 Fax: 86-27-5980-5118 China - Xian Tel: 86-29-8833-7252 Fax: 86-29-8833-7256 China - Xiamen Tel: 86-592-2388138 Fax: 86-592-2388130 China - Zhuhai Tel: 86-756-3210040 Fax: 86-756-3210049 ASIA/PACIFIC India - Bangalore Tel: 91-80-3090-4444 Fax: 91-80-3090-4123 India - New Delhi Tel: 91-11-4160-8631 Fax: 91-11-4160-8632 India - Pune Tel: 91-20-2566-1512 Fax: 91-20-2566-1513 Japan - Yokohama Tel: 81-45-471- 6166 Fax: 81-45-471-6122 Korea - Daegu Tel: 82-53-744-4301 Fax: 82-53-744-4302 Korea - Seoul Tel: 82-2-554-7200 Fax: 82-2-558-5932 or 82-2-558-5934 Malaysia - Kuala Lumpur Tel: 60-3-6201-9857 Fax: 60-3-6201-9859 Malaysia - Penang Tel: 60-4-227-8870 Fax: 60-4-227-4068 Philippines - Manila Tel: 63-2-634-9065 Fax: 63-2-634-9069 Singapore Tel: 65-6334-8870 Fax: 65-6334-8850 Taiwan - Hsin Chu Tel: 886-3-6578-300 Fax: 886-3-6578-370 Taiwan - Kaohsiung Tel: 886-7-536-4818 Fax: 886-7-536-4803 Taiwan - Taipei Tel: 886-2-2500-6610 Fax: 886-2-2508-0102 Thailand - Bangkok Tel: 66-2-694-1351 Fax: 66-2-694-1350 EUROPE Austria - Wels Tel: 43-7242-2244-39 Fax: 43-7242-2244-393 Denmark - Copenhagen Tel: 45-4450-2828 Fax: 45-4485-2829 France - Paris Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20 Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79 Germany - Munich Tel: 49-89-627-144-0 Fax: 49-89-627-144-44 Italy - Milan Tel: 39-0331-742611 Fax: 39-0331-466781 Netherlands - Drunen Tel: 31-416-690399 Fax: 31-416-690340 Spain - Madrid Tel: 34-91-708-08-90 Fax: 34-91-708-08-91 UK - Wokingham Tel: 44-118-921-5869 Fax: 44-118-921-5820 Worldwide Sales and Service 01/05/10 EPCOS Sample Kit 2012 SMD NTC Thermistors General-Use Components for Temperature Measurement and Compensation www.epcos.com What are SMD NTC thermistors? As defined by IEC 60539, NTC (Negative Temperature Coefficient) thermistors are thermally sensitive semiconductor resistors which show a decrease in resistance as temperature increases. SMD NTCs are designed for temperature measurement and compensation. Benefits for customer applications Available case sizes 0402, 0603 and 0805 (1206 upon request) Resistance values 1 kV up to 680 kV Operating temperature range: –55 … +125 °C Excellent long-term aging stability in high-temperature environment Nickel barrier termination and lead-free solderability Important information: Some parts of this publication contain statements about the suitability of our products for certain areas of application. These statements are based on our knowledge of typical requirements that are often placed on our products. We expressly point out that these statements cannot be regarded as binding statements about the suitability of our products for a particular customer application. It is incumbent on the customer to check and decide whether a product is suitable for use in a particular application. This publication is only a brief product survey which may be changed from time to time. Our products are described in detail in our data sheets. The Important notes (www.epcos.com /ImportantNotes) and the product-specific Cautions and warnings must be observed. All relevant information is available through our sales offices. B57221 V2472J060 B57230 V2103F260 B57221 V2103J060 B57261 V2223J060 B57221 V2473J060 B57321 V2102J060 B57301 V2472J060 B57330 V2103F260 B57321 V2103J060 B57371 V2103J060 B57321 V2223J060 B57371 V2223J060 B57321 V2473J060 B57371 V2473J060 B57371 V2104J060 B57371 V2474J060 B57421 V2102J062 B57421 V2222J062 B57401 V2472J062 B57471 V2472J062 B57421 V2103J062 B57471 V2103J062 B57421 V2223J062 B57471 V2223J062 B57471 V2473J062 B57471 V2104J062 B57471 V2474J062 Components Product range Electrical specifications and ordering codes EIA R25 DRR B25/50 B25/85 B25/100 Ordering code case size [kV] % [K] [K] [K] Case size 0402 0402 4.7 ±5 3940 3980 4000 ±3% B57221V2472J060 0402 10 ±1 3380 3435 3455 ±1% B57230V2103F260 0402 10 ±5 3940 3980 4000 ±3% B57221V2103J060 0402 22 ±5 4473 4548 4575 ±3% B57261V2223J060 0402 47 ±5 3940 3980 4000 ±3% B57221V2473J060 Case size 0603 0603 1 ±3, ±5 3940 3980 4000 ±3% B57321V2102+060 0603 4.7 ±3, ±5 3590 3635 3650 ±3% B57301V2472+060 0603 10 ±1 3380 3435 3455 ±1% B57330V2103F260 0603 10 ±3, ±5 3940 3980 4000 ±3% B57321V2103+060 0603 10 ±3, ±5 4386 4455 4480 ±3% B57371V2103+060 0603 22 ±3, ±5 3940 3980 4000 ±3% B57321V2223+060 0603 22 ±3, ±5 4386 4455 4480 ±3% B57371V2223+060 0603 47 ±3, ±5 3940 3980 4000 ±3% B57321V2473+060 0603 47 ±3, ±5 4386 4455 4480 ±3% B57371V2473+060 0603 100 ±3, ±5 4386 4455 4480 ±3% B57371V2104+060 0603 470 ±3, ±5 4386 4455 4480 ±3% B57371V2474+060 Case size 0805 0805 1 ±3, ±5 3940 3980 4000 ±3% B57421V2102+062 0805 2.2 ±3, ±5 3940 3980 4000 ±3% B57421V2222+062 0805 4.7 ±3, ±5 3590 3635 3650 ±3% B57401V2472+062 0805 4.7 ±3, ±5 4386 4455 4480 ±3% B57471V2472+062 0805 10 ±3, ±5 3940 3980 4000 ±3% B57421V2103+062 0805 10 ±3, ±5 4386 4455 4480 ±3% B57471V2103+062 0805 22 ±3, ±5 3940 3980 4000 ±3% B57421V2223+062 0805 22 ±3, ±5 4386 4455 4480 ±3% B57471V2223+062 0805 47 ±3, ±5 4386 4455 4480 ±3% B57471V2473+062 0805 100 ±3, ±5 4386 4455 4480 ±3% B57471V2104+062 0805 470 ±3, ±5 4386 4455 4480 ±3% B57471V2474+062 See enclosed CD-ROM for data sheets and further details. + = Resistance tolerance: H = ±3%, J = ±5% Application examples for SMD NTC thermistors Diagrams for LED, power amplifier and battery pack LED LED lifetime is extended if the current through the LED is controlled by using a NTC thermistor as temperature sensor. 10 kV ±5% 10 kV ±1% 100 kV ±5% Power amplifier Compensation circuit of a power amplifier using a NTC thermistor as temperature sensor. Battery pack Schematic drawing of the charging control unit of a battery pack using NTC thermistors as temperature sensors. 10 kV ±5% 10 kV ±1% Further applications: Temperature sensing and compensation in e.g. Household electronics (refrigerators and deep-freezers, washing machines, water boilers, LED lighting etc.) Heating and air-conditioning Industrial electronics Computer and consumer electronics Telecommunications © EPCOS AG · A Member of TDK-EPC Corporation Edition 07/2012 · Ordering No. B57999V2999J099 · Printed in Germany · SO 0712.5 1. General description The PCA9555 is a 24-pin CMOS device that provides 16 bits of General Purpose parallel Input/Output (GPIO) expansion for I2C-bus/SMBus applications and was developed to enhance the NXP Semiconductors family of I2C-bus I/O expanders. The improvements include higher drive capability, 5 V I/O tolerance, lower supply current, individual I/O configuration, and smaller packaging. I/O expanders provide a simple solution when additional I/O is needed for ACPI power switches, sensors, push buttons, LEDs, fans, etc. The PCA9555 consists of two 8-bit Configuration (Input or Output selection); Input, Output and Polarity Inversion (active HIGH or active LOW operation) registers. The system master can enable the I/Os as either inputs or outputs by writing to the I/O configuration bits. The data for each Input or Output is kept in the corresponding Input or Output register. The polarity of the read register can be inverted with the Polarity Inversion register. All registers can be read by the system master. Although pin-to-pin and I2C-bus address compatible with the PCF8575, software changes are required due to the enhancements, and are discussed in Application Note AN469. The PCA9555 open-drain interrupt output is activated when any input state differs from its corresponding input port register state and is used to indicate to the system master that an input state has changed. The power-on reset sets the registers to their default values and initializes the device state machine. Three hardware pins (A0, A1, A2) vary the fixed I2C-bus address and allow up to eight devices to share the same I2C-bus/SMBus. The fixed I2C-bus address of the PCA9555 is the same as the PCA9554, allowing up to eight of these devices in any combination to share the same I2C-bus/SMBus. 2. Features n Operating power supply voltage range of 2.3 V to 5.5 V n 5 V tolerant I/Os n Polarity Inversion register n Active LOW interrupt output n Low standby current n Noise filter on SCL/SDA inputs n No glitch on power-up n Internal power-on reset n 16 I/O pins which default to 16 inputs n 0 Hz to 400 kHz clock frequency n ESD protection exceeds 2000 V HBM per JESD22-A114, 200 V MM per JESD22-A115, and 1000 V CDM per JESD22-C101 PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 Product data sheet PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 2 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt n Latch-up testing is done to JEDEC Standard JESD78 which exceeds 100 mA n Six packages offered: DIP24, SO24, SSOP24, TSSOP24, HVQFN24 and HWQFN24 3. Ordering information 3.1 Ordering options Table 1. Ordering information Type number Package Name Description Version PCA9555N DIP24 plastic dual in-line package; 24 leads (600 mil) SOT101-1 PCA9555D SO24 plastic small outline package; 24 leads; body width 7.5 mm SOT137-1 PCA9555DB SSOP24 plastic shrink small outline package; 24 leads; body width 5.3 mm SOT340-1 PCA9555PW TSSOP24 plastic thin shrink small outline package; 24 leads; body width 4.4 mm SOT355-1 PCA9555BS HVQFN24 plastic thermal enhanced very thin quad flat package; no leads; 24 terminals; body 4 ´ 4 ´ 0.85 mm SOT616-1 PCA9555HF HWQFN24 plastic thermal enhanced very very thin quad flat package; no leads; 24 terminals; body 4 ´ 4 ´ 0.75 mm SOT994-1 Table 2. Ordering options Type number Topside mark Temperature range PCA9555N PCA9555 -40 °C to +85 °C PCA9555D PCA9555D -40 °C to +85 °C PCA9555DB PCA9555 -40 °C to +85 °C PCA9555PW PCA9555 -40 °C to +85 °C PCA9555BS 9555 -40 °C to +85 °C PCA9555HF P55H -40 °C to +85 °C PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 3 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 4. Block diagram 5. Pinning information 5.1 Pinning Remark: All I/Os are set to inputs at reset. Fig 1. Block diagram of PCA9555 PCA9555 POWER-ON RESET 002aac702 I2C-BUS/SMBus CONTROL INPUT FILTER SCL SDA VDD INPUT/ OUTPUT PORTS IO0_0 VSS 8-bit write pulse read pulse IO0_2 IO0_1 IO0_3 IO0_4 IO0_5 IO0_6 IO0_7 INPUT/ OUTPUT PORTS IO1_0 8-bit write pulse read pulse IO1_2 IO1_1 IO1_3 IO1_4 IO1_5 IO1_6 IO1_7 INT A1 A0 A2 LP filter VDD Fig 2. Pin configuration for DIP24 Fig 3. Pin configuration for SO24 VDD SDA SCL A0 IO1_7 IO1_6 IO1_5 IO1_4 IO1_3 IO1_2 IO1_1 IO1_0 INT A1 A2 IO0_0 IO0_1 IO0_2 IO0_3 IO0_4 IO0_5 IO0_6 IO0_7 VSS PCA9555N 002aac697 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 13 16 15 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23 INT VDD A1 SDA A2 SCL IO0_0 A0 IO0_1 IO1_7 IO0_2 IO1_6 IO0_3 IO1_5 IO0_4 IO1_4 IO0_5 IO1_3 IO0_6 IO1_2 IO0_7 IO1_1 VSS IO1_0 PCA9555D 002aac698 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 13 16 15 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23 PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 4 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt Fig 4. Pin configuration for SSOP24 Fig 5. Pin configuration for TSSOP24 Fig 6. Pin configuration for HVQFN24 Fig 7. Pin configuration for HWQFN24 INT A1 A2 IO0_0 IO0_1 IO0_2 IO0_3 IO0_4 IO0_5 IO0_6 IO0_7 VSS PCA9555DB 002aac699 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 13 16 15 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23 VDD SDA SCL A0 IO1_7 IO1_6 IO1_5 IO1_4 IO1_3 IO1_2 IO1_1 IO1_0 VDD SDA SCL A0 IO1_7 IO1_6 IO1_5 IO1_4 IO1_3 IO1_2 IO1_1 IO1_0 INT A1 A2 IO0_0 IO0_1 IO0_2 IO0_3 IO0_4 IO0_5 IO0_6 IO0_7 VSS PCA9555PW 002aac700 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 13 16 15 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23 002aac701 PCA9555BS Transparent top view IO1_3 IO0_4 IO0_5 IO1_4 IO0_3 IO1_5 IO0_2 IO1_6 IO0_1 IO1_7 IO0_0 A0 IO0_6 IO0_7 VSS IO1_0 IO1_1 IO1_2 A2 A1 VDD SDA SCL terminal 1 index area 6 13 5 14 4 15 3 16 2 17 1 18 7 8 9 10 11 12 24 23 22 21 20 19 INT 002aac881 Transparent top view IO1_3 IO0_4 IO0_5 IO1_4 IO0_3 IO1_5 IO0_2 IO1_6 IO0_1 IO1_7 IO0_0 A0 IO0_6 IO0_7 VSS IO1_0 IO1_1 IO1_2 A2 A1 INT VDD SDA SCL terminal 1 index area 6 13 5 14 4 15 3 16 2 17 1 18 7 8 9 10 11 12 24 23 22 21 20 19 PCA9555HF PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 5 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 5.2 Pin description [1] HVQFN and HWQFN package die supply ground is connected to both the VSS pin and the exposed center pad. The VSS pin must be connected to supply ground for proper device operation. For enhanced thermal, electrical, and board-level performance, the exposed pad needs to be soldered to the board using a corresponding thermal pad on the board, and for proper heat conduction through the board thermal vias need to be incorporated in the PCB in the thermal pad region. Table 3. Pin description Symbol Pin Description DIP24, SO24, SSOP24, TSSOP24 HVQFN24, HWQFN24 INT 1 22 interrupt output (open-drain) A1 2 23 address input 1 A2 3 24 address input 2 IO0_0 4 1 port 0 input/output IO0_1 5 2 IO0_2 6 3 IO0_3 7 4 IO0_4 8 5 IO0_5 9 6 IO0_6 10 7 IO0_7 11 8 VSS 12 9[1] supply ground IO1_0 13 10 port 1 input/output IO1_1 14 11 IO1_2 15 12 IO1_3 16 13 IO1_4 17 14 IO1_5 18 15 IO1_6 19 16 IO1_7 20 17 A0 21 18 address input 0 SCL 22 19 serial clock line SDA 23 20 serial data line VDD 24 21 supply voltage PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 6 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 6. Functional description Refer to Figure 1 “Block diagram of PCA9555”. 6.1 Device address 6.2 Registers 6.2.1 Command byte The command byte is the first byte to follow the address byte during a write transmission. It is used as a pointer to determine which of the following registers will be written or read. Fig 8. PCA9555 device address R/W 002aac219 0 1 0 0 A2 A1 A0 programmable slave address fixed Table 4. Command byte Command Register 0 Input port 0 1 Input port 1 2 Output port 0 3 Output port 1 4 Polarity Inversion port 0 5 Polarity Inversion port 1 6 Configuration port 0 7 Configuration port 1 PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 7 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 6.2.2 Registers 0 and 1: Input port registers This register is an input-only port. It reflects the incoming logic levels of the pins, regardless of whether the pin is defined as an input or an output by Register 3. Writes to this register have no effect. The default value ‘X’ is determined by the externally applied logic level. 6.2.3 Registers 2 and 3: Output port registers This register is an output-only port. It reflects the outgoing logic levels of the pins defined as outputs by Registers 6 and 7. Bit values in this register have no effect on pins defined as inputs. In turn, reads from this register reflect the value that is in the flip-flop controlling the output selection, not the actual pin value. 6.2.4 Registers 4 and 5: Polarity Inversion registers This register allows the user to invert the polarity of the Input port register data. If a bit in this register is set (written with ‘1’), the Input port data polarity is inverted. If a bit in this register is cleared (written with a ‘0’), the Input port data polarity is retained. Table 5. Input port 0 Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Symbol I0.7 I0.6 I0.5 I0.4 I0.3 I0.2 I0.1 I0.0 Default X X X X X X X X Table 6. Input port 1 register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Symbol I1.7 I1.6 I1.5 I1.4 I1.3 I1.2 I1.1 I1.0 Default X X X X X X X X Table 7. Output port 0 register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Symbol O0.7 O0.6 O0.5 O0.4 O0.3 O0.2 O0.1 O0.0 Default 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Table 8. Output port 1 register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Symbol O1.7 O1.6 O1.5 O1.4 O1.3 O1.2 O1.1 O1.0 Default 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Table 9. Polarity Inversion port 0 register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Symbol N0.7 N0.6 N0.5 N0.4 N0.3 N0.2 N0.1 N0.0 Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 10. Polarity Inversion port 1 register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Symbol N1.7 N1.6 N1.5 N1.4 N1.3 N1.2 N1.1 N1.0 Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 8 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 6.2.5 Registers 6 and 7: Configuration registers This register configures the directions of the I/O pins. If a bit in this register is set (written with ‘1’), the corresponding port pin is enabled as an input with high-impedance output driver. If a bit in this register is cleared (written with ‘0’), the corresponding port pin is enabled as an output. Note that there is a high value resistor tied to VDD at each pin. At reset, the device's ports are inputs with a pull-up to VDD. 6.3 Power-on reset When power is applied to VDD, an internal power-on reset holds the PCA9555 in a reset condition until VDD has reached VPOR. At that point, the reset condition is released and the PCA9555 registers and SMBus state machine will initialize to their default states. The power-on reset typically completes the reset and enables the part by the time the power supply is above VPOR. However, when it is required to reset the part by lowering the power supply, it is necessary to lower it below 0.2 V. 6.4 I/O port When an I/O is configured as an input, FETs Q1 and Q2 are off, creating a high-impedance input with a weak pull-up to VDD. The input voltage may be raised above VDD to a maximum of 5.5 V. If the I/O is configured as an output, then either Q1 or Q2 is on, depending on the state of the Output Port register. Care should be exercised if an external voltage is applied to an I/O configured as an output because of the low-impedance path that exists between the pin and either VDD or VSS. Table 11. Configuration port 0 register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Symbol C0.7 C0.6 C0.5 C0.4 C0.3 C0.2 C0.1 C0.0 Default 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Table 12. Configuration port 1 register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Symbol C1.7 C1.6 C1.5 C1.4 C1.3 C1.2 C1.1 C1.0 Default 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 9 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 6.5 Bus transactions 6.5.1 Writing to the port registers Data is transmitted to the PCA9555 by sending the device address and setting the least significant bit to a logic 0 (see Figure 8 “PCA9555 device address”). The command byte is sent after the address and determines which register will receive the data following the command byte. The eight registers within the PCA9555 are configured to operate as four register pairs. The four pairs are Input Ports, Output Ports, Polarity Inversion Ports, and Configuration Ports. After sending data to one register, the next data byte will be sent to the other register in the pair (see Figure 10 and Figure 11). For example, if the first byte is sent to Output Port 1 (register 3), then the next byte will be stored in Output Port 0 (register 2). There is no limitation on the number of data bytes sent in one write transmission. In this way, each 8-bit register may be updated independently of the other registers. At power-on reset, all registers return to default values. Fig 9. Simplified schematic of I/Os VDD I/O pin output port configuration register data register D Q CK Q data from shift register write configuration pulse output port register D Q write pulse CK polarity inversion register D Q CK data from shift register write polarity pulse input port register D Q read pulse CK input port register data polarity inversion register data 002aac703 FF data from shift register FF FF FF Q1 Q2 VSS to INT 100 kW xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 10 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt Fig 10. Write to Output port registers S 0 1 0 0 A2 A1 A0 0 A START condition R/W acknowledge from slave 002aac220 A SCL SDA A write to port data out from port 0 P tv(Q) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 command byte data to port 0 DATA 0 slave address 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 STOP condition 0.7 0.0 acknowledge from slave acknowledge from slave data to port 1 1.7 DATA 1 1.0 A data out from port 1 tv(Q) DATA VALID Fig 11. Write to Configuration registers S 0 1 0 0 A2 A1 A0 0 A START condition R/W acknowledge from slave 002aac221 A SCL SDA A P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 command byte data to register DATA 0 slave address 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 STOP condition MSB LSB acknowledge from slave acknowledge from slave data to register DATA 1 MSB LSB A PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 11 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 6.5.2 Reading the port registers In order to read data from the PCA9555, the bus master must first send the PCA9555 address with the least significant bit set to a logic 0 (see Figure 8 “PCA9555 device address”). The command byte is sent after the address and determines which register will be accessed. After a restart, the device address is sent again, but this time the least significant bit is set to a logic 1. Data from the register defined by the command byte will then be sent by the PCA9555 (see Figure 12, Figure 13 and Figure 14). Data is clocked into the register on the falling edge of the acknowledge clock pulse. After the first byte is read, additional bytes may be read but the data will now reflect the information in the other register in the pair. For example, if you read Input Port 1, then the next byte read would be Input Port 0. There is no limitation on the number of data bytes received in one read transmission but the final byte received, the bus master must not acknowledge the data. Remark: Transfer can be stopped at any time by a STOP condition. Fig 12. Read from register S A START condition R/W acknowledge from slave 002aac222 A acknowledge from slave SDA A P acknowledge from master DATA (first byte) slave address STOP condition S (repeated) START condition (cont.) (cont.) 0 1 0 0 A2 A1 A0 1 A R/W acknowledge from slave slave address at this moment master-transmitter becomes master-receiver and slave-receiver becomes slave-transmitter NA no acknowledge from master 0 1 0 0 A2 A1 A0 0 COMMAND BYTE data from lower or upper byte of register MSB LSB DATA (last byte) data from upper or lower byte of register MSB LSB xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 12 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt Remark: Transfer of data can be stopped at any moment by a STOP condition. When this occurs, data present at the latest acknowledge phase is valid (output mode). It is assumed that the command byte has previously been set to ‘00’ (read Input Port register). Fig 13. Read Input port register, scenario 1 S 0 1 0 0 A2 A1 A0 1 A START condition R/W acknowledge from slave 002aac223 A SCL SDA A read from port 0 P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 slave address I0.x STOP condition acknowledge from master I1.x acknowledge from master A I0.x acknowledge from master 1 I1.x non acknowledge from master data into port 0 read from port 1 data into port 1 INT 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 tv(INT_N) trst(INT_N) xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 13 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt Remark: Transfer of data can be stopped at any moment by a STOP condition. When this occurs, data present at the latest acknowledge phase is valid (output mode). It is assumed that the command byte has previously been set to ‘00’ (read Input Port register). Fig 14. Read Input port register, scenario 2 S 0 1 0 0 A2 A1 A0 1 A START condition R/W acknowledge from slave 002aac224 A SCL SDA A read from port 0 P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 slave address I0.x STOP condition acknowledge from master I1.x acknowledge from master A I0.x acknowledge from master 1 I1.x non acknowledge from master data into port 0 read from port 1 data into port 1 INT tv(INT_N) trst(INT_N) DATA 00 DATA 10 DATA 03 DATA 12 DATA 00 DATA 01 th(D) th(D) DATA 02 tsu(D) DATA 03 tsu(D) DATA 10 DATA 11 DATA 12 PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 14 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 6.5.3 Interrupt output The open-drain interrupt output is activated when one of the port pins changes state and the pin is configured as an input. The interrupt is deactivated when the input returns to its previous state or the Input Port register is read (see Figure 13). A pin configured as an output cannot cause an interrupt. Since each 8-bit port is read independently, the interrupt caused by Port 0 will not be cleared by a read of Port 1 or the other way around. Remark: Changing an I/O from an output to an input may cause a false interrupt to occur if the state of the pin does not match the contents of the Input Port register. 7. Characteristics of the I2C-bus The I2C-bus is for 2-way, 2-line communication between different ICs or modules. The two lines are a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL). Both lines must be connected to a positive supply via a pull-up resistor when connected to the output stages of a device. Data transfer may be initiated only when the bus is not busy. 7.1 Bit transfer One data bit is transferred during each clock pulse. The data on the SDA line must remain stable during the HIGH period of the clock pulse as changes in the data line at this time will be interpreted as control signals (see Figure 15). 7.1.1 START and STOP conditions Both data and clock lines remain HIGH when the bus is not busy. A HIGH-to-LOW transition of the data line while the clock is HIGH is defined as the START condition (S). A LOW-to-HIGH transition of the data line while the clock is HIGH is defined as the STOP condition (P) (see Figure 16). Fig 15. Bit transfer mba607 data line stable; data valid change of data allowed SDA SCL Fig 16. Definition of START and STOP conditions mba608 SDA SCL P STOP condition S START condition PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 15 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 7.2 System configuration A device generating a message is a ‘transmitter’; a device receiving is the ‘receiver’. The device that controls the message is the ‘master’ and the devices which are controlled by the master are the ‘slaves’ (see Figure 17). 7.3 Acknowledge The number of data bytes transferred between the START and the STOP conditions from transmitter to receiver is not limited. Each byte of eight bits is followed by one acknowledge bit. The acknowledge bit is a HIGH level put on the bus by the transmitter, whereas the master generates an extra acknowledge related clock pulse. A slave receiver which is addressed must generate an acknowledge after the reception of each byte. Also a master must generate an acknowledge after the reception of each byte that has been clocked out of the slave transmitter. The device that acknowledges has to pull down the SDA line during the acknowledge clock pulse, so that the SDA line is stable LOW during the HIGH period of the acknowledge related clock pulse; set-up time and hold time must be taken into account. A master receiver must signal an end of data to the transmitter by not generating an acknowledge on the last byte that has been clocked out of the slave. In this event, the transmitter must leave the data line HIGH to enable the master to generate a STOP condition. Fig 17. System configuration 002aaa966 MASTER TRANSMITTER/ RECEIVER SLAVE RECEIVER SLAVE TRANSMITTER/ RECEIVER MASTER TRANSMITTER MASTER TRANSMITTER/ RECEIVER SDA SCL I2C-BUS MULTIPLEXER SLAVE Fig 18. Acknowledgement on the I2C-bus 002aaa987 S START condition 1 2 8 9 clock pulse for acknowledgement not acknowledge acknowledge data output by transmitter data output by receiver SCL from master PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 16 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 8. Application design-in information Device address configured as 0100 000xb for this example. IO0_0, IO0_2, IO0_3 configured as outputs. IO0_1, IO0_4, IO0_5 configured as inputs. IO0_6, IO0_7, and IO1_0 to IO1_7 configured as inputs. Fig 19. Typical application PCA9555 IO0_0 IO0_1 SCL SDA VDD (5 V) MASTER CONTROLLER SCL SDA INT IO0_2 VDD A2 A1 A0 VDD GND INT 10 kW SUB-SYSTEM 1 (e.g., temp sensor) IO0_3 INT SUB-SYSTEM 2 (e.g., counter) RESET controlled switch (e.g., CBT device) VDD A B ENABLE SUB-SYSTEM 3 (e.g., alarm system) ALARM IO0_4 IO0_5 IO0_6 10 DIGIT NUMERIC KEYPAD VSS 002aac704 10 kW 10 kW 2 kW IO0_7 IO1_0 IO1_1 IO1_2 IO1_3 IO1_4 IO1_5 IO1_6 IO1_7 PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 17 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 9. Limiting values Table 13. Limiting values In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134). Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit VDD supply voltage -0.5 +6.0 V VI/O voltage on an input/output pin VSS - 0.5 6 V IO output current on an I/O pin - ±50 mA II input current - ±20 mA IDD supply current - 160 mA ISS ground supply current - 200 mA Ptot total power dissipation - 200 mW Tstg storage temperature -65 +150 °C Tamb ambient temperature operating -40 +85 °C PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 18 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 10. Static characteristics [1] VDD must be lowered to 0.2 V for at least 5 ms in order to reset part. Table 14. Static characteristics VDD = 2.3 V to 5.5 V; VSS = 0 V; Tamb = -40 °C to +85 °C; unless otherwise specified. Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Supplies VDD supply voltage 2.3 - 5.5 V IDD supply current Operating mode; VDD = 5.5 V; no load; fSCL = 100 kHz - 135 200 mA Istb standby current Standby mode; VDD = 5.5 V; no load; VI = VSS; fSCL = 0 kHz; I/O = inputs - 1.1 1.5 mA Standby mode; VDD = 5.5 V; no load; VI = VDD; fSCL = 0 kHz; I/O = inputs - 0.25 1 mA VPOR power-on reset voltage[1] no load; VI = VDD or VSS - 1.5 1.65 V Input SCL; input/output SDA VIL LOW-level input voltage -0.5 - +0.3VDD V VIH HIGH-level input voltage 0.7VDD - 5.5 V IOL LOW-level output current VOL = 0.4 V 3 - - mA IL leakage current VI = VDD = VSS -1 - +1 mA Ci input capacitance VI = VSS - 6 10 pF I/Os VIL LOW-level input voltage -0.5 - +0.3VDD V VIH HIGH-level input voltage 0.7VDD - 5.5 V IOL LOW-level output current VDD = 2.3 V to 5.5 V; VOL = 0.5 V [2] 8 (8 to 20) - mA VDD = 2.3 V to 5.5 V; VOL = 0.7 V [2] 10 (10 to 24) - mA VOH HIGH-level output voltage IOH = -8 mA; VDD = 2.3 V [3] 1.8 - - V IOH = -10 mA; VDD = 2.3 V [3] 1.7 - - V IOH = -8 mA; VDD = 3.0 V [3] 2.6 - - V IOH = -10 mA; VDD = 3.0 V [3] 2.5 - - V IOH = -8 mA; VDD = 4.75 V [3] 4.1 - - V IOH = -10 mA; VDD = 4.75 V [3] 4.0 - - V ILIH HIGH-level input leakage current VDD = 5.5 V; VI = VDD - - 1 mA ILIL LOW-level input leakage current VDD = 5.5 V; VI = VSS - - -100 mA Ci input capacitance - 3.7 5 pF Co output capacitance - 3.7 5 pF Interrupt INT IOL LOW-level output current VOL = 0.4 V 3 - - mA Select inputs A0, A1, A2 VIL LOW-level input voltage -0.5 - +0.3VDD V VIH HIGH-level input voltage 0.7VDD - 5.5 V ILI input leakage current -1 - +1 mA PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 19 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt [2] Each I/O must be externally limited to a maximum of 25 mA and each octal (IO0_0 to IO0_7 and IO1_0 to IO1_7) must be limited to a maximum current of 100 mA for a device total of 200 mA. [3] The total current sourced by all I/Os must be limited to 160 mA. (1) IOH = -8 mA (2) IOH = -10 mA (1) IOH = -8 mA (2) IOH = -10 mA Fig 20. VOH maximum Fig 21. VOH minimum VDD = 5.5 V; VI/O = 5.5 V; A2, A1, A0 set to logic 0. (1) Tamb = -40 °C (2) Tamb = +25 °C (3) Tamb = +85 °C Fig 22. IDD versus number of I/Os held LOW 2.0 5.0 4.0 3.0 6.0 VOH (V) VDD (V) 2.7 3.6 5.5 002aac706 (1) (2) 2.5 3.5 4.5 VOH (V) 1.5 VDD (V) 2.3 3.0 4.75 002aac707 (1) (2) 0 1.2 0.8 0.4 1.6 IDD (mA) number of I/Os 002aac705 all 1s one 0 three 0s all 0s (1) (2) (3) PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 20 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 11. Dynamic characteristics [1] tVD;ACK = time for acknowledgement signal from SCL LOW to SDA (out) LOW. [2] tVD;DAT = minimum time for SDA data out to be valid following SCL LOW. [3] Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. Table 15. Dynamic characteristics Symbol Parameter Conditions Standard-mode I2C-bus Fast-mode I2C-bus Unit Min Max Min Max fSCL SCL clock frequency 0 100 0 400 kHz tBUF bus free time between a STOP and START condition 4.7 - 1.3 - ms tHD;STA hold time (repeated) START condition 4.0 - 0.6 - ms tSU;STA set-up time for a repeated START condition 4.7 - 0.6 - ms tSU;STO set-up time for STOP condition 4.0 - 0.6 - ms tVD;ACK data valid acknowledge time [1] 0.3 3.45 0.1 0.9 ms tHD;DAT data hold time 0 - 0 - ns tVD;DAT data valid time [2] 300 - 50 - ns tSU;DAT data set-up time 250 - 100 - ns tLOW LOW period of the SCL clock 4.7 - 1.3 - ms tHIGH HIGH period of the SCL clock 4.0 - 0.6 - ms tf fall time of both SDA and SCL signals - 300 20 + 0.1Cb [3] 300 ns tr rise time of both SDA and SCL signals - 1000 20 + 0.1Cb [3] 300 ns tSP pulse width of spikes that must be suppressed by the input filter - 50 - 50 ns Port timing tv(Q) data output valid time - 200 - 200 ns tsu(D) data input set-up time 150 - 150 - ns th(D) data input hold time 1 - 1 - ms Interrupt timing tv(INT_N) valid time on pin INT - 4 - 4 ms trst(INT_N) reset time on pin INT - 4 - 4 ms PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 21 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 12. Test information Fig 23. Definition of timing on the I2C-bus tBUF tSP tHD;STA P S P tLOW tr tHD;DAT tf tHIGH tSU;DAT tSU;STA Sr tHD;STA tSU;STO SDA SCL 002aaa986 RL = load resistor. CL = load capacitance includes jig and probe capacitance. RT = termination resistance should be equal to the output impedance of Zo of the pulse generators. Fig 24. Test circuitry for switching times Fig 25. Load circuit PULSE GENERATOR VO CL 50 pF RL 500 W 002aab284 RT VI VDD DUT VDD open GND CL 50 pF 002aac226 RL 500 W from output under test 2VDD open GND RL S1 500 W PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 22 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 13. Package outline Fig 26. Package outline SOT101-1 (DIP24) UNIT A max. 1 2 b1 c D E e MH L OUTLINE REFERENCES VERSION EUROPEAN PROJECTION ISSUE DATE IEC JEDEC JEITA mm inches DIMENSIONS (inch dimensions are derived from the original mm dimensions) SOT101-1 99-12-27 03-02-13 A min. A max. b e1 ME w 1.7 1.3 0.53 0.38 0.32 0.23 32.0 31.4 14.1 13.7 3.9 3.4 2.54 15.24 0.25 15.80 15.24 17.15 15.90 5.1 0.51 4 2.2 0.066 0.051 0.021 0.015 0.013 0.009 1.26 1.24 0.56 0.54 0.15 0.13 0.1 0.6 0.01 0.62 0.60 0.68 0.63 0.2 0.02 0.16 0.087 051G02 MO-015 SC-509-24 MH c (e 1 ) ME A L seating plane A1 w M b1 e D A2 Z 24 1 13 12 b E pin 1 index 0 5 10 mm scale Note 1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.25 mm (0.01 inch) maximum per side are not included. Z max. (1) (1) (1) DIP24: plastic dual in-line package; 24 leads (600 mil) SOT101-1 PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 23 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt Fig 27. Package outline SOT137-1 (SO24) UNIT A max. A1 A2 A3 bp c D(1) E(1) e HE L Lp Q v w y Z (1) q OUTLINE REFERENCES VERSION EUROPEAN PROJECTION ISSUE DATE IEC JEDEC JEITA mm inches 2.65 0.3 0.1 2.45 2.25 0.49 0.36 0.32 0.23 15.6 15.2 7.6 7.4 1.27 10.65 10.00 1.1 1.0 0.9 0.4 8 0 o o 0.25 0.1 DIMENSIONS (inch dimensions are derived from the original mm dimensions) Note 1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) maximum per side are not included. 1.1 0.4 SOT137-1 X 12 24 w M q A A1 A2 bp D HE Lp Q detail X E Z c L v M A 13 (A 3 ) A y 0.25 075E05 MS-013 pin 1 index 0.1 0.012 0.004 0.096 0.089 0.019 0.014 0.013 0.009 0.61 0.60 0.30 0.29 0.05 1.4 0.055 0.419 0.394 0.043 0.039 0.035 0.016 0.01 0.25 0.01 0.004 0.043 0.016 0.01 e 1 0 5 10 mm scale SO24: plastic small outline package; 24 leads; body width 7.5 mm SOT137-1 99-12-27 03-02-19 PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 24 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt Fig 28. Package outline SOT340-1 (SSOP24) UNIT A1 A2 A3 bp c D(1) E(1) e HE L Lp Q v w y Z (1) q OUTLINE REFERENCES VERSION EUROPEAN PROJECTION ISSUE DATE IEC JEDEC JEITA mm 0.21 0.05 1.80 1.65 0.38 0.25 0.20 0.09 8.4 8.0 5.4 5.2 0.65 1.25 7.9 7.6 0.9 0.7 0.8 0.4 8 0 o 0.2 0.13 0.1 o DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions) Note 1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.2 mm maximum per side are not included. 1.03 0.63 SOT340-1 MO-150 99-12-27 03-02-19 X w M q A A1 A2 bp D HE Lp Q detail X E Z e c L v M A (A 3 ) A 1 12 24 13 0.25 y pin 1 index 0 2.5 5 mm scale SSOP24: plastic shrink small outline package; 24 leads; body width 5.3 mm SOT340-1 A max. 2 PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 25 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt Fig 29. Package outline SOT355-1 (TSSOP24) UNIT A1 A2 A3 bp c D(1) E(2) e HE L Lp Q v w y Z (1) q OUTLINE REFERENCES VERSION EUROPEAN PROJECTION ISSUE DATE IEC JEDEC JEITA mm 0.15 0.05 0.95 0.80 0.30 0.19 0.2 0.1 7.9 7.7 4.5 4.3 0.65 6.6 6.2 0.4 0.3 8 0 o 1 0.2 0.13 0.1 o DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions) Notes 1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.15 mm maximum per side are not included. 2. Plastic interlead protrusions of 0.25 mm maximum per side are not included. 0.75 0.50 SOT355-1 MO-153 99-12-27 03-02-19 0.25 0.5 0.2 w M bp Z e 1 12 24 13 pin 1 index q A A1 A2 Lp Q detail X L (A 3 ) HE E c v M A X D A y 0 2.5 5 mm scale TSSOP24: plastic thin shrink small outline package; 24 leads; body width 4.4 mm SOT355-1 A max. 1.1 PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 26 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt Fig 30. Package outline SOT616-1 (HVQFN24) 1 0.2 0.5 UNIT A1 b Eh e y OUTLINE REFERENCES VERSION EUROPEAN PROJECTION ISSUE DATE IEC JEDEC JEITA mm 4.1 3.9 Dh 2.25 1.95 y1 4.1 3.9 2.25 1.95 e1 2.5 e2 2.5 0.30 0.18 c 0.05 0.00 0.05 0.1 DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions) SOT616-1 - - - MO-220 - - - 0.5 0.3 L 0.1 v 0.05 w 0 2.5 5 mm scale SOT616-1 HVQFN24: plastic thermal enhanced very thin quad flat package; no leads; 24 terminals; body 4 x 4 x 0.85 mm A(1) max. A A1 c detail X y1 C y e L Eh Dh e e1 b 7 12 24 19 18 13 6 1 X D E C B A e2 01-08-08 02-10-22 terminal 1 index area terminal 1 index area C A C v M B w M 1/2 e 1/2 e E(1) Note 1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.075 mm maximum per side are not included. D(1) PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 27 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt Fig 31. Package outline SOT994-1 (HWQFN24) OUTLINE REFERENCES VERSION EUROPEAN PROJECTION ISSUE DATE IEC JEDEC JEITA SOT994-1 - - - MO-220 - - - SOT994-1 07-02-07 07-03-03 Note 1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.075 mm maximum per side are not included. UNIT A(1) max mm 0.8 0.05 0.00 0.30 0.18 4.1 3.9 2.25 1.95 4.1 3.9 2.25 1.95 2.5 2.5 0.1 A1 DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions) HWQFN24: plastic thermal enhanced very very thin quad flat package; no leads; 24 terminals; body 4 x 4 x 0.75 mm 0 2.5 5 mm scale b c 0.2 D(1) Dh E(1) Eh e 0.5 e1 e2 L 0.5 0.3 v w 0.05 y 0.05 y1 0.1 B A terminal 1 index area E D detail X A A1 c b e2 e1 e e 1/2 e 1/2 e Æ v M C A B Æ w M C terminal 1 index area 6 13 7 12 18 24 19 1 L Eh Dh C y1 C y X PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 28 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 14. Handling information All input and output pins are protected against ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD) under normal handling. When handling ensure that the appropriate precautions are taken as described in JESD625-A or equivalent standards. 15. Soldering of SMD packages This text provides a very brief insight into a complex technology. A more in-depth account of soldering ICs can be found in Application Note AN10365 “Surface mount reflow soldering description”. 15.1 Introduction to soldering Soldering is one of the most common methods through which packages are attached to Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs), to form electrical circuits. The soldered joint provides both the mechanical and the electrical connection. There is no single soldering method that is ideal for all IC packages. Wave soldering is often preferred when through-hole and Surface Mount Devices (SMDs) are mixed on one printed wiring board; however, it is not suitable for fine pitch SMDs. Reflow soldering is ideal for the small pitches and high densities that come with increased miniaturization. 15.2 Wave and reflow soldering Wave soldering is a joining technology in which the joints are made by solder coming from a standing wave of liquid solder. The wave soldering process is suitable for the following: • Through-hole components • Leaded or leadless SMDs, which are glued to the surface of the printed circuit board Not all SMDs can be wave soldered. Packages with solder balls, and some leadless packages which have solder lands underneath the body, cannot be wave soldered. Also, leaded SMDs with leads having a pitch smaller than ~0.6 mm cannot be wave soldered, due to an increased probability of bridging. The reflow soldering process involves applying solder paste to a board, followed by component placement and exposure to a temperature profile. Leaded packages, packages with solder balls, and leadless packages are all reflow solderable. Key characteristics in both wave and reflow soldering are: • Board specifications, including the board finish, solder masks and vias • Package footprints, including solder thieves and orientation • The moisture sensitivity level of the packages • Package placement • Inspection and repair • Lead-free soldering versus SnPb soldering 15.3 Wave soldering Key characteristics in wave soldering are: PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 29 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt • Process issues, such as application of adhesive and flux, clinching of leads, board transport, the solder wave parameters, and the time during which components are exposed to the wave • Solder bath specifications, including temperature and impurities 15.4 Reflow soldering Key characteristics in reflow soldering are: • Lead-free versus SnPb soldering; note that a lead-free reflow process usually leads to higher minimum peak temperatures (see Figure 32) than a SnPb process, thus reducing the process window • Solder paste printing issues including smearing, release, and adjusting the process window for a mix of large and small components on one board • Reflow temperature profile; this profile includes preheat, reflow (in which the board is heated to the peak temperature) and cooling down. It is imperative that the peak temperature is high enough for the solder to make reliable solder joints (a solder paste characteristic). In addition, the peak temperature must be low enough that the packages and/or boards are not damaged. The peak temperature of the package depends on package thickness and volume and is classified in accordance with Table 16 and 17 Moisture sensitivity precautions, as indicated on the packing, must be respected at all times. Studies have shown that small packages reach higher temperatures during reflow soldering, see Figure 32. Table 16. SnPb eutectic process (from J-STD-020C) Package thickness (mm) Package reflow temperature (°C) Volume (mm3) < 350 ³ 350 < 2.5 235 220 ³ 2.5 220 220 Table 17. Lead-free process (from J-STD-020C) Package thickness (mm) Package reflow temperature (°C) Volume (mm3) < 350 350 to 2000 > 2000 < 1.6 260 260 260 1.6 to 2.5 260 250 245 > 2.5 250 245 245 PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 30 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt For further information on temperature profiles, refer to Application Note AN10365 “Surface mount reflow soldering description”. 16. Soldering of through-hole mount packages 16.1 Introduction to soldering through-hole mount packages This text gives a very brief insight into wave, dip and manual soldering. Wave soldering is the preferred method for mounting of through-hole mount IC packages on a printed-circuit board. 16.2 Soldering by dipping or by solder wave Driven by legislation and environmental forces the worldwide use of lead-free solder pastes is increasing. Typical dwell time of the leads in the wave ranges from 3 seconds to 4 seconds at 250 °C or 265 °C, depending on solder material applied, SnPb or Pb-free respectively. The total contact time of successive solder waves must not exceed 5 seconds. The device may be mounted up to the seating plane, but the temperature of the plastic body must not exceed the specified maximum storage temperature (Tstg(max)). If the printed-circuit board has been pre-heated, forced cooling may be necessary immediately after soldering to keep the temperature within the permissible limit. 16.3 Manual soldering Apply the soldering iron (24 V or less) to the lead(s) of the package, either below the seating plane or not more than 2 mm above it. If the temperature of the soldering iron bit is less than 300 °C it may remain in contact for up to 10 seconds. If the bit temperature is between 300 °C and 400 °C, contact may be up to 5 seconds. MSL: Moisture Sensitivity Level Fig 32. Temperature profiles for large and small components 001aac844 temperature time minimum peak temperature = minimum soldering temperature maximum peak temperature = MSL limit, damage level peak temperature PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 31 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 16.4 Package related soldering information [1] For SDIP packages, the longitudinal axis must be parallel to the transport direction of the printed-circuit board. [2] For PMFP packages hot bar soldering or manual soldering is suitable. 17. Abbreviations Table 18. Suitability of through-hole mount IC packages for dipping and wave soldering Package Soldering method Dipping Wave CPGA, HCPGA - suitable DBS, DIP, HDIP, RDBS, SDIP, SIL suitable suitable[1] PMFP[2] - not suitable Table 19. Abbreviations Acronym Description CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor GPIO General Purpose Input/Output I2C-bus Inter-Integrated Circuit bus SMBus System Management Bus I/O Input/Output ACPI Advanced Configuration and Power Interface LED Light Emitting Diode ESD ElectroStatic Discharge HBM Human Body Model MM Machine Model CDM Charged Device Model PCB Printed-Circuit Board FET Field-Effect Transistor MSB Most Significant Bit LSB Least Significant Bit PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 32 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 18. Revision history Table 20. Revision history Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice Supersedes PCA9555_8 20091022 Product data sheet - PCA9555_7 Modifications: • Table 2 “Ordering options”, Topside mark for TSSOP24 package, PCA9555PW, is changed from “PCA9555PW” to “PCA9555” • Figure 13 “Read Input port register, scenario 1” modified • Figure 14 “Read Input port register, scenario 2” modified • Table 14 “Static characteristics”, Table note [1] modified (added phrase “for at least 5 ms”) • updated soldering information PCA9555_7 20070605 Product data sheet - PCA9555_6 PCA9555_6 20060825 Product data sheet - PCA9555_5 PCA9555_5 (9397 750 14125) 20040930 Product data sheet - PCA9555_4 PCA9555_4 (9397 750 13271) 20040727 Product data sheet - PCA9555_3 PCA9555_3 (9397 750 10164) 20020726 Product data 853-2252 28672 of 2002 July 26 PCA9555_2 PCA9555_2 (9397 750 09818) 20020513 Product data - PCA9555_1 PCA9555_1 (9397 750 08343) 20010507 Product data - - PCA9555_8 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 08 — 22 October 2009 33 of 34 NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt 19. Legal information 19.1 Data sheet status [1] Please consult the most recently issued document before initiating or completing a design. [2] The term ‘short data sheet’ is explained in section “Definitions”. [3] The product status of device(s) described in this document may have changed since this document was published and may differ in case of multiple devices. The latest product status information is available on the Internet at URL http://www.nxp.com. 19.2 Definitions Draft — The document is a draft version only. The content is still under internal review and subject to formal approval, which may result in modifications or additions. NXP Semiconductors does not give any representations or warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of information included herein and shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such information. Short data sheet — A short data sheet is an extract from a full data sheet with the same product type number(s) and title. A short data sheet is intended for quick reference only and should not be relied upon to contain detailed and full information. For detailed and full information see the relevant full data sheet, which is available on request via the local NXP Semiconductors sales office. In case of any inconsistency or conflict with the short data sheet, the full data sheet shall prevail. 19.3 Disclaimers General — Information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such information. Right to make changes — NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make changes to information published in this document, including without limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior to the publication hereof. Suitability for use — NXP Semiconductors products are not designed, authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in medical, military, aircraft, space or life support equipment, nor in applications where failure or malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental damage. NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own risk. Applications — Applications that are described herein for any of these products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the specified use without further testing or modification. Limiting values — Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) may cause permanent damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those given in the Characteristics sections of this document is not implied. Exposure to limiting values for extended periods may affect device reliability. Terms and conditions of sale — NXP Semiconductors products are sold subject to the general terms and conditions of commercial sale, as published at http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms, including those pertaining to warranty, intellectual property rights infringement and limitation of liability, unless explicitly otherwise agreed to in writing by NXP Semiconductors. In case of any inconsistency or conflict between information in this document and such terms and conditions, the latter will prevail. No offer to sell or license — Nothing in this document may be interpreted or construed as an offer to sell products that is open for acceptance or the grant, conveyance or implication of any license under any copyrights, patents or other industrial or intellectual property rights. Export control — This document as well as the item(s) described herein may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior authorization from national authorities. 19.4 Trademarks Notice: All referenced brands, product names, service names and trademarks are the property of their respective owners. I2C-bus — logo is a trademark of NXP B.V. 20. Contact information For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com Document status[1][2] Product status[3] Definition Objective [short] data sheet Development This document contains data from the objective specification for product development. Preliminary [short] data sheet Qualification This document contains data from the preliminary specification. Product [short] data sheet Production This document contains the product specification. NXP Semiconductors PCA9555 16-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with interrupt © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com Date of release: 22 October 2009 Document identifier: PCA9555_8 Please be aware that important notices concerning this document and the product(s) described herein, have been included in section ‘Legal information’. 21. Contents 1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3.1 Ordering options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 5 Pinning information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 5.1 Pinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 5.2 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 6 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.1 Device address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.2 Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.2.1 Command byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.2.2 Registers 0 and 1: Input port registers . . . . . . . 7 6.2.3 Registers 2 and 3: Output port registers. . . . . . 7 6.2.4 Registers 4 and 5: Polarity Inversion registers . 7 6.2.5 Registers 6 and 7: Configuration registers . . . . 8 6.3 Power-on reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 6.4 I/O port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 6.5 Bus transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 6.5.1 Writing to the port registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 6.5.2 Reading the port registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 6.5.3 Interrupt output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 7 Characteristics of the I2C-bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 7.1 Bit transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 7.1.1 START and STOP conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 7.2 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 7.3 Acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 8 Application design-in information . . . . . . . . . 16 9 Limiting values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 10 Static characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 11 Dynamic characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 12 Test information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 13 Package outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 14 Handling information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 15 Soldering of SMD packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 15.1 Introduction to soldering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 15.2 Wave and reflow soldering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 15.3 Wave soldering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 15.4 Reflow soldering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 16 Soldering of through-hole mount packages . 30 16.1 Introduction to soldering through-hole mount packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 16.2 Soldering by dipping or by solder wave . . . . . 30 16.3 Manual soldering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 16.4 Package related soldering information . . . . . . 31 17 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 18 Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 19 Legal information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 19.1 Data sheet status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 19.2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 19.3 Disclaimers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 19.4 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 20 Contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 21 Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Features • High Performance, Low Power Atmel® AVR® 8-Bit Microcontroller • Advanced RISC Architecture – 130 Powerful Instructions – Most Single Clock Cycle Execution – 32 × 8 General Purpose Working Registers – Fully Static Operation – Up to 16 MIPS Throughput at 16 MHz – On-Chip 2-cycle Multiplier • High Endurance Non-volatile Memory segments – 16 Kbytes of In-System Self-programmable Flash program memory – 512 Bytes EEPROM – 1 Kbytes Internal SRAM – Write/Erase cycles: 10,000 Flash/100,000 EEPROM – Data retention: 20 years at 85°C/100 years at 25°C(1) – Optional Boot Code Section with Independent Lock Bits In-System Programming by On-chip Boot Program True Read-While-Write Operation – Programming Lock for Software Security • JTAG (IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant) Interface – Boundary-scan Capabilities According to the JTAG Standard – Extensive On-chip Debug Support – Programming of Flash, EEPROM, Fuses, and Lock Bits through the JTAG Interface • Peripheral Features – 4 × 25 Segment LCD Driver – Two 8-bit Timer/Counters with Separate Prescaler and Compare Mode – One 16-bit Timer/Counter with Separate Prescaler, Compare Mode, and Capture Mode – Real Time Counter with Separate Oscillator – Four PWM Channels – 8-channel, 10-bit ADC – Programmable Serial USART – Master/Slave SPI Serial Interface – Universal Serial Interface with Start Condition Detector – Programmable Watchdog Timer with Separate On-chip Oscillator – On-chip Analog Comparator – Interrupt and Wake-up on Pin Change • Special Microcontroller Features – Power-on Reset and Programmable Brown-out Detection – Internal Calibrated Oscillator – External and Internal Interrupt Sources – Five Sleep Modes: Idle, ADC Noise Reduction, Power-save, Power-down, and Standby • I/O and Packages – 54 Programmable I/O Lines – 64-lead TQFP, 64-pad QFN/MLF and 64-pad DRQFN • Speed Grade: – ATmega169PV: 0 - 4 MHz @ 1.8V - 5.5V, 0 - 8 MHz @ 2.7V - 5.5V – ATmega169P: 0 - 8 MHz @ 2.7V - 5.5V, 0 - 16 MHz @ 4.5V - 5.5V • Temperature range: – -40°C to 85°C Industrial • Ultra-Low Power Consumption – Active Mode: 1 MHz, 1.8V: 330 μA 32 kHz, 1.8V: 10 μA (including Oscillator) 32 kHz, 1.8V: 25 μA (including Oscillator and LCD) – Power-down Mode: 0.1 μA at 1.8V – Power-save Mode: 0.6 μA at 1.8V (Including 32 kHz RTC) 8-bit Microcontroller with 16K Bytes In-System Programmable Flash ATmega169P ATmega169PV Preliminary Summary Rev. 8018PS–AVR–08/10 2 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P 1. Pin Configurations 1.1 Pinout - TQFP/QFN/MLF Figure 1-1. 64A (TQFP)and 64M1 (QFN/MLF) Pinout ATmega169P Note: The large center pad underneath the QFN/MLF packages is made of metal and internally connected to GND. It should be soldered or glued to the board to ensure good mechanical stability. If the center pad is left unconnected, the package might loosen from the board. 64 63 62 47 46 48 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 33 34 2 3 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 15 17 61 60 18 59 20 58 19 21 57 22 56 23 55 24 54 25 53 26 52 27 51 29 28 50 32 49 31 30 PC0 (SEG12) VCC GND PF0 (ADC0) PF7 (ADC7/TDI) PF1 (ADC1) PF2 (ADC2) PF3 (ADC3) PF4 (ADC4/TCK) PF5 (ADC5/TMS) PF6 (ADC6/TDO) AREF GND AVCC (RXD/PCINT0) PE0 (TXD/PCINT1) PE1 LCDCAP (XCK/AIN0/PCINT2) PE2 (AIN1/PCINT3) PE3 (USCK/SCL/PCINT4) PE4 (DI/SDA/PCINT5) PE5 (DO/PCINT6) PE6 (CLKO/PCINT7) PE7 (SS/PCINT8) PB0 (SCK/PCINT9) PB1 (MOSI/PCINT10) PB2 (MISO/PCINT11) PB3 (OC0A/PCINT12) PB4 (OC2A/PCINT15) PB7 (T1/SEG24) PG3 (OC1B/PCINT14) PB6 (T0/SEG23) PG4 (OC1A/PCINT13) PB5 PC1 (SEG11) PG0 (SEG14) (SEG15) PD7 PC2 (SEG10) PC3 (SEG9) PC4 (SEG8) PC5 (SEG7) PC6 (SEG6) PC7 (SEG5) PA7 (SEG3) PG2 (SEG4) PA6 (SEG2) PA5 (SEG1) PA4 (SEG0) PA3 (COM3) PA0 (COM0) PA1 (COM1) PA2 (COM2) PG1 (SEG13) (SEG16) PD6 (SEG17) PD5 (SEG18) PD4 (SEG19) PD3 (SEG20) PD2 (INT0/SEG21) PD1 (ICP1/SEG22) PD0 (TOSC1) XTAL1 (TOSC2) XTAL2 RESET/PG5 GND VCC INDEX CORNER 3 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P 1.2 Pinout - DRQFN Figure 1-2. 64MC (DRQFN) Pinout ATmega169P Top view Bottom view A1 B1 A2 B2 A3 B3 A4 B4 A5 B5 A6 B6 A7 B7 A8 A9 B8 A10 B9 A11 B10 A12 B11 A13 B12 A14 B13 A15 B14 A16 B15 A17 A25 B22 A24 B21 A23 B20 A22 B19 A21 B18 A20 B17 A19 B16 A18 A34 B30 A33 B29 A32 B28 A31 B27 A30 B26 A29 B25 A28 B24 A27 B23 A26 A1 B1 A2 B2 A3 B3 A4 B4 A5 B5 A6 B6 A7 B7 A8 A25 B22 A24 B21 A23 B20 A22 B19 A21 B18 A20 B17 A19 B16 A18 A17 B15 A16 B14 A15 B13 A14 B12 A13 B11 A12 B10 A11 B9 A10 B8 A9 A26 B23 A27 B24 A28 B25 A29 B26 A30 B27 A31 B28 A32 B29 A33 B30 A34 Table 1-1. DRQFN-64 Pinout ATmega169P. A1 PE0 A9 PB7 A18 PG1 (SEG13) A26 PA2 (COM2) B1 VLCDCAP B8 PB6 B16 PG0 (SEG14) B23 PA3 (COM3) A2 PE1 A10 PG3 A19 PC0 (SEG12) A27 PA1 (COM1) B2 PE2 B9 PG4 B17 PC1 (SEG11) B24 PA0 (COM0) A3 PE3 A11 RESET A20 PC2 (SEG10) A28 VCC B3 PE4 B10 VCC B18 PC3 (SEG9) B25 GND A4 PE5 A12 GND A21 PC4 (SEG8) A29 PF7 B4 PE6 B11 XTAL2 (TOSC2) B19 PC5 (SEG7) B26 PF6 A5 PE7 A13 XTAL1 (TOSC1) A22 PC6 (SEG6) A30 PF5 B5 PB0 B12 PD0 (SEG22) B20 PC7 (SEG5) B27 PF4 A6 PB1 A14 PD1 (SEG21) A23 PG2 (SEG4) A31 PF3 B6 PB2 B13 PD2 (SEG20) B21 PA7 (SEG3) B28 PF2 A7 PB3 A15 PD3 (SEG19) A24 PA6 (SEG2) A32 PF1 B7 PB5 B14 PD4 (SEG18) B22 PA4 (SEG0) B29 PF0 A8 PB4 A16 PD5 (SEG17) A25 PA5 (SEG1) A33 AREF B15 PD7 (SEG15) B30 AVCC A17 PD6 (SEG16) A34 GND 4 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P 2. Overview The ATmega169P is a low-power CMOS 8-bit microcontroller based on the AVR enhanced RISC architecture. By executing powerful instructions in a single clock cycle, the ATmega169P achieves throughputs approaching 1 MIPS per MHz allowing the system designer to optimize power consumption versus processing speed. 2.1 Block Diagram Figure 2-1. Block Diagram PROGRAM COUNTER INTERNAL OSCILLATOR WATCHDOG TIMER STACK POINTER PROGRAM FLASH MCU CONTROL REGISTER SRAM GENERAL PURPOSE REGISTERS INSTRUCTION REGISTER TIMER/ COUNTERS INSTRUCTION DECODER DATA DIR. REG. PORTB DATA DIR. REG. PORTE DATA DIR. REG. PORTA DATA DIR. REG. PORTD DATA REGISTER PORTB DATA REGISTER PORTE DATA REGISTER PORTA DATA REGISTER PORTD TIMING AND CONTROL OSCILLATOR INTERRUPT UNIT EEPROM USART SPI STATUS REGISTER Z Y X ALU PORTE DRIVERS PORTB DRIVERS PORTF DRIVERS PORTA DRIVERS PORTD DRIVERS PORTC DRIVERS PE0 - PE7 PB0 - PB7 PF0 - PF7 PA0 - PA7 VCC GND AREF XTAL1 XTAL2 CONTROL LINES + - ANALOG COMPARATOR PC0 - PC7 8-BIT DATA BUS RESET AVCC CALIB. OSC DATA DIR. REG. PORTC DATA REGISTER PORTC ON-CHIP DEBUG JTAG TAP PROGRAMMING LOGIC BOUNDARYSCAN DATA DIR. REG. PORTF DATA REGISTER PORTF ADC PD0 - PD7 DATA DIR. REG. PORTG DATA REG. PORTG PORTG DRIVERS PG0 - PG4 UNIVERSAL SERIAL INTERFACE AVR CPU LCD CONTROLLER/ DRIVER 5 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P The AVR core combines a rich instruction set with 32 general purpose working registers. All the 32 registers are directly connected to the Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU), allowing two independent registers to be accessed in one single instruction executed in one clock cycle. The resulting architecture is more code efficient while achieving throughputs up to ten times faster than conventional CISC microcontrollers. The ATmega169P provides the following features: 16 Kbytes of In-System Programmable Flash with Read-While-Write capabilities, 512 bytes EEPROM, 1 Kbyte SRAM, 53 general purpose I/O lines, 32 general purpose working registers, a JTAG interface for Boundary-scan, On-chip Debugging support and programming, a complete On-chip LCD controller with internal step-up voltage, three flexible Timer/Counters with compare modes, internal and external interrupts, a serial programmable USART, Universal Serial Interface with Start Condition Detector, an 8- channel, 10-bit ADC, a programmable Watchdog Timer with internal Oscillator, an SPI serial port, and five software selectable power saving modes. The Idle mode stops the CPU while allowing the SRAM, Timer/Counters, SPI port, and interrupt system to continue functioning. The Power-down mode saves the register contents but freezes the Oscillator, disabling all other chip functions until the next interrupt or hardware reset. In Power-save mode, the asynchronous timer and the LCD controller continues to run, allowing the user to maintain a timer base and operate the LCD display while the rest of the device is sleeping. The ADC Noise Reduction mode stops the CPU and all I/O modules except asynchronous timer, LCD controller and ADC, to minimize switching noise during ADC conversions. In Standby mode, the crystal/resonator Oscillator is running while the rest of the device is sleeping. This allows very fast start-up combined with low-power consumption. The device is manufactured using Atmel’s high density non-volatile memory technology. The On-chip ISP Flash allows the program memory to be reprogrammed In-System through an SPI serial interface, by a conventional non-volatile memory programmer, or by an On-chip Boot program running on the AVR core. The Boot program can use any interface to download the application program in the Application Flash memory. Software in the Boot Flash section will continue to run while the Application Flash section is updated, providing true Read-While-Write operation. By combining an 8-bit RISC CPU with In-System Self-Programmable Flash on a monolithic chip, the Atmel ATmega169P is a powerful microcontroller that provides a highly flexible and cost effective solution to many embedded control applications. The ATmega169P AVR is supported with a full suite of program and system development tools including: C Compilers, Macro Assemblers, Program Debugger/Simulators, In-Circuit Emulators, and Evaluation kits. 6 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P 2.2 Pin Descriptions 2.2.1 VCC Digital supply voltage. 2.2.2 GND Ground. 2.2.3 Port A (PA7:PA0) Port A is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port A output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port A pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port A pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port A also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega169P as listed on ”Alternate Functions of Port A” on page 73. 2.2.4 Port B (PB7:PB0) Port B is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port B output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port B pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port B pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port B has better driving capabilities than the other ports. Port B also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega169P as listed on ”Alternate Functions of Port B” on page 74. 2.2.5 Port C (PC7:PC0) Port C is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port C output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port C pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port C pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port C also serves the functions of special features of the ATmega169P as listed on ”Alternate Functions of Port C” on page 77. 2.2.6 Port D (PD7:PD0) Port D is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port D output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port D pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port D pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port D also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega169P as listed on ”Alternate Functions of Port D” on page 79. 7 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P 2.2.7 Port E (PE7:PE0) Port E is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port E output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port E pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port E pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port E also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega169P as listed on ”Alternate Functions of Port E” on page 81. 2.2.8 Port F (PF7:PF0) Port F serves as the analog inputs to the A/D Converter. Port F also serves as an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port, if the A/D Converter is not used. Port pins can provide internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port F output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port F pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port F pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. If the JTAG interface is enabled, the pull-up resistors on pins PF7(TDI), PF5(TMS), and PF4(TCK) will be activated even if a reset occurs. Port F also serves the functions of the JTAG interface, see ”Alternate Functions of Port F” on page 83. 2.2.9 Port G (PG5:PG0) Port G is a 6-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port G output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port G pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port G pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. Port G also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega169P as listed on page 85. 2.2.10 RESET Reset input. A low level on this pin for longer than the minimum pulse length will generate a reset, even if the clock is not running. The minimum pulse length is given in Table 28-4 on page 333. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a reset. 2.2.11 XTAL1 Input to the inverting Oscillator amplifier and input to the internal clock operating circuit. 2.2.12 XTAL2 Output from the inverting Oscillator amplifier. 2.2.13 AVCC AVCC is the supply voltage pin for Port F and the A/D Converter. It should be externally connected to VCC, even if the ADC is not used. If the ADC is used, it should be connected to VCC through a low-pass filter. 8 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P 2.2.14 AREF This is the analog reference pin for the A/D Converter. 2.2.15 LCDCAP An external capacitor (typical > 470 nF) must be connected to the LCDCAP pin as shown in Figure 23-2 on page 236. This capacitor acts as a reservoir for LCD power (VLCD). A large capacitance reduces ripple on VLCD but increases the time until VLCD reaches its target value. 9 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P 3. Resources A comprehensive set of development tools, application notes and datasheets are available for download on http://www.atmel.com/avr. Note: 1. 4. Data Retention Reliability Qualification results show that the projected data retention failure rate is much less than 1 PPM over 20 years at 85°C or 100 years at 25°C. 10 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P 5. Register Summary Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page (0xFF) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xFE) LCDDR18 – – – – – – – SEG324 250 (0xFD) LCDDR17 SEG323 SEG322 SEG321 SEG320 SEG319 SEG318 SEG317 SEG316 250 (0xFC) LCDDR16 SEG315 SEG314 SEG313 SEG312 SEG311 SEG310 SEG309 SEG308 250 (0xFB) LCDDR15 SEG307 SEG306 SEG305 SEG304 SEG303 SEG302 SEG301 SEG300 250 (0xFA) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xF9) LCDDR13 – – – – – – – SEG224 250 (0xF8) LCDDR12 SEG223 SEG222 SEG221 SEG220 SEG219 SEG218 SEG217 SEG216 250 (0xF7) LCDDR11 SEG215 SEG214 SEG213 SEG212 SEG211 SEG210 SEG209 SEG208 250 (0xF6) LCDDR10 SEG207 SEG206 SEG205 SEG204 SEG203 SEG202 SEG201 SEG200 250 (0xF5) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xF4) LCDDR8 – – – – – – – SEG124 250 (0xF3) LCDDR7 SEG123 SEG122 SEG121 SEG120 SEG119 SEG118 SEG117 SEG116 250 (0xF2) LCDDR6 SEG115 SEG114 SEG113 SEG112 SEG111 SEG110 SEG109 SEG108 250 (0xF1) LCDDR5 SEG107 SEG106 SEG105 SEG104 SEG103 SEG102 SEG101 SEG100 250 (0xF0) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xEF) LCDDR3 – – – – – – – SEG024 250 (0xEE) LCDDR2 SEG023 SEG022 SEG021 SEG020 SEG019 SEG018 SEG017 SEG016 250 (0xED) LCDDR1 SEG015 SEG014 SEG013 SEG012 SEG011 SEG010 SEG09 SEG008 250 (0xEC) LCDDR0 SEG007 SEG006 SEG005 SEG004 SEG003 SEG002 SEG001 SEG000 250 (0xEB) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xEA) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xE9) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xE8) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xE7) LCDCCR LCDDC2 LCDDC1 LCDDC0 LCDMDT LCDCC3 LCDCC2 LCDCC1 LCDCC0 249 (0xE6) LCDFRR – LCDPS2 LCDPS1 LCDPS0 – LCDCD2 LCDCD1 LCDCD0 247 (0xE5) LCDCRB LCDCS LCD2B LCDMUX1 LCDMUX0 – LCDPM2 LCDPM1 LCDPM0 246 (0xE4) LCDCRA LCDEN LCDAB – LCDIF LCDIE LCDBD LCDCCD LCDBL 245 (0xE3) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xE2) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xE1) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xE0) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xDF) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xDE) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xDD) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xDC) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xDB) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xDA) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xD9) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xD8) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xD7) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xD6) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xD5) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xD4) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xD3) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xD2) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xD1) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xD0) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xCF) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xCE) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xCD) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xCC) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xCB) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xCA) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xC9) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xC8) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xC7) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xC6) UDR0 USART0 I/O Data Register 190 (0xC5) UBRRH0 USART0 Baud Rate Register High 194 (0xC4) UBRRL0 USART0 Baud Rate Register Low 194 (0xC3) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xC2) UCSR0C – UMSEL0 UPM01 UPM00 USBS0 UCSZ01 UCSZ00 UCPOL0 190 (0xC1) UCSR0B RXCIE0 TXCIE0 UDRIE0 RXEN0 TXEN0 UCSZ02 RXB80 TXB80 190 (0xC0) UCSR0A RXC0 TXC0 UDRE0 FE0 DOR0 UPE0 U2X0 MPCM0 190 11 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P (0xBF) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xBE) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xBD) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xBC) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xBB) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xBA) USIDR USI Data Register 207 (0xB9) USISR USISIF USIOIF USIPF USIDC USICNT3 USICNT2 USICNT1 USICNT0 207 (0xB8) USICR USISIE USIOIE USIWM1 USIWM0 USICS1 USICS0 USICLK USITC 208 (0xB7) Reserved – – – – – – – (0xB6) ASSR – – – EXCLK AS2 TCN2UB OCR2UB TCR2UB 156 (0xB5) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xB4) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xB3) OCR2A Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register A 155 (0xB2) TCNT2 Timer/Counter2 (8-bit) 155 (0xB1) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xB0) TCCR2A FOC2A WGM20 COM2A1 COM2A0 WGM21 CS22 CS21 CS20 153 (0xAF) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xAE) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xAD) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xAC) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xAB) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xAA) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xA9) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xA8) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xA7) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xA6) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xA5) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xA4) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xA3) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xA2) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xA1) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0xA0) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x9F) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x9E) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x9D) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x9C) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x9B) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x9A) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x99) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x98) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x97) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x96) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x95) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x94) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x93) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x92) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x91) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x90) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x8F) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x8E) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x8D) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x8C) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x8B) OCR1BH Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register B High Byte 132 (0x8A) OCR1BL Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register B Low Byte 132 (0x89) OCR1AH Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register A High Byte 132 (0x88) OCR1AL Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register A Low Byte 132 (0x87) ICR1H Timer/Counter1 - Input Capture Register High Byte 133 (0x86) ICR1L Timer/Counter1 - Input Capture Register Low Byte 133 (0x85) TCNT1H Timer/Counter1 - Counter Register High Byte 132 (0x84) TCNT1L Timer/Counter1 - Counter Register Low Byte 132 (0x83) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x82) TCCR1C FOC1A FOC1B – – – – – – 131 (0x81) TCCR1B ICNC1 ICES1 – WGM13 WGM12 CS12 CS11 CS10 130 (0x80) TCCR1A COM1A1 COM1A0 COM1B1 COM1B0 – – WGM11 WGM10 128 (0x7F) DIDR1 – – – – – – AIN1D AIN0D 214 (0x7E) DIDR0 ADC7D ADC6D ADC5D ADC4D ADC3D ADC2D ADC1D ADC0D 232 Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page 12 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P (0x7D) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x7C) ADMUX REFS1 REFS0 ADLAR MUX4 MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0 228 (0x7B) ADCSRB – ACME – – – ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 213, 232 (0x7A) ADCSRA ADEN ADSC ADATE ADIF ADIE ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 230 (0x79) ADCH ADC Data Register High byte 231 (0x78) ADCL ADC Data Register Low byte 231 (0x77) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x76) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x75) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x74) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x73) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x72) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x71) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x70) TIMSK2 – – – – – – OCIE2A TOIE2 156 (0x6F) TIMSK1 – – ICIE1 – – OCIE1B OCIE1A TOIE1 133 (0x6E) TIMSK0 – – – – – – OCIE0A TOIE0 104 (0x6D) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x6C) PCMSK1 PCINT15 PCINT14 PCINT13 PCINT12 PCINT11 PCINT10 PCINT9 PCINT8 63 (0x6B) PCMSK0 PCINT7 PCINT6 PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0 64 (0x6A) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x69) EICRA – – – – – – ISC01 ISC00 62 (0x68) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x67) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x66) OSCCAL Oscillator Calibration Register 38 (0x65) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x64) PRR – – – PRLCD PRTIM1 PRSPI PRUSART0 PRADC 45 (0x63) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x62) Reserved – – – – – – – – (0x61) CLKPR CLKPCE – – – CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0 38 (0x60) WDTCR – – – WDCE WDE WDP2 WDP1 WDP0 54 0x3F (0x5F) SREG I T H S V N Z C 13 0x3E (0x5E) SPH – – – – – SP10 SP9 SP8 15 0x3D (0x5D) SPL SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 15 0x3C (0x5C) Reserved 0x3B (0x5B) Reserved 0x3A (0x5A) Reserved 0x39 (0x59) Reserved 0x38 (0x58) Reserved 0x37 (0x57) SPMCSR SPMIE RWWSB – RWWSRE BLBSET PGWRT PGERS SPMEN 293 0x36 (0x56) Reserved – – – – – – – – 0x35 (0x55) MCUCR JTD – – PUD – – IVSEL IVCE 60, 88, 278 0x34 (0x54) MCUSR – – – JTRF WDRF BORF EXTRF PORF 278 0x33 (0x53) SMCR – – – – SM2 SM1 SM0 SE 45 0x32 (0x52) Reserved – – – – – – – – 0x31 (0x51) OCDR IDRD/OCDR7 OCDR6 OCDR5 OCDR4 OCDR3 OCDR2 OCDR1 OCDR0 257 0x30 (0x50) ACSR ACD ACBG ACO ACI ACIE ACIC ACIS1 ACIS0 213 0x2F (0x4F) Reserved – – – – – – – – 0x2E (0x4E) SPDR SPI Data Register 167 0x2D (0x4D) SPSR SPIF WCOL – – – – – SPI2X 166 0x2C (0x4C) SPCR SPIE SPE DORD MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0 165 0x2B (0x4B) GPIOR2 General Purpose I/O Register 2 29 0x2A (0x4A) GPIOR1 General Purpose I/O Register 1 29 0x29 (0x49) Reserved – – – – – – – – 0x28 (0x48) Reserved – – – – – – – – 0x27 (0x47) OCR0A Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Register A 104 0x26 (0x46) TCNT0 Timer/Counter0 (8 Bit) 104 0x25 (0x45) Reserved – – – – – – – – 0x24 (0x44) TCCR0A FOC0A WGM00 COM0A1 COM0A0 WGM01 CS02 CS01 CS00 102 0x23 (0x43) GTCCR TSM – – – – – PSR2 PSR10 137, 157 0x22 (0x42) EEARH – – – – – – – EEAR8 27 0x21 (0x41) EEARL EEPROM Address Register Low Byte 27 0x20 (0x40) EEDR EEPROM Data Register 27 0x1F (0x3F) EECR – – – – EERIE EEMWE EEWE EERE 27 0x1E (0x3E) GPIOR0 General Purpose I/O Register 0 29 0x1D (0x3D) EIMSK PCIE1 PCIE0 – – – – – INT0 62 0x1C (0x3C) EIFR PCIF1 PCIF0 – – – – – INTF0 63 Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page 13 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P Note: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses should never be written. 2. I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions. 3. Some of the Status Flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVRs, the CBI and SBI instructions will only operate on the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such Status Flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only. 4. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used. When addressing I/O Registers as data space using LD and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses. The ATmega169P is a complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location reserved in Opcode for the IN and OUT instructions. For the Extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used. 0x1B (0x3B) Reserved – – – – – – – – 0x1A (0x3A) Reserved – – – – – – – – 0x19 (0x39) Reserved – – – – – – – – 0x18 (0x38) Reserved – – – – – – – – 0x17 (0x37) TIFR2 – – – – – – OCF2A TOV2 156 0x16 (0x36) TIFR1 – – ICF1 – – OCF1B OCF1A TOV1 134 0x15 (0x35) TIFR0 – – – – – – OCF0A TOV0 105 0x14 (0x34) PORTG – – PORTG5 PORTG4 PORTG3 PORTG2 PORTG1 PORTG0 90 0x13 (0x33) DDRG – – DDG5 DDG4 DDG3 DDG2 DDG1 DDG0 90 0x12 (0x32) PING – – PING5 PING4 PING3 PING2 PING1 PING0 90 0x11 (0x31) PORTF PORTF7 PORTF6 PORTF5 PORTF4 PORTF3 PORTF2 PORTF1 PORTF0 90 0x10 (0x30) DDRF DDF7 DDF6 DDF5 DDF4 DDF3 DDF2 DDF1 DDF0 90 0x0F (0x2F) PINF PINF7 PINF6 PINF5 PINF4 PINF3 PINF2 PINF1 PINF0 90 0x0E (0x2E) PORTE PORTE7 PORTE6 PORTE5 PORTE4 PORTE3 PORTE2 PORTE1 PORTE0 89 0x0D (0x2D) DDRE DDE7 DDE6 DDE5 DDE4 DDE3 DDE2 DDE1 DDE0 89 0x0C (0x2C) PINE PINE7 PINE6 PINE5 PINE4 PINE3 PINE2 PINE1 PINE0 90 0x0B (0x2B) PORTD PORTD7 PORTD6 PORTD5 PORTD4 PORTD3 PORTD2 PORTD1 PORTD0 89 0x0A (0x2A) DDRD DDD7 DDD6 DDD5 DDD4 DDD3 DDD2 DDD1 DDD0 89 0x09 (0x29) PIND PIND7 PIND6 PIND5 PIND4 PIND3 PIND2 PIND1 PIND0 89 0x08 (0x28) PORTC PORTC7 PORTC6 PORTC5 PORTC4 PORTC3 PORTC2 PORTC1 PORTC0 89 0x07 (0x27) DDRC DDC7 DDC6 DDC5 DDC4 DDC3 DDC2 DDC1 DDC0 89 0x06 (0x26) PINC PINC7 PINC6 PINC5 PINC4 PINC3 PINC2 PINC1 PINC0 89 0x05 (0x25) PORTB PORTB7 PORTB6 PORTB5 PORTB4 PORTB3 PORTB2 PORTB1 PORTB0 88 0x04 (0x24) DDRB DDB7 DDB6 DDB5 DDB4 DDB3 DDB2 DDB1 DDB0 88 0x03 (0x23) PINB PINB7 PINB6 PINB5 PINB4 PINB3 PINB2 PINB1 PINB0 88 0x02 (0x22) PORTA PORTA7 PORTA6 PORTA5 PORTA4 PORTA3 PORTA2 PORTA1 PORTA0 88 0x01 (0x21) DDRA DDA7 DDA6 DDA5 DDA4 DDA3 DDA2 DDA1 DDA0 88 0x00 (0x20) PINA PINA7 PINA6 PINA5 PINA4 PINA3 PINA2 PINA1 PINA0 88 Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page 14 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P 6. Instruction Set Summary Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC INSTRUCTIONS ADD Rd, Rr Add two Registers Rd ← Rd + Rr Z,C,N,V,H 1 ADC Rd, Rr Add with Carry two Registers Rd ← Rd + Rr + C Z,C,N,V,H 1 ADIW Rdl,K Add Immediate to Word Rdh:Rdl ← Rdh:Rdl + K Z,C,N,V,S 2 SUB Rd, Rr Subtract two Registers Rd ← Rd - Rr Z,C,N,V,H 1 SUBI Rd, K Subtract Constant from Register Rd ← Rd - K Z,C,N,V,H 1 SBC Rd, Rr Subtract with Carry two Registers Rd ← Rd - Rr - C Z,C,N,V,H 1 SBCI Rd, K Subtract with Carry Constant from Reg. Rd ← Rd - K - C Z,C,N,V,H 1 SBIW Rdl,K Subtract Immediate from Word Rdh:Rdl ← Rdh:Rdl - K Z,C,N,V,S 2 AND Rd, Rr Logical AND Registers Rd ← Rd • Rr Z,N,V 1 ANDI Rd, K Logical AND Register and Constant Rd ← Rd • K Z,N,V 1 OR Rd, Rr Logical OR Registers Rd ← Rd v Rr Z,N,V 1 ORI Rd, K Logical OR Register and Constant Rd ← Rd v K Z,N,V 1 EOR Rd, Rr Exclusive OR Registers Rd ← Rd ⊕ Rr Z,N,V 1 COM Rd One’s Complement Rd ← 0xFF − Rd Z,C,N,V 1 NEG Rd Two’s Complement Rd ← 0x00 − Rd Z,C,N,V,H 1 SBR Rd,K Set Bit(s) in Register Rd ← Rd v K Z,N,V 1 CBR Rd,K Clear Bit(s) in Register Rd ← Rd • (0xFF - K) Z,N,V 1 INC Rd Increment Rd ← Rd + 1 Z,N,V 1 DEC Rd Decrement Rd ← Rd − 1 Z,N,V 1 TST Rd Test for Zero or Minus Rd ← Rd • Rd Z,N,V 1 CLR Rd Clear Register Rd ← Rd ⊕ Rd Z,N,V 1 SER Rd Set Register Rd ← 0xFF None 1 MUL Rd, Rr Multiply Unsigned R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z,C 2 MULS Rd, Rr Multiply Signed R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z,C 2 MULSU Rd, Rr Multiply Signed with Unsigned R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z,C 2 FMUL Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Unsigned R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z,C 2 FMULS Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Signed R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z,C 2 FMULSU Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Signed with Unsigned R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z,C 2 BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS RJMP k Relative Jump PC ← PC + k + 1 None 2 IJMP Indirect Jump to (Z) PC ← Z None 2 JMP k Direct Jump PC ← k None 3 RCALL k Relative Subroutine Call PC ← PC + k + 1 None 3 ICALL Indirect Call to (Z) PC ← Z None 3 CALL k Direct Subroutine Call PC ← k None 4 RET Subroutine Return PC ← STACK None 4 RETI Interrupt Return PC ← STACK I 4 CPSE Rd,Rr Compare, Skip if Equal if (Rd = Rr) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3 CP Rd,Rr Compare Rd − Rr Z, N,V,C,H 1 CPC Rd,Rr Compare with Carry Rd − Rr − C Z, N,V,C,H 1 CPI Rd,K Compare Register with Immediate Rd − K Z, N,V,C,H 1 SBRC Rr, b Skip if Bit in Register Cleared if (Rr(b)=0) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3 SBRS Rr, b Skip if Bit in Register is Set if (Rr(b)=1) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3 SBIC P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register Cleared if (P(b)=0) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3 SBIS P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register is Set if (P(b)=1) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3 BRBS s, k Branch if Status Flag Set if (SREG(s) = 1) then PC←PC+k + 1 None 1/2 BRBC s, k Branch if Status Flag Cleared if (SREG(s) = 0) then PC←PC+k + 1 None 1/2 BREQ k Branch if Equal if (Z = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRNE k Branch if Not Equal if (Z = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRCS k Branch if Carry Set if (C = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRCC k Branch if Carry Cleared if (C = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRSH k Branch if Same or Higher if (C = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRLO k Branch if Lower if (C = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRMI k Branch if Minus if (N = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRPL k Branch if Plus if (N = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRGE k Branch if Greater or Equal, Signed if (N ⊕ V= 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRLT k Branch if Less Than Zero, Signed if (N ⊕ V= 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRHS k Branch if Half Carry Flag Set if (H = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRHC k Branch if Half Carry Flag Cleared if (H = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRTS k Branch if T Flag Set if (T = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRTC k Branch if T Flag Cleared if (T = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRVS k Branch if Overflow Flag is Set if (V = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 15 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P BRVC k Branch if Overflow Flag is Cleared if (V = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRIE k Branch if Interrupt Enabled if ( I = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BRID k Branch if Interrupt Disabled if ( I = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2 BIT AND BIT-TEST INSTRUCTIONS SBI P,b Set Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b) ← 1 None 2 CBI P,b Clear Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b) ← 0 None 2 LSL Rd Logical Shift Left Rd(n+1) ← Rd(n), Rd(0) ← 0 Z,C,N,V 1 LSR Rd Logical Shift Right Rd(n) ← Rd(n+1), Rd(7) ← 0 Z,C,N,V 1 ROL Rd Rotate Left Through Carry Rd(0)←C,Rd(n+1)← Rd(n),C←Rd(7) Z,C,N,V 1 ROR Rd Rotate Right Through Carry Rd(7)←C,Rd(n)← Rd(n+1),C←Rd(0) Z,C,N,V 1 ASR Rd Arithmetic Shift Right Rd(n) ← Rd(n+1), n=0..6 Z,C,N,V 1 SWAP Rd Swap Nibbles Rd(3..0)←Rd(7..4),Rd(7..4)←Rd(3..0) None 1 BSET s Flag Set SREG(s) ← 1 SREG(s) 1 BCLR s Flag Clear SREG(s) ← 0 SREG(s) 1 BST Rr, b Bit Store from Register to T T ← Rr(b) T 1 BLD Rd, b Bit load from T to Register Rd(b) ← T None 1 SEC Set Carry C ← 1 C 1 CLC Clear Carry C ← 0 C 1 SEN Set Negative Flag N ← 1 N 1 CLN Clear Negative Flag N ← 0 N 1 SEZ Set Zero Flag Z ← 1 Z 1 CLZ Clear Zero Flag Z ← 0 Z 1 SEI Global Interrupt Enable I ← 1 I 1 CLI Global Interrupt Disable I ← 0 I 1 SES Set Signed Test Flag S ← 1 S 1 CLS Clear Signed Test Flag S ← 0 S 1 SEV Set Twos Complement Overflow. V ← 1 V 1 CLV Clear Twos Complement Overflow V ← 0 V 1 SET Set T in SREG T ← 1 T 1 CLT Clear T in SREG T ← 0 T 1 SEH Set Half Carry Flag in SREG H ← 1 H 1 CLH Clear Half Carry Flag in SREG H ← 0 H 1 DATA TRANSFER INSTRUCTIONS MOV Rd, Rr Move Between Registers Rd ← Rr None 1 MOVW Rd, Rr Copy Register Word Rd+1:Rd ← Rr+1:Rr None 1 LDI Rd, K Load Immediate Rd ← K None 1 LD Rd, X Load Indirect Rd ← (X) None 2 LD Rd, X+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd ← (X), X ← X + 1 None 2 LD Rd, - X Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. X ← X - 1, Rd ← (X) None 2 LD Rd, Y Load Indirect Rd ← (Y) None 2 LD Rd, Y+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd ← (Y), Y ← Y + 1 None 2 LD Rd, - Y Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y ← Y - 1, Rd ← (Y) None 2 LDD Rd,Y+q Load Indirect with Displacement Rd ← (Y + q) None 2 LD Rd, Z Load Indirect Rd ← (Z) None 2 LD Rd, Z+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd ← (Z), Z ← Z+1 None 2 LD Rd, -Z Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z ← Z - 1, Rd ← (Z) None 2 LDD Rd, Z+q Load Indirect with Displacement Rd ← (Z + q) None 2 LDS Rd, k Load Direct from SRAM Rd ← (k) None 2 ST X, Rr Store Indirect (X) ← Rr None 2 ST X+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (X) ← Rr, X ← X + 1 None 2 ST - X, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. X ← X - 1, (X) ← Rr None 2 ST Y, Rr Store Indirect (Y) ← Rr None 2 ST Y+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Y) ← Rr, Y ← Y + 1 None 2 ST - Y, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y ← Y - 1, (Y) ← Rr None 2 STD Y+q,Rr Store Indirect with Displacement (Y + q) ← Rr None 2 ST Z, Rr Store Indirect (Z) ← Rr None 2 ST Z+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Z) ← Rr, Z ← Z + 1 None 2 ST -Z, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z ← Z - 1, (Z) ← Rr None 2 STD Z+q,Rr Store Indirect with Displacement (Z + q) ← Rr None 2 STS k, Rr Store Direct to SRAM (k) ← Rr None 2 LPM Load Program Memory R0 ← (Z) None 3 LPM Rd, Z Load Program Memory Rd ← (Z) None 3 LPM Rd, Z+ Load Program Memory and Post-Inc Rd ← (Z), Z ← Z+1 None 3 SPM Store Program Memory (Z) ← R1:R0 None - IN Rd, P In Port Rd ← P None 1 OUT P, Rr Out Port P ← Rr None 1 Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks 16 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P PUSH Rr Push Register on Stack STACK ← Rr None 2 POP Rd Pop Register from Stack Rd ← STACK None 2 MCU CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS NOP No Operation None 1 SLEEP Sleep (see specific descr. for Sleep function) None 1 WDR Watchdog Reset (see specific descr. for WDR/timer) None 1 BREAK Break For On-chip Debug Only None N/A Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks 17 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P 7. Ordering Information Notes: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information and minimum quantities. 2. Pb-free packaging, complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive). Also Halide free and fully Green. 3. For Speed vs. VCC, see Figure 28-1 on page 331 and Figure 28-2 on page 332. Speed (MHz)(3) Power Supply Ordering Code Package(1)(2) Operation Range 8 1.8V - 5.5V ATmega169PV-8AU ATmega169PV-8MU ATmega169PV-8MCH 64A 64M1 64MC Industrial (-40°C to 85°C) 16 2.7V - 5.5V ATmega169P-16AU ATmega169P-16MU ATmega169P-16MCH 64A 64M1 64MC Industrial (-40°C to 85°C) Package Type 64A 64-Lead, Thin (1.0 mm) Plastic Gull Wing Quad Flat Package (TQFP) 64M1 64-pad, 9 × 9 × 1.0 mm body, lead pitch 0.50 mm, Quad Flat No-Lead/Micro Lead Frame Package (QFN/MLF) 64MC 64-lead (2-row Staggered), 7 × 7 × 1.0 mm body, 4.0 × 4.0 mm Exposed Pad, Quad Flat No-Lead Package (QFN) 18 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P 8. Packaging Information 8.1 64A 2325 Orchard Parkway San Jose, CA 95131 TITLE DRAWING NO. R REV. 64A, 64-lead, 14 x 14 mm Body Size, 1.0 mm Body Thickness, 0.8 mm Lead Pitch, Thin Profile Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP) 64A B 10/5/2001 PIN 1 IDENTIFIER 0°~7° PIN 1 L C A1 A2 A D1 D e E1 E B COMMON DIMENSIONS (Unit of Measure = mm) SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE Notes: 1.This package conforms to JEDEC reference MS-026, Variation AEB. 2. Dimensions D1 and E1 do not include mold protrusion. Allowable protrusion is 0.25 mm per side. Dimensions D1 and E1 are maximum plastic body size dimensions including mold mismatch. 3. Lead coplanarity is 0.10 mm maximum. A – – 1.20 A1 0.05 – 0.15 A2 0.95 1.00 1.05 D 15.75 16.00 16.25 D1 13.90 14.00 14.10 Note 2 E 15.75 16.00 16.25 E1 13.90 14.00 14.10 Note 2 B 0.30 – 0.45 C 0.09 – 0.20 L 0.45 – 0.75 e 0.80 TYP 19 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P 8.2 64M1 2325 Orchard Parkway San Jose, CA 95131 TITLE DRAWING NO. R REV. 64M1, 64-pad, 9 x 9 x 1.0 mm Body, Lead Pitch 0.50 mm, 64M1 G 5/25/06 COMMON DIMENSIONS (Unit of Measure = mm) SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE A 0.80 0.90 1.00 A1 – 0.02 0.05 b 0.18 0.25 0.30 D D2 5.20 5.40 5.60 8.90 9.00 9.10 E 8.9 0 9.00 9.10 E2 5.20 5.40 5.60 e 0.50 BSC L 0.35 0.40 0.45 Note: 1. JEDEC Standard MO-220, (SAW Singulation) Fig. 1, VMMD. 2. Dimension and tolerance conform to ASMEY14.5M-1994. TOP VIEW SIDE VIEW BOTTOM VIEW D E Marked Pin# 1 ID SEATING PLANE A1 C A 0.08 C 1 2 3 K 1.25 1.40 1.55 E2 D2 b e Pin #1 Corner L Pin #1 Triangle Pin #1 Chamfer (C 0.30) Option A Option B Pin #1 Notch (0.20 R) Option C K K 5.40 mm Exposed Pad, Micro Lead Frame Package (MLF) 20 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P 8.3 64MC TITLE GPC DRAWING NO. REV. Package Drawing Contact: packagedrawings@atmel.com ZXC 64MC A 64MC, 64QFN (2-Row Staggered), 7 x 7 x 1.00 mm Body, 4.0 x 4.0 mm Exposed Pad, Quad Flat No Lead Package 10/3/07 COMMON DIMENSIONS (Unit of Measure = mm) SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE A 0.80 0.90 1.00 A1 0.00 0.02 0.05 b 0.18 0.23 0.28 C 0.20 REF D 6.90 7.00 7.10 D2 3.95 4.00 4.05 E 6.90 7.00 7.10 E2 3.95 4.00 4.05 eT – 0.65 – eR – 0.65 – K 0.20 – – (REF) L 0.35 0.40 0.45 y 0.00 – 0.075 SIDE VIEW TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEW Note: 1. The terminal #1 ID is a Laser-marked Feature. Pin 1 ID D E A1 A y C eT/2 R0.20 0.40 B1 A1 B30 A34 b A8 B7 eT D2 B16 A18 B22 A25 E2 K (0.1) REF B8 A9 (0.18) REF L B15 A17 L eR A26 B23 eT 21 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P 9. Errata 9.1 ATmega169P Rev. G No known errata. 9.2 ATmega169P Rev. A to F Not sampled. 22 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P 10. Datasheet Revision History Please note that the referring page numbers in this section are referring to this document. The referring revision in this section are referring to the document revision. 10.1 Rev. 8018P 08/10 10.2 Rev. 8018O 10/09 10.3 Rev. 8018N 08/09 10.4 Rev. 8018M 07/09 10.5 Rev. L 08/08 10.6 Rev. K 06/08 1. Status changed to active 2. EEPROM minimum wait delay, Table 27-15 on page 312, has been changed from 9.0 ms to 3.6 ms 3. Datasheet layout and technical terminology updated 1. Changed datasheet status to “Mature” 2. Added Capacitance for Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator, Table 8-5 on page 33. 1. Updated ”Ordering Information” on page 17, MCU replaced by MCH. 1. Updated the last page with new Atmel’s addresses. 1. Updated package information in ”Features” on page 1. 2. Added ”Pinout - DRQFN” on page 3: • The Staggered QFN is named Dual Row QFN (DRQFN). 1. Updated package information in ”Features” on page 1. 2. Removed “Disclaimer” from section ”Pin Configurations” on page 2 3. Added ”64MC (DRQFN) Pinout ATmega169P” on page 3 4. Added ”Data Retention” on page 9. 5. Updated ”Stack Pointer” on page 13. 6. Updated ”Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator” on page 34. 7. Updated ”USART Register Description” on page 194, register descriptions and tables. 8. Updated ”UCSRnB – USART Control and Status Register n B” on page 195. 9. Updated VIL2 in ”DC Characteristics” on page 329, by removing 0.2VCC from the table. 23 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P 10.7 Rev. J 08/07 10.8 Rev. I 11/06 10.9 Rev. H 09/06 10.10 Rev. G 08/06 10.11 Rev. F 08/06 10.12 Rev. E 08/06 10. Replaced Figure 29-36 on page 357 by a correct one. 11. Updated ”Ordering Information” on page 17. 12. Added ”64MC” on page 20 package to ”Packaging Information” on page 18. 1. Updated ”Features” on page 1. 2. Added ”Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 237 in the LCD section. 3. Updated ”System and Reset Characteristics” on page 333. 1. Updated ”Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator” on page 34. 2. Updated Table 8-8 on page 35, Table 8-9 on page 35, Table 8-10 on page 35, Table 28-7 on page 336. 3. Updated note in Table 28-7 on page 336. 1. All characterization data moved to ”Electrical Characteristics” on page 329. 2. Updated ”Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator” on page 32. 3. Updated ”System Control and Reset” on page 47. 4. Added note to Table 27-16 on page 314. 5. Updated ”LCD Controller Characteristics” on page 337. 1. Updated ”LCD Controller Characteristics” on page 337. 1. Updated ”DC Characteristics” on page 329. 2. Updated Table 13-19 on page 84. 1. Updated ”Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator” on page 34. 2. Updated ”Device Identification Register” on page 260. 3. Updated ”Signature Bytes” on page 299. 4. Added Table 27-6 on page 299. 24 8018PS–AVR–08/10 ATmega169P 10.13 Rev. D 07/06 10.14 Rev. C 06/06 10.15 Rev. B 04/06 10.16 Rev. A 03/06 1. Updated ”Register Description for I/O-Ports” on page 88. 2. Updated ”Fast PWM Mode” on page 97. 3. Updated ”Fast PWM Mode” on page 120. 4. Updated Table 14-2 on page 102, Table 14-4 on page 103, Table 15-3 on page 129, Table 15-4 on page 130, Table 17-2 on page 153 and Table 17-4 on page 154. 5 Updated ”UCSRnC – USART Control and Status Register n C” on page 196. 6. Updated Features in ”USI – Universal Serial Interface” on page 199. 7. Added ”Clock speed considerations.” on page 206. 8. Updated Features in ”LCD Controller” on page 234. 9. Updated ”Register Summary” on page 10. 1. Updated typos. 2. Updated ”Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator” on page 32. 3. Updated ”OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Register” on page 38. 4. Added Table 28-2 on page 332. 1. Updated ”Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator” on page 32. 1. Initial revision. 8018PS–AVR–08/10 Headquarters International Atmel Corporation 2325 Orchard Parkway San Jose, CA 95131 USA Tel: 1(408) 441-0311 Fax: 1(408) 487-2600 Atmel Asia Unit 1-5 & 16, 19/F BEA Tower, Millennium City 5 418 Kwun Tong Road Kwun Tong, Kowloon Hong Kong Tel: (852) 2245-6100 Fax: (852) 2722-1369 Atmel Europe Le Krebs 8, Rue Jean-Pierre Timbaud BP 309 78054 Saint-Quentin-en- Yvelines Cedex France Tel: (33) 1-30-60-70-00 Fax: (33) 1-30-60-71-11 Atmel Japan 9F, Tonetsu Shinkawa Bldg. 1-24-8 Shinkawa Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-0033 Japan Tel: (81) 3-3523-3551 Fax: (81) 3-3523-7581 Product Contact Web Site www.atmel.com Technical Support avr@atmel.com Sales Contact www.atmel.com/contacts Literature Requests www.atmel.com/literature Disclaimer: The information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property right is granted by this document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN ATMEL’S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE LOCATED ON ATMEL’S WEB SITE, ATMEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Atmel makes no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time without notice. Atmel does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Unless specifically provided otherwise, Atmel products are not suitable for, and shall not be used in, automotive applications. Atmel’s products are not intended, authorized, or warranted for use as components in applications intended to support or sustain life. © 2010 Atmel Corporation. All rights reserved. Atmel®, Atmel logo and combinations thereof, AVR®, AVR® logo, and others are registered trademarks or trademarks of Atmel Corporation or its subsidiaries. Windows® and others are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft® Corporation in the US and/or other countries. Other terms and product names may be trademarks of others. PSMN7R0-30YL N-channel 30 V 7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK Rev. 04 — 9 March 2011 Product data sheet LFPAK Table 1. Quick reference data Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit VDS drain-source voltage Tj ≥ 25 °C; Tj ≤175°C - - 30 V ID drain current Tmb = 25 °C; VGS = 10 V; see Figure 1 - - 76 A Ptot total power dissipation Tmb = 25 °C; see Figure 2 - - 51 W Tj junction temperature -55 - 175 °C Static characteristics RDSon drain-source on-state resistance VGS = 10 V; ID = 15 A; Tj = 25 °C - 4.92 7 mΩ Dynamic characteristics QGD gate-drain charge VGS = 4.5 V; ID = 10 A; VDS = 12 V; see Figure 14; see Figure 15 - 2.9 - nC QG(tot) total gate charge - 10 - nC Avalanche ruggedness EDS(AL)S non-repetitive drain-source avalanche energy VGS = 10 V; Tj(init) = 25 °C; ID = 65 A; Vsup ≤ 30 V; RGS = 50 Ω; unclamped - - 21 mJ PSMN7R0-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 04 — 9 March 2011 2 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PSMN7R0-30YL N-channel 30 V 7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK 2. Pinning information 3. Ordering information 4. Limiting values Table 2. Pinning information Pin Symbol Description Simplified outline Graphic symbol 1 S source SOT669 (LFPAK) 2 S source 3 S source 4 G gate mb D mounting base; connected to drain mb 1 2 3 4 S D G mbb076 Table 3. Ordering information Type number Package Name Description Version PSMN7R0-30YL LFPAK plastic single-ended surface-mounted package (LFPAK); 4 leads SOT669 Table 4. Limiting values In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134). Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit VDS drain-source voltage Tj ≥ 25 °C; Tj ≤ 175 °C - 30 V VDSM peak drain-source voltage tp ≤ 25 ns; f ≤ 500 kHz; EDS(AL) ≤ 90 nJ; pulsed - 35 V VDGR drain-gate voltage Tj ≥ 25 °C; Tj ≤ 175 °C; RGS = 20 kΩ - 30 V VGS gate-source voltage -20 20 V ID drain current VGS = 10 V; Tmb = 100 °C; see Figure 1 - 53 A VGS = 10 V; Tmb = 25 °C; see Figure 1 - 76 A IDM peak drain current pulsed; tp ≤ 10 μs; Tmb = 25 °C; see Figure 3 - 260 A Ptot total power dissipation Tmb = 25 °C; see Figure 2 - 51 W Tstg storage temperature -55 175 °C Tj junction temperature -55 175 °C Source-drain diode IS source current Tmb = 25 °C - 65 A ISM peak source current pulsed; tp ≤ 10 μs; Tmb = 25 °C - 260 A Avalanche ruggedness EDS(AL)S non-repetitive drain-source avalanche energy VGS = 10 V; Tj(init) = 25 °C; ID = 65 A; Vsup ≤ 30 V; RGS = 50 Ω; unclamped - 21 mJ PSMN7R0-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 04 — 9 March 2011 3 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PSMN7R0-30YL N-channel 30 V 7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK Fig 1. Continuous drain current as a function of mounting base temperature Fig 2. Normalized total power dissipation as a function of mounting base temperature Fig 3. Safe operating area; continuous and peak drain currents as a function of drain-source voltage 003aac720 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 50 100 150 200 Tmb (°C) ID (A) Tmb (°C) 0 50 100 150 200 03aa16 40 80 120 Pder (%) 0 003aac732 10-1 1 10 102 103 10-1 1 10 102 VDS (V) ID (A) DC Limit RDSon = VDS / ID 100 ms 10 ms 1 ms 100 μs 10 μs PSMN7R0-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 04 — 9 March 2011 4 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PSMN7R0-30YL N-channel 30 V 7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK 5. Thermal characteristics Table 5. Thermal characteristics Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Rth(j-mb) thermal resistance from junction to mounting base see Figure 4 - 1.4 2.45 K/W Fig 4. Transient thermal impedance from junction to mounting base as a function of pulse duration 003aac721 single shot 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 10-2 10-1 1 10 10-6 10-5 10-4 10-3 10-2 10-1 tp (s) 1 Zth(j-mb) (K/W) δ = 0.5 tp T P t tp T δ = PSMN7R0-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 04 — 9 March 2011 5 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PSMN7R0-30YL N-channel 30 V 7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK 6. Characteristics Table 6. Characteristics Tested to JEDEC standards where applicable. Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Static characteristics V(BR)DSS drain-source breakdown voltage ID = 250 μA; VGS = 0 V; Tj=25°C 30 - - V ID = 250 μA; VGS = 0 V; Tj = -55 °C 27 - - V VGS(th) gate-source threshold voltage ID = 1 mA; VDS = VGS; Tj = 25 °C; see Figure 11; see Figure 12 1.3 1.7 2.15 V ID = 1 mA; VDS = VGS; Tj = 150 °C; see Figure 12 0.65 - - V ID = 1 mA; VDS = VGS; Tj = -55 °C; see Figure 12 - - 2.45 V IDSS drain leakage current VDS = 30 V; VGS = 0 V; Tj=25°C - - 1 μA VDS = 30 V; VGS = 0 V; Tj = 150 °C - - 100 μA IGSS gate leakage current VGS = 16 V; VDS = 0 V; Tj = 25 °C - - 100 nA VGS = -16 V; VDS = 0 V; Tj = 25 °C - - 100 nA RDSon drain-source on-state resistance VGS = 4.5 V; ID = 15 A; Tj = 25 °C - 6.97 9.1 mΩ VGS = 10 V; ID = 15 A; Tj = 150 °C; see Figure 13 - - 12.2 mΩ VGS = 10 V; ID = 15 A; Tj = 25 °C - 4.92 7 mΩ RG gate resistance f = 1 MHz - 0.6 1.5 Ω Dynamic characteristics QG(tot) total gate charge ID = 10 A; VDS = 12 V; VGS = 4.5 V; see Figure 14; see Figure 15 - 10 - nC ID = 0 A; VDS = 0 V; VGS = 10 V - 20 - nC ID = 10 A; VDS = 12 V; VGS = 10 V; see Figure 14; see Figure 15 - 22 - nC QGS gate-source charge ID = 10 A; VDS = 12 V; VGS = 4.5 V; see Figure 14; see Figure 15 - 3.7 - nC QGS(th) pre-threshold gate-source charge - 2.1 - nC QGS(th-pl) post-threshold gate-source charge - 1.6 - nC QGD gate-drain charge - 2.9 - nC VGS(pl) gate-source plateau voltage VDS = 12 V; see Figure 14; see Figure 15 - 2.6 - V Ciss input capacitance VDS = 12 V; VGS = 0 V; f = 1 MHz; Tj = 25 °C; see Figure 16 - 1270 - pF Coss output capacitance - 255 - pF Crss reverse transfer capacitance - 145 - pF td(on) turn-on delay time VDS = 12 V; RL = 0.5 Ω; VGS = 4.5 V; RG(ext) = 4.7 Ω - 24 - ns tr rise time - 39 - ns td(off) turn-off delay time - 30 - ns tf fall time - 11 - ns PSMN7R0-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 04 — 9 March 2011 6 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PSMN7R0-30YL N-channel 30 V 7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK Source-drain diode VSD source-drain voltage IS = 25 A; VGS = 0 V; Tj = 25 °C; see Figure 17 - 0.88 1.2 V trr reverse recovery time IS = 20 A; dIS/dt = -100 A/μs; VGS = 0 V; VDS = 20 V - 30 - ns Qr recovered charge - 22 - nC Table 6. Characteristics …continued Tested to JEDEC standards where applicable. Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Fig 5. Transfer characteristics: drain current as a function of gate-source voltage; typical values Fig 6. Forward transconductance as a function of drain current; typical values Fig 7. Drain-source on-state resistance as a function of gate-source voltage; typical values Fig 8. Output characteristics: drain current as a function of drain-source voltage; typical values 003aac729 0 20 40 60 80 0 1 2 3 VGS (V) 4 ID (A) Tj = 150 °C 25 °C 003aac728 30 40 50 60 0 10 20 30 I 40 D (A) gfs (S) 003aac727 4 6 8 10 12 14 2 4 6 8 V 10 GS (V) RDSon (mΩ) 003aac726 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 2 4 6 8 10 VDS (V) ID (A) VGS (V) = 4.5 10 3.2 3 2.8 2.6 2.4 2.2 PSMN7R0-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 04 — 9 March 2011 7 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PSMN7R0-30YL N-channel 30 V 7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK Fig 9. Input and reverse transfer capacitances as a function of gate-source voltage; typical values Fig 10. Drain-source on-state resistance as a function of drain current; typical values Fig 11. Sub-threshold drain current as a function of gate-source voltage Fig 12. Gate-source threshold voltage as a function of junction temperature 003aac724 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 0 2 4 6 8 10 VGS (V) C (pF) Ciss Crss 003aac722 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 0 20 40 60 80 100 ID (A) RDSon (mΩ) VGS (V) = 4.5 10 3.2 003aab271 10-6 10-5 10-4 10-3 10-2 10-1 0 1 2 VGS (V) 3 ID (A) min typ max 003aac337 0 1 2 3 -60 0 60 120 180 Tj (°C) VGS(th) (V) max typ min PSMN7R0-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 04 — 9 March 2011 8 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PSMN7R0-30YL N-channel 30 V 7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK Fig 13. Normalized drain-source on-state resistance factor as a function of junction temperature Fig 14. Gate charge waveform definitions Fig 15. Gate-source voltage as a function of gate charge; typical values Fig 16. Input, output and reverse transfer capacitances as a function of drain-source voltage; typical values 03aa27 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 −60 0 60 120 180 Tj (°C) a 003aaa508 VGS VGS(th) QGS1 QGS2 QGD VDS QG(tot) ID QGS VGS(pl) 003aac725 0 2 4 6 8 10 0 5 10 15 20 25 QG (nC) VGS (V) VDS = 19 (V) VDS = 12 (V) 003aac723 0 400 800 1200 1600 10-1 1 10 102 VDS (V) C (pF) Ciss Coss Crss PSMN7R0-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 04 — 9 March 2011 9 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PSMN7R0-30YL N-channel 30 V 7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK Fig 17. Source (diode forward) current as a function of source-drain (diode forward) voltage; typical values 003aac730 0 20 40 60 80 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 VSD (V) IS (A) Tj = 150 °C 25 °C PSMN7R0-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 04 — 9 March 2011 10 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PSMN7R0-30YL N-channel 30 V 7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK 7. Package outline Fig 18. Package outline SOT669 (LFPAK) OUTLINE REFERENCES VERSION EUROPEAN PROJECTION ISSUE DATE IEC JEDEC JEITA SOT669 MO-235 04-10-13 06-03-16 0 2.5 5 mm scale e E1 b c2 A2 UNIT A A2 b c e DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions) mm 1.10 0.95 A1 A3 0.15 0.00 1.20 1.01 0.50 0.35 b2 4.41 3.62 b3 2.2 2.0 b4 0.9 0.7 0.25 0.19 c2 0.30 0.24 4.10 3.80 6.2 5.8 H 1.3 0.8 L2 0.85 0.40 L 1.3 0.8 L1 8° 0° D(1) w y 5.0 4.8 E(1) 3.3 3.1 E1 D1 (1) (1) max 0.25 4.20 1.27 0.25 0.1 1 2 3 4 mounting base D1 c Plastic single-ended surface-mounted package (LFPAK); 4 leads SOT669 E b2 b3 b4 H D L2 L1 A w M A C C X 1/2 e y C θ θ (A 3 ) L A A1 detail X Note 1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.15 mm maximum per side are not included. PSMN7R0-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 04 — 9 March 2011 11 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PSMN7R0-30YL N-channel 30 V 7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK 8. Revision history Table 7. Revision history Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice Supersedes PSMN7R0-30YL v.4 20110309 Product data sheet - PSMN7R0-30YL v.3 Modifications: • Various changes to content. PSMN7R0-30YL v.3 20100104 Product data sheet - PSMN7R0-30YL v.2 PSMN7R0-30YL v.2 20090105 Product data sheet - PSMN7R0-30YL v.1 PSMN7R0-30YL v.1 20081015 Preliminary data sheet - - PSMN7R0-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 04 — 9 March 2011 12 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PSMN7R0-30YL N-channel 30 V 7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK 9. Legal information 9.1 Data sheet status [1] Please consult the most recently issued document before initiating or completing a design. [2] The term 'short data sheet' is explained in section "Definitions". [3] The product status of device(s) described in this document may have changed since this document was published and may differ in case of multiple devices. The latest product status information is available on the Internet at URL http://www.nxp.com. 9.2 Definitions Draft — The document is a draft version only. The content is still under internal review and subject to formal approval, which may result in modifications or additions. NXP Semiconductors does not give any representations or warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of information included herein and shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such information. Short data sheet — A short data sheet is an extract from a full data sheet with the same product type number(s) and title. A short data sheet is intended for quick reference only and should not be relied upon to contain detailed and full information. For detailed and full information see the relevant full data sheet, which is available on request via the local NXP Semiconductors sales office. In case of any inconsistency or conflict with the short data sheet, the full data sheet shall prevail. Product specification — The information and data provided in a Product data sheet shall define the specification of the product as agreed between NXP Semiconductors and its customer, unless NXP Semiconductors and customer have explicitly agreed otherwise in writing. In no event however, shall an agreement be valid in which the NXP Semiconductors product is deemed to offer functions and qualities beyond those described in the Product data sheet. 9.3 Disclaimers Limited warranty and liability — Information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such information. In no event shall NXP Semiconductors be liable for any indirect, incidental, punitive, special or consequential damages (including - without limitation - lost profits, lost savings, business interruption, costs related to the removal or replacement of any products or rework charges) whether or not such damages are based on tort (including negligence), warranty, breach of contract or any other legal theory. Notwithstanding any damages that customer might incur for any reason whatsoever, NXP Semiconductors’ aggregate and cumulative liability towards customer for the products described herein shall be limited in accordance with the Terms and conditions of commercial sale of NXP Semiconductors. Right to make changes — NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make changes to information published in this document, including without limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior to the publication hereof. Suitability for use — NXP Semiconductors products are not designed, authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in life support, life-critical or safety-critical systems or equipment, nor in applications where failure or malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental damage. NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own risk. Quick reference data — The Quick reference data is an extract of the product data given in the Limiting values and Characteristics sections of this document, and as such is not complete, exhaustive or legally binding. Applications — Applications that are described herein for any of these products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the specified use without further testing or modification. Customers are responsible for the design and operation of their applications and products using NXP Semiconductors products, and NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for any assistance with applications or customer product design. It is customer’s sole responsibility to determine whether the NXP Semiconductors product is suitable and fit for the customer’s applications and products planned, as well as for the planned application and use of customer’s third party customer(s). Customers should provide appropriate design and operating safeguards to minimize the risks associated with their applications and products. NXP Semiconductors does not accept any liability related to any default, damage, costs or problem which is based on any weakness or default in the customer’s applications or products, or the application or use by customer’s third party customer(s). Customer is responsible for doing all necessary testing for the customer’s applications and products using NXP Semiconductors products in order to avoid a default of the applications and the products or of the application or use by customer’s third party customer(s). NXP does not accept any liability in this respect. Limiting values — Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) will cause permanent damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and (proper) operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those given in the Recommended operating conditions section (if present) or the Characteristics sections of this document is not warranted. Constant or repeated exposure to limiting values will permanently and irreversibly affect the quality and reliability of the device. Terms and conditions of commercial sale — NXP Semiconductors products are sold subject to the general terms and conditions of commercial sale, as published at http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms, unless otherwise agreed in a valid written individual agreement. In case an individual agreement is concluded only the terms and conditions of the respective Document status [1] [2] Product status [3] Definition Objective [short] data sheet Development This document contains data from the objective specification for product development. Preliminary [short] data sheet Qualification This document contains data from the preliminary specification. Product [short] data sheet Production This document contains the product specification. PSMN7R0-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 04 — 9 March 2011 13 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PSMN7R0-30YL N-channel 30 V 7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK agreement shall apply. NXP Semiconductors hereby expressly objects to applying the customer’s general terms and conditions with regard to the purchase of NXP Semiconductors products by customer. No offer to sell or license — Nothing in this document may be interpreted or construed as an offer to sell products that is open for acceptance or the grant, conveyance or implication of any license under any copyrights, patents or other industrial or intellectual property rights. Export control — This document as well as the item(s) described herein may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior authorization from national authorities. Non-automotive qualified products — Unless this data sheet expressly states that this specific NXP Semiconductors product is automotive qualified, the product is not suitable for automotive use. It is neither qualified nor tested in accordance with automotive testing or application requirements. NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of non-automotive qualified products in automotive equipment or applications. In the event that customer uses the product for design-in and use in automotive applications to automotive specifications and standards, customer (a) shall use the product without NXP Semiconductors’ warranty of the product for such automotive applications, use and specifications, and (b) whenever customer uses the product for automotive applications beyond NXP Semiconductors’ specifications such use shall be solely at customer’s own risk, and (c) customer fully indemnifies NXP Semiconductors for any liability, damages or failed product claims resulting from customer design and use of the product for automotive applications beyond NXP Semiconductors’ standard warranty and NXP Semiconductors’ product specifications. 9.4 Trademarks Notice: All referenced brands, product names, service names and trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Adelante, Bitport, Bitsound, CoolFlux, CoReUse, DESFire, EZ-HV, FabKey, GreenChip, HiPerSmart, HITAG, I²C-bus logo, ICODE, I-CODE, ITEC, Labelution, MIFARE, MIFARE Plus, MIFARE Ultralight, MoReUse, QLPAK, Silicon Tuner, SiliconMAX, SmartXA, STARplug, TOPFET, TrenchMOS, TriMedia and UCODE — are trademarks of NXP B.V. HD Radio and HD Radio logo — are trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation. 10. Contact information For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com NXP Semiconductors PSMN7R0-30YL N-channel 30 V 7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com Date of release: 9 March 2011 Document identifier: PSMN7R0-30YL Please be aware that important notices concerning this document and the product(s) described herein, have been included in section ‘Legal information’. DPO4000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes User Manual www.tektronix.com 071-1785-00 Copyright © Tektronix. All rights reserved. Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries or suppliers, and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication supersedes that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved. TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc. e*Scope, iView, OpenChoice, TekSecure, and TekVPI are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc. Wave Inspector is a trademark of Tektronix, Inc. Contacting Tektronix Tektronix, Inc. 14200 SW Karl Braun Drive P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 USA For product information, sales, service, and technical support: In North America, call 1-800-833-9200. Worldwide, visit www.tektronix.com to find contacts in your area. Warranty 4 Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment. If any such product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product. Parts, modules and replacement products used by Tektronix for warranty work may be new or reconditioned to like new performance. All replaced parts, modules and products become the property of Tektronix. In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid. Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges for products returned to any other locations. This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; c) to repair any damage or malfunction caused by the use of non-Tektronix supplies; or d) to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Table of Contents Table of Contents General Safety Summary ................................................................................................................... v Environmental Considerations ............................................................................................................ viii Preface....................................................................................................................................... x Key Features........................................................................................................................... x Where to Find More Information..................................................................................................... xii Conventions Used in This Manual................................................................................................... xiii Installation .................................................................................................................................. 1 Before Installation..................................................................................................................... 1 Operating Considerations ............................................................................................................ 6 Connecting Probes .................................................................................................................. 10 Powering On the Oscilloscope ...................................................................................................... 11 Powering Off the Oscilloscope ...................................................................................................... 14 Functional Check .................................................................................................................... 15 Compensating the Probe ............................................................................................................ 17 Installing an Application Module..................................................................................................... 19 Changing the User Interface Language ............................................................................................. 20 Changing the Date and Time ........................................................................................................ 23 Signal Path Compensation .......................................................................................................... 25 Upgrading Firmware ................................................................................................................. 28 Connecting Your Oscilloscope to a Computer ...................................................................................... 34 DPO4000 Series User Manual i Table of Contents Get Acquainted with the Instrument....................................................................................................... 45 Front-Panel Menus and Controls.................................................................................................... 45 Front-Panel Connectors ............................................................................................................. 66 Side-Panel Connector ............................................................................................................... 67 Rear-Panel Connectors.............................................................................................................. 68 Acquire the Signal ......................................................................................................................... 70 Setting Up Signal Input .............................................................................................................. 70 Using the Default Setup ............................................................................................................. 73 Using Autoset ........................................................................................................................ 74 Acquisition Concepts ................................................................................................................ 75 How the Acquisition Modes Work ................................................................................................... 78 Changing the Acquisition Mode and Record Length................................................................................ 80 Using Roll Mode ..................................................................................................................... 83 Defining a Serial Bus ................................................................................................................ 84 Trigger Setup and Run .................................................................................................................... 91 Triggering Concepts ................................................................................................................. 91 Choosing a Trigger................................................................................................................... 98 Selecting Triggers.................................................................................................................... 99 Triggering on Buses ................................................................................................................ 102 Checking Trigger Status ............................................................................................................ 107 Using A (Main) and B (Delayed) Triggers .......................................................................................... 107 Starting and Stopping an Acquisition............................................................................................... 111 ii DPO4000 Series User Manual Table of Contents Display Waveform Data .................................................................................................................. 112 Adding and Removing a Waveform ................................................................................................ 112 Setting the Display Style and Persistence ......................................................................................... 112 Setting Waveform and Graticule Intensity.......................................................................................... 115 Setting the Graticule Style .......................................................................................................... 117 Setting the LCD Backlight .......................................................................................................... 118 Scaling and Positioning a Waveform............................................................................................... 120 Setting Input Parameters ........................................................................................................... 122 Analyze Waveform Data.................................................................................................................. 129 Taking Automatic Measurements................................................................................................... 129 Selecting Automatic Measurements................................................................................................ 131 Customizing an Automatic Measurement .......................................................................................... 137 Taking Manual Measurements with Cursors ....................................................................................... 144 Using Math Waveforms ............................................................................................................. 150 Using FFT........................................................................................................................... 153 Using Advanced Math .............................................................................................................. 157 Using Reference Waveforms ....................................................................................................... 160 Managing Long Record Length Waveforms........................................................................................ 163 Save and Recall Information ............................................................................................................. 174 Saving a Screen Image............................................................................................................. 174 Saving and Recalling Waveform Data.............................................................................................. 176 Saving and Recalling Setups ....................................................................................................... 184 DPO4000 Series User Manual iii Table of Contents Saving with One Button Push ...................................................................................................... 187 Printing a Hard Copy................................................................................................................ 189 Erasing DPO4000 Memory ......................................................................................................... 196 Use Application Modules ................................................................................................................. 200 Application Examples..................................................................................................................... 201 Taking Simple Measurements ...................................................................................................... 201 Analyzing Signal Detail ............................................................................................................. 217 Triggering on a Video Signal ....................................................................................................... 226 Capturing a Single-Shot Signal..................................................................................................... 230 Correlating Data With a TLA5000 Logic Analyzer ................................................................................. 235 Tracking Down Bus Anomalies ..................................................................................................... 238 Index iv DPO4000 Series User Manual General Safety Summary General Safety Summary Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it. To avoid potential hazards, use this product only as specified. Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures. To Avoid Fire or Personal Injury Use Proper Power Cord. Use only the power cord specified for this product and certified for the country of use. Connect and Disconnect Properly. Do not connect or disconnect probes or test leads while they are connected to a voltage source. Connect and Disconnect Properly. De-energize the circuit under test before connecting or disconnecting the current probe. Ground the Product. This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product, ensure that the product is properly grounded. Observe All Terminal Ratings. To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings and markings on the product. Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product. The inputs are not rated for connection to mains or Category II, III, or IV circuits. Connect the probe reference lead to earth ground only. Do not apply a potential to any terminal, including the common terminal, that exceeds the maximum rating of that terminal. DPO4000 Series User Manual v General Safety Summary Power Disconnect. The power switch disconnects the product from the power source. See instructions for the location. Do not block the power switch; it must remain accessible to the user at all times. Do Not Operate Without Covers. Do not operate this product with covers or panels removed. Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures. If you suspect that there is damage to this product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel. Avoid Exposed Circuitry. Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present. Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions. Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere. Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry. Provide Proper Ventilation. Refer to the manual’s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation. Terms in this Manual These terms may appear in this manual: WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life. CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property. vi DPO4000 Series User Manual General Safety Summary Symbols and Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product: DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking. WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking. CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product. The following symbols may appear on the product: DPO4000 Series User Manual vii Environmental Considerations Environmental Considerations This section provides information about the environmental impact of the product. Product End-of-Life Handling Observe the following guidelines when recycling an instrument or component: Equipment Recycling. Production of this equipment required the extraction and use of natural resources. The equipment may contain substances that could be harmful to the environment or human health if improperly handled at the product’s end of life. In order to avoid release of such substances into the environment and to reduce the use of natural resources, we encourage you to recycle this product in an appropriate system that will ensure that most of the materials are reused or recycled appropriately. The symbol shown below indicates that this product complies with the European Union’s requirements according to Directive 2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). For information about recycling options, check the Support/Service section of the Tektronix Web site (www.tektronix.com). Mercury Notification. This product uses an LCD backlight lamp that contains mercury. Disposal may be regulated due to environmental considerations. Please contact your local authorities or, within the United States, the Electronics Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org) for disposal or recycling information. viii DPO4000 Series User Manual Environmental Considerations Restriction of Hazardous Substances This product has been classified as Monitoring and Control equipment, and is outside the scope of the 2002/95/EC RoHS Directive. This product is known to contain lead, cadmium, mercury, and hexavalent chromium. DPO4000 Series User Manual ix Preface Preface This manual describes the installation and operation of the following DPO4000 Series Instruments: DPO4104 DPO4054 DPO4034 DPO4032 Key Features DPO4000 Series instruments can help you verify, debug, and characterize electronic designs. Key features include: 1 GHz, 500 MHz, and 350 MHz bandwidths 2 and 4 channel models Sample rates up to 5 GS/s on all channels 10 Megapoint record length on all channels I2C, SPI, and CAN serial triggering and analysis (Requires use of the DPO4EMBD (for I2C and SPI) or DPO4AUTO (for CAN) application modules) Wave Inspector controls for managing long record lengths, with zoom and pan, play and pause, search and mark 10.4 inch (264 mm) XGA color display Small footprint and lightweight, at 140 mm (5.5 inches) deep and 5 kg (11 pounds) USB and CompactFlash available for quick and easy storage Built-in Ethernet port USB 2.0 device port for direct PC control of the oscilloscope using USBTMC protocol x DPO4000 Series User Manual Preface OpenChoice documentation and analysis software Remote viewing with control (e*Scope and OpenChoice connectivity) TekVPI Versatile Probe Interface supports active, differential, and current probes for automatic scaling and units DPO4000 Series User Manual xi Preface Where to Find More Information The following information is available for your oscilloscope: To read about Use these documents Installation and Operation This DPO4000 User Manual English: 071-1785-XX French: 071-1799-XX Italian: 071-1800-XX German: 071-1801-XX Spanish: 071-1802-XX Japanese: 071-1803-XX Portuguese: 071-1804-XX Simplified Chinese: 071-1805-XX Traditional Chinese: 071-1806-XX Korean: 071-1807-XX Russian: 071-1808-XX Specifications and Performance Verification The DPO4000 Technical Reference (071-1843-XX) (PDF only) Programmer Commands The DPO4000 Programmer Manual (071-1845-XX) (PDF only) Analysis and Connectivity Tools The optional Getting Started with OpenChoice Solutions Manual (020-2514-XX) (includes a CD) xii DPO4000 Series User Manual Preface To read about Use these documents Servicing and calibration The optional DPO4000 Service Manual (071-1844-XX) Installing and testing application modules The DPO4000 Series Application Module Installation Instructions manual (071-1833-XX) (11 languages) Conventions Used in This Manual The following icons are used throughout this manual. Sequence Step Front panel power Connect power Network USB DPO4000 Series User Manual xiii Preface xiv DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation Installation Before Installation Unpack the oscilloscope and check that you received all items listed as standard accessories. The following pages list recommended accessories and probes, instrument options, and upgrades. Check the Tektronix Web site (www.tektronix.com) for the most current information. Standard Accessories Accessory Tektronix part number English (Option L0) 071-1785-XX French (Option L1) 071-1799-XX Italian (Option L2) 071-1800-XX German (Option L3) 071-1801-XX Spanish (Option L4) 071-1802-XX Japanese (Option L5) 071-1803-XX Portuguese (Option L6) 071-1804-XX Simple Chinese (Option L7) 071-1805-XX Traditional Chinese (Option L8) 071-1806-XX Korean (Option L9) 071-1807-XX DPO4000 User Manual Russian (Option L10) 071-1808-XX DPO4000 Series User Manual 1 Installation Standard Accessories (cont.) Accessory Tektronix part number DPO4000 Documentation Browser CD Electronic versions of DPO4000 documents, including the Programmer Manual and the Technical Reference. 063-1810-XX OpenChoice Desktop CD Applications that let you capture and transfer data from your oscilloscope to an external PC. Use the standalone OpenChoice Desktop, MS Word, or MS Excel Toolbars. 020-2514-XX Calibration certificate documenting traceability to national metrology institute(s), and ISO9001 quality system registration. —— One 500 MHz, 10x passive probe per channel P6139A Front Cover Hard plastic cover to help protect the instrument 200-4908-00 CompactFlash memory card Extra storage 156-9413-00 2 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation Standard Accessories (cont.) Accessory Tektronix part number North America (Option A0) 161-0104-00 Universal Euro (Option A1) 161-0104-06 United Kingdom (Option A2) 161-0104-07 Australia (Option A3) 161-0104-05 Switzerland (Option A5) 161-0167-00 Japan (Option A6) 161-A005-00 China (Option A10) 161-0306-00 India (Option A11) 161-0400-00 Power Cord No power cord or AC adapter (Option A99) —— DPO4000 Series User Manual 3 Installation Optional Accessories Accessory Tektronix Part Number DPO4EMBD The embedded serial triggering and analysis module enables triggering on packet level information on I2C and SPI serial buses, as well as digital views of the signal, bus views, bus decoding, search tools, and packet decode tables with timestamp information DPO4EMBD DPO4AUTO The embedding automotive serial triggering and analysis module enables triggering on packet level information on CAN serial buses, as well as digital views of the signal, bus views, bus decoding, search tools, and packet decode tables with timestamp information DPO4AUTO TPA-BNC TekVPI to TekProbe 2 BNC Adapter TPA-BNC TEK-USB-488 Adapter GPIB to USB Adapter TEK-USB-488 Getting Started with OpenChoice Solutions Manual with CD Describes ways to develop host-computer software applications that work with your oscilloscope 020-2513-XX Rackmount kit Adds rackmount brackets RM4000 Soft transit case Case for carrying instrument AC4000 Hard transit case Traveling case, which requires use of the soft transit case (AC4000) HCTEK4321 4 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation Optional Accessories (cont.) Accessory Tektronix Part Number CompactFlash memory card Extra storage 156-9413-00 CompactFlash to USB memory card reader Card reader 119-6827-00 DPO4000 Programmer Manual Describes commands for remote control of the DPO4000 oscilloscope. Available electronically on the Documentation Browser CD or for download from www.tektronix.com. 071-1845-XX DPO4000 Technical Reference Manual Describes the DPO4000 oscilloscope specifications and performance verification procedure. Available electronically on the Documentation Browser CD or for download from www.tektronix.com. 071-1809-XX DPO4000 Service manual Service information 071-1844-XX DPO4000 Module Installation Instructions Manual 071-1833-XX The DPO4000 oscilloscope works with multiple optional probes. (See page 10, Connecting Probes.) Check the Tektronix Web site (www.tektronix.com) for the most current information. DPO4000 Series User Manual 5 Installation Operating Considerations DPO4000 Series Oscilloscope Input Voltage: 100 V to 240 V ±10% Input Power Frequency: 47 Hz to 66 Hz (100 V to 240 V) 400 Hz (100 V to 132 V) Power Consumption: 250 W maximum Weight: 5 kg (11 lbs), stand-alone instrument Height, including feet but not handle: 229 mm (9.0 in) Width, from handle hub to handle hub: 439 mm (17.3 in) Depth, from feet to front of knobs: 137 mm (5.4 in) Depth, from feet to front of front cover: 145 mm (5.7 in) Clearance: 51 mm (2 in) Temperature: Operating: +0 °C to +50 °C Nonoperating: -20 °C to +60 °C 6 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation Humidity: Operating: High: 40 °C to 50 °C, 10% to 60% RH Operating: Low: 0 °C to 40 °C, 10 to 90% RH Non-operating: High: 40 °C to 60 °C, 5 to 60% RH Non-operating: Low: 0 °C to 40 °C, 5 to 90% RH Altitude: Operating: 3,000 m (about 10,000 ft) Nonoperating Altitude: 12,192 m (40,000 ft) Random Vibration: Operating: 0.31 GRMS, 5 – 500 Hz, 10 minutes per axis, 3 axes (30 minutes total) Non-operating: 2.46 GRMS, 5 – 500 Hz, 10 minutes per axis, 3 axes (30 minutes total) Pollution Degree: 2, Indoor use only Acquisition System: 1 MΩ The maximum input voltage at the BNC, between center conductor and shield is 400 Vpeak (DF ≤ 39.2%), 250 VRMS to 130 kHz derated to 2.6 V RMS at 500 MHz. The maximum transient withstand voltage is ± 800 Vpeak. For steady-state sinusoidal waveforms, derate at 20 dB/decade above 200 kHz to 13 Vpk at 3 MHz and above. Acquisition System: 50Ω The maximum input voltage at the BNC, between center conductor and shield is 5 VRMS, with peaks ≤ ±20 V (DF ≤ 6.25%) DPO4000 Series User Manual 7 Installation External Trigger: 1 MΩ The maximum input voltage at the BNC, between center conductor and shield is 400 Vpeak (DF ≤ 39.2%), 250 VRMS to 2 MHz derated to 5 VRMS at 500 MHz. The maximum transient withstand voltage is ±800 Vpeak. For steady-state sinosoidal waveforms, derate at 20 dB/decade above 200 kHz to 13 Vpeak at 3 MHz and above. P6139A Passive Probe Input Voltage: 400 VRMS or 400 V DC; CAT I (2,500 Vpeak transient) 300 VRMS or 300 V DC; CAT II (2,500 Vpeak transient 150 VRMS or 150 V DC; CAT III (2,500 Vpeak transient) For steady-state, sinusoidal waveforms, derate at 20 dB/decade above 2.5 MHz to 50 VRMS at 20 MHz and above. Output Voltage (terminated into 1 MΩ): 40 VRMS or 40 V DC; CAT I (2,500 Vpeak impulse) 30 VRMS or 30 V DC; CAT I (250 Vpeak impulse) 15 VRMS or 15 V DC; CAT I (250 Vpeak impulse) Temperature: Operating: -15 °C to +65 °C ( +5 °F to +149 °F) Nonoperating: -62 °C to +85 °C ( -80 °F to +185 °F) Altitude: ≤ 2,000 meters 8 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation Pollution Degree: 2, Indoor use only Humidity: Operating: High: 40 °C to 50 °C, 10% to 60% RH Operating: Low: 0 °C to 40 °C, 10 to 90% RH CAUTION. To ensure proper cooling, keep the sides and rear of the instrument clear of obstructions. Cleaning Inspect the oscilloscope and probes as often as operating conditions require. To clean the exterior surface, perform the following steps: 1. Remove loose dust on the outside of the oscilloscope and probes with a lint-free cloth. Use care to avoid scratching the clear glass display filter. 2. Use a soft cloth dampened with water to clean the oscilloscope. Use an aqueous solution of 75% isopropyl alcohol for more efficient cleaning. CAUTION. To avoid damage to the surface of the oscilloscope or probes, do not use any abrasive or chemical cleaning agents. DPO4000 Series User Manual 9 Installation Connecting Probes The DPO4000 oscilloscope supports probes with the following: 1. Tektronix Versatile Probe Interface (TekVPI) These probes support two-way communication with the oscilloscope through on-screen menus and remotely through programmable support. The remote control is useful in applications like ATE where you want the system to preset probe parameters. 2. TPA-BNC Adapter The TPA-BNC Adapter allows you to use TekProbe Level II probe capabilities, such as providing probe power and passing information to the oscilloscope on scaling and whether the units are volts or amperes. 3. Plain BNC interfaces These probes only pass the waveform signal to the oscilloscope. There is no other communication. 10 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation For more information on the many probes available for use with DPO4000 oscilloscopes, refer to www.tektronix.com. Powering On the Oscilloscope Ground the Oscilloscope and Yourself Before pushing the power switch, connect the oscilloscope to an electrically neutral reference point, such as earth ground. Do this by plugging the three-pronged power cord into an outlet grounded to earth ground. Grounding the oscilloscope is necessary for safety and to take accurate measurements. The oscilloscope needs to share the same ground as any circuits that you are testing. DPO4000 Series User Manual 11 Installation If you are working with static sensitive components, ground yourself. Static electricity that builds up on your body can damage static-sensitive components. Wearing a grounding strap safely sends static charges on your body to earth ground. 12 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation To connect the power cord and power on the oscilloscope: DPO4000 Series User Manual 13 Installation Powering Off the Oscilloscope To power off the oscilloscope and remove the power cord: 14 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation Functional Check Perform this quick functional check to verify that your oscilloscope is operating correctly. 1. Connect the oscilloscope power cable as described above. 2. Power on the oscilloscope. DPO4000 Series User Manual 15 Installation 3. Connect the oscilloscope P6139A probe tip and reference lead to the PROBE COMP connectors. 4. Press Default Setup. 16 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation 5. Push the Autoset button. The screen should now display a square wave, approximately 2.5 V at 1 kHz. If the signal appears but is misshapen, perform the procedures for compensating the probe. (See page 17, Compensating the Probe.) If no signal appears, rerun the procedure. If it no signal still appears, have the instrument serviced by qualified service personnel. Compensating the Probe Whenever you attach a passive voltage probe for the first time to any input channel, compensate the probe to match it to the corresponding oscilloscope input channel. To properly compensate your passive probe: 1. Follow the steps for the functional check. (See page 15, Functional Check.) DPO4000 Series User Manual 17 Installation 2. Check the shape of the displayed waveform to determine if your probe is properly compensated. Properly compensated Under compensated Over compensated 3. If necessary, adjust your probe. Repeat as needed. 18 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation Quick Tips Use the shortest possible ground lead and signal path to minimize probe-induced ringing and distortion on the measured signal. Short ground lead Long ground lead Installing an Application Module CAUTION. To avoid damage to the oscilloscope or application module, observe ESD precautions. (See page 11, Powering On the Oscilloscope.) Turn off the oscilloscope power while removing or adding an application module. (See page 14, Powering Off the Oscilloscope.) DPO4000 Series User Manual 19 Installation Optional application module packages extend the capability of your oscilloscope. Install up to four application modules at one time into the two slots with windows in the upper right corner of the front panel and the two additional slots hidden behind the two you can see. Refer to the DPO4000 Series Application Module Installation Instructions that came with your application module for instructions on installing and testing an application module. NOTE. If you remove an application module, the features provided by the application module become unavailable. To restore the features, turn off the oscilloscope power, reinstall the module and turn on the oscilloscope power. Changing the User Interface Language To change the language of the oscilloscope user interface and the front-panel button labels: 1. Push Utility. 2. Push System repeatedly until you select Config from the pop-up menu. Config 20 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation 3. Push Language from the resulting lower-bezel menu. System Config Language English Set Date & Time TekSecure Erase Memory Version v1.00 4. Push the side-bezel button corresponding to the desired language. Choose among: English, French, Italian, German, Spanish, Japanese, Brazilian Portuguese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, and Russian. Language English Francais Deutsch Italiano -more- 1 of 3 DPO4000 Series User Manual 21 Installation 5. If you choose to use English, be sure that the plastic front-panel overlay is removed. If you choose a language other than English, place the plastic overlay for the language that you desire over the front panel to display labels in that language. 22 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation Changing the Date and Time To set the internal clock with the current date and time: 1. Push Utility. 2. Push System repeatedly until you select Config from the pop-up menu. Config 3. Push Set Date & Time. System Config Language English Set Date & Time TekSecure Erase Memory Version DPO4000 Series User Manual 23 Installation Date Time Set Display Date/Time ON OFF 4. Push the side-panel buttons and rotate both multipurpose knobs (a and b) to set the time and date values. Hour: 4 Min: 1 Month: July Day: 19 Year: 2005 OK Enter Date & Time 5. Push OK Enter Date & Time. OK Enter Date & Time 24 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation Signal Path Compensation Signal Path Compensation (SPC) corrects for DC inaccuracies caused by temperature variations and/or long-term drift. Run the compensation whenever the ambient temperature has changed by more than 10 °C or once a week if you use vertical settings of 5 mV/division or less. Failure to do so may result in the instrument not meeting warranted performance levels at those volts/div settings. To compensate the signal path: 1. Warm up the oscilloscope for at least 20 minutes. Remove all input signals (probes and cables) from channel inputs. Input signals with AC components adversely affect SPC. DPO4000 Series User Manual 25 Installation 2. Push Utility. 3. Push System repeatedly until you select Calibration from the resulting pop-up menu. Calibration 4. Push Signal Path from the lower-bezel menu. System Calibration Signal Path Pass Factory Pass 5. Push OK Compensate Signal path from the resulting side-bezel menu. OK Compensate Signal Path The calibration will take approximately 10 minutes to complete. 26 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation 6. After calibration, verify that the status indicator on the lower-bezel menu displays Pass. System Calibration Signal Path Pass Factory Pass If it does not, then recalibrate the instrument or have the instrument serviced by qualified service personnel. 7. Service personnel use the factory calibration functions to calibrate the internal voltage references of the oscilloscope using external sources. Refer to your Tektronix field office or representative for assistance with factory calibration. NOTE. Signal Path Compensation does not include calibration to the probe tip. (See page 17, Compensating the Probe.) DPO4000 Series User Manual 27 Installation Upgrading Firmware To upgrade the firmware of the oscilloscope: 1. Open up a Web browser and go to www.tektronix.com. Proceed to the software finder. Download the latest firmware for your DPO4000 series oscilloscope onto a USB storage device. 28 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation 2. Power off your DPO4000. DPO4000 Series User Manual 29 Installation 3. Insert the USB storage device into the front-panel USB port on your DPO4000. 30 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation 4. Power on the DPO4000. The instrument automatically recognizes the replacement firmware and installs it. If the instrument does not install the firmware, rerun the procedure. It the problem continues, contact qualified service personnel. CAUTION. Do not power off the oscilloscope or remove the USB storage device until the oscilloscope finishes installing the firmware. DPO4000 Series User Manual 31 Installation 5. Power off the DPO4000 and remove the USB storage device. 32 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation 6. Power on the DPO4000. 7. Push Utility. DPO4000 Series User Manual 33 Installation 8. Push Version. The oscilloscope displays the firmware version number. System Config Language English Set Date & Time TekSecure Erase Memory Version 9. Confirm that the version number matches that of the new firmware. Connecting Your Oscilloscope to a Computer You may want to document your work for future reference. Instead of saving screen images and waveform data to a CompactFlash or USB storage device, and then generating a report later, you may want to send it directly to a remote PC for analysis. You may also want to control an oscilloscope at a remote location from your computer. Two ways to connect your oscilloscope to a computer are the TekVISA-based OpenChoice and the e*Scope Web-enabled tool. Use OpenChoice to communicate with your oscilloscope from your computer through a software application. Use e*Scope to communicate with your oscilloscope through a Web browser. Using OpenChoice OpenChoice lets you use your MS-Windows computer to acquire data from your oscilloscope for use in an analysis package that runs on your PC, such as Microsoft Excel, National Instruments LabVIEW. or a program of your own creation. You can use a common communications protocol, such as USB, Ethernet, or GPIB to connect the computer to the oscilloscope. 34 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation To set up OpenChoice communications between your oscilloscope and a computer: 1. Load the TekVISA drivers on your computer. Find these on the OpenChoice Desktop CD or at the Tektronix software finder Web page (www.tektronix.com). When done, the TekVISA icon appears in the Windows System Tray. Typically, this is the bottom right of the Windows desktop on your MS-Windows computer. DPO4000 Series User Manual 35 Installation 2. Connect the DPO4000 to your computer with the appropriate USB or Ethernet cable. To communicate between the DPO4000 and a GPIB system, connect the oscilloscope to the TEK-USB-488 GPIB-to-USB Adapter with a USB cable. Then connect the adapter to your GPIB system with a GPIB cable. 36 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation 3. Push Utility. 4. Push System repeatedly to select I/O. I/O 5. To use Ethernet, push Ethernet Network Settings. System I/O USB Enabled Ethernet Network Settings GPIB 1 DPO4000 Series User Manual 37 Installation Network Configuration Change Instrument Settings DHCP/ BOOTP On Off On the side-bezel menu, if you are on a DHCP Ethernet network and using a through cable, set DHCP to On. If you are using a cross-over cable, set it to Off and set a hard coded TCPIP address. Test Connection 6. If you are using GPIB, push GPIB. 7. Enter the GPIB address on the side-bezel menu, using multipurpose knob a. Talk/Listen Address a 1 This will set the GPIB address on an attached TEK-USB-488 Adapter. 38 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation 8. If you are using USB, the system sets itself up automatically for you, if USB is enabled. Check USB on the bottom-bezel menu to be sure that USB is enabled. If it is not enabled, push USB. Then push Enabled on the side-bezel menu. 9. Run your application software on your computer. 10. In case of problems getting oscilloscope-to-PC communications to work, refer to the networking troubleshooter. To bring up the troubleshooter, click the TekVISA icon on the System Tray of your MS-Windows computer. Then go to the online help. Quick Tips The DPO4000 comes with a variety of Windows-based software tools designed to ensure efficient connectivity between your oscilloscope and your computer. There are tool bars that speed connectivity with Microsoft Excel and Word. There is also a standalone acquisition program called the OpenChoice Desktop. The rear-panel USB 2.0 device port is the correct USB port for computer connectivity. Use the rear- and front-panel USB 2.0 host ports to connect your oscilloscope to storage devices and printers. DPO4000 Series User Manual 39 Installation Using e*Scope e*Scope lets you access any Internet-connected DPO4000 Series Oscilloscope from a browser on your workstation, PC, or laptop computer. No matter where you are, your DPO4000 is as close as the nearest browser. To set up e*Scope communications between your oscilloscope and a Web browser running on a remote computer: 1. Connect the DPO4000 to your computer network with the appropriate Ethernet cable. 2. Push Utility. 40 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation 3. Push System repeatedly to select I/O. I/O 4. Push Ethernet Network Settings. System I/O USB Ethernet Network Settings GPIB DPO4000 Series User Manual 41 Installation Network Configuration 5. Push Change Instrument Settings to determine the Ethernet address and instrument name. On the side-bezel menu, if you are on a DHCP Ethernet network and using dynamic addressing, set DHCP to On. If you are using static addressing, set it to Off. Change Instrument Settings DHCP/ BOOTP On Off Test Connection 6. Start your browser on your remote computer. In the browser address line, enter the IP address or, if DHCP is set to On in the oscilloscope, simply enter the instrument name. 42 DPO4000 Series User Manual Installation 7. You should now see the e*Scope screen, with a copy of the oscilloscope display, on your Web browser. If e*Scope does not work, rerun the procedure. If it still does not work, contact qualified service personnel. DPO4000 Series User Manual 43 Installation 44 DPO4000 Series User Manual Get Acquainted with the Instrument Get Acquainted with the Instrument Front-Panel Menus and Controls The front panel has buttons and controls for the functions that you use most often. Use the menu buttons to access more specialized functions. DPO4000 Series User Manual 45 Get Acquainted with the Instrument Using the Menu System To use the menu system: 1. Push a front-panel menu button to display the menu that you want to use. 46 DPO4000 Series User Manual Get Acquainted with the Instrument 2. Push a lower-bezel button to select a menu item. If a pop-up menu appears, push the lower-bezel button repeatedly to select the desired choice. 3. Push a side-bezel button to choose a side-bezel menu item. If the menu item contains more than one choice, push the side-bezel button repeatedly to cycle through the choices. DPO4000 Series User Manual 47 Get Acquainted with the Instrument 4. To remove a side-bezel menu, push the lower-bezel button again or push Menu Off. 5. Certain menu choices require you to set a numerical value to complete the setup. Use the upper and lower multipurpose knobs a and b to adjust values. 6. Push Fine to turn off or on the ability to make smaller adjustments. 48 DPO4000 Series User Manual Get Acquainted with the Instrument Using the Menu Buttons Use the menu buttons to perform many functions in the oscilloscope. 1. Measure. Push to perform automated measurements on waveforms or to configure cursors. 2. Search. Push to search through an acquisition for user-defined events/criteria. 3. Test. Push to activate advanced or application-specific testing features. 4. Acquire. Push to set the acquisition mode and adjust the record length. 5. Autoset. Push to perform an automatic setup of oscilloscope settings. 6. Trigger Menu. Push to specify trigger settings. DPO4000 Series User Manual 49 Get Acquainted with the Instrument 7. Utility. Push to activate the system utility functions, such as selecting a language or setting the date/time. 8. Default Setup. Push to restore the oscilloscope to the default settings. 9. Save / Recall Menu. Push to save and recall setups, waveforms, and screen images to internal memory, a CompactFlash card, or a USB storage device. 10. Channel 1,2,3, or 4. Push to set vertical parameters for input waveforms and to display or remove the corresponding waveform from the display. 50 DPO4000 Series User Manual Get Acquainted with the Instrument 11. B1 or B2. Push to define and display a bus, if you have the appropriate module application keys. The DPO4AUTO module supports CAN. The DPO4EMBD module supports I2C and SPI. Also, push the B1 or B2 button to display or remove the corresponding bus from the display. 12. R. Push to manage reference waveforms, including the display or removal of each reference waveform from the display. 13. M. Push to manage the math waveform, including the display or removal of the math waveform from the display. DPO4000 Series User Manual 51 Get Acquainted with the Instrument Using Other Controls These buttons and knobs control waveforms, cursors and other data input. 1. Turn the upper multipurpose knob a, when activated, to move a cursor or set a numerical parameter value for a menu item. Push the nearby Fine button to toggle between coarse and fine adjustment. Screen icons tell you when a or b are active. 2. Cursors. Push once to activate the two vertical cursors. Push again to turn on the two vertical and two horizontal cursors. Push again to turn off all cursors. When the cursors are on, you can turn the multipurpose knobs to control their position. 52 DPO4000 Series User Manual Get Acquainted with the Instrument 3. Select. Push to activate special functions. For example, when using the two vertical cursors (and no horizontal ones are visible), you can push this button to link or unlink the cursors. When the two vertical and two horizontal cursors are both visible, you can push this button to make either the vertical cursors or the horizontal ones active. 4. Fine. Push to toggle between making coarse and fine adjustments with the vertical and horizontal position knobs, the trigger level knob, and many operations of multipurpose knobs a and b. 5. Waveform Intensity. Push to enable multipurpose knob a to control waveform display intensity and knob b to control graticule intensity. DPO4000 Series User Manual 53 Get Acquainted with the Instrument 6. Turn the lower multipurpose knob b, when activated, to move a cursor or set a numerical parameter value for a menu item. Push Fine to make adjustments more slowly. 7. Zoom button. Push to activate zoom mode. 8. Pan (outer knob). Turn to scroll the zoom window through the acquired waveform. 9. Zoom (inner knob). Turn to control the zoom factor. Turning it clockwise zooms in further. Turning it counterclockwise zooms out. 10. Play-pause button. Push to start or stop the automatic panning of a waveform. Control the speed and direction with the pan knob. 11. ← Prev. Push to jump to the previous waveform mark. 54 DPO4000 Series User Manual Get Acquainted with the Instrument 12. Set/Clear Mark. Push to establish or delete a waveform mark. 13. → Next. Push to jump to the next waveform mark. 14. Horizontal Position. Turn to adjust the trigger point location relative to the acquired waveforms. Push Fine to make smaller adjustments. 15. Horizontal Scale. Turn to adjust the horizontal scale (time/division). DPO4000 Series User Manual 55 Get Acquainted with the Instrument 16. Run/Stop. Push to start or stop acquisitions. 17. Single. Push to make a single acquisition. 18. Autoset. Push to automatically set the vertical, horizontal, and trigger controls for a usable, stable display. 19. Trigger Level. Turn to adjust the trigger level. 20. Set to 50%. Push to set the trigger level to the midpoint of the waveform. 21. Force Trig. Push to force an immediate trigger event. 56 DPO4000 Series User Manual Get Acquainted with the Instrument 22. Vertical Position. Turn to adjust the vertical position of the corresponding waveform. Push Fine to make smaller adjustments. 23. 1, 2, 3, 4. Push to display or remove the corresponding waveform from the display and access the vertical menu. 24. Vertical Scale. Turn to adjust the vertical scale factor of the corresponding waveform (volts/division). 25. Print. Push to initiate a hard copy using the printer selected in the Utility menu. 26. Power switch. Push to power on or off the instrument. DPO4000 Series User Manual 57 Get Acquainted with the Instrument 27. USB 2.0 host port. Insert a USB cable here to connect peripherals, such as printers and storage devices, to the oscilloscope. There are also two more USB 2.0 host ports on the rear panel. 28. CompactFlash Drive. Insert a CompactFlash card here. 29. CompactFlash Eject. Pops the CompactFlash card out of the CompactFlash drive. 30. Save. Push to perform an immediate save operation. The save operation uses the current save parameters, as defined in the Save / Recall menu. 31. Default Setup. Push to perform an immediate restore of the oscilloscope to the default settings. 32. Menu Off. Push to clear a displayed menu from the screen. 58 DPO4000 Series User Manual Get Acquainted with the Instrument Identifying Items in the Display The items shown to the right may appear in the display. Not all of these items are visible at any given time. Some readouts move outside the graticule area when menus are turned off. DPO4000 Series User Manual 59 Get Acquainted with the Instrument 1. The acquisition readout shows when an acquisition is running, stopped, or when acquisition preview is in effect. Icons are: Run: Acquisitions enabled Stop: Acquisitions not enabled Roll: In roll mode (40 ms/div or slower) PreVu: In this state, the oscilloscope is stopped or between triggers. You can change the horizontal or vertical position or scale to see approximately what the next acquisition will look like. RUN 60 DPO4000 Series User Manual Get Acquainted with the Instrument 2. The trigger position icon shows the trigger position in the acquisition. 3. The expansion point icon (an orange triangle) shows the point that the horizontal scale expands and compresses around. 4. The waveform record view shows the trigger location relative to the waveform record. The line color corresponds to the selected waveform color. DPO4000 Series User Manual 61 Get Acquainted with the Instrument 5. The trigger status readout shows trigger status. Status conditions are: Trig’d: Triggered Auto: Acquiring untriggered signal PrTrig: Acquiring pretrigger data Trig?: Waiting for trigger Trig’d 6. The cursor readout shows time, amplitude, and delta (Δ) values for each cursor. For FFT measurements, it shows frequency and magnitude. 62 DPO4000 Series User Manual Get Acquainted with the Instrument 7. The trigger level icon shows the trigger level on the waveform. The icon color corresponds to the trigger source channel color. 8. The edge trigger readout shows the trigger source, slope, and level. The trigger readouts for other trigger types show other parameters. 9. The top line of the record length/sampling rate readout shows the sampling rate (adjust with the Horizontal Scale knob). The bottom line shows the record length (adjust with the Acquire menu). DPO4000 Series User Manual 63 Get Acquainted with the Instrument 10. The horizontal position/scale readout shows on the top line the horizontal scale (adjust with the Horizontal Scale knob) and on the bottom line the time from the T symbol to the expansion point icon (adjust with the Horizontal Position knob). Use horizontal position to insert added delay between when the trigger occurs and when you actually capture the data. Insert a negative time to capture more pretrigger information. 11. The auxiliary waveform readouts show the vertical and horizontal scale factors of the math or reference waveforms. 12. The channel readout shows the channel scale factor (per division), coupling, and invert status. Adjust with the Vertical Scale knob and the channel 1, 2, 3, or 4 menus. 64 DPO4000 Series User Manual Get Acquainted with the Instrument 13. Measurement readouts show the selected measurements. You can select up to four measurements to display at one time. A symbol appears instead of the expected numerical measurement if a vertical clipping condition exists. Part of the waveform is above or below the display. To obtain a proper numerical measurement, turn the vertical scale and position knobs to make all of the waveform appear in the display. 14. The waveform baseline indicator shows the zero-volt level of a waveform (ignoring the effect of offset). The icon colors correspond to the waveform colors. DPO4000 Series User Manual 65 Get Acquainted with the Instrument Front-Panel Connectors 1. Channel 1, 2, (3, 4). Channel inputs with TekVPI Versatile Probe Interface. 2. Aux In. Trigger level range is adjustable from +8 V to –8 V. The maximum input voltage is 400V peak, 250V RMS. Input resistance is 1 MΩ ± 1% in parallel with 13 pF ±2 pF. 3. PROBE COMP. Square wave signal source to compensate probes. Output voltage: 0 – 2.5V, amplitude ± 1% behind 1k Ω ±2%. Frequency: 1 kHz. 4. Ground. 5. Application Module Slots. 66 DPO4000 Series User Manual Get Acquainted with the Instrument Side-Panel Connector 1. Ground strap connector. This is a receptacle for a grounding strap. DPO4000 Series User Manual 67 Get Acquainted with the Instrument Rear-Panel Connectors 1. Trigger Out. Use the trigger signal output to synchronize other test equipment with your oscilloscope. A LOW to HIGH transition indicates the trigger occurred. The logic level for Vout (HI) is ≥2.5V open circuit; ≥1.0 V into a 50Ω load to ground. The logic level for Vout (LO) is ≤0.7 V into a load of ≤4 mA; ≤0.25 V into a 50Ω load to ground. 2. XGA Out. Use the XGA Video port (DB-15 female connector) to show the oscilloscope display on an external monitor or projector. 3. LAN. Use the LAN (Ethernet) port (RJ-45 connector) to connect the oscilloscope to a 10/100 Base-T local area network. 4. Device. Use the USB 2.0 High speed device port to control the oscilloscope through USBTMC or GPIB with a TEK-USB-488 Adapter. The USBTMC protocol allows USB devices to communicate using IEEE488 style messages. This lets you run your GPIB software applications on USB hardware. 68 DPO4000 Series User Manual Get Acquainted with the Instrument 5. Host. Use the USB 2.0 Full speed host ports (two) to take advantage of USB mass storage devices and printers. 6. Power input. Attach to an AC power line with integral safety ground. (See page 6, Operating Considerations.) DPO4000 Series User Manual 69 Acquire the Signal Acquire the Signal This section describes concepts of and procedures for setting up the oscilloscope to acquire the signal as you want it to. Setting Up Signal Input Use front-panel buttons to set up your instrument to acquire the signal. 1. Connect the P6139A or VPI probe to the input signal source. 70 DPO4000 Series User Manual Acquire the Signal 2. Select the input channel by pushing the front-panel buttons. NOTE. If you are using a probe that does not supply probe encoding (not a P6139A nor a VPI probe), set the attenuation (probe factor) on the oscilloscope side-bezel menu. 3. Push Autoset. DPO4000 Series User Manual 71 Acquire the Signal 4. Push the desired channel button. Then adjust the vertical position and scale. 5. Adjust the horizontal position and scale. The horizontal position determines the number of pretrigger and posttrigger samples. The horizontal scale determines the size of the acquisition window relative to the waveform. You can scale the window to contain a waveform edge, a cycle, several cycles, or thousands of cycles. 72 DPO4000 Series User Manual Acquire the Signal Quick Tip Use the zoom feature to see multiple acquisition cycles in the upper part and a single cycle in the lower part of the display. (See page 163, Managing Long Record Length Waveforms.) Using the Default Setup To return the oscilloscope to its default settings: 1. Push Default Setup. 2. If you change your mind, push Undo Default Setup to undo the last default setup. Undo Default Setup Quick Tip The DPO4000 Technical Reference describes the default setup settings in detail. This manual is available on the accompanying CD or at www.tektronix.com. DPO4000 Series User Manual 73 Acquire the Signal Using Autoset Autoset adjusts the instrument (acquisition, horizontal, trigger, and vertical controls) such that it displays two or three waveform cycles with the trigger near the midlevel. 1. Connect the probe, and then select the input channel. (See page 70, Setting Up Signal Input.) 2. Push Autoset to execute an Autoset. 3. If desired, push Autoset Undo to undo the last Autoset. Undo Autoset 74 DPO4000 Series User Manual Acquire the Signal Quick Tips To position the waveform appropriately, Autoset may change the vertical position. Autoset always sets vertical offset to 0 V. If you use Autoset when no channels are displayed, the instrument turns on channel one (1) and scales it. Acquisition Concepts Before a signal can be displayed, it must pass through the input channel where it is scaled and digitized. Each channel has a dedicated input amplifier and digitizer. Each channel produces a stream of digital data from which the instrument extracts waveform records. Sampling Process Acquisition is the process of sampling an analog signal, converting it into digital data, and assembling it into a waveform record, which is then stored in acquisition memory. Input signal Sampled points Digital values DPO4000 Series User Manual 75 Acquire the Signal Real-time Sampling Record points DPO4000 series oscilloscopes use real-time sampling. In real-time sampling, the instrument digitizes all of the points it acquires using a single trigger event. Sampling rate 76 DPO4000 Series User Manual Acquire the Signal Waveform Record The instrument builds the waveform record through use of the following parameters: Sample interval: The time between recorded sample points. Adjust this by turning the Horizontal Scale knob. Record length: The number of samples required to fill a waveform record. Set this by pushing the Acquire button and using the resulting lower-bezel menu. Trigger point: The zero time reference in a waveform record. It is shown on the screen by an orange T. DPO4000 Series User Manual 77 Acquire the Signal Horizontal position: The time from the trigger point to the expansion point. Adjust this by turning the Horizontal Position knob. Use a positive time to acquire the record after the trigger point. Use a negative time to acquire it before the trigger point. Expansion point: The point that the horizontal scale expands and contracts around. It is shown by an orange triangle. How the Acquisition Modes Work Sample mode retains the first sampled point from each acquisition interval. Sample is the default mode. 78 DPO4000 Series User Manual Acquire the Signal Peak Detect mode uses the highest and lowest of all the samples contained in two consecutive acquisition intervals. This mode only works with real-time, noninterpolated sampling and is useful for catching high frequency glitches. Hi Res mode calculates the average of all the samples for each acquisition interval. This mode also only works with real-time, noninterpolated sampling. Hi-Res provides a higher-resolution, lower-bandwidth waveform. Envelope mode finds the highest and lowest record points over all acquisitions. Envelope uses Peak Detect for each individual acquisition. Average mode calculates the average value for each record point over a user-specified number of acquisitions. Average uses Sample mode for each individual acquisition. Use average mode to reduce random noise. DPO4000 Series User Manual 79 Acquire the Signal Changing the Acquisition Mode and Record Length Use this procedure to change the acquisition mode. 1. Push Acquire. 2. Push Mode. Mode Average Record Length 10k Reset Horizontal Position Waveform Display 80 DPO4000 Series User Manual Acquire the Signal Acquisition Mode Sample Peak Detect Hi Res Envelope 3. Then choose the acquisition mode from the side-bezel menu. You can chose from: Sample, Peak Detect, Hi Res, Envelope, or Average. NOTE. Peak Detect and High Res require more than one sample point per sample interval. If there is only one sample point, these two modes will appear the same as sample mode. Average 16 DPO4000 Series User Manual 81 Acquire the Signal 4. If you chose Average, turn multipurpose knob a to set the number of waveforms to average over. 5. Push Record Length. 6. Push the side-bezel menu, record length button. 1000 points Choose between: 1000, 10 k, 100 k, 1 M, and 10 M points. 82 DPO4000 Series User Manual Acquire the Signal Using Roll Mode Roll mode gives a display similar to a strip chart recorder for low-frequency signals. Roll mode lets you see acquired data points without waiting for the acquisition of a complete waveform record. Roll mode is enabled when the trigger mode is auto and the horizontal scale is set to 40 ms/div or slower. Quick Tips Switching to Envelope or Average acquisition mode, using math waveforms, or switching to normal trigger will disable Roll mode. Roll mode is disabled when you set the horizontal scale to 20 ms per division or faster. Push Run/Stop to halt Roll mode. DPO4000 Series User Manual 83 Acquire the Signal Defining a Serial Bus Your DPO4000 oscilloscope can trigger on I2C and SPI serial buses if the DPO4EMBD application module is installed. It can trigger on CAN serial buses if the DPO4AUTO application module is installed. It can display the physical layer of a bus (as analog waveforms), digital waveforms, and protocol level information (as symbolic waveforms). Plug in the DPO4EMBD application module to use the I2C and SPI features. Plug in the DPO4AUTO application module to use the CAN features. Using buses in two steps To quickly use serial bus triggering: 1. Push B1 or B2 and enter parameters of the bus to trigger on. You can separately use B1 and B2 to view two different buses. 2. Push Trigger Menu and enter trigger parameters. (See page 98, Choosing a Trigger.) You can display bus information without triggering on the bus signal. 84 DPO4000 Series User Manual Acquire the Signal Setting up serial bus parameters To set up bus parameters: 1. Push B1 or B2 to bring up the lower-bezel bus menu. I2C SPI 2. Push Bus as many times as needed to select the desired bus (I2C, SPI, or CAN) from the pop-up menu. CAN DPO4000 Series User Manual 85 Acquire the Signal 3. Push Define Inputs and use the side-bezel buttons to assign oscilloscope channels to the serial bus signal(s). Bus I2C Define Inputs Thresholds Display As Bus Bus Decode Hex For example, with an I2C bus, you might assign channel 1 to supply the SCLK signal and channel 2 to supply the SDA signal. You can assign any channel to a predefined bus signal. For all serial bus sources, use channel 1 to channel 4. Do not use the Aux In input. 4. Push Thresholds. Bus I2C Define Inputs Thresholds Display As Bus Decode 86 DPO4000 Series User Manual Acquire the Signal For each signal that makes up the serial bus, push the appropriate side-bezel menu button. Then turn the appropriate multipurpose knob to define the voltage level above which the oscilloscope treats the signal as high and below which as low. 5. If you selected CAN above, push Bit Rate and the desired side-bezel menu choice. Bus CAN Define Inputs Thresholds Bit Rate 500 Kbps Display As Bus Bus Decode Hex 6. If you selected SPI above, push Polarity and the desired side-bezel menu choice. Bus SPI Define Inputs Thresholds Polarity Display As Bus Bus Decode Hex Active High means when a signal is greater than the threshold value, it is considered a logical 1. Active Low means when the signal is lower than the threshold value, it is considered a logical 1. DPO4000 Series User Manual 87 Acquire the Signal 7. Push Display As and use the side-bezel menu to define how to display the serial bus. Display As Push Bus to display packet level information decoded for easy visual inspection, much like what you would see on a logic analyzer. Bus Push Waveforms to display the digital (high or low) representations of the waveforms. Waveforms Push Bus and Waveforms to display both views of the signal. Bus and Waveforms Push Event Table On to display a list of packets in the bus. Event Table On Off Sample bus information: 88 DPO4000 Series User Manual Acquire the Signal Sample waveforms: Sample event table: 8. Push Bus Decode and the desired side-bezel menu choice to display the bus data in hexadecimal or binary format. 9. Turn multipurpose knob a to move the bus display up or down on the screen. DPO4000 Series User Manual 89 Acquire the Signal You can also trigger on packet level information on your serial bus. (See page 102, Triggering on Buses.) NOTE. To acquire signals from two buses simultaneously, use this procedure once to define the parameters of the B1 bus and again to define the B2 bus. 90 DPO4000 Series User Manual Trigger Setup and Run Trigger Setup and Run This section contains concepts and procedures for setting up the oscilloscope to trigger on your signal. Triggering Concepts Trigger Event The trigger event establishes the time-reference point in the waveform record. All waveform record data is located in time with respect to that point. The instrument continuously acquires and retains enough sample points to fill the pretrigger portion of the waveform record. That is the part of the waveform that is displayed before, or to the left of, the triggering event on screen. When a trigger event occurs, the instrument starts acquiring samples to build the posttrigger portion of the waveform record, that is, the part displayed after or to the right of the trigger event. After a trigger is recognized, the instrument will not accept another trigger until the acquisition is complete and the holdoff time has expired. DPO4000 Series User Manual 91 Trigger Setup and Run Untriggered display Triggered display Trigger Modes The trigger mode determines how the instrument behaves in the absence of a trigger event: Normal trigger mode enables the instrument to acquire a waveform only when it is triggered. If no trigger occurs, the last waveform record acquired remains on the display. If no last waveform exists, no waveform is displayed. Auto trigger mode enables the instrument to acquire a waveform even if a trigger does not occur. Auto mode uses a timer that starts when the acquisition is started, and the pretrigger information is obtained. If a trigger event is not detected before the timer times out, the instrument forces a trigger. The length of time it waits for a trigger event depends on the time base setting. 92 DPO4000 Series User Manual Trigger Setup and Run Auto mode, when forcing triggers in the absence of valid triggering events, does not synchronize the waveform on the display. The waveform will appear to roll across the screen. If valid triggers occur, the display will become stable. You can also force the instrument to trigger by pushing the front-panel Force Trig button. Trigger Holdoff Adjust holdoff to obtain stable triggering when the instrument is triggering on undesired trigger events. Trigger holdoff can help stabilize triggering, since the oscilloscope does not recognize new triggers during the holdoff time. When the instrument recognizes a trigger event, it disables the trigger system until acquisition is complete. In addition, the trigger system remains disabled during the holdoff period that follows each acquisition. Holdoffs DPO4000 Series User Manual 93 Trigger Setup and Run Trigger Coupling Trigger coupling determines what part of the signal is passed to the trigger circuit. Edge triggering can use all available coupling types: DC, Low Frequency Rejection, High Frequency Rejection, and Noise Rejection. All other trigger types use DC coupling only. Horizontal Position Use horizontal position to acquire waveform detail in a region that is separated from the trigger location by a significant interval of time. 94 DPO4000 Series User Manual Trigger Setup and Run 1. Adjust the position (delay) time by rotating the Horizontal Position knob. 2. Turn horizontal SCALE to acquire the detail that you need around the position (delay) expansion point. DPO4000 Series User Manual 95 Trigger Setup and Run The part of the record that occurs before the trigger is the pretrigger portion. The part that occurs after the trigger is the posttrigger portion. Pretrigger data can help you troubleshoot. For example, to find the cause of an unwanted glitch in your test circuit, you can trigger on the glitch and make the pretrigger period large enough to capture data before the glitch. By analyzing what happens before the glitch, you may uncover information that helps you find the source of the glitch. Alternatively, to see what is happening in your system as a result of the trigger event, make the posttrigger period large enough to capture data after the trigger. Slope and Level The slope control determines whether the instrument finds the trigger point on the rising or the falling edge of a signal. The level control determines where on that edge the trigger point occurs. The DPO4000 provides a long horizontal bar or bars across the graticule to temporarily show the trigger level. 96 DPO4000 Series User Manual Trigger Setup and Run 1. Turn the front-panel Trigger Level knob to adjust the trigger level without going to a menu. 2. Push the front-panel Set to 50% button to quickly set the trigger level to the midpoint of the waveform. Delayed Trigger System Trigger with the A (Main) trigger system alone or, if using an edge trigger, combine the A (Main) trigger with the B (Delayed) trigger to trigger on sequential events. When using sequential triggering, the A trigger event arms the trigger system, and the B trigger event triggers the instrument when the B trigger conditions are met. A and B triggers can (and typically do) have separate sources. The B trigger condition can be based on a time delay or a specified number of events. (See page 107, Using A (Main) and B (Delayed) Triggers.) DPO4000 Series User Manual 97 Trigger Setup and Run Choosing a Trigger To select a trigger: 1. Push Trigger Menu. Edge Pulse Width Runt Logic Setup & Hold Rise/Fall Time Video 2. Push Type repeatedly to select the trigger type to use. NOTE. The bus trigger requires use of the DPO4EMBD or the DPO4AUTO application module. Bus 98 DPO4000 Series User Manual Trigger Setup and Run 3. Complete the trigger setup using the lower-bezel menu controls displayed for the trigger type. The controls to set up the trigger vary depending on the trigger type. Type Edge Source 1 Coupling DC Slope Level 100 mV Mode Auto & Holdoff Configure B Trigger Selecting Triggers Trigger Type Trigger Conditions Edge Trigger on a rising or falling edge, as defined by the slope control. Coupling choices are DC, LF Reject, HF Reject, and Noise Reject. Edge triggers are the simplest and most commonly used trigger type, with both analog and digital signals. An edge trigger event occurs when the trigger source passes through a specified voltage level in the specified direction. DPO4000 Series User Manual 99 Trigger Setup and Run Trigger Type Trigger Conditions Pulse/Width Trigger on pulses that are less than, greater than, equal to, or not equal to a specified time. You can trigger on positive or negative pulses. Pulse/width triggers are primarily used on digital signals. Runt Trigger on a pulse amplitude that crosses one threshold but fails to cross a second threshold before recrossing the first. You can detect positive or negative (or either) runts, or only those wider than, less than, greater than, equal to, or not equal to a specified width. Runt triggers are primarily used on digital signals. Logic Logic triggers are primarily used with digital signals. You can set each input to high, low, or don’t care. In addition, you can use one channel as a clock source set to either the rising or falling edge. Trigger when logic inputs cause the selected function to become True or False. You can also specify that the logic conditions be satisfied for a specific amount of time before triggering. 100 DPO4000 Series User Manual Trigger Setup and Run Trigger Type Trigger Conditions Setup and Hold Violation Trigger when a logic data input changes state inside of the setup or hold time relative to a clock edge. Setup is the amount of time that data should be stable and not change before a clock edge occurs. Hold is the time that data should be stable and not change after a clock edge occurs. Rise/Fall Time Trigger on rise and fall times. Trigger on pulse edges that traverse between two thresholds at faster or slower rates than the specified time. Specify pulse edges as positive or negative or either. Video Trigger on specified fields or lines of a composite video signal. Only composite signal formats are supported. Trigger on NTSC, PAL, or SECAM.Works with Macrovision signals. DPO4000 Series User Manual 101 Trigger Setup and Run Trigger Type Trigger Conditions Bus Optional: Trigger on common, serial-bus, packet-level information with the following application modules: DPO4EMBD — I2C and SPI DPO4AUTO — CAN Triggering on Buses You can use your DPO4000 oscilloscope to trigger on CAN, I2C, and SPI buses, if you have the DPO4AUTO or the DPO4EMBD application module installed. The DPO4000 can display both physical layer (as analog waveforms ) and protocol level information (as digital and symbolic waveforms). To set up the bus trigger: 1. If you have not already defined your bus using the front-panel B1 or B2 buttons, do so now. (See page 84, Defining a Serial Bus.) 102 DPO4000 Series User Manual Trigger Setup and Run 2. Push Trigger Menu. Bus 3. Push and keep pushing the Type button of the lower-bezel menu until you select Bus. Type Bus Source Bus B1 (I2C) Trigger On Address Address 07F Direction Write Mode Auto & Holdoff DPO4000 Series User Manual 103 Trigger Setup and Run 4. Push and keep pushing the Source Bus B1 (I2C) button of the lower-bezel menu until you select the bus that you want to trigger on. B2 (I2C) 5. Push and keep pushing the lower-bezel menu Trigger On button until you select the desired trigger on feature. If you are using the I2C bus trigger, you can trigger on Start, Repeated Start, Stop, Missing Ack, Address, Data, or Address/Data. If you are using the SPI bus trigger, you can trigger on SS Active, MOSI, MISO, or MOSI & MISO. If you are using the CAN bus trigger, you can trigger on Start of Frame, Type of Frame, Identifier, Data, Id & Data, End of Frame, and Missing Ack. 104 DPO4000 Series User Manual Trigger Setup and Run 6. If you are setting up an I2C trigger and have selected a Trigger On selection of Address or Address/Data, push the lower-bezel menu Address button to access the Address side-bezel menu. Press the side-bezel menu Address button. Enter the address parameters of interest with multipurpose knobs a and b. Then push the lower-bezel menu Direction button to enter the direction of interest. Choices are: Read, Write, and Read or Write. DPO4000 Series User Manual 105 Trigger Setup and Run Bus Trigger Data Matching Rolling window byte matching for I2C and SPI. You can use a rolling window to trigger on data with SPI and I2C buses. You define the number of bytes to match. Then the oscilloscope uses a rolling window to find any match within a packet, with the window rolling one byte at a time. For example, if the number of bytes is one, the oscilloscope will match the first byte, second byte, third, and so on within the packet. If the number of bytes is two, the oscilloscope will try to match any two consecutive bytes, such as one and two, two and three, three and four, and so on. If the oscilloscope finds a match, it will then trigger. Specific byte matching (non-rolling window matching) for CAN, I2C, and SPI. You can trigger on a specific byte for SPI and I2C in two ways: For I2C and SPI, enter the number of bytes to match the number of bytes in the signal. Then use don’t cares (X) to mask the bytes that you are not interested in. For I2C, push the bottom-bezel Trigger On to trigger on Address/Data. Push Address. On the side-bezel menu, push Address and rotate multipurpose knobs a and b as needed. Set the address to don’t cares (X) if you want to mask the address. The data will be matched starting at the first byte without using a rolling window. For CAN, triggering occurs when the user-selected data input matches the data and qualifier in the signal starting at the first byte. Set the number of bytes to match the number of bytes of interest. Use the data qualifier to perform: =, !=, <, >, >=, and <= operations. Triggering on identifier and data always matches the identifier and data selected by the user, with the data starting at the first byte. No rolling window is used. 106 DPO4000 Series User Manual Trigger Setup and Run Checking Trigger Status To quickly determine the settings of some key trigger parameters, check the Trigger readout at the bottom of the display. The readouts differ for edge and the advanced triggers. 1. Trigger source = channel 1. 2. Trigger slope = rising. 3. Trigger level = 0.00 V. Edge trigger readout Using A (Main) and B (Delayed) Triggers Combine an edge A Event (Main) trigger with the B Event (Delayed) trigger to capture more complex signals. After the A Event occurs, the trigger system looks for the B Event before triggering and displaying the waveform. To use the B trigger: 1. Push Trigger Menu. DPO4000 Series User Manual 107 Trigger Setup and Run 2. Press Type repeatedly to select a trigger type of Edge. 3. Push Configure B Trigger. This brings up the B trigger menu. The B Trigger Setup item only appears if the A trigger is set to edge trigger. Type Edge Source 1 Coupling DC Slope Level 0.00 V Mode Auto & Holdoff Configure B Trigger 4. Set the B trigger parameters as defined in the B trigger lower-bezel and side-bezel menu items. B Trigger On B Trigger After A Time Source 1 Coupling DC Slope Level 0.00V Configure A Trigger 108 DPO4000 Series User Manual Trigger Setup and Run Trigger on B Event The A trigger arms the instrument. Posttrigger acquisition starts on the nth B event. DPO4000 Series User Manual 109 Trigger Setup and Run B Trigger After Delay Time The A trigger arms the instrument. Posttrigger acquisition starts on the first B edge after the trigger delay time. Quick Tips B-trigger delay time and horizontal position are independent functions. When you establish a trigger condition using either the A trigger alone or the A and B triggers together, you can also use horizontal position to delay the acquisition by an additional amount. When using the B trigger, the A and B trigger types can only be Edge. 110 DPO4000 Series User Manual Trigger Setup and Run Starting and Stopping an Acquisition After you have defined the acquisition and trigger parameters, start the acquisition with Run/Stop or Single. Push Run/Stop to start the acquisition. Push it again to stop the acquisition. Push Single to take a single acquisition. Single sets the trigger mode to Normal for the single acquisition. DPO4000 Series User Manual 111 Display Waveform Data Display Waveform Data This section contains concepts and procedures for displaying the acquired waveform. Adding and Removing a Waveform 1. To add or remove an active waveform from the display, push the relevant front-panel channel button. You can use the channel as a trigger source whether or not it is displayed. Setting the Display Style and Persistence 1. To set the display style, push Acquire. 112 DPO4000 Series User Manual Display Waveform Data 2. Push Waveform Display. Mode Sample Record Length 10k Reset Horizontal Position Waveform Display DPO4000 Series User Manual 113 Display Waveform Data 3. Push Dots Only On Off from the side-bezel menu. Dots on will display the waveform record points as dots on the screen. Dots off connects the dots with vectors. Waveform Display Dots Only On Off 4. Push Persist Time, and turn multipurpose knob a to have waveform data remain on screen for a user-specified amount of time. Persist Time a Auto 5. Push Set to Auto to have the oscilloscope automatically determine a persistence time for you. Set to Auto 6. Push Clear Persistence to reset the persistence information. Clear Persistence 114 DPO4000 Series User Manual Display Waveform Data Quick Tips Variable persistence accumulates record points for a specified time interval. Each record point decays independently according to the time interval. Use variable persistence for displaying infrequently appearing signal anomalies, such as glitches. Infinite persistence continuously accumulates record points until you change one of the acquisition display settings. Use infinite persistence for displaying unique signal anomalies, such as glitches. Setting Waveform and Graticule Intensity 1. Push the front-panel Intensity button. This will bring up the intensity readout on the display. DPO4000 Series User Manual 115 Display Waveform Data 2. Rotate multipurpose knob a to select the desired waveform intensity. 3. Rotate multipurpose knob b to select the desired intensity for the graticule and text. 4. Push Intensity again to clear the intensity readout from the display. 116 DPO4000 Series User Manual Display Waveform Data Setting the Graticule Style 1. To set the graticule style, push Utility. 2. Push System repeatedly until you select Display from the pop-up menu. Display 3. Push Graticule from the lower-bezel menu. System Display Backlight Intensity High Graticule Full DPO4000 Series User Manual 117 Display Waveform Data 4. Select the desired style from the resulting side-bezel menu. Use the Full graticule for quick estimates of waveform parameters. Use the Grid graticule for full-screen measurements with cursors and automatic readouts when cross hairs are not needed. Use the Cross Hair graticule for making quick estimates of waveforms while leaving more room for automatic readouts and other data. Use the Frame graticule with automatic readouts and other screen text when display features are not needed. Setting the LCD Backlight 1. Push Utility. 118 DPO4000 Series User Manual Display Waveform Data 2. Push System repeatedly until you select Display. Display 3. Push Backlight Intensity. System Display Backlight Intensity High Graticule Full Backlight Intensity High Medium 4. Select the intensity level from the resulting side-bezel menu. Choices are: High, Medium, and Low. Low DPO4000 Series User Manual 119 Display Waveform Data Scaling and Positioning a Waveform Use the horizontal controls to adjust the time base, adjust the trigger point, and to examine waveform details more closely. Original waveform Scaled horizontally Positioned horizontally 120 DPO4000 Series User Manual Display Waveform Data Use the vertical controls to select waveforms, adjust the waveform vertical position and scale, and set input parameters. Push a channel button (1, 2, 3, or 4), the MATH button, or the REF button or the B1 or B2 button as many times as needed and the associated menu items to select, add, or remove a waveform. Original waveform Scaled vertically Positioned vertically Quick Tips Preview. If you change the Position or Scale controls when the acquisition is stopped or when it is waiting for the next trigger, the oscilloscope rescales and repositions the relevant waveforms in response to the new control settings. It simulates what you will see when you next push the RUN button. The oscilloscope uses the new settings for the next acquisition. You may see a clipped waveform if the original acquisition went off the screen. The math waveform, cursors, and automatic measurements remain active and valid when using preview. DPO4000 Series User Manual 121 Display Waveform Data Setting Input Parameters Use the vertical controls to select waveforms, adjust the waveform vertical position and scale, and set input parameters. 1. Push channel button 1, 2, 3, or 4 to bring up the vertical menu for the designated waveform. The vertical menu only affects the selected waveform. Pushing a channel button will also select or cancel that waveform selection. 2. Push Coupling. Coupling DC Invert Off Bandwidth Full Fine Scale 100mV/div Offset 0.00V Position 0.00 div Probe Setup 1X 122 DPO4000 Series User Manual Display Waveform Data 3. Push DC, AC, or GND (ground). Use DC coupling to pass both AC and DC components. DC Use AC coupling to block the DC component and show only the AC signal. AC Use Ground (GND) to display the reference potential. GND 4. Push Ω. Ω 1M 50 Set the input impedance (termination) to 50 Ω or 1 MΩ if using DC or Gnd coupling. Input impedance is automatically set to 1 MΩ when using AC coupling. For more information on input impedance, see Quick Tips below. DPO4000 Series User Manual 123 Display Waveform Data 5. Push Invert to invert the signal. Coupling DC Invert Off Bandwidth Full Fine Scale 100mV/div Offset 0.00V Position 0.00 div Probe Setup 1X Select Invert Off for normal operation and Invert On to invert the polarity of the signal in the preamplifier. 6. Push Bandwidth, and select the desired bandwidth from the resulting side-bezel menu. Coupling DC Invert Off Bandwidth Full Fine Scale 100mV/div Offset 0.00V Position 0.00 div Probe Setup 1 X The set choices are: Full, 250 MHz, and 20 MHz. Additional choices may appear, depending on the probe that you use. Select Full to set the bandwidth to the full oscilloscope bandwidth. Select 250 MHz to set the bandwidth to 250 MHz. Select 20 MHz to set the bandwidth to 20 MHz. 124 DPO4000 Series User Manual Display Waveform Data 7. Push Fine Scale to enable multipurpose knob a to make fine vertical scale adjustments. Coupling DC Invert Off Bandwidth Full Fine Scale 100mV/div Offset 0.00V Position 0.00 div Probe Setup 1 X 8. Push Offset to enable multipurpose knob a to make vertical offset adjustments. Coupling DC Invert Off Bandwidth Full Fine Scale 100mV/div Offset 0.00V Position 0.00 div Probe Setup 1 X On the side-bezel menu, choose Set to 0 V to set the vertical offset to 0 V. For more information on offset, see the Quick Tips below. DPO4000 Series User Manual 125 Display Waveform Data 9. Push Position to enable multipurpose knob a to make vertical position adjustments. Coupling DC Invert Off Bandwidth Full Fine Scale 100mV/div Offset 0.00V Position 0.00 div Probe Setup 1 X NOTE. You can also use the position knob on the front panel to do this. On the side-bezel menu, choose Set to 0 divs to set the vertical position to the center of the screen. For more information on vertical position, see the Quick Tips below. 126 DPO4000 Series User Manual Display Waveform Data 10. Push Probe Setup to define probe parameters. Coupling DC Invert Off Bandwidth Full Fine Scale 100mV/div Offset 0.00V Position 0.00 div Probe Setup 1 X On the resulting side-bezel menu: Select Voltage Probe or Current Probe to set the probe gain or attenuation for probes that do not have the TekProbe II or TekVPI interface. Push Deskew to set the time skew correction to zero. Turn multipurpose knob a to adjust the time skew (deskew) correction for the probe attached to the selected channel. This shifts acquisition and display of the waveform left or right, relative to the trigger time. Use this to compensate for differences in cable lengths or probe types. Select Attenuation to choose the probe attenuation. DPO4000 Series User Manual 127 Display Waveform Data Quick Tips Using Probes with the TekProbe II and TekVPI Interfaces. When you attach a probe with the TekProbe II or the TekVPI interface, the oscilloscope sets the channel sensitivity, coupling, and termination resistance automatically to match the probe requirements. Tek Probe II probes require use of the TPA-BNC Adapter. The Difference Between Vertical Position and Offset. Vertical position is a display function. Adjust the vertical position to place the waveforms where you want to see them. The waveform baseline locations track adjustments made to their positions. When you adjust vertical offset, you see a similar effect, but it is actually quite different. Vertical offset is applied before the oscilloscope preamplifier and can be used to increase the effective dynamic range of the inputs. For example, you can use vertical offset to look at small variations in a large DC voltage. Set the vertical offset to match the nominal DC voltage and the signal appears in the center of the screen. 50 Ω Protection. If you select 50 Ω termination, the maximum vertical scale factor is limited to 1 V/div. If you apply excessive input voltage, the oscilloscope automatically switches to 1 M Ω termination to protect the internal 50 Ω termination. For more details, refer to the specifications in the DPO4000 Technical Reference. 128 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data Analyze Waveform Data After having properly set up the acquisition, triggering, and display of your desired waveform, you can then analyze the results. Select from features such as cursors, automatic measurements, statistics, math, and FFT. Taking Automatic Measurements To take an automatic measurement: 1. Push Measure. 2. Push Select Measurement. Select Measurement Remove Measurement Gating Off Statistics Off Reference Levels Indicators Configure Cursors DPO4000 Series User Manual 129 Analyze Waveform Data 3. Turn multipurpose knob a to select the channel from which you want to measure. This step is only needed if you are acquiring data on more than one channel. 4. Select the specific measurement or measurements from the side-bezel menu. 5. To remove a measurement, push Remove Measurement and the specific measurement from the resulting side-bezel menu. Quick Tips To remove all measurements, select Remove All. A symbol appears instead of the expected numerical measurement if a vertical clipping condition exists. Part of the waveform is above or below the display. To obtain a proper numerical measurement, turn the vertical scale and position knobs to make all of the waveform appear in the display. 130 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data Selecting Automatic Measurements The following tables list each automatic measurement by category: amplitude or time. (See page 129, Taking Automatic Measurements.) Time Measurements Measurement Description Period The time required to complete the first cycle in a waveform or gated region. Period is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds. Frequency The first cycle in a waveform or gated region. Frequency is the reciprocal of the period; it is measured in hertz (Hz) where one Hz is one cycle per second. Delay The time between the mid reference (default 50%) amplitude point of two different waveforms. See also Phase. Rise Time The time required for the leading edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to rise from the low reference value (default = 10%) to the high reference value (default = 90%) of the final value. Fall Time The time required for the falling edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to fall from the high reference value (default = 90%) to the low reference value (default = 10%) of the final value. Positive Duty Cycle The ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage. The duty cycle is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region. DPO4000 Series User Manual 131 Analyze Waveform Data Time Measurements (cont.) Measurement Description Negative Duty Cycle The ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage. The duty cycle is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region. Positive Pulse Width The distance (time) between the mid reference (default 50%) amplitude points of a positive pulse. The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region. Negative Pulse Width The distance (time) between the mid reference (default 50%) amplitude points of a negative pulse. The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region. Burst Width The duration of a burst (a series of transient events) and is measured over the entire waveform or gated region. Phase The amount of time that one waveform leads or lags another waveform, expressed in degrees where 360° comprises one waveform cycle. See also Delay. 132 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data Amplitude Measurements Measurement Description Positive Overshoot This is measured over the entire waveform or gated region and is expressed as: Positive Overshoot = (Maximum – High) / Amplitude x 100%. Negative Overshoot This is measured over the entire waveform or gated region and is expressed as: Negative Overshoot = (Low – Minimum) / Amplitude x 100%. DPO4000 Series User Manual 133 Analyze Waveform Data Amplitude Measurements (cont.) Measurement Description Pk-Pk The absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region. Amplitude The high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or gated region. High This value is used as 100% whenever high reference, mid reference, or low reference values are needed, such as in fall time or rise time measurements. Calculate using either the min/max or histogram method. The min/max method uses the maximum value found. The histogram method uses the most common value found above the midpoint. This value is measured over the entire waveform or gated region. Low This value is used as 0% whenever high reference, mid reference, or low reference values are needed, such as in fall time or rise time measurements. Calculate using either the min/max or histogram method. The min/max method uses the minimum value found. The histogram method uses the most common value found below the midpoint. This value is measured over the entire waveform or gated region. Max The most positive peak voltage. Max is measured over the entire waveform or gated region. Min The most negative peak voltage. Min is measured over the entire waveform or gated region. 134 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data Amplitude Measurements (cont.) Measurement Description Mean The arithmetic mean over the entire waveform or gated region. Cycle Mean The arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region. RMS The true Root Mean Square voltage over the entire waveform or gated region. Cycle RMS The true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region. DPO4000 Series User Manual 135 Analyze Waveform Data Miscellaneous Measurements Measurement Description Area Area measurement is a voltage over time measurement. It returns the area over the entire waveform or gated region in volt-seconds. Area measured above ground is positive; area measured below ground is negative. Cycle Area A voltage over time measurement. The measurement is the area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region expressed in volt-seconds. The area above the common reference point is positive while the area below the common reference point is negative. 136 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data Customizing an Automatic Measurement You can customize automatic measurements by using gating, modifying measurement statistics, adjusting the measurement reference levels, or taking a snapshot. Gating Gating confines the measurement to a certain portion of a waveform. To use: 1. Push Measure. 2. Push Gating. Select Measurement Remove Measurement Gating Off Statistics Off Reference Levels Indicators Configure Cursors DPO4000 Series User Manual 137 Analyze Waveform Data 3. Position the gates from the side-bezel menu options. Gating Off (Full record) Screen Between cursors Bring cursors on screen 138 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data Statistics Statistics characterize the stability of measurements. To adjust statistics: 1. Push Measure. 2. Push Statistics. Select Measurement Remove Measurement Gating Off Statistics Off Reference Levels Indicators Configure Cursors DPO4000 Series User Manual 139 Analyze Waveform Data Measurement Statistics On Off Mean & Std Dev Samples a 32 3. Push the side-bezel menu options. These include whether to turn statistics on or off and how many samples to use for mean and standard deviation calculations. Reset Statistics Snapshot To see all the single-sourced measurements at one moment in time: 1. Push Measure. 140 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data 2. Push Select Measurement. Select measurement Remove Measurement Gating Off Statistics Off High-Low Setup Reference Levels Indicators Off 3. Push Snapshot All Measurements. Snapshot All Measurements 4. View results. Snapshot on 1 Period: 588.0 ns Freq: 1.701 MHz +Width: 529.7 ns -Width: 58.33 ns BrstW: 39.91 μs Rise: 2.014 μs Fall: 1.522 μs ... ... ... ... DPO4000 Series User Manual 141 Analyze Waveform Data Reference Levels Reference levels determine how time-related measurements are taken. For example, they are used in calculating rise and fall times. 1. Push Measure. 2. Push Reference Levels. Select Measurement Remove Measurement Gating Off Statistics Off Reference Levels Indicators Configure Cursors 142 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data 3. Set the levels from the side-bezel menu. Reference Levels Set Levels in % units Use High and Low reference to calculate rise and fall times. High Ref a 90.0 % Use Mid reference primarily for measurements between edges such as pulse widths. Mid Ref a 50.0 % b 50.0 % Low Ref a 10.0 % - more - 1 of 2 DPO4000 Series User Manual 143 Analyze Waveform Data Taking Manual Measurements with Cursors Cursors are on-screen markers that you position in the waveform display to take manual measurements on acquired data. They appear as horizontal and/or as vertical lines. To use cursors: 1. Push Cursors. This changes the cursor state. The three states are: No cursors appear on the screen, Two vertical waveform cursors appear. They are attached to the selected waveform Four screen cursors appear. Two are vertical and two are horizontal. They are no longer specifically attached to a waveform For example, the first time you push Cursors the state might be off. 144 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data 2. Push Cursors again. In the example, two vertical cursors appear on the selected screen waveform. As you turn multipurpose knob a, you move one cursor to the right or left. As you turn knob b, you move the other cursor. If you change the selected waveform by pushing the front-panel 1, 2, 3, 4, M or R button, both cursors jump to the new selected waveform. 3. Push Select. This turns the cursor linking on and off. If linking is on, turning multipurpose knob a moves the two cursors together. Turning multipurpose knob b adjusts the time between the cursors. DPO4000 Series User Manual 145 Analyze Waveform Data 4. Push Fine to toggle between a coarse or a fine adjustment for multipurpose knobs a and b. Pushing Fine also changes the sensitivity of other knobs as well. 5. Push Cursors again. This will put the cursors into screen mode. Two horizontal bars and two vertical bars span the graticule. 6. Turn multipurpose knobs a and b to move the pair of horizontal cursors. 146 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data 7. Push Select. This makes the vertical cursors active and the horizontal ones inactive. Now, as you turn the multipurpose knobs, the vertical cursors will move. Push Select again to make the horizontal cursors active again. 8. View the cursor and the cursor readout. DPO4000 Series User Manual 147 Analyze Waveform Data 9. Push Cursors again. This will turn off the cursor mode. The screen will no longer display the cursors and the cursor readout. 148 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data Using cursor readouts Cursor readouts supply textual and numeric information relating to the current cursor positions. Readouts appear in the upper right corner of the graticule. If Zoom is on, the readout appears in the upper right corner of the zoom window. The oscilloscope always shows the readouts when the cursors are turned on. When a bus is the currently selected waveform, the readout is the decoded bus data in whatever format you have selected (hexadecimal or binary). Δ Readout: The Δ readouts indicate the difference between the cursor positions. a Readout: Indicates the value is controlled by multipurpose knob a. b Readout: Indicates the value is controlled by multipurpose knob b. The horizontal cursor lines on the display measure the vertical parameters, typically voltage. DPO4000 Series User Manual 149 Analyze Waveform Data The vertical cursor lines on the display measure horizontal parameters, typically time. Using Math Waveforms Create math waveforms to support the analysis of your channel and reference waveforms. By combining and transforming source waveforms and other data into math waveforms, you can derive the data view that your application requires. Use the following procedure for executing simple (+, –, *, ÷) math operations on two waveforms: 1. Push Math. 150 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data 2. Push Dual Wfm Math. Dual Wfm Math FFT Advanced Math 3. On the side-bezel menu, set the sources to either channel 1, 2, 3, 4, or reference waveforms R1, 2, 3, or 4. Choose the +, –, x, or ÷ operators. 4. For example, you might calculate power by multiplying a voltage waveform and a current waveform. DPO4000 Series User Manual 151 Analyze Waveform Data Quick Tips Math waveforms can be created from channel or reference waveforms or a combination of them. Measurements can be taken on math waveforms in the same way as on channel waveforms. Math waveforms derive their horizontal scale and position from the sources in their math expressions. Adjusting these controls for the source waveforms also adjusts the math waveform. You can zoom in on math waveforms using the inner knob of the Pan-Zoom control. Use the outer knob for positioning the zoomed area. (See page 163, Managing Long Record Length Waveforms.) 152 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data Using FFT An FFT breaks down signals into component frequencies, which the oscilloscope uses to display a graph of the frequency domain of a signal, as opposed to the oscilloscope’s standard time domain graph. You can match these frequencies with known system frequencies, such as system clocks, oscillators, or power supplies. 1. Push Math. 2. Push FFT. Dual Wfm Math FFT Advanced Math DPO4000 Series User Manual 153 Analyze Waveform Data 3. Push the side-bezel menu FFT Source button repeatedly to select the source to use. Choices are: channels 1, 2, 3, 4, reference waveforms 1, 2, 3, and 4. Math Definition FFT Source 1 4. Push the side-bezel Vertical Scale button repeatedly to select either Linear RMS or dBV RMS. Vertical Scale Linear RMS 5. Push the side-bezel Window button repeatedly to select the desired window. Window choices are: Rectangular, Hamming, Hanning, and Blackman-Harris. Window Hanning 6. Push the side-bezel Horizontal button to activate multipurpose knobs a and b to pan and zoom the FFT display. Horizontal 0.00 Hz 40.0 154 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data 7. The FFT will appear on the display. Quick Tips Use short record lengths for faster instrument response. Use long record lengths to lower the noise relative to the signal and increase the frequency resolution. DPO4000 Series User Manual 155 Analyze Waveform Data If desired, use the zoom feature along with the horizontal Position and Scale controls to magnify and position the FFT waveform. Use the default dBV RMS scale to see a detailed view of multiple frequencies, even if they have very different amplitudes. Use the linear RMS scale to see an overall view of how all frequencies compare to each other. The FFT feature provides four windows. Each is a trade-off between frequency resolution and magnitude accuracy. What you want to measure and your source signal characteristics help determine which window to use. Use the following guidelines to select the best window. Description Window Rectangular This is the best type of window for resolving frequencies that are very close to the same value but worst for accurately measuring the amplitude of those frequencies. It is the best type for measuring the frequency spectrum of nonrepetitive signals and measuring frequency components near DC. Use Rectangular for measuring transients or bursts where the signal level before and after the event are nearly equal. Also, use this window for equal-amplitude sine waves with frequencies that are very close and for broadband random noise with a relatively slow varying spectrum. Hamming This is a very good window for resolving frequencies that are very close to the same value with somewhat improved amplitude accuracy over the rectangular window. It has a slightly better frequency resolution than the Hanning. Use Hamming for measuring sine, periodic, and narrow band random noise. This window works on transients or bursts where the signal levels before and after the event are significantly different. 156 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data Description Window Hanning This is a very good window for measuring amplitude accuracy but less so for resolving frequencies. Use Hanning for measuring sine, periodic, and narrow band random noise. This window works on transients or bursts where the signal levels before and after the event are significantly different. Blackman-Harris: This is the best window for measuring the amplitude of frequencies but worst at resolving frequencies. Use Blackman-Harris for measuring predominantly single frequency waveforms to look for higher order harmonics. Using Advanced Math The advanced math feature lets you create a custom math waveform expression that can incorporate active and reference waveforms, measurements, and/or numeric constants. To use this feature: 1. Push Math. DPO4000 Series User Manual 157 Analyze Waveform Data 2. Push Advanced Math. Dual Wfm Math FFT Advanced Math 3. Use the side-bezel menu buttons to create custom expressions. 4. Push Edit Expression and use the multipurpose knobs and the resulting lower-bezel buttons to create an expression. When done, push the side-bezel menu OK Accept button. 158 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data For example, to use Edit Expression to take the integral of a square wave: 1. Push the lower-bezel Clear button 2. Turn multipurpose knob a to select INTG( 3. Push Enter Selection 4. Turn multipurpose knob a to select channel 1 5. Push Enter Selection 6. Turn multipurpose knob a to select ) 7. Push OK Accept. DPO4000 Series User Manual 159 Analyze Waveform Data Using Reference Waveforms Create a reference waveform to store a waveform. For example, you might do this to set up a standard against which to compare other waveforms. To use the reference waveforms: 1. Push Ref R. This brings up the lower-bezel reference menu. 2. Use the resulting lower-bezel menu selections to display or select a reference waveform. R 1 (On) 25–Oct- 2006 R 2 (Off) R 3 (Off) R 4 (Off) 160 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data 3. Use the side-bezel menu and the multipurpose knobs to adjust the vertical and horizontal settings of the reference waveform. R1 Vertical a 0.00 div b 100 mV/div Horizontal 0.00 s 4.00 μs/div Quick Tips Selecting and Displaying Reference Waveforms. You can display all the reference waveforms at the same time. Push the appropriate screen button to select a particular reference waveform. The selected waveform appears brighter than other displayed reference waveforms. Removing Reference Waveforms from the Display. To remove a reference waveform from the display, push the front-panel R button to access the lower-bezel menu. Then push the associated button from the lower-bezel menu to turn it off. Scaling and Positioning a Reference Waveform. You can position and scale a reference waveform independently from all other displayed waveforms. Select the reference waveform and then adjust it with a multipurpose knob. You can do this whether acquisition is running or not. DPO4000 Series User Manual 161 Analyze Waveform Data If a reference waveform is selected, scaling and repositioning of the reference waveform operates the same way whether zoom is turned on or off. Saving 10M Reference Waveforms. 10M reference waveforms are volatile and not saved when the oscilloscope power is turned off. To keep these waveforms, save them to external storage. Recalling Reference Waveforms from External Storage. 162 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data Managing Long Record Length Waveforms The DPO4000 Series Wave Inspector controls (zoom/pan, play/pause, marks, search) help you to efficiently work with long record length waveforms. To magnify a waveform horizontally, rotate the Zoom knob. To scroll through a zoomed waveform, rotate the Pan knob. The Pan-Zoom Control consists of: 1. An outer pan knob 2. An inner zoom knob DPO4000 Series User Manual 163 Analyze Waveform Data Zooming a Waveform To use zoom: 1. Rotate the inner knob on the Pan-Zoom control clockwise to zoom in on a selected portion of the waveform. Rotate the knob counterclockwise to zoom back out. 2. Alternatively, enable or disable the zoom mode by pushing the zoom button. 164 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data 3. Examine the zoomed view of the waveform that appears on the larger, lower portion of the display. The upper portion of the display will show the position and size of the zoomed portion in the waveform, within the context of the overall record. DPO4000 Series User Manual 165 Analyze Waveform Data Panning a Waveform While the zoom feature is on, you can use the pan feature to quickly scroll through the waveform. To use pan: 1. Rotate the pan (outer) knob of the pan-zoom controls to pan the waveform. Turn the knob clockwise to pan forward. Turn it counterclockwise to pan backwards. The further you turn the knob, the faster the zoom window pans. 166 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data Playing and Pausing a Waveform Use the play-pause feature to automatically pan through a waveform record. To use it: 1. Enable the play-pause mode by pushing the play-pause button. 2. Adjust the play speed by turning the pan (outer) knob further. The further you turn it, the faster it goes. DPO4000 Series User Manual 167 Analyze Waveform Data 3. Change the play direction by reversing the direction that you are turning the pan knob. 4. During play, up to a point, the more you turn the ring, the faster the waveform accelerates. If you rotate the ring as far as it can go, the play speed does not change, but the zoom box quickly moves in that direction. Use this maximum rotation feature to replay a portion of the waveform that you just saw and want to see again. 5. Pause the play-pause feature by pushing the play-pause button again. 168 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data Searching and Marking Waveforms You can mark locations of interest in the acquired waveform. These marks help you limit your analysis to particular regions of the waveform. You can mark areas of the waveform automatically, if they meet some special criteria, or you can manually mark each item of interest. You can use arrow keys to jump from mark to mark (area of interest to area of interest). You can automatically search and mark many of the same parameters that you can trigger on. Search marks provide a way to mark a waveform region for reference. You can set marks automatically with search criteria. You can search for and mark regions with particular edges, pulse widths, runts, logic states, rise/fall times, setup and hold, and bus search types. To manually set and clear (delete) marks: 1. Move (the zoom box) to the area on the waveform where you want to set (or clear) a search mark by turning the pan (outer) knob. Push the next ( →) or previous (←) arrow button to jump to an existing mark. 2. Push Set/Clear. If no search mark is at the screen center, the oscilloscope will add one. DPO4000 Series User Manual 169 Analyze Waveform Data 3. Now investigate your waveform by moving from search mark to search mark. Use the next ( →) or previous (←) arrow button to jump from one marked location to another, without adjusting any other controls. 4. Delete a mark. Push the next ( →) or previous (←) arrow button to jump to the mark you want to clear. To remove the current, center-positioned mark, just push Set/Clear. It works on both manually and automatically created marks. To automatically set and clear (delete) search marks: 1. Push Search. 170 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data 2. Select the search type desired from the lower-bezel menu. Search Off Search Type Edge Source 1 Slope Threshold 0.00V The search menu is similar to the trigger menu. 3. From the side-bezel menu, turn on the search. 4. On the screen, hollow triangles show the location of automatic marks and solid triangles show the custom (user-defined) locations. These appear on both normal and zoomed waveform views. DPO4000 Series User Manual 171 Analyze Waveform Data 5. Again, you can quickly investigate your waveform by moving from search mark to search mark with the next ( →) and previous (←) arrow buttons. No other adjustments are needed. Quick Tips. You can copy trigger settings to search for other locations in your acquired waveform that meet the trigger conditions. You can also copy search settings to your trigger. Custom (User) marks are saved with the waveform when the waveform is saved and when the setup is saved. Automatic search marks are not saved with the waveform when the waveform is saved. However, you can easily recapture them by re-using the search function. The search criteria are saved in the saved setup. With the optional DPO4EMBD and DPO4AUTO application modules installed, you can use the front-panel B1 and B2 buttons to define a combination of inputs to be either I2C, SPI, or CAN serial bus. Once set up, you can trigger on user-specified packet level content and have the DPO4000 automatically decode every packet in the acquisition into either binary or hex. The Wave Inspector includes the following search capabilities: Search Description Edge Searches for edges (rising or falling) with a user-specified threshold level. Pulse Width Searches for positive or negative pulse widths that are >, <, =, or ≠ a user specified pulse width. 172 DPO4000 Series User Manual Analyze Waveform Data Search Description Runt Searches for positive or negative pulses that cross one amplitude threshold but fail to cross a second threshold before crossing the first again. Search for all runt pulses or only those with a duration >, <, =, or ≠ a user specified time. Logic Search for a logic pattern (AND, OR, NAND, or NOR) across multiple waveforms with each input set to either High, Low, or Don’t Care. Search for when the event goes true, goes false, or stays valid for >, <, =, or ≠ a user specified time. Additionally, you can define one of the inputs as a clock for synchronous (state) searches. Setup & Hold Search for violations of user specified Setup and Hold times. Rise/Fall Time Search for rising and/or falling edges that are >, <, =, or ≠ a user specified time. Bus I2C: Search for Start, Repeated Start, Stop, Missing Ack, Address, Data, or Address and Data. SPI: Search for SS Active, MOSI, MISO, or MOSI & MISO CAN: Search for Start of Frame, Type of Frame (Data, Remote, Error, Overload), Identifier (standard or extended), Data, Identifier and Data, End of Frame, or Missing Ack. DPO4000 Series User Manual 173 Save and Recall Information Save and Recall Information The DPO4000 Series oscilloscope provides permanent storage for setups, waveforms, and screen images. Use the internal storage of the oscilloscope to save setups and reference waveform data. Use external storage, such as CompactFlash media and USB flash-memory storage devices to save setups, waveforms, and screen images. Use the external storage to carry data to remote computers for further analysis and for archiving. Saving a Screen Image A screen image consists of a graphical image of the oscilloscope screen. This is different from waveform data, which consists of numeric values for each point in the waveform. To save a screen image: 1. Push Save / Recall Menu. Do not yet push the Save button. 2. Push Save Screen Image from the lower-bezel menu. Save Screen Image Save Waveform Save Setup Recall Waveform Recall Setup Assign Save to Setup File Utilities 174 DPO4000 Series User Manual Save and Recall Information Save Screen Image 3. From the side-bezel menu, push File Format repeatedly to select among: .tif, .bmp, and .png formats. File Format .png 4. Push Orientation to select between saving the image in a landscape (horizontal) and a portrait (vertical) orientation. Orientation 5. Push Ink Saver to turn the Ink Saver mode on or off. When on, this mode provides a white background. Ink Saver On Off 6. Push Edit File Name to create a custom name for the screen image file. Skip this step to use a default name. Edit File Name 7. Push OK Save Screen Image to write the image to the selected media. OK Save Screen Image DPO4000 Series User Manual 175 Save and Recall Information For information on printing screen images of waveforms, go to Printing a Hardcopy. (See page 189, Printing a Hard Copy.) Saving and Recalling Waveform Data Waveform data consists of the numeric values for each point in the waveform. It copies the data, as opposed to a graphical image of the screen. To save the current waveform data or to recall previously stored waveform data: 1. Push Save / Recall Menu. 2. Push Save Waveform or Recall Waveform from the lower-bezel menu. Save Screen Image Save Waveform Save Setup Recall Waveform Recall Setup Assign Save to Waveform File Utilities 176 DPO4000 Series User Manual Save and Recall Information 3. From the resulting side-bezel menu, select the location to save the waveform data to or to recall it from. Save the information externally to a file on a CompactFlash card or USB memory stick. Alternatively, save the information internally to one of the four reference memories in the oscilloscope. 4. Push To File to save to a CompactFlash card or USB memory stick. To File This brings up the file manager screen. Use it to define a custom file name. Skip this step to use the default name and location. Editing File, Directory, Reference Waveform, or Instrument Setup Names. Give files descriptive names that you can recognize at a later date. To edit file names, directory names, reference waveform and instrument setup labels: 1. Push Save / Recall Menu. DPO4000 Series User Manual 177 Save and Recall Information 2. Push Save Screen Image, Save Waveform, or Save Setup. Save Screen Image Save Waveform Save Setup Recall Waveform Recall Setup Assign Save to Setup File Utilities 3. Enter the file manager by pushing the side-bezel menu To File item. To File 4. Turn multipurpose knob a to scroll through the file structure. D: is the CompactFlash drive. E: is the USB drive plugged into the USB port on the front of the oscilloscope. F: and G: are the USB drives plugged into the USB host ports on the rear of the oscilloscope. 178 DPO4000 Series User Manual Save and Recall Information 5. Push Select to open or close file folders. 6. Push the Menu Off button to cancel the save operation, or push a side-bezel menu OK Save. item to complete the operation. OK Save DPO4000 Series User Manual 179 Save and Recall Information Naming Your File. The oscilloscope gives all files it creates the default name tekxxxxx where xxxxx is an integer from 00000 to 99999. For example, the first time you save a file, that file is named tek00000. The next file is named tek00001. To define a file name of your own choosing: 1. Push Save / Recall Menu. 2. Push Save Screen Image, Save Waveform, or Save Setup. Save Screen Image Save Waveform Save Setup Recall Waveform Recall Setup Map Save Button File Utilities 3. Enter the file manager by pushing the side-bezel menu To File item. To File 180 DPO4000 Series User Manual Save and Recall Information 4. Push the front-panel Select or the lower-bezel menu Enter Character to select a character. 5. Push the Menu Off button to cancel the file naming operation or push a side-bezel menu Save to Selected File item to complete the operation. Save to Selected File DPO4000 Series User Manual 181 Save and Recall Information Saving a Waveform to File. When you push the To File side-bezel menu button, the oscilloscope changes the side- menu contents. The following table describes these side-bezel menu items for saving data to a mass storage file. Side-bezel menu button Description Internal File Format (.ISF) Sets the oscilloscope to save waveform data in internal waveform save file (.isf) format. This format is the fastest to write and creates the smallest-sized file. Use this format if you intend to recall a waveform to reference memory for viewing or measuring. Spreadsheet File Format (.CSV) Sets the oscilloscope to save waveform data as a comma-separated data file compatible with popular spreadsheet programs. This file cannot be recalled to reference memory. Saving a Waveform to Reference Memory. To save a waveform to nonvolatile memory inside the oscilloscope, first select the waveform that you want to save. Push the Save Waveform screen button. Then select one of the reference waveform locations. Four-channel models have four reference locations. Two-channel models have two reference locations. Saved waveforms contain only the most current acquisition. Gray-scale information, if any, is not saved. Displaying a Reference Waveform. To display a waveform stored in nonvolatile memory: 1. Push Ref R. 182 DPO4000 Series User Manual Save and Recall Information 2. Push R1, R2, R3, or R4. R 1 (On) R 2 (Off) R 3 (Off) R 4 (Off) Removing a Reference Waveform from the Display. To remove a reference waveform from the display: 1. Push Ref R. 2. Push the R1, R2, R3, or R4 screen button to select a reference waveform. R 1 (On) R 2 (Off) R 3 (Off) R 4 (Off) 3. Push the front-panel Ref or the appropriate lower-bezel R button again to remove the reference waveform from the display. The reference waveform is still in nonvolatile memory and can be displayed again. DPO4000 Series User Manual 183 Save and Recall Information Saving and Recalling Setups Setup information includes acquisition information, such as vertical, horizontal, trigger, cursor, and measurement information. It does not include communications information, such as GPIB addresses. To save the setup information: 1. Push Save / Recall Menu. 2. Push Save Setup or Recall Setup from the lower-bezel menu. Save Screen Image Save Waveform Save Setup Recall Waveform Recall Setup Assign Save to Setup File Utilities 184 DPO4000 Series User Manual Save and Recall Information Save Setup To File To Setup 1 3. From the resulting side-bezel menu, select the location to save the setup to or to recall it from. To save setup information to one of the ten internal setup memories in the oscilloscope, push the appropriate side-bezel button. To save setup information to a CompactFlash or USB file, push the To File button. To Setup 2 To Setup 3 – more – DPO4000 Series User Manual 185 Save and Recall Information 4. If you are saving information to a CompactFlash or USB memory device, turn multipurpose knob a to scroll through the file structure. D: is the CompactFlash drive. E: is the USB drive plugged into the USB port on the front of the oscilloscope. F: and G: are the USB drives plugged into the USB ports on the rear of the oscilloscope. Push Select to open or close file folders. Push the Menu Off button to cancel the save operation, or push a side-bezel menu Save to Selected File item to complete the operation. 186 DPO4000 Series User Manual Save and Recall Information Save 1 to Selected File Quick Tips Recalling the Default Setup. Push the front-panel Default Setup button to initialize the oscilloscope to a known setup. (See page 73, Using the Default Setup.) Saving with One Button Push After you have defined the save/recall parameters with the Save/Recall Menu button and menu, you can make saves to files with a single push of the Save button. For example, if you have defined the save operation to save waveform data to a USB drive, then each push of the Save button will save current waveform data to the defined USB drive. 1. To define the Save button behavior, push Save/Recall Menu. DPO4000 Series User Manual 187 Save and Recall Information 2. Push Assign Save button. Save Screen Image Save Waveform Save Setup Recall Waveform Recall Setup Assign Save to Setup File Utilities 3. Push the action to assign to the Save button. Assign Save to Screen Image Waveform Setup 4. From now on, when you push Save the button will perform the action that you just specified rather than having to navigate menus each time. 188 DPO4000 Series User Manual Save and Recall Information Printing a Hard Copy To print an image of what appears on the oscilloscope screen, do the following procedure. Connect a Printer to Your Oscilloscope Connect your printer to a USB port on the rear or front panel of the oscilloscope. Alternatively, you can print to networked printers through the Ethernet port. Set Up Print Parameters To set up the oscilloscope to print hard copies: 1. Push Utility. 2. Push System as many times as needed to select Print Setup from the resulting pop-up menu. Print Setup DPO4000 Series User Manual 189 Save and Recall Information System Print Setup Select Printer N/A Orientation Landscape Ink Saver On 3. Push Select Printer if you are changing the default printer. Turn multipurpose knob a to scroll through the list of available printers. Push Select to choose the desired printer. To add a USB printer to the list, plug the printer into the USB slot. The oscilloscope will automatically recognize it. To add an Ethernet printer to the list, use the instructions in the section titled Printing Over Ethernet. 190 DPO4000 Series User Manual Save and Recall Information 4. Select the image orientation (portrait or landscape). Landscape Portrait 5. Choose Ink Saver On or Off. The On selection will print out a copy with a clear (white) background. Ink Saver on Ink Saver off DPO4000 Series User Manual 191 Save and Recall Information Printing Over Ethernet To set up the oscilloscope to print over Ethernet: 1. Connect an Ethernet cable to the rear-panel Ethernet port. 2. Push Utility. 192 DPO4000 Series User Manual Save and Recall Information 3. Push System repeatedly until you select Print Setup. Print Setup 4. Push Select Printer. System Print Setup Select Printer (N/A) Orientation Landscape Ink Saver Off Select Printer 5. Push Add Network Printer. Add Network Printer Rename Printer DPO4000 Series User Manual 193 Save and Recall Information 6. Turn multipurpose knob a to scroll through the list of letters, numbers, and other characters to find the first character in the printer name that you want to enter. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 0123456789_=+-!@#$%^&*()[]{}<>/~’”\|:,.? 7. Push Select or Enter Character to let the oscilloscope know that you have picked the proper character to use. You can use the lower-bezel buttons to edit the name, as needed. Enter Character Back Space Delete Clear 8. Continue scrolling and pushing Select until you have entered all the desired characters. 194 DPO4000 Series User Manual Save and Recall Information 9. Push the down arrow key to move the character cursor down a row to the Server Name field. 10. Turn multipurpose knob a and push Select or Enter Character as often as needed to enter the name. 11. If desired, push the down arrow key to move the character cursor down a row to the Server IP Address: field. 12. Turn multipurpose knob a and push Select or Enter Character as often as needed to enter the name. Add Printer 13. When done, push OK Accept. OK Accept DPO4000 Series User Manual 195 Save and Recall Information NOTE. If you have multiple printers connected to the oscilloscope at the same time, the oscilloscope will print to the printer listed in the Utility > System > Print Setup > Select Printer menu item. Print to a Printer Once you have connected a printer to your oscilloscope and set up print parameters, you can print current screen images with a single push of a button: 1. Push the printer icon button in the lower left corner of the front panel. Erasing DPO4000 Memory You can erase all setup and waveform information saved in the nonvolatile memory with the TekSecure function. If you have acquired confidential data on your oscilloscope, you may want to execute the TekSecure function before you return the oscilloscope to general use. The TekSecure function: Replaces all waveforms in all reference memories with null values 196 DPO4000 Series User Manual Save and Recall Information Replaces the current front-panel setup and all stored setups with the default setup Displays a confirmation or warning message, depending on whether the verification is successful or unsuccessful To use TekSecure: 1. Push Utility. 2. Push System repeatedly until you select Config. Config 3. Push TekSecure. System Config Language English Set Date & Time TekSecure Erase Memory Version v1.00 DPO4000 Series User Manual 197 Save and Recall Information 4. Push OK Erase Setup and Ref Memory from the side-bezel menu. OK Erase Setup and Ref Memory To abort the procedure, push Menu Off. 198 DPO4000 Series User Manual Save and Recall Information 5. Power off the oscilloscope, and then power it back on to complete the process. DPO4000 Series User Manual 199 Use Application Modules Use Application Modules Optional application module packages extend the capability of your oscilloscope. Install up to four application modules at one time. Application modules go into the two slots with windows in the upper right corner of the front panel. Two additional slots are directly behind the two that you can see. Refer to the DPO4000 Series Application Module Installation Instructions that came with your application module for instructions on installing and testing an application module. Some modules are described below. Additional packages may be available. Contact your Tektronix representative or visit our Web site at www.tektronix.com for more information. Also, refer to Contacting Tektronix at the beginning of the manual. The DPO4EMBD Serial Triggering and Analysis Module adds triggering on packet level information in serial buses used in embedded designs (I2C and SPI), as well as analytical tools to help you efficiently analyze your serial bus. These include digital views of the signal, bus views, packet decoding, search tools, and event tables with timestamp information. The DPO4AUTO Serial Triggering and Analysis Module adds triggering on packet level information in serial buses used in automotive designs (CAN), as well as analytical tools to help you efficiently analyze your serial bus. These include digital views of the signal, bus views, packet decoding, search tools, and event tables with timestamp information. 200 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples Application Examples This section contains ways to use your instrument in both common and advanced troubleshooting tasks. Taking Simple Measurements If you need to see a signal in a circuit, but you do not know the signal amplitude or frequency, connect the probe from channel 1 of the oscilloscope to the signal. Then display the signal and measure its frequency and peak-to-peak amplitude. DPO4000 Series User Manual 201 Application Examples Using Autoset To quickly display a signal: 1. Push Autoset. 202 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples The oscilloscope sets vertical, horizontal, and trigger controls automatically. You can manually adjust any of these controls if you need to optimize the display of the waveform. When you are using more than one channel, the autoset function sets the vertical controls for each channel and uses the lowest-numbered active channel to set the horizontal and trigger controls. Selecting Automatic Measurements The oscilloscope can take automatic measurements of most displayed signals. To measure signal frequency and peak-to-peak amplitude: 1. Push Measure. 2. Push Select Measurement. Select Measurement a 1 Remove Measurement Gating Off Statistics Off Reference Levels Indicators Configure Cursors DPO4000 Series User Manual 203 Application Examples 3. Turn multipurpose knob a to select the channel from which you want to measure. For example, select channel 1. This step is only needed if you are acquiring data on more than one channel. 4. Select the Frequency measurement from the side-bezel menu. Frequency 5. Push -more- until you can select the Pk-Pk measurement. -more- 6. Push Menu Off. 204 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples 7. Observe that the measurements appear on the screen and update as the signal changes. DPO4000 Series User Manual 205 Application Examples Measuring Two Signals In this example, you are testing a piece of equipment and need to measure the gain of its audio amplifier. You have an audio generator that can inject a test signal at the amplifier input. Connect two oscilloscope channels to the amplifier input and output as shown. Measure both signal levels and use these measurements to calculate the gain. 206 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples To display the signals connected to channels 1 and 2: 1. Push channel 1 and channel 2 to activate both channels. 2. Push Autoset. To select measurements for the two channels: 1. Push Measure to see the measurement menu. DPO4000 Series User Manual 207 Application Examples 2. Push Select Measurement. Select Measurement a 1 Remove Measurement Gating Off Statistics Off Reference Levels Indicators Configure Cursors 3. Turn multipurpose knob a to select channel 1. 4. Page through the measurement menus until you find Amplitude. Select Amplitude. Amplitude 208 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples 5. Turn multipurpose knob a to select channel 2. 6. Select Amplitude. Amplitude 7. Calculate the amplifier gain using the following equations: Gain = (output amplitude ÷ input amplitude) = (3.155 V ÷ 130.0 mV) = 24.27 Gain (dB) = 20 x log(24.27) = 27.7 dB DPO4000 Series User Manual 209 Application Examples Customizing Your Measurements In this example, you want to verify that the incoming signal to digital equipment meets its specifications. Specifically, the transition time from a low logic level (0.8 V) to a high logic level (2.0 V) must be 10 ns or less. To select the rise time measurement. 1. Push Measure. 210 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples 2. Push Select Measurement. Select Measurement a 1 Remove Measurement Gating Off Statistics Off Reference Levels Indicators Configure Cursors 3. Turn multipurpose knob a to select channel 1. This step is only needed if you are acquiring data on more channels than just channel 1. 4. Select the Rise Time measurement from the side-bezel menu. Rise Time DPO4000 Series User Manual 211 Application Examples 5. Press Reference Levels. Reference Levels 6. Push Set Levels in to select units. Set Levels in % units 7. Push High Ref and turn multipurpose knob a to enter 2.00 V. If needed, push Fine to change the sensitivity of the multipurpose knob. High Ref a 2.00 V Mid Ref 8. Push Low Ref and turn multipurpose knob a to enter 800 mV. If needed, push Fine to change the sensitivity of the multipurpose knob. Low Ref a 800 mV 212 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples Rise time is typically measured between the 10% and 90% amplitude levels of a signal. These are the default reference levels that the oscilloscope uses for rise time measurements, However, in this example, you need to measure the time that the signal takes to pass between the 0.8 V and 2.0 V levels. You can customize the rise time measurement to measure the signal transition time between any two reference levels. You can set each of these reference levels to a specific percent of the signal amplitude or to a specific level in vertical units (such as volts or amperes). Measuring Specific Events. Next you want to see the pulses in the incoming digital signal, but the pulse widths vary so it is hard to establish a stable trigger. To look at a snapshot of the digital signal, do this step: 1. Push Single to capture a single acquisition. Now you want to measure the width of each displayed pulse. You can use measurement gating to select a specific pulse to measure. To measure the second pulse: 1. Push Measure. DPO4000 Series User Manual 213 Application Examples 2. Push Select Measurement. Select measurement a 1 Remove Measurement Gating Statistics Reference Levels Indicators Configure Cursors 3. Turn multipurpose knob a to select channel 1. 4. Select Positive Pulse Width measurement. Positive Pulse Width 214 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples 5. Push Gating. Select Measurement Remove Measurement Gating Off Statistics Off Reference Levels Indicators Configure Cursors 6. Select Between Cursors from the side-bezel menu to choose measurement gating using cursors. Between Cursors 7. Place one cursor to the left and one cursor to the right of the second pulse. DPO4000 Series User Manual 215 Application Examples 8. View the resulting width measurement (160 ms) for the second pulse. 216 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples Analyzing Signal Detail In this example, you have a noisy signal displayed on the oscilloscope, and you need to know more about it. You suspect that the signal contains much more detail than you can currently see in the display. DPO4000 Series User Manual 217 Application Examples Looking at a Noisy Signal The signal appears noisy. You suspect that noise is causing problems in your circuit. To better analyze the noise: 1. Push Acquire. 2. Push Mode on the lower-bezel menu. Mode Record Length 10k Reset Horizontal Position Waveform Display 218 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples 3. Push Peak Detect on the side-bezel menu. Sample Peak Detect Hi Res Envelope Average 4. Push Intensity and turn multipurpose knob a to see the noise more easily. DPO4000 Series User Manual 219 Application Examples 5. View the results on the display. Peak detect emphasizes noise spikes and glitches in your signal as narrow as 1 ns, even when the time base is set to a slow setting. 220 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples Peak-detect and the other acquisition modes are explained earlier in this manual. (See page 75, Acquisition Concepts.) Separating the Signal from Noise Now you want to analyze the signal shape and ignore the noise. To reduce random noise in the oscilloscope display: 1. Push Acquire. 2. Push Mode. Mode Record Length Reset Horizontal Position Waveform Display 3. Push Average on the side-bezel menu. Average DPO4000 Series User Manual 221 Application Examples Averaging reduces random noise and makes it easier to see detail in a signal. In the example to the right, a ring shows on the rising and falling edges of the signal when the noise is removed. 222 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples Taking Cursor Measurements You can use the cursors to take quick measurements on a waveform. To measure the ring frequency at the rising edge of the signal: 1. Push channel 1 to select the channel 1 signal. 2. Push Measure. 3. Push Configure Cursors. Select Measurement Remove Measurement Gating Statistics Reference Levels Indicators Configure Cursors DPO4000 Series User Manual 223 Application Examples 4. Push Vertical Bar Units repeatedly to select Hz (1/s). Vertical Bar Units Hz (1/s) 5. Push Cursors repeatedly until the two vertical bar cursors appear on the selected waveform. 6. Place one cursor on the first peak of the ring using multipurpose knob a. 7. If the cursor readout says that the cursors are linked, push Select to unlink them. 224 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples 8. Place the other cursor on the next peak of the ring using multipurpose knob b. 9. The cursor Δ readout shows the measured ring frequency is 227 kHz. DPO4000 Series User Manual 225 Application Examples Triggering on a Video Signal The DPO4000 Series of oscilloscopes supports triggering on NTSC, SECAM, and PAL signals. In this example, you are testing the video circuit in a piece of medical equipment and need to display the video output signal. The video output is an NTSC standard signal. Use the video signal to obtain a stable display. To trigger on the video fields: 1. Push Trigger Menu. 226 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples 2. Push Type repeatedly to select Video. Video 3. Push Standard repeatedly to select 525/NTSC. Type Video Standard 525/NTSC Source 1 Trigger on All Lines Mode Auto & Holdoff 4. Push Trigger On. 5. Select Odd Fields. Odd Fields If the signal had been noninterlaced, you could choose to trigger on All Fields. 6. Turn the Horizontal Scale knob to see a complete field across the screen. DPO4000 Series User Manual 227 Application Examples 7. View results. Triggering on Lines Triggering on Lines. To look at the video lines in the field: 1. Push Trigger Menu. 228 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples 2. Push Type repeatedly to select Video. Video Type Video Standard 525/NTSC Source 1 Trigger On All Lines Mode Auto & Holdoff 3. Push Trigger On. 4. Select All Lines. All Lines 5. Adjust Horizontal Scale to see a complete video line across the screen. DPO4000 Series User Manual 229 Application Examples 6. Observe the results. Capturing a Single-Shot Signal In this example, the reliability of a reed relay in a piece of equipment has been poor, and you need to investigate the problem. You suspect that the relay contacts arc when the relay opens. The fastest you can open and close the relay is about once per minute, so you need to capture the voltage across the relay as a single-shot acquisition. To set up for a single-shot acquisition: 1. Adjust the Vertical Scale and Horizontal Scale to appropriate ranges for the signal you expect to see. 230 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples 2. Push Acquire. 3. Push Mode. 4. Select Sample. 5. Push Trigger Menu. 6. Push Slope and . 7. Turn the Trigger Level knob to adjust the trigger level to a voltage midway between the open and closed voltages of the replay. DPO4000 Series User Manual 231 Application Examples 8. Push Single (single sequence). When the relay opens, the oscilloscope triggers and captures the event. The Single sequence button disables auto triggering so that only a valid triggered signal is acquired. 232 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples Optimizing the Acquisition The initial acquisition shows the relay contact beginning to open at the trigger point. This is followed by large spikes that indicate contact bounce and inductance in the circuit. The inductance can cause contact arcing and premature relay failure. Before you take the next acquisition, you can adjust the vertical and horizontal controls to give you a preview of how the next acquisition might appear. As you adjust these controls, the current acquisition is repositioned, expanded, or compressed. This preview is useful to optimize the settings before the next single-shot event is captured. When the next acquisition is captured with the new vertical and horizontal settings, you can see more detail about the relay contact opening. You can now see that the contact bounces several times as it opens. DPO4000 Series User Manual 233 Application Examples Using the Horizontal Zoom Function To take a close look at a particular point on the acquired waveform, use the horizontal zoom function. To look closely at the point where the relay contact first begins to open: 1. Turn the Zoom knob. 2. Turn the Pan knob to place the center of the zoom box close to where the relay contact begins to open. 3. Turn the Zoom knob to magnify the waveform in the zoom window. 234 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples The ragged waveform and the inductive load in the circuit suggest that the relay contact may be arcing as it opens. The zoom function works equally well when the acquisition is running or is stopped. Horizontal position and scale changes affect only the display, not the next acquisition. Correlating Data With a TLA5000 Logic Analyzer To troubleshoot designs with fast clock edges and data rates, it helps to view analog characteristics of digital signals in relation to complex digital events in the circuit. You can do that with iView, which lets you transfer analog waveforms from the oscilloscope to the logic analyzer display. You can then view time-correlated analog and digital signals side-by-side and use this to pinpoint sources of glitches and other problems. DPO4000 Series User Manual 235 Application Examples The iView External Oscilloscope Cable allows you to connect your logic analyzer to a Tektronix oscilloscope. This enables communication between the two instruments. The Add External Oscilloscope wizard, which is available from the TLA application System menu, guides you through the process of connecting the iView cable between your logic analyzer and oscilloscope. The TLA also provides a setup window to assist you in verifying, changing, and testing the oscilloscope settings. Before acquiring and displaying a waveform you must establish a connection between your Tektronix logic analyzer and oscilloscope using the Add External Oscilloscope wizard. To do this: 1. Select Add iView External Oscilloscope ... from the logic analyzer System menu. 236 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples 2. Select your model of oscilloscope. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions, and then click Next. 4. See your Tektronix Logic Analyzer documentation for more information on correlating data between a DPO4000 Series Oscilloscope and a Tektronix Logic Analyzer. DPO4000 Series User Manual 237 Application Examples Tracking Down Bus Anomalies In this example, you are testing your new I2C circuit. Something is not working. You tell the master IC to send a message to the slave IC. Then you expect to receive data back and an LED to light. The light never goes on. Where in the ten or so commands that were sent out did the problem occur? Once you locate the problem location, how do you determine what went wrong? You can use your DPO4000 Series oscilloscope, with its serial triggering and long-record length management features, to track down the problem in both the physical layer and in the protocol layer of the bus. Basic strategy First, you will display and acquire the bus signal by setting up the bus parameters and trigger. Then, you will search through each packet with the search/mark functions. NOTE. Triggering on bus signals requires use of the DPO4EMBD or the DPO4AUTO Serial Triggering and Analysis Module. 238 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples 1. Connect the channel 1 probe to the clock line. 2. Connect the channel 2 probe to the data line. 3. Push Autoset. DPO4000 Series User Manual 239 Application Examples 4. Push the B1 button and enter the parameters of your I2C bus in the resulting screen menus. 5. Push Trigger Menu. 6. Push Type to select Bus. Enter trigger parameters in the resulting screen menus. Type Bus Source Bus B1 (I2C) Trigger On Address Address 07F Direction Read Mode Auto & Holdoff 240 DPO4000 Series User Manual Application Examples 7. Analyze the physical layer. For example, you can use the cursors for manual measurements. (See page 144, Taking Manual Measurements with Cursors.) You can also use the automated measurements. (See page 129, Taking Automatic Measurements.) 8. Push Search. Set Search Marks to On. Enter a search type, source, and other parameters as relevant on the lower-bezel menu and associated side-bezel menus. (See page 163, Managing Long Record Length Waveforms.) 9. Jump ahead to the next search point by pushing the right arrow key. Push it again and again until you see all the events. Jump back with the left arrow key. Do you have all the packets that you expected to have? If not, at least you have narrowed your search down to the last packet sent. DPO4000 Series User Manual 241 Application Examples 10. Analyze the decoded packets in the protocol layer. Did you send the data bytes in the correct order? Did you use the correct address? 242 DPO4000 Series User Manual Index Index Symbols and Numbers 50 Ω protection, 128 A Accessories, 1 Acquire button, 49, 80, 112, 218, 221 Acquisition input channels and digitizers, 75 modes defined, 78 readout, 60 sampling, 75 Adapter TEK-USB-488, 4 TPA-BNC, 4, 10 Adding waveform, 112 Advanced math, 157 Altitude DPO4000, 7 P6139A, 8 Analysis and Connectivity, xii Application module DPO4AUTO, 84 DPO4EMBD, 84 Application Module, xiii, 19 Applications modules, 200 Attenuation, 127 Auto trigger mode, 92 Autoset, 74, 202 Autoset button, 17, 49, 56, 71, 74, 202, 207 Autoset undo, 74 Auxiliary readout, 64 Average acquisition mode, 79 BB Trigger, 109 B1 / B2 button, 51, 84, 85, 102 Backlight intensity, 119 Bandwidth, x Before Installation, 1 Blackman-Harris FFT window, 157 BNC interface, 10 Bus button, 84, 85, 102 menu, 51, 85 Bus trigger, defined, 102 Buses, 84, 102 Button Acquire, 49, 80, 112, 218, 221 Autoset, 17, 49, 56, 71, 74, 202, 207 B1 / B2, 51, 84, 85, 102 bus, 84, 85, 102 Channel, 50 Cursors, 52, 144, 224 Default Setup, 50, 58, 73 Fine, 48, 52, 53, 54, 55, 57 Force Trig, 56, 93 hard copy, 57, 196 Intensity, 115 M, 51, 150, 153 Math, 51, 150, 153 Measure, 49, 129, 139, 140, 203, 207, 210, 213 Menu Off, 58, 204 Next, 55 play-pause, 167 Play-pause, 54 Previous, 54 printer icon, 57, 196 Ref, 51, 160, 182 DPO4000 Series User Manual 243 Index Run/Stop, 56, 83, 111 Save / Recall, 50, 58, 174 Search, 49, 170 Select, 53, 224 Set / Clear Mark, 55, 169 Set to 50%, 56, 97 Single, 56, 111, 213, 232 Test, 49 Trigger, 49 Trigger level, 56 Trigger menu, 226 Trigger Menu, 98 Utility, 20, 23, 26, 50, 117, 118, 189 Vertical, 50 Zoom, 54 C Calibration, 25, 27 Calibration certificate, 2 CAN, 51, 84, 102 Channel button, 50 Channel readout, 64 Clearance, DPO4000, 6 Communications, 35, 40 CompactFlash, x, 2, 5, 50, 58, 174 Compensate probe, 17 Compensate signal path, 25 Confidential data, 196 Connectivity, 2, 35, 40 Connector, side-panel, 67 Connectors front-panel, 66 rear-panel, 68 Controls, 45 Coupling, trigger, 94 Cover, front, 2 Cross Hair graticule style, 118 Cursor readout, 62, 149 Cursor, measurements, 144 Cursors, 144 button, 52, 144, 224 linking, 145 Cursors menu, 144 D Date and time, changing, 23 Default setup, 187 Default Setup, 73 button, 50, 58, 73 menu, 50 Undo, 73 Delayed trigger, 107 Depth, DPO4000, 6 Deskew, 127 Display persistence, 112 style, 112 Displaying, reference waveforms, 182 Documentation, xii DPO4AUTO, 84 DPO4EMBD, 84 Drivers, 35, 39 Dual waveform math, 150 Ee *Scope, 40 Edge trigger, defined, 99 Envelope acquisition mode, 79 Erase setup and ref memory, 196 Ethernet, x, 37, 40, 41 port, 68 printing, 192 Event Table, 88, 89 Excel, 34 Expansion point icon, 61 244 DPO4000 Series User Manual Index FF actory calibration, 27 FFT Blackman-Harris, 157 controls, 153 Hamming, 156 Hanning, 157 Rectangular, 156 File format, 175 Internal File Format (ISF), 182 Spreadsheet file format (.CSV), 182 File system, 174, 177, 180 Fine, 53 Fine button, 48, 52, 54, 55, 57 Firmware upgrade, 28 Force Trig button, 56, 93 Frame graticule style, 118 Frequency, Input power DPO4000, 6 Front cover, 2 Front panel, 45 Front-panel connectors, 66 Front-panel overlay, 22 Full graticule style, 118 Functional check, 15 G Gating, 137 GPIB, 36, 38, 68 GPIB address, 38 Graticule Cross Hair, 118 Frame, 118 Full, 118 Grid, 118 intensity, 115 styles, 117 Grid graticule style, 118 Ground, 11 Ground lead, 19 Ground strap, 67 H Hamming FFT window, 156 Hanning FFT window, 157 Hard copy, 57, 189 Height, DPO4000, 6 Hi Res acquisition mode, 79 Holdoff, trigger, 93 Horizontal delay, 94 Horizontal position, 55, 94, 95, 120, 156, 234, 235 and math waveforms, 152 defined, 72 Horizontal position/scale readout, 64 Horizontal scale, 55, 120, 156, 227, 229, 230, 234 and math waveforms, 152 defined, 72 How to erase memory, 196 print a hard copy, 189 recall setups, 184 recall waveforms, 174 save screen images, 174 save setups, 184 save waveforms, 174 Humidity DPO4000, 7 P6139A, 9 I I2C, 51, 84, 102 DPO4000 Series User Manual 245 Index Icon Expansion point, 61 Trigger level, 63 Trigger position, 61 Image orientation, 175, 191 Impedance, 123 Indicator, waveform baseline, 65 Infinite persistence, 115 Ink Saver, 175, 191 Inner knob, 54, 152 Installing, application modules, xiii Intensity button, 115 Internal File Format, 182 K Knob inner, 54, 152 Multipurpose, 24, 48, 53, 54, 80, 86, 177, 224, 225 outer, 54 pan, 54, 166, 169 Trigger level, 97 Vertical position, 57, 72 Vertical scale, 57, 72 zoom, 54, 152, 164 LL abView, 34 Landscape, 175, 191 Language change, 20 overlay, 22 Level, trigger, 96 Logic trigger, defined, 100 Long record length, 238 Long record length management, 163 MM button, 51, 150, 153 Main trigger, 107 Mark, 169 Math Advanced, 157 button, 51, 150, 153 Dual waveform, 150 FFT, 153 menu, 51 waveforms, 150 Measure button, 49, 129, 139, 140, 203, 207, 210, 213 Measurement menu, 49 Measurements automatic, 129 cursor, 144 defined, 131 reference levels, 142 snapshot, 140 statistics, 139 Memory, erasure of, 196 Menu Bus, 51, 85 Cursors, 144 Default Setup, 50 Math, 51 Measurement, 49 Reference, 51, 160, 161 Save / Recall, 50, 58, 174 Trigger, 49, 98, 108, 226 Utility, 20, 23, 50, 57, 117, 189 Vertical, 50, 122 Menu buttons, 49 Menu Off button, 58, 204 Menus, 45 Mode, roll, 83 Multipurpose knob, 48, 53, 54, 80, 86, 177, 224, 225 246 DPO4000 Series User Manual Index N Network printing, 192 Next button, 55 Normal trigger mode, 92 O Offset and position, 128 OpenChoice, 2, 35 Operating specifications, 6 Orientation of the image, 175, 191 Outer knob, 54 Overlay, 22 P Pan, 164, 166 knob, 54, 166, 169 Pause, 166 Peak detect acquisition mode, 79 Performance verification, xii Persistence display, 112 infinite, 115 variable, 115 Play, 166 Play-pause button, 54, 167 Play-pause mode, 167 Pollution Degree DPO4000, 7 P6139A, 9 Portrait, 175, 191 Position Horizontal, 94, 95, 120, 156, 234, 235 Vertical, 121 Position and offset, 128 Posttrigger, 91, 96 Power cord, 3 input, 69 off, 14 removing, 14 supply, 11 switch, 57 Power consumption, DPO4000, 6 Predefined math expressions, 150 Pretrigger, 91, 96 Previous button, 54 Print, 57, 189 Printing a hard copy, 189 Printing, Ethernet, 192 Probe Comp, 16 Probe compensation, 17 Probes BNC, 10 connecting, 10 ground lead, 19 TEK-USB-488 Adapter, 4 TekVPI, 10 TPA-BNC Adapter, 4, 10 Programmer Commands, xii Pulse/Width trigger, defined, 100 R Rackmount, 4 Readout Acquisition, 60 Auxiliary, 64 Channel, 64 Cursor, 62, 149 Horizontal position/scale, 64 Record length/sampling rate, 63 Trigger, 63, 107 Trigger status, 62 Rear-panel connectors, 68 Recalling setups, 184 waveforms, 174 Record length, x DPO4000 Series User Manual 247 Index Record length/sampling rate readout, 63 Rectangular FFT window, 156 Ref button, 51, 160 Ref R, 182 Reference button, 182 Reference levels, 142 Reference menu, 51, 160, 161 Reference waveforms, 160 displaying, 182 removing, 161, 183 saving, 182 saving 10M waveforms, 162 Related documents, xii Removing reference waveforms, 183 Removing reference waveforms, 161 Removing waveform, 112 Rise/Fall trigger, defined, 101 Roll mode, 83 Run/Stop button, 56, 83, 111 Runt trigger, defined, 100 SS afety Summary, v Sample acquisition mode, 78 Sample rates, x Sampling process, defined, 75 Sampling, real-time, 76 Save / Recall menu, 50, 58, 174 Save / Recall Menu button, 50 Save / Recall Save button, 58, 174 Saving reference waveforms, 182 screen images, 174 waveforms, 174 Saving and recalling Information, 174 Saving setups, 184 Scale Horizontal, 55, 120, 156, 227, 229, 230, 234 Vertical, 121, 230 Search, 169 Search / Mark, 238 Search button, 49, 170 Securing DPO4000 memory, 196 Select button, 53, 224 Sequential triggering, 107 Serial, 84, 102, 238 Service information, xiii Set / Clear Mark button, 55, 169 Set to 50% button, 56, 97 Setup default, 58, 187 Default, 73 Setup and Hold trigger, defined, 101 Side panel connector, 67 Signal path compensation, 25 Single button, 56, 111, 213, 232 Single sequence, 83, 111 Slope, trigger, 96 Snapshot, 140 Software drivers, 35, 39 Software, optional, 200 SPC, 25 Specifications, xii operating, 6 power supply, 11 SPI, 51, 84, 102 Spreadsheet file format (.CSV), 182 Start an acquisition, 111 Statistics, 139 Stop an acquisition, 111 Switch, power, 57 T Table, Event, 88, 89 TDSPCS1, 35 248 DPO4000 Series User Manual Index TEK-USB-488 Adapter, 36, 38, 68 TEK-USB–488 Adapter, 4 TekSecure, 196 TekVPI, 10 Temperature DPO4000, 6 P6139A, 8 Termination, 123 Test button, 49 TPA-BNC Adapter, 4, 10 Transit case, 4 Transition trigger, defined, 101 Trigger concepts, 91 coupling, 94 delayed, 107 event, defined, 91 forcing, 92 holdoff, 93 level, 96 modes, 92, 98 posttrigger, 91, 96 pretrigger, 91, 96 readout, 107 sequential, 107 Serial, 84, 102, 238 slope, 96 Trigger level button, 56 Icon, 63 knob, 97 Trigger menu, 49, 98, 108, 226 Trigger menu button, 226 Trigger Menu button, 98 Trigger modes Auto, 92 Normal, 92 Trigger position icon, 61 Trigger readout, 63 Trigger status readout, 62 Trigger types, defined, 99 U Undo Autoset, 74 Default Setup, 73 Upgrading firmware, 28 USB, x, 5, 36, 39, 50, 58, 69, 174, 189 port, 68 USBTMC, 68 User marks, 169 Utility button, 20, 23, 26, 50, 117, 118, 189 Utility menu, 20, 23, 50, 57, 117 V Variable persistence, 115 Versatile Probe Interface, 10 Vertical button, 50 menu, 50, 122 Position, 121 position and autoset, 75 position and offset, 128 Position knob, 57, 72 Scale, 121, 230 Scale knob, 57, 72 Vibration, DPO4000, 7 Video lines, 228 port, 68 Video trigger, defined, 101 View waveform record, 61 Voltage, Input DPO4000, 6 P6139A, 8 DPO4000 Series User Manual 249 Index Voltage, Output, P6139A, 8 W Waveform adding, 112 display style, 112 intensity, 115 pan, 164, 166 pause, 166 play, 166 play-pause, 167 record defined, 77 removing, 112 search and mark, 169 user marks, 169 zoom, 164 Waveform baseline indicator, 65 Waveform record, 77 Waveform record view, 61 Weight DPO4000, 6 Width DPO4000, 6 ZZ oom, 164 button, 54 graticule size, 166 Horizontal, 234 knob, 54, 164 PBSS9110Z 100 V, 1 A PNP low VCEsat (BISS) transistor Rev. 03 — 11 December 2009 Product data sheet Table 1. Quick reference data Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit VCEO collector-emitter voltage open base - - −100 V IC collector current - - −1 A ICM peak collector current single pulse; tp ≤ 1 ms - - −3 A RCEsat collector-emitter saturation resistance IC = −1 A; IB = −100 mA [1] - 170 320 mΩ PBSS9110Z_3 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 03 — 11 December 2009 2 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PBSS9110Z 100 V, 1 A PNP low VCEsat (BISS) transistor 2. Pinning information 3. Ordering information 4. Marking 5. Limiting values Table 2. Pinning Pin Description Simplified outline Symbol 1 base 2 collector 3 emitter 4 collector 1 2 3 4 sym028 2, 4 3 1 Table 3. Ordering information Type number Package Name Description Version PBSS9110Z SC-73 plastic surface-mounted package with increased heat sink; 4 leads SOT223 Table 4. Marking codes Type number Marking code PBSS9110Z PB9110 Table 5. Limiting values In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134). Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit VCBO collector-base voltage open emitter - −120 V VCEO collector-emitter voltage open base - −100 V VEBO emitter-base voltage open collector - −5 V IC collector current - −1 A ICM peak collector current single pulse; tp ≤ 1 ms - −3 A IB base current - −0.3 A Ptot total power dissipation Tamb ≤ 25 °C [1] - 0.65 W [2] - 1 W [3] - 1.4 W PBSS9110Z_3 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 03 — 11 December 2009 3 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PBSS9110Z 100 V, 1 A PNP low VCEsat (BISS) transistor [1] Device mounted on an FR4 PCB, single-sided copper, tin-plated and standard footprint. [2] Device mounted on an FR4 PCB, single-sided copper, tin-plated, mounting pad for collector 1cm2. [3] Device mounted on an FR4 PCB, single-sided copper, tin-plated, mounting pad for collector 6cm2. 6. Thermal characteristics [1] Device mounted on an FR4 PCB, single-sided copper, tin-plated and standard footprint. [2] Device mounted on an FR4 PCB, single-sided copper, tin-plated, mounting pad for collector 1cm2. [3] Device mounted on an FR4 PCB, single-sided copper, tin-plated, mounting pad for collector 6cm2. Tj junction temperature - 150 °C Tamb ambient temperature −65 +150 °C Tstg storage temperature −65 +150 °C (1) FR4 PCB, mounting pad for collector 6cm2 (2) FR4 PCB, mounting pad for collector 1cm2 (3) FR4 PCB, standard footprint Fig 1. Power derating curves Table 5. Limiting values …continued In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134). Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit Tamb (°C) 0 40 80 120 160 001aaa508 0.8 0.4 1.2 1.6 Ptot (W) 0 (1) (2) (3) Table 6. Thermal characteristics Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Rth(j-a) thermal resistance from junction to ambient in free air [1]- - 192 K/W [2]- - 125 K/W [3]- - 89 K/W Rth(j-sp) thermal resistance from junction to solder point - - 17 K/W PBSS9110Z_3 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 03 — 11 December 2009 4 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PBSS9110Z 100 V, 1 A PNP low VCEsat (BISS) transistor FR4 PCB, standard footprint Fig 2. Transient thermal impedance from junction to ambient as a function of pulse duration; typical values FR4 PCB, mounting pad for collector 1cm2 Fig 3. Transient thermal impedance from junction to ambient as a function of pulse duration; typical values 006aaa819 10 1 102 103 Zth(j-a) (K/W) 10−1 10−5 10−4 10−2 10−1 10 102 tp (s) 10−3 1 103 duty cycle = 1 0.75 0.5 0.33 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.01 0 006aaa820 10 1 102 103 Zth(j-a) (K/W) 10−1 10−5 10−4 10−2 10−1 10 102 tp (s) 10−3 1 103 duty cycle = 0.75 0.5 0.33 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.01 0 1 PBSS9110Z_3 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 03 — 11 December 2009 5 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PBSS9110Z 100 V, 1 A PNP low VCEsat (BISS) transistor FR4 PCB, mounting pad for collector 6cm2 Fig 4. Transient thermal impedance from junction to ambient as a function of pulse duration; typical values 006aaa821 10 1 102 103 Zth(j-a) (K/W) 10−1 10−5 10−4 10−2 10−1 10 102 tp (s) 10−3 1 103 duty cycle = 1 0.75 0.5 0.33 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.01 0 PBSS9110Z_3 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 03 — 11 December 2009 6 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PBSS9110Z 100 V, 1 A PNP low VCEsat (BISS) transistor 7. Characteristics [1] Pulse test: tp ≤ 300 μs; δ ≤ 0.02. Table 7. Characteristics Tamb = 25°C unless otherwise specified. Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit ICBO collector-base cut-off current VCB = −80 V; IE = 0 A - - −100 nA VCB = −80 V; IE = 0 A; Tj = 150 °C - - −50 μA ICES collector-emitter cut-off current VCE = −80 V; VBE = 0 V - - −100 nA IEBO emitter-base cut-off current VEB = −4 V; IC = 0 A - - −100 nA hFE DC current gain VCE = −5 V; IC = −1 mA 150 - - VCE = −5 V; IC = −250 mA 150 - - VCE = −5 V; IC = −0.5 A [1] 150 - 450 VCE = −5 V; IC = −1 A [1] 125 - - VCEsat collector-emitter saturation voltage IC = −250 mA; IB = −25 mA - - −120 mV IC = −500 mA; IB = −50 mA [1]- - −180 mV IC = −1 A; IB = −100 mA [1]- - −320 mV RCEsat collector-emitter saturation resistance IC = −1 A; IB = −100 mA [1] - 170 320 mΩ VBEsat base-emitter saturation voltage IC = −1 A; IB = −100 mA [1]- - −1.1 V VBEon base-emitter turn-on voltage VCE = −5 V; IC = −1 A [1]- - −1.0 V td delay time VCC = −10 V; IC = −0.5 A; IBon = −0.025 A; IBoff = 0.025 A - 20 - ns tr rise time - 60 - ns ton turn-on time - 80 - ns ts storage time - 290 - ns tf fall time - 120 - ns toff turn-off time - 410 - ns fT transition frequency VCE = −10 V; IC = −50 mA; f = 100 MHz 100 - - MHz Cc collector capacitance VCB = −10 V; IE = ie = 0 A; f = 1 MHz - - 17 pF PBSS9110Z_3 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 03 — 11 December 2009 7 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PBSS9110Z 100 V, 1 A PNP low VCEsat (BISS) transistor VCE = −10 V (1) Tamb = 100 °C (2) Tamb = 25 °C (3) Tamb = −55 °C Tamb = 25 °C Fig 5. DC current gain as a function of collector current; typical values Fig 6. Collector current as a function of collector-emitter voltage; typical values VCE = −10 V (1) Tamb = −55 °C (2) Tamb = 25 °C (3) Tamb = 100 °C IC/IB = 10 (1) Tamb = −55 °C (2) Tamb = 25 °C (3) Tamb = 100 °C Fig 7. Base-emitter voltage as a function of collector current; typical values Fig 8. Base-emitter saturation voltage as a function of collector current; typical values 001aaa376 200 400 600 hFE 0 IC (mA) −10−1 −1 −10 −102 −103 −104 (1) (2) (3) VCE (V) 0 −1 −2 −3 −4 −5 001aaa384 −0.8 −1.2 −0.4 −1.6 −2 IC (A) 0 IB (mA) = −45 −40.5 −36 −31.5 −27 −22.5 −18 −13.5 −9 −4.5 001aaa377 −0.4 −0.8 −1.2 VBE (V) 0 IC (mA) −10−1 −1 −10 −102 −103 −104 (1) (2) (3) 001aaa381 IC (mA) −10−1 −1 −10 −102 −103 −104 −1 −10 VBEsat (V) −10−1 (1) (2) (3) PBSS9110Z_3 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 03 — 11 December 2009 8 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PBSS9110Z 100 V, 1 A PNP low VCEsat (BISS) transistor IC/IB = 10 (1) Tamb = 100 °C (2) Tamb = 25 °C (3) Tamb = −55 °C Tamb = 25 °C (1) IC/IB = 50 (2) IC/IB = 20 Fig 9. Collector-emitter saturation voltage as a function of collector current; typical values Fig 10. Collector-emitter saturation voltage as a function of collector current; typical values IC/IB = 10 (1) Tamb = −55 °C (2) Tamb = 25 °C (3) Tamb = 100 °C Tamb = 25 °C (1) IC/IB = 50 (2) IC/IB = 20 Fig 11. Collector-emitter saturation resistance as a function of collector current; typical values Fig 12. Collector-emitter saturation resistance as a function of collector current; typical values 001aaa378 IC (mA) −10−1 −1 −10 −102 −103 −104 −10−1 −1 VCEsat (V) −10−2 (1) (2) (3) 001aaa380 IC (mA) −10−1 −1 −10 −102 −103 −104 −10−1 −1 VCEsat (V) −10−2 (1) (2) 001aaa382 IC (mA) −10−1 −1 −10 −102 −103 −104 1 10 102 103 RCEsat (Ω) 10−1 (1) (2) (3) 001aaa383 IC (mA) −10−1 −1 −10 −102 −103 −104 1 10 102 103 RCEsat (Ω) 10−1 (1) (2) PBSS9110Z_3 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 03 — 11 December 2009 9 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PBSS9110Z 100 V, 1 A PNP low VCEsat (BISS) transistor 8. Test information Fig 13. BISS transistor switching time definition VCC = −10 V; IC = −0.5 A; IBon = −0.025 A; IBoff = 0.025 A Fig 14. Test circuit for switching times 006aaa266 −IBon (100 %) −IB input pulse (idealized waveform) −IBoff 90 % 10 % −IC (100 %) −IC td ton 90 % 10 % tr output pulse (idealized waveform) tf t ts toff RC R2 R1 DUT mgd624 Vo RB (probe) 450 Ω (probe) 450 Ω oscilloscope oscilloscope VBB VI VCC PBSS9110Z_3 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 03 — 11 December 2009 10 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PBSS9110Z 100 V, 1 A PNP low VCEsat (BISS) transistor 9. Package outline 10. Packing information [1] For further information and the availability of packing methods, see Section 14. Fig 15. Package outline SOT223 (SC-73) Dimensions in mm 04-11-10 6.7 6.3 3.1 2.9 1.8 1.5 7.3 6.7 3.7 3.3 1.1 0.7 1 2 3 4 4.6 2.3 0.8 0.6 0.32 0.22 Table 8. Packing methods The indicated -xxx are the last three digits of the 12NC ordering code.[1] Type number Package Description Packing quantity 1000 4000 PBSS9110Z SOT223 8 mm pitch, 12 mm tape and reel -115 -135 PBSS9110Z_3 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 03 — 11 December 2009 11 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PBSS9110Z 100 V, 1 A PNP low VCEsat (BISS) transistor 11. Soldering Fig 16. Reflow soldering footprint SOT223 (SC-73) Fig 17. Wave soldering footprint SOT223 (SC-73) sot223_fr 1.2 (4×) 1.2 (3×) 1.3 (4×) 1.3 (3×) 6.15 7 3.85 3.6 3.5 0.3 3.9 7.65 2.3 2.3 6.1 4 1 2 3 solder lands solder resist occupied area solder paste Dimensions in mm sot223_fw 1.9 6.7 8.9 8.7 1.9 (3×) 1.9 1.1 (2×) 6.2 2.7 2.7 2 4 1 3 solder lands solder resist occupied area preferred transport direction during soldering Dimensions in mm PBSS9110Z_3 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 03 — 11 December 2009 12 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PBSS9110Z 100 V, 1 A PNP low VCEsat (BISS) transistor 12. Revision history Table 9. Revision history Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice Supersedes PBSS9110Z_3 20091211 Product data sheet - PBSS9110Z_2 Modifications: • This data sheet was changed to reflect the new company name NXP Semiconductors, including new legal definitions and disclaimers. No changes were made to the technical content. • Figure 16 “Reflow soldering footprint SOT223 (SC-73)”: updated • Figure 17 “Wave soldering footprint SOT223 (SC-73)”: updated PBSS9110Z_2 20060724 Product data sheet - PBSS9110Z_1 PBSS9110Z_1 20040609 Product data sheet - - PBSS9110Z_3 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 03 — 11 December 2009 13 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PBSS9110Z 100 V, 1 A PNP low VCEsat (BISS) transistor 13. Legal information 13.1 Data sheet status [1] Please consult the most recently issued document before initiating or completing a design. [2] The term ‘short data sheet’ is explained in section “Definitions”. [3] The product status of device(s) described in this document may have changed since this document was published and may differ in case of multiple devices. The latest product status information is available on the Internet at URL http://www.nxp.com. 13.2 Definitions Draft — The document is a draft version only. The content is still under internal review and subject to formal approval, which may result in modifications or additions. NXP Semiconductors does not give any representations or warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of information included herein and shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such information. Short data sheet — A short data sheet is an extract from a full data sheet with the same product type number(s) and title. A short data sheet is intended for quick reference only and should not be relied upon to contain detailed and full information. For detailed and full information see the relevant full data sheet, which is available on request via the local NXP Semiconductors sales office. In case of any inconsistency or conflict with the short data sheet, the full data sheet shall prevail. 13.3 Disclaimers General — Information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such information. Right to make changes — NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make changes to information published in this document, including without limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior to the publication hereof. Suitability for use — NXP Semiconductors products are not designed, authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in medical, military, aircraft, space or life support equipment, nor in applications where failure or malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental damage. NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own risk. Applications — Applications that are described herein for any of these products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the specified use without further testing or modification. Limiting values — Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) may cause permanent damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those given in the Characteristics sections of this document is not implied. Exposure to limiting values for extended periods may affect device reliability. Terms and conditions of sale — NXP Semiconductors products are sold subject to the general terms and conditions of commercial sale, as published at http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms, including those pertaining to warranty, intellectual property rights infringement and limitation of liability, unless explicitly otherwise agreed to in writing by NXP Semiconductors. In case of any inconsistency or conflict between information in this document and such terms and conditions, the latter will prevail. No offer to sell or license — Nothing in this document may be interpreted or construed as an offer to sell products that is open for acceptance or the grant, conveyance or implication of any license under any copyrights, patents or other industrial or intellectual property rights. Export control — This document as well as the item(s) described herein may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior authorization from national authorities. Quick reference data — The Quick reference data is an extract of the product data given in the Limiting values and Characteristics sections of this document, and as such is not complete, exhaustive or legally binding. 13.4 Trademarks Notice: All referenced brands, product names, service names and trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 14. Contact information For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com Document status[1][2] Product status[3] Definition Objective [short] data sheet Development This document contains data from the objective specification for product development. Preliminary [short] data sheet Qualification This document contains data from the preliminary specification. Product [short] data sheet Production This document contains the product specification. NXP Semiconductors PBSS9110Z 100 V, 1 A PNP low VCEsat (BISS) transistor © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com Date of release: 11 December 2009 Document identifier: PBSS9110Z_3 Please be aware that important notices concerning this document and the product(s) described herein, have been included in section ‘Legal information’. This document was generated on 01/06/2014 PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION Part Number: 43020-1200 Status: Active Overview: Micro-Fit 3.0™ Connectors Description: Micro-Fit 3.0™ Plug Housing, Dual Row, with Panel Mount Ears, 12 Circuits Documents: 3D Model Test Summary TS-43045-001 (PDF) Drawing (PDF) RoHS Certificate of Compliance (PDF) Product Specification PS-43045 (PDF) Product Literature (PDF) Packaging Specification PK-43020-001 (PDF) Agency Certification CSA LR19980 TUV R72081037 UL E29179 General Product Family Crimp Housings Series 43020 Application Power, Wire-to-Wire Comments Glow Wire Equivalent Part Number 43020-1208 Overview Micro-Fit 3.0™ Connectors Product Literature Order No 987650-5984 Product Name Micro-Fit 3.0™ UPC 800754383530 Physical Circuits (maximum) 12 Circuits Detail 12 Color - Resin Black Flammability 94V-0 Gender Male Glow-Wire Compliant No Lock to Mating Part Yes Material - Resin Polyester Net Weight 1.476/g Number of Rows 2 Packaging Type Bag Panel Mount Yes Pitch - Mating Interface 3.00mm Pitch - Termination Interface 3.00mm Polarized to Mating Part Yes Stackable No Temperature Range - Operating -40°C to +105°C Electrical Current - Maximum per Contact 5A Material Info Reference - Drawing Numbers Packaging Specification PK-43020-001 Product Specification PS-43045, RPS-43045-003, RPS-43045-004 Sales Drawing SDA-43020-**** Test Summary TS-43045-001 Series image - Reference only EU RoHS China RoHS ELV and RoHS Compliant REACH SVHC Contains SVHC: No Low-Halogen Status Low-Halogen Need more information on product environmental compliance? Email productcompliance@molex.com For a multiple part number RoHS Certificate of Compliance, click here Please visit the Contact Us section for any non-product compliance questions. Search Parts in this Series 43020Series Mates With 43025 Micro-Fit 3.0™ Receptacle Housing Use With Micro-Fit 3.0™ Crimp Terminal, MaleThis document was generated on 01/06/2014 PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION This document was generated on 07/03/2013 PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION Part Number: 87439-0800 Status: Active Overview: Pico-Spox™ Description: 1.50mm Pitch Pico-SPOX™ Wire-to-Board Housing, 8 Circuits, Off-White Housing Documents: 3D Model RoHS Certificate of Compliance (PDF) Drawing (PDF) Product Literature (PDF) Product Specification PS-87437 (PDF) Agency Certification CSA LR19980 UL E29179 General Product Family Crimp Housings Series 87439 Application Signal, Wire-to-Board MolexKits Yes Overview Pico-Spox™ Product Literature Order No USA-235 Product Name Pico-SPOX™ UPC 800754313278 Physical Circuits (maximum) 8 Color - Resin Natural Flammability 94V-0 Gender Female Glow-Wire Compliant No Lock to Mating Part Yes Material - Resin Nylon Net Weight 0.120/g Number of Rows 1 Packaging Type Bag Panel Mount No Pitch - Mating Interface 1.50mm Polarized to Mating Part Yes Stackable No Temperature Range - Operating -55°C to +105°C Electrical Current - Maximum per Contact 2.5A Material Info Reference - Drawing Numbers Product Specification PS-87437, RPS-87437, RPS-87437-001, RPS-87437-200 Sales Drawing SD-87439-**00 Series image - Reference only EU RoHS China RoHS ELV and RoHS Compliant REACH SVHC Contains SVHC: No Low-Halogen Status Low-Halogen Need more information on product environmental compliance? Email productcompliance@molex.com For a multiple part number RoHS Certificate of Compliance, click here Please visit the Contact Us section for any non-product compliance questions. Search Parts in this Series 87439Series Mates With Pico-SPOX™ Wire-to-Board Header 87437 , 87438 Use With 87421 Pico-SPOX™ Crimp Terminal This document was generated on 07/03/2013 PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION This document was generated on 01/08/2014 PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION Part Number: 43160-3102 Status: Active Overview: Sabre™ Power Connector Description: 7.50mm Pitch Sabre™ Header, Right Angle, 2 Circuits, Glow Wire Compatible. Recommended PCB Thickness 1.60mm, with Board Lock Documents: 3D Model RoHS Certificate of Compliance (PDF) Drawing (PDF) Product Literature (PDF) Product Specification PSX-44441-9999 (PDF) Agency Certification CSA LR19980 TUV R72130381 UL E29179 General Product Family PCB Headers Series 43160 Application Power, Wire-to-Board Comments "Fully Polarized, high power wire to board and wire to wire connector system
This Molex product is manufactured from material that has the following ratings, tested by independent agencies:. a) A Glow Wire Ignition Temperature (GWIT) of at least 775 deg C per IEC 60695-2-13.. b) A Glow Wire Flammability Index (GWFI) above 850 deg C per IEC 60695-2-12.and hence complies with the requirements set out in the International Standard IEC 60335-1 5th edition - household and similar electrical appliances - safety, section 30 Resistance to heat and fire.
The customers using this product must determine its suitability for use in their particular application through testing or other acceptable means as described in end-product glow-wire flammability test standard IEC 60695-2-11 and any applicable product end-use standard(s).
If it is determined during
the customer’s evaluation of suitability, that higher
performance is required, please contact Molex for
possible product options."
Overview Sabre™ Power Connector
Product Literature Order No 987650-5662
Product Name Sabre™
UPC 800754378185
Physical
Breakaway No
Circuits (Loaded) 2
Circuits (maximum) 2
Color - Resin Black
Durability (mating cycles max) 25
First Mate / Last Break No
Flammability 94V-0
Glow-Wire Compliant Yes
Guide to Mating Part No
Keying to Mating Part Yes
Series
image - Reference only
EU RoHS China RoHS
ELV and RoHS
Compliant
REACH SVHC
Contains SVHC: No
Low-Halogen Status
Not Low-Halogen
Need more information on product
environmental compliance?
Email productcompliance@molex.com
For a multiple part number RoHS Certificate of
Compliance, click here
Please visit the Contact Us section for any
non-product compliance questions.
Search Parts in this Series
43160Series
Mates With
44441-2002 Sabre™ Receptacle Housing
Lock to Mating Part Yes
Material - Metal Brass
Material - Plating Mating Tin
Material - Plating Termination Tin
Material - Resin High Temperature Thermoplastic
Net Weight 3.331/g
Number of Rows 1
Orientation Right Angle
PC Tail Length 3.81mm
PCB Locator Yes
PCB Retention Yes
PCB Thickness - Recommended 1.60mm
Packaging Type Tray
Pitch - Mating Interface 7.50mm
Pitch - Termination Interface 7.50mm
Plating min - Mating 0.889μm
Plating min - Termination 0.889μm
Polarized to Mating Part Yes
Polarized to PCB Yes
Shrouded Fully
Stackable No
Surface Mount Compatible (SMC) No
Temperature Range - Operating -40°C to +75°C
Termination Interface: Style Through Hole
Electrical
Current - Maximum per Contact 18A
Voltage - Maximum 600V
Solder Process Data
Duration at Max. Process Temperature (seconds) 5
Lead-free Process Capability Wave Capable (TH only)
Max. Cycles at Max. Process Temperature 1
Process Temperature max. C 235
Material Info
Reference - Drawing Numbers
Product Specification PSX-44441-9999
Sales Drawing SDA-43160-****
This document was generated on 01/08/2014
PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION
This document was generated on 01/06/2014
PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION
Part Number: 39-00-0038
Status: Active
Overview: Mini-Fit Jr.™ Power Connectors
Description: Mini-Fit® Female Crimp Terminal, Tin (Sn) over Copper (Cu) Plated Brass, 18-24
AWG, Reel
Documents:
Drawing (PDF) Product Specification PS-52034-003 (PDF)
Product Specification PS-51010-005 (PDF) Product Specification PS-52034-004 (PDF)
Product Specification PS-51010-006 (PDF) Product Specification PS-5556-001 (PDF)
Product Specification PS-51045-001 (PDF) Product Specification PS-5556-002 (PDF)
Product Specification PS-51045-002 (PDF) Packaging Specification PK-5556-001 (PDF)
Product Specification PS-51045-004 (PDF) Test Summary TS-5556-002 (PDF)
Product Specification PS-51096-001 (PDF) RoHS Certificate of Compliance (PDF)
General
Product Family Crimp Terminals
Series 5556
Application Power
Crimp Quality Equipment Yes
Overview Mini-Fit Jr.™ Power Connectors
Packaging Alternative 39-00-0039 (Loose)
Product Name Mini-Fit®
UPC 800753585010
Physical
Durability (mating cycles max) 30
Gender Receptacle
Material - Metal Brass
Material - Plating Mating Tin
Material - Plating Termination Tin
Net Weight 0.130/g
Packaging Type Reel
Plating min - Mating 0.889μm
Plating min - Termination 0.889μm
Termination Interface: Style Crimp or Compression
Wire Insulation Diameter 1.30-3.10mm
Wire Size AWG 18, 20, 22, 24
Wire Size mm² N/A
Electrical
Current - Maximum per Contact 9A
Voltage - Maximum 600V
Material Info
Old Part Number 5556T
Reference - Drawing Numbers
Packaging Specification PK-5556-001
Product Specification PS-51010-005, PS-51010-006, PS-51045-001,
PS-51045-002, PS-51045-004, PS-51096-001,
PS-52034-003, PS-52034-004, PS-5556-001,
PS-5556-002, RPS-30067-001, RPS-30067-002,
RPS-42474-001, RPS-51045-001, RPS-5557-008,
RPS-5557-024, RPS-5557-031, RPS-5557-036,
RPS-5557-037, RPS-5557-045, RPS-5557-046,
RPS-5566-002
Series
image - Reference only
EU RoHS China RoHS
ELV and RoHS
Compliant
REACH SVHC
Contains SVHC: No
Low-Halogen Status
Low-Halogen
Need more information on product
environmental compliance?
Email productcompliance@molex.com
For a multiple part number RoHS Certificate of
Compliance, click here
Please visit the Contact Us section for any
non-product compliance questions.
Search Parts in this Series
5556Series
Mates With
5558 Mini-Fit® Crimp Male Terminals. Mini-
Fit Jr.™ Header, Dual Row, 5566 , 5569
Use With
5557 Mini-Fit Jr.™ Receptacle Housing,
30067 Mini-Fit® TPA, 42474 Mini-Fit®
BMI Panel Mount, 5559 Mini-Fit Jr.™ Plug
Housing, Dual Row
Application Tooling | FAQ
Tooling specifications and manuals are
found by selecting the products below.
Crimp Height Specifications are then
contained in the Application Tooling
Specification document.
Global
Description Product #
FineAdjust™
Applicator for
Insulation OD
0639023900
Sales Drawing SD-5556****
Test Summary TS-5556-002
1.40-1.70mm - 18-24
AWG
Extraction Tool 0011030044
Hand Crimp Tool for
Male and Female
Crimp Terminals,
16-24 AWG Wire
0638190900
FineAdjust™
Applicator for
Insulation OD
2.50-2.95mm - 18-24
AWG
0639002600
FineAdjust™
Applicator for
Insulation OD
1.65-2.05mm - 18-24
AWG
0639002900
FineAdjust™
Applicator for
Insulation OD
1.90-2.30mm - 18-24
AWG
0639015600
FineAdjust™
Applicator for
Insulation OD
2.50-2.95mm
Optimized for 18
AWG Only
0639024800
FineAdjust™
Applicator for
Insulation OD
2.30-2.60mm - 18-24
AWG
0639024900
T2 Terminator™
for insulation OD
2.50-2.95mm - 18-24
AWG
0639102600
T2 Terminator™ for
insulation OD 1.65
– 2.05mm – 18 – 24
AWG
0639102900
T2 Terminator™
for insulation OD
1.90-2.30mm - 18-24
AWG
0639115600
T2 Terminator™
for insulation OD
1.40-1.70mm - 18-24
AWG
0639123900
T2 Terminator™
for insulation OD
2.50-2.95mm
optimized for 18
AWG only
0639124800
T2 Terminator™
for insulation OD
2.30-2.60mm - 18-24
AWG
0639124900
Japan
Description Product #
Applicator for M211A
Bench Press, 18-24
AWG Wire
0570223000
Side-Feed Applicator
For Full-Auto
Machine
0570223200
Hand Extraction Tool 0570316000
This document was generated on 01/06/2014
PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION
For more complete information on any product, please visit our web site: www.aimtti.com
Measurably better value manual & bus programmable - Laboratory Power Supplies
Mixed-mode Regulation
Mixed-mode regulation with linear output stage
4 digit voltage and current meters on each output *
Constant voltage or constant current operation
Variable auxiliary output (1.5-5V@5A) on triple model
Switched remote sensing (not EX355P or EX752M)
Silent fan-free cooling **
DC output switches
Compact bench power supplies
Single, dual or triple outputs
Mixed-mode regulation
Power from 175W to 420W
Switched remote sense terminals
RS-232 interface model available
EX-R series
Model Outputs Voltage / Current Power Interfaces
EX355R One 0 to 35V / 0 to 5A 175W -
EX355P One 0 to 35V / 0 to 5A 175W RS232
EX355P-USB One 0 to 35V / 0 to 5A 175W USB
EX1810R One 0 to 18V / 0 to 10A 180W -
EX2020R One 0 to 20V / 0 to 20A 400W -
EX4210R One 0 to 42V / 0 to 10A 420W -
EX354RD Two 2 x (0 to 35V / 0 to 4A) 280W -
EX354RT Three 2 x (0 to 35V / 0 to 4A)
plus 1.5 to 5.0V @ 5A
305W
EX752M Two 2 x (0 to 75V / 0 to 2A)
or 0 to 75V / 0 to 4A
or 0 to 150V / 0 to 2A
300W
Brief specifications for main outputs:
Line & load regulation: <0.01%. Output noise: < 2mV rms.
Meter accuracies: voltage - 0.3% ± 1digit, current - 0.6% ± 1digit.
Sizes: singles - 140 x 160 x 295mm; dual/triple - 260 x 160 x 295mm (WxHxD)
The EX752M is a dual output 300
watt PSU with Multi-Mode capability.
This enables it to operate as a dual
power supply with two independent and
isolated outputs, or as a single power
supply of double the power.
As a dual, each output provides 0 to
75V at 0 to 2A (mode A). As a single,
the output can be selected as either 0
to 75V at 0 to 4A (mode B) or 0 to 150V
at 0 to 2A (mode C). In single modes,
the unused half of the unit becomes
completely inoperative and its displays
are blanked.
For those requiring a basic bus
controllable power supply, versions with
an RS-232 interface (EL302P) or a USB
interface (EL302P-USB) are available.
The EX series is the value-for-money
PSU for users who require higher power
levels. Mixed-mode regulation gives
excellent performance combined with
compact size and low weight.
Dual output and triple output models
are available in a similar casing style.
The EX354RT triple (illustrated) has a
variable voltage auxiliary output which
can be set using the digital displays.
** Note that the EX2020R and
EX4210R use fan assisted cooling.
All-linear regulation becomes impractical at higher
power levels, so Aim-TTi have developed a technology
that combines HF switch-mode pre-regulation with
linear final regulation.
This technique combines exceptional efficiency with
noise levels that are close to that of pure linears.
Mixed-mode regulation is used in the EX-R and TSX
series.
* Note that 3 digit current meters
are used on the EX355P and
EX752M and that voltmeter resolution
on the EX752M is 0.1V.
* Note that a 3 digit current
meters is used on the EL302P
& EL302P-USB, and that these
models do not have remote
sense terminals.
http://www.farnell.com/datasheets/1796748.pdf
SS-331
LCD Desoldering Station
User’s Manual
1st Edition,
©2014 Copyright by Prokit’s Industries Co., Ltd.
1
Description
SS‐331 designed for lead free desoldering especially. The quick heating and strong power are for convenient and clear soldering / desoldering all types of DIP components.
Reasonable structure, single hand operation and strong absorbing power can be easy removal of the residual solder from the one‐sided or two sided of the PCB.
This tool is used in the fields of electronic research, teaching and production, especially in the repairing and desoldering on the electronic appliances and communication equipments.
1.
Control Unit
The desoldering iron gun is controlled automatically by the micro‐processor. The digital control electronics and high‐quality sensor and heat exchange system guarantee precise temperature control at the soldering tip. The highest degree of temperature precision and optimal dynamic thermal behavior under load conditions is obtained by the quick and accurate recording of the measured values in a closed control circuit, and this design is especially for the lead‐free production techniques.
2.
Desoldering Iron gun
Desoldering iron gun with a power of 60W（Heat up rating 130W）and a wide spectrum of soldering tips can be used anywhere in the electronics field.
The high power and gun type design make this iron gun suitable for fine desoldering work. The heating element is made of ceramic and the sensor on the desoldering tip can control the desoldering temperature quickly and accurately.
2
Technical Specification
Voltage
220~240V AC
Power Consumption
140W
Temperature
160°C ~ 480°C
Vacuum Pressure
600mm Hg
Heating Element
Ceramic Heater
Accessories
Spare tip x 3 ( 0.8(on the gun)1.0/ 1.3mm) Cleaning tool x 3 (0.7/0.9/ 1.2mm) Filter sponge x 4 (φ20.8x1 +φ16.8x3)
Certificate
CE, GS, RoHS
Station Size (mm)
225 x 160 x 130
Weight (kgs)
2.5
Operating Instruction
Caution：Make sure that the four screws which are used to fasten the Diaphragm pump are removed from the control system before use. Otherwise serious damages may be caused to the user and the system.
1.
Place the desoldering iron gun in the holder separately. Then connect the plug to the receptacle on the station and turn clockwise to tighten the plug nut. Check that the power supply is corresponding to the specification on the type plate and the power switch is on the “OFF” position. Connect the control unit to the power supply and switch on the power. Then a self‐test is carried out in which all display elements are switched on briefly. The electronic system then switches on automatically to the set temperature and displays this value.
2.
The display and temperature setting
①.
Shows the actual temperature of the desoldering tip.
②.
Shows the setting temperature: Pressing the “UP” or “DOWN” button can switch the digital display to the set point display. The set‐point can be changed for ±1℃ by tapping the “UP” or “DOWN” button. Pressing the button will change the set‐point quickly. The digital display will return automatically to the actual value and the iron will reach to the setting temperature quickly.
③.
℃/℉ display: Switching the temperature display from ℃ to ℉ by pressing the “℃/℉”button and then the electronic system will display the actual temperature① and setting temperature② in ℉, and vice versa.
④.
When the actual temperature on the soldering tip is less than the set‐point, “HEAT ON” will display and make the desoldering tip heating up.
⑤.
When the absolute offset is more than ±10℃ between the actual temperature and the set‐point on the soldering tip or the nozzle, “WAIT” will display. It means that the temperature electronic control system is not in the stable situation, we should wait a moment to let the “WAIT” disappear.
⑥.
When “ERROR” display, there may be a trouble on the 3
4
Safety Instruction
1.
The manufacturer assumes no liability for uses other than those described in the operating instructions or for unauthorized alterations.
2.
The operating instructions and cautions should be read carefully and kept in an easily visible location in the vicinity of the control system. Non‐observance of the cautions will result in accidents, injury or risks to health.
Caution
1.
The power cord only can be inserted in approved power sockets or adapters.
2.
High Temperature
The temperature of the soldering tip will reach as high as around 400℃（752℉） when the power switch is on. Since mishandling may lead to burns and fire, be sure to comply with the following precautions:
①.
Do not touch metallic parts near the soldering tip/ nozzle.
②.
Do not use this system near the flammable items.
③.
Advise other people in the work area that the unit can reach a very high temperature and should be considered potentially dangerous.
④.
Turn off the power switch while taking breaks and when finishing using.
⑤.
Before replacing parts or storing the system, turn off the power and let it cool down to the room temperature.
⑥.
Warning: this tool must be placed on its stand when not in use.
5
⑦.
A fire may result if the appliance is not used with care, therefore:
1)
Be careful when using the appliance in places where there is combustible material.
2)
Do not apply to the same place for a long time.
3)
Do not use in presence of an explosive atmosphere.
4)
Be aware heat may be conducted to combustible materials that out of sight.
5)
Place the appliance on its stand after use and allow it to cool down before storage.
6)
Do not leave the appliance unattended when it is switched on.
3.
Take care of your tools
Do not use the tools for any applications other than soldering or desoldering.
Do not rap the iron against the work bench or otherwise subject the iron to severe shocks.
Do not file the soldering tip to remove the oxide, please wipe the tip on the cleaning sponge.
Use only accessories or attachments which are listed in the operation manual. Use of other tools and other accessories can lead to a danger of injury.
Please turn off the power before connecting or disconnecting the soldering iron.
4.
Maintenance
Before further use, safety devices or slightly damaged parts must be carefully checked for error‐free and intended operation. Inspect moving parts for error‐free operation and that they don’t bind, or whether any parts are damaged. Damaged safety devices and parts must be repaired or replaced by a qualified technician, so long as nothing else is indicated in the operation manual. Use only accessories or
6
attachments which are listed in the operation manual. Use of other tools and other accessories can lead to a danger of injury.
5.
Keep children at a distance
Warning: this appliance is not intended for use by young children and infirm persons unless they have been adequately supervised by a responsible person to ensure that they can use the appliance safely.
Warning: Young children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.
Unused soldering tools should be stored in a dry location which is out of the reach of children. Switch off all unused soldering tools.
6.
Protect yourself against electrical shocks
Avoid touching grounded parts with your body, e.g. pipes, heating radiators and so on. The grip of antistatic designed soldering tool is conductive.
7.
Work environment
Do not use the soldering tool in a moist or wet environment. The soldering iron should be placed on the holder after finished using.
8.
Observe the valid safety regulations at your work place.
SS-331數顯吸焊台
概述
SS-331 特別為無鉛吸焊而設計。快速升溫和大功率的特點使其可以方便快速的焊接/拆焊所有類型的DIP元器件。
合理的結構，單手操作和強大的吸焊功率能夠輕鬆的從PCB一面或兩面除去殘餘錫渣。
目前已廣泛的應用於電子科研，教學以及生產等單位，特別是家電維修和通訊器材維修人員所不可缺少的首選專用工具。
1.
控制單元
吸焊槍由微處理器自動控制。數位控制裝置和高品質的感測器及加熱交換系統保證對烙鐵頭的溫度進行精確的控制。通過快速準確的記錄閉和控制回路測量可以獲得作高的溫度精度和帶負載狀況下最佳熱量轉遞性能，特別適合用於無鉛制程工藝。
2.
吸焊槍 (5SS-331-DG)
吸焊槍的功率為 60W（額定加熱功率 130W），可以配各種尺寸的烙鐵頭（U系列），廣泛應用於電子領域。
大功率和細長外形設計使這個電烙鐵適合做精密的焊接操作，發熱芯採用陶瓷發熱材料製作，頂端溫度感測器設計其特點在於能夠快速並準確的控制焊接溫度。
7
技術規範.
電壓
220~240V AC
消耗功率
140W
溫度
160°C ~ 480°C
真空吸力
600mm Hg
發熱原件
陶磁發熱芯
配件
吸嘴 x 3(0.8(裝在吸槍上)1.0/ 1.3mm) 通針 x 3( 0.7/ 0.9/ 1.2mm) 過濾棉 x 4 ( 20.8mm x1 + 16.8mm x3)
認證
CE, GS, RoHS
尺寸(mm)
225 x 160 x 130
重量(kgs )
2.5
操作說明：
1
將吸焊槍放置在支架上。然後將插頭插入插座順時針方向鎖緊螺母。檢查供電電源符合本產品的規格並確認總電源開關處於OFF的位置。接通控制系統的電源並打開電源開關。系統進行自檢，所有的液晶顯示都暫時被點亮。電子系統自動打開並迅速達到設定的溫度值。
2
顯示幕和溫度設置：
數位顯示說明：
①
. 顯示吸焊烙鐵頭的實際溫度。
8
9
②
. 顯示的是設定溫度，通過按“UP＂或“DOWN＂鍵來改變設定值。輕壓單下“UP＂或“DOWN＂鍵設定值將以±1℃變化，持續按下“UP＂或“DOWN＂鍵設定值將會快速改變。改變設定值後，電子系統自動工作，顯示溫度會迅速到達設定值。
③
. ℃或℉溫度，通過按“℃/℉＂按鈕切換攝氏或華氏溫度，切換後電子系統會自動顯示的攝氏或華氏實際溫度①和設定溫度②數值。
④
. 當烙鐵頭實際溫度小於設定溫度時顯示“HEAT ON＂表示電子系統對烙鐵正在加熱。
⑤
. 當烙鐵頭實際溫度與設定溫度的絕對偏差大於±10℃時顯示“WAIT＂，表示電子控溫系統還沒到達穩定狀態，請稍做等待，待“WAIT＂不顯示時即可正常使用了。
⑥
. 顯示“---＂則表示系統有故障，或者是電烙鐵沒有正確連接到控制系統。
3
安全操作說明
3.1
製造商對於超出操作說明中所到的其他使用或未經授權的更改，不負任何責任。
3.2
應仔細閱讀操作說明及警告並將其放置在控制系統附近，如不遵守這些警告，將有可能發生意外事故，人體傷害或健康傷害。
4
警告及注意事項
4.1
電源線只能插入經認證過的電源插座或適配器中。
4.2
小心高溫:在開機狀態下，烙鐵頭或熱風槍焊嘴的溫度可以達到大約400℃（752℉）左右，由於不正確的操作可能會造成燒傷或引起火災，故應確保遵守以下預防措施：
不要讓金屬部件接觸到焊嘴和烙鐵頭；
不要在易燃物品附近使用該系統；
告知工作區域中的其他人員此設備會達到非常高的溫度應注意識別其潛在的危險性；
在休息及使用完後應關閉總電源
在更換零件或儲存前，應關閉總電源並讓其冷卻到
10
室溫
警告：不用時一定要將此工具放置在特定的支架上。
如使用不當可能會引起火災，因此
在有易燃物品的場所使用該設備一定要小心；
不要長時間在同一位置使用該設備；
不要在有爆炸性氣體的場所使用；
要知道熱量有可能會引燃不在視線範圍內的可燃物質；
使用完畢後要將器具放置在特定的支架上，且要在冷卻後方可收藏起來;
離開時必須要關閉電源開關。
4.3
愛護工具
不要將此設備用於焊接或脫焊以外的其他操作。
不要在工作臺上敲打電烙鐵或熱風筒或其他嚴重的撞擊。
不要銼烙鐵頭上的氧化層，請使用浸水的清潔棉擦除氧化層。
確保使用操作說明上列明的附件或配件，使用其他的工具或其他配件使本系統損壞或會有受傷的危險。
在接通或斷開錫槍前應先關閉電源。
4.4
工具保養 在使用前，應仔細檢查安全裝置或有輕微損害的零件無故障及在指定操作狀態。檢查活動的零件無故障操作，並且沒有繞線及零件損壞。已損壞的安全設備及零件都應由有資格的專業人員進行維修或更換。只使用操作說明中列出的配件。如果使用其他工具或配件有可能對操作人員造成傷害。
4.5
放置在兒童接觸不到的地方 警告：老人和兒童必須在監護人在場確保可安全使用的情況下方可使用該設備。警告：應確保兒童在沒有監護的情況下無法接觸到該設
備。
4.6
不用的焊接工具應存放在乾燥的，兒童接觸不到的地方。而且應該關閉所有未在使用狀態下的焊接工具的電源。
4.7
避免遭受電擊 避免用身體接觸接地零件，如：烙鐵管，散熱器等。抗靜電設計的焊接工具的把手是導電的。
4.8
工作環境 不要在潮濕的環境中使用焊接工具。電烙鐵及熱風槍用完後要放回到支架上。
4.9
遵守工作場所中的安全操作規定。
寶工實業股份有限公司
PROKIT’S INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
http://www.prokits.com.tw
E-mail:pk@mail.prokits.com.tw
©2014 Prokit’s Industries Co., LTD. All rights reserved 2014001(C)
Connections to a Wider Range of Slaves Ensured by Upgraded Models
Master Conventional
models
New models
C200HW-SRM21
CQM1-SRM21
SRM1-C01
SRM1-C02
SRM1-C01-V1
SRM1-C02-V1
3G8B3-SRM00
3G8B3-SRM01
C200PC-ISA02-SRM
C200PC-ISA12-SRM
C200HW-SRM21-V1
CQM1-SRM21-V1
SRM1-C01-V2
SRM1-C02-V2
NKE-made Uniwire
C B /SS d
Communications mode
Slave
ade U e
CompoBus/S Send
Unit SDD-CS1
High-speed
communications
mode
Long-distance
communications
mode
SRT1 Series
FND-X-SRT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Products
from other
companies
SMC Solenoid valve
for SI manifold
use
VQ Series
SX Series
SY Series
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
CKD Solenoid valve
for saving wiring
effort
4TB1 and 4TB2 Series
4TB3 and 4TB4 Series
4G Series
MN4SO Series
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Koganei Valve for saving
wiring effort
YS1A1, A2
YS2A1, A2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
New product SRT2-AD02
SRT2-DA02
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
SRT2-VID08S(-1)
SRT2-VOD08S(-1)
SRT2-VID16ML(-1)
SRT2-VOD16ML(-1)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
SRT2-ID16(-1)
SRT2-OD16(-1)
SRT2-ID08(-1)
SRT2-OD08(-1)
SRT2-ROC16
SRT2-ROF16
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPM1A-SRT21 Yes Yes Yes
Products to be released soon SRT2-ID04(-1)
SRT2-OD04(-1)
SRT2-ID16T(-1)
SRT2-OD16T(-1)
SRT2-MD16T(-1)
SRT2-ROC08
SRT2-ROF08
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note: 1. In high-speed communications mode, the maximum transmission distance is 100 m at a baud rate of 750 kbps. In long-distance
communications mode (i.e., a newly available mode), the maximum transmission distance is 500 m at a baud rate of 93.75 kbps.
2. The SRT2-AD04 and SRT2-DA02 are available for 16-bit synchronous communications.
11
Master Control Unit SRM1-C01-V2/C02-V2
Subminiature, Stand-alone Model with
CompoBus/S Master and SYSMAC
Controller Functions
Maximum number of Remote I/O points per Master:
256
Maximum number of Slaves per Master: 32
Communications cycle time: 0.5 ms max. (at baud
rate 750 kbps).
Communications distance: Extended to 500 m
max. (at baud rate 93.75 kbps).
Additional instructions (PID, SCL, NEG, ZCP)
ensure analog compatibility.
RS-232C port incorporated (SRM1-C02-V2).
RC
Ordering Information
Specifications Model
Buuilt-in sstaandd-aaloonee ccoontroolleer fuuncctioonss Without RS-232C SRM1-C01-V2
With RS-232C SRM1-C02-V2
Specifications
Master Specifications
Number of I/O points 256 points (128 inputs/128 outputs)
128 points (64 inputs/64 outputs)
Selectable by DM setting. The default setting is 256 points.
Max. number of Slaves per Master 256 points: 32
128 points: 16
I/O words Input words: 000 to 007
Output words: 010 to 017
Programming language Ladder diagram
Types of instruction 14 basic and 72 special instructions (123 instructions in total)
Execution time LD instruction: 0.97 ms
MOV instruction: 9.1 ms
Program capacity 4,096 words
Data memory 2,048 + 512 (read-only) words
Timers/Counters 128 timers/counters
Work bits 640 bits
Memory backup Flash memory (without battery): User programs
Super capacitor: Data memory (backed up for 20 days at an ambient temperature of 25°C)
Peripheral port 1 point
RS-232C port 1 point (SRM1-C02-V1 only)
Host Link, NT Link, 1:1 Link, or no protocol
Programming tool Programming Consoles: CQM1-PRO01-E, C200H-PRO27-E
SYSMAC-CPT: WS01-CPTB1-E (CD-ROM/FD)
SYSMAC Support Software (MS-DOS version): C500-ZL3AT1-E
Note: PID, SCL, NEG, and ZCP instructions are not supported by the SYSMAC-CPT.
SRM1-C01-V2/C02-V2 SRM1-C01-V2/C02-V2
12
Communications Specifications
Communications method CompoBus/S protocol
Coding method Manchester coding method
Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method (see note 1)
Communications baud rate 750,000 bps/93,750 bps (see note 2)
Communications
cycle time
High-speed
comm nications
0.5 ms with 8 Slaves for inputs and 8 Slaves for outputs
communications
mode 0.8 ms with 16 Slaves for inputs and 16 Slaves for outputs
Long-distance
comm nications
4.0 ms with 8 Slaves for inputs and 8 Slaves for outputs
communications
mode 6.0 ms with 16 Slaves for inputs and 16 Slaves for outputs
Communications cable 2-conductor VCTF cable (0.75 x 20)
Dedicated flat cable
Communications
distance
High-speed
communications
mode
VCTF cable:
Main line length: 100 m max.
Branch line length: 3 m max.
Total branch line length: 50 m max.
Flat cable:
Main line length: 30 m max.
Branch line length: 3 m max.
Total branch line length: 30 m max.
(When flat cable is used to connect fewer than 16 Slaves, the main line can be up to
100 m long and the total branch line length can be up to 50 m.)
Long-distance
communications
mode
VCTF cable:
Main line length: 500 m max.
Branch line length: 6 m max.
Total branch line length: 120 m max.
Max. number of connecting nodes 32
Error control checks Manchester code check, frame length check, and parity check
Note: 1. A terminator must be connected to the point in the system farthest from the Master.
2. The communications baud rate is switched using DM settings (default setting is 750,000 bps).
General Specifications
Supply voltage 24 VDC
Allowable supply voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Power consumption 3.5 W max.
Inrush current 12.0 A max.
Noise immunity Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 kV (power lines)
Vibration resistance 10 to 57 Hz, 0.075-mm amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz, acceleration: 9.8 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z
directions for 80 minutes each
(Time coefficient; 8 minutes × coefficient factor 10 = total time 80 minutes)
Shock resistance 147 m/s2 three times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C
Storage: –20°C to 75°C
Humidity 10% to 90% (with no condensation)
Atmosphere Must be free from corrosive gas.
Terminal screw size M3
Power interrupt time DC type: 2 ms min.
Weight 150 g max.
SRM1-C01-V2/C02-V2 SRM1-C01-V2/C02-V2
13
Nomenclature
SRM1-C01-V2 SRM1-C02-V2
CPU Unit status indicator
CompoBus/S
communications status indicator
Indicates the status of the Compo-
Bus/S in operation and in communication
with Slaves.
Peripheral port
communications status indicator
Flashes when the peripheral port or
RS-232C port is in communication.
Connector cover
Peripheral port
Connect this port to programming
tools through dedicated cables.
Terminal block
Connector cover
RS-232C port
Connect this port to the
RS-232C interfaces of personal
computers and Programmable
Terminals.
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
SRM1-C01/C02-V2
The above dimensions apply to the SRM1-C02-V2. The SRM-C01-V2 has no RS-232C port.
14
Master Unit C200HW-SRM21-V1
Master Unit for CS1, C200HX, C200HG,
C200HE, and C200HS
A maximum of 256 I/O points available.
Connects to a maximum of 32 Slaves.
Communications cycle time: 0.5 ms max. (at baud
rate 750 kbps).
Communications distance: Extended to 500 m
max. (at baud rate 93.75 kbps).
Connection to Analog Terminals now supported.
RC
Ordering Information
PC Max. number of I/O points Model
C200HX (-Z), C200HG (-Z), C200HE (-Z),
C200HS, CS1
256 points (128 inputs/128 outputs) C200HW-SRM21-V1
Specifications
Communications Specifications
Communications method CompoBus/S protocol
Coding method Manchester coding method
Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method (see note 1)
Communications baud rate 750,000 bps, 93,750 bps (see note 2)
Communications
cycle time
High-speed
comm nications
0.5 ms with 8 Slaves for inputs and 8 Slaves for outputs
communications
mode 0.8 ms with 16 Slaves for inputs and 16 Slaves for outputs
Long-distance
comm nications
4.0 ms with 8 Slaves for inputs and 8 Slaves for outputs
communications
mode 6.0 ms with 16 Slaves for inputs and 16 Slaves for outputs
Communications cable 2-conductor VCTF cable (0.75 x 20)
Dedicated flat cable
Communications
distance
High-speed
communications
mode
VCTF cable:
Main line length: 100 m max.
Branch line length: 3 m max.
Total branch line length: 50 m max.
Flat cable:
Main line length: 30 m max.
Branch line length: 3 m max.
Total branch line length: 30 m max.
(When flat cable is used to connect fewer than 16 Slaves, the main line can be up to
100 m long and the total branch line length can be up to 50 m.)
Long-distance
communications
mode
VCTF cable:
Main line length: 500 m max.
Branch line length: 6 m max.
Total branch line length: 120 m max.
Max. number of connecting nodes 32
Error control checks Manchester code check, frame length check, and parity check
Note: 1. A terminator must be connected to the point in the system farthest from the Master.
2. The communications baud rate is switched with the DIP switch.
C200HW-SRM21-V1 C200HW-SRM21-V1
15
Unit Specifications
Current consumption 150 mA max. at 5 VDC
Number of I/O points 256 points (128 inputs/128 outputs), 128 points (64 inputs/64 outputs) (switchable)
Number of occupied words 256 points: 20 words (8 input words/8 output words, 4 status data)
128 points: 10 words (4 input words/4 output words, 2 status data)
PC CS1, C200HX (-ZE), C200HG (-ZE), C200HE (-ZE), C200HS
Number of points per node number 8 points
Max. number of Slaves per Master 32
Status data Communications Error Flag and Active Slave Node (see note)
Weight 200 g max.
Approved standards UL 508 (E95399), CSA C22.2 No. 142 (LR51460)
Note: These flags use the AR area.
Ratings
The ratings of the Unit are the same as those of the CS1, C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS.
Nomenclature
Indicators
Indicates the operating status of the Master Unit and
the status of communications with the Slaves.
Rotary Switch
This switch sets the Master’s one-digit hexadecimal
unit number.
DIP Switch
These pins have the following functions:
Pin 1: Max. number of Slaves setting
Pin 2: Baud rate setting
Pins 3 to 4: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Communications Terminals
Connect the Slaves’ transmission cable to
these terminals.
C200HW-SRM21-V1 C200HW-SRM21-V1
16
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
C200HW-SRM21-V1
Note: Refer to the C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, C200HS, or CS1 Operation Manual for
details on the dimensions when the Master Unit is installed in the PC’s Backplane.
Precautions
Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using
the Unit.
17
Master Unit CQM1-SRM21-V1
Master Unit for CQM1
A maximum of 128 I/O points available (Possible to
set 32, 64, or 128 I/O points).
Connects to a maximum of 16/32 Slaves.
Communications cycle time: 0.5 ms max. (at baud
rate 750 kbps).
Communications distance: Extended to 500 m
max. (at baud rate 93.75 kbps).
Connection to Analog Terminals now supported.
RC
Ordering Information
PC Max. number of I/O points Model
CQM1-series PC 128 points (64 inputs/64 outputs) CQM1-SRM21-V1
Specifications
Communications Specifications
Communications method CompoBus/S protocol
Coding method Manchester coding method
Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method (see note 1)
Communications baud rate 750,000 bps, 93,750 bps (see note 2)
Communications
cycle time
High-speed
comm nications
0.5 ms with 8 Slaves for inputs and 8 Slaves for outputs
communications
mode 0.8 ms with 16 Slaves for inputs and 16 Slaves for outputs
Long-distance
comm nications
4.0 ms with 8 Slaves for inputs and 8 Slaves for outputs
communications
mode 6.0 ms with 16 Slaves for inputs and 16 Slaves for outputs
Communications cable 2-conductor VCTF cable (0.75 x 20)
Dedicated flat cable
Communications
distance
High-speed
communications
mode
VCTF cable:
Main line length: 100 m max.
Branch line length: 3 m max.
Total branch line length: 50 m max.
Flat cable:
Main line length: 30 m max.
Branch line length: 3 m max.
Total branch line length: 30 m max.
(When flat cable is used to connect fewer than 16 Slaves, the main line can be up to
100 m long and the total branch line length can be up to 50 m.)
Long-distance
communications
mode
VCTF cable::
Main line length: 500 m max.
Branch line length: 6 m max.
Total branch line length: 120 m max.
Max. number of connecting nodes 32
Error control checks Manchester code check, frame length check, and parity check
Note: 1. A terminator must be connected to the point in the system farthest from the Master.
2. The communications baud rate is switched with the DIP switch.
CQM1-SRM21-V1 CQM1-SRM21-V1
18
Unit Specifications
Current consumption 180 mA max. at 5 VDC
Number of I/O points 128 points (64 inputs/64 outputs), 64 points (32 inputs/32 outputs),
32 points (16 inputs/16 outputs) (switchable)
Number of occupied words 128 points: 4 input words/4 output words
64 points: 2 input words/2 output words
32 points: 1 input word/1 output word
PC 128 points: CQM1-CPU41-EV1/CPU42-EV1/CPU43-EV1/CPU44-EV1
64 points: CQM1-CPU11-E/CPU21-E/CPU41-EV1/CPU42-EV1/CPU43-EV1/CPU44-EV1
32 points: CQM1-CPU11-E/CPU21-E/CPU41-EV1/CPU42-EV1/CPU43-EV1/CPU44-EV1
Number of points per node number 4/8 points (switchable)
Max. number of Slaves per Master 32 (4 points per node number)
Status data Alarm terminal output
Weight 200 g max.
Approved standards UL 508 (E95399), CSA C22.2 No. 142 (LR51460)
Alarm Output Specifications
Maximum switching capacity 2 A at 24 VDC
Minimum switching capacity 10 mA at 5 VDC
Relay G6D-1A
Minimum ON time 100 ms
Circuit configuration
2 A at 24 VDC max.
Internal
circuit
CQM1-SRM21-V1
Ratings
The ratings of the Unit are the same as those for the CQM1.
Nomenclature
Indicators
Indicates the operating status of the Master Unit and
the status of communications with the Slaves.
DIP Switch
These pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 and 2: PC word allocation setting
Pin 3: Number of points setting
Pin 4: Baud rate setting
Pins 5 to 6: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Alarm Output Terminals
These terminals are shorted when an error occurs.
Connect to a warning device.
Communications Terminals
Connect the Slaves’ transmission cable to these
terminals.
Terminal block screws
These screws attach the terminal
block. The terminal block can be
removed when these screws are
loosened.
CQM1-SRM21-V1 CQM1-SRM21-V1
19
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
CQM1-SRM21-V1
Note: Refer to the CQM1 Operation Manual for details on the dimensions when
the Master Unit is installed in the PC’s Backplane.
Precautions
Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using
the Unit.
20
SYSMAC Board C200PC-ISA2-SRM
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE and
CompoBus/S Master Functions
Integrated into a Single PCB
Operates as a Programmable Controller to be built
into personal computers.
Programming is possible through Programming
Devices like the programming on C200HX/HG.
An optional Expansion Board is available for serial
communications.
Dedicated library in C is available for control.
Driver for Windows use is available.
Connects to a maximum of three Expansion I/O
Racks.
CompoBus/S Slave data is automatically read.
Ordering Information
PC Max. number of I/O points Model
C200HG-CPU43 256 points ( 128 inputs/128 outputs) C200PC-ISA02-SRM
C200HX-CPU64
56 o s 8 u s/ 8 ou u s)
C200PC-ISA12-SRM
Specifications
Communications Specifications
Communications method CompoBus/S protocol
Coding method Manchester coding method
Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method (see note)
Communications baud rate 750,000 bps
Communications cycle time 0.5 ms with 8 Slaves for inputs and 8 Slaves for outputs
0.8 ms with 16 Slaves for inputs and 16 Slaves for outputs
Communications cable 2-conductor VCTF cable (0.75 x 20)
Dedicated flat cable
Communications distance VCTF cable:
Main line length: 100 m max.
Branch line length: 3 m max.
Total branch line length: 50 m max.
Flat cable:
Main line length: 30 m max.
Branch line length: 3 m max.
Total branch line length: 30 m max.
(When flat cable is used to connect fewer than 16 Slaves, the main line can be up to
100 m long and the total branch line length can be up to 50 m.)
Max. number of connecting nodes 32
Error control checks Manchester code check, frame length check, and parity check
Note: A terminator must be connected to the point in the system farthest from the Master.
C200PC-ISA2-SRM C200PC-ISA2-SRM
21
Unit Specifications
Power supply voltage 4.875 to 5.25 VDC
Current consumption 0.5 A max. (see note 1)
Number of I/O points 256 points (128 inputs/128 outputs), 128 points (64 inputs/64 outputs), (switchable)
Number of occupied words 256 points: 20 words (8 input words, 8 output words, and 4 status data words) (see note 2)
128 points: 10 words (4 input words, 4 output words, and 2 status data words)
Number of points per node number 8 points
Max. number of Slaves per Master 32
Status data Communications Error Flag and Active Slave Node (see note 2)
Weight 200 g max.
Note: 1. The current consumption will be 0.8 A max. if the Programming Console is connected through the optional Expansion Board.
2. The occupied words are in the IR area.
22
I/O Link Unit CPM1A-SRT21
I/O Link Unit for CPM2A/CPM1A
Operates as a Slave of the CompoBus/S Master
Unit.
Exchanges eight inputs and eight outputs with the
Master.
Approved by UL and CSA standards, and bears the
CE marking.
RC
Ordering Information
CPU Units
I/O configuration Power supply Output method Input Output Model
30-point I/O model AC Relay 18 12
CPM1A-30CDR-A*
DC Relay
CPM1A-30CDR-D*
Transistor (sink) CPM1A-30CDT-D
Transistor (source) CPM1A-30CDT1-D
AC Relay CPM2A-30CDR-A
DC Relay CPM2A-30CDR-D
Transistor (sink) CPM2A-30CDT-D
Transistor (source) CPM2A-30CDT1-D
40-point I/O model AC Relay 24 16
CPM1A-40CDR-A*
DC Relay
CPM1A-40CDR-D*
Transistor (sink) CPM1A-40CDT-D
Transistor (source) CPM1A-40CDT1-D
AC Relay CPM2A-40CDR-A
DC Relay CPM2A-40CDR-D
Transistor (sink) CPM2A-40CDT-D
Transistor (source) CPM2A-40CDT1-D
60-point I/O model AC Relay 36 24
CPM2A-60CDR-A
DC Relay
CPM2A-60CDR-D
Transistor (sink) CPM2A-60CDT-D
Transistor (source) CPM2A-60CDT1-D
Note: Models marked with asterisks do not bear CE markings.
Expansion Units
Product Number of connectable
Units per CPU Unit
Output method Input Output Model
Expansion I/O Units 3 max. (see note) Relay 12 8
CPM1A-20EDR1
Transistor (sink)
CPM1A-20EDT
Transistor (source) CPM1A-20EDT1
--- 8 --- CPM1A-8ED
Relay --- 8 CPM1A-8ER
Transistor (sink) --- 8
CPM1A-8ET
Transistor (source)
CPM1A-8ET1
Analog I/O Unit 3 max. (see note) Analog 2 1 CPM1A-MAD01
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit 3 max. (see note) --- 8 I/O link points 8 I/O link points CPM1A-SRT21
Note: Only a single Unit will be connectable if the NT-AL001 is connected to the RS-232C port.
CPM1A-SRT21 CPM1A-SRT21
23
Specifications
Slave CompoBus/S Slave
Number of I/O points 8 inputs and 8 outputs
Number of occupied I/O memory
words of CPM2A
1 input word and 1 output word (same as other Expansion Units in allocation)
Node address setting DIP switch
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
CPM1A-SRT21
Installation
Connection Examples
CompoBus/S Master Unit or
SRM1 CompoBus/S Master
Control Unit CPM1A or CPM2A CPU Unit
CPM1A-SRT21 CompoBus/S
I/O Link Unit
CS1
C200H
CQM1
SRM1
Dedicated flat cable or VCTF cable Connectable to 16 Units max.
(Eight CQM1-SRM21 Units max.)
Note: A single CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit together with a maximum of two other Expansion I/O Units can be connected to the CPM1A or
CPM2A CPU Unit.
24
Transistor Remote Terminal SRT-ID/OD
Long-distance Communications
Supported by SRT2 Models
(Long-distance/High-speed
Communications Selection)
SRT1 models support high-speed communications
only.
SRT2 models support long-distance communications
and high-speed communications.
Ultra-compact at 80 x 48 x 50 (W x H x D) mm for
4-point and 8-point terminals and 105 x 48 x 50 (W x
H x D) mm for 16-point terminals.
Two independent power supplies can be used
because the I/O terminals are insulated from the
internal circuits.
DIN track mounting and screw mounting are both
supported.
RC
Ordering Information
I/O classification Internal I/O circuit
common
I/O points Rated voltage I/O rated voltage Model
Input NPN (+ common) 4 24 VDC 24 VDC SRT1-ID04
PNP (– common)
C C
SRT1-ID04-1
Output NPN (– common) SRT1-OD04
PNP (+ common) SRT1-OD04-1
Input NPN (+ common) 8
SRT2-ID08
PNP (– common)
SRT2-ID08-1
Output NPN (– common) SRT2-OD08
PNP (+ common) SRT2-OD08-1
Input NPN (+ common) 16 SRT2-ID16
PNP (– common)
6
SRT2-ID16-1
Output NPN (– common) SRT2-OD16
PNP (+ common) SRT2-OD16-1
Note: For more details about connections supported by the Master Unit, refer to page 10.
Specifications
Ratings
Inputs
Input current 6 mA max./point
ON delay time 1.5 ms max.
OFF delay time 1.5 ms max.
ON voltage 15 VDC min. between each input terminal and V
OFF voltage 5 VDC max. between each input terminal and V
OFF current 1 mA max.
Insulation method Photocoupler
Input indicators LED (yellow)
SRT-ID/OD SRT-ID/OD
25
Outputs
Rated output current 0.3 A/point
Residual voltage 0.6 V max.
Leakage current 0.1 mA max.
Insulation method Photocoupler
Output indicators LED (yellow)
Characteristics
Communications power supply
voltage
14 to 26.4 VDC
I/O power supply voltage 24 VDC +10%/–15%
I/O power supply current 1 A max.
Current consumption (see note) 50 mA max. at 24 VDC
Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method
Secondary branches cannot be connected to T-branch lines.
Connecting Units 4-point and 8-point Terminals: 16 Input Terminals and 16 Output Terminals per Master
16-point Terminals: 8 Input Terminals and 8 Output Terminals per Master
Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 min (1-mA sensing current between insulated circuits)
Noise immunity Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 kV (power lines)
Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude
Shock resistance Malfunction: 200 m/s2
Destruction: 300 m/s2
Mounting strength No damage when 50 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions
Terminal strength No damage when 50 N pull load was applied for 10 s
Screw tightening torque 0.6 to 1.18 N m
Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –20°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85%
Weight 4-point and 8-point Terminals: 80 g max.
16-point Terminals: 110 g max.
Approved standards (4/8 points) UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 14
Note: The above current consumption is the value with all 4 and 8 and 16 points turned ON excluding the current consumption of the external
sensor connected to the input Remote Terminal and the current consumption of the load connected to the output Remote Terminal.
SRT-ID/OD SRT-ID/OD
26
Nomenclature
I/O Terminals
I/O Power Supply Terminals
Connect 24-VDC power supply
Communications Power Supply Terminals
Connect 14- to 26.4-VDC power supply.
CompoBus/S Terminal
Connect the CompoBus/S
DIP Switch communications cable.
Used for node number setting and holding or clearing outputs for communications error.
Refer to the Compobus/S Operation Manual (W266) for details on DIP switch settings.
Baud rate setting
0 to 7
ERR
COMM
PWR
Node Number Settings
Output HOLD/CLEAR settings (Output Terminals only)
Screw mounting hole
Indicators
Indicator Display Color Meaning
PWR Lit Green The communications power supply is ON.
Not lit The communications power supply is OFF.
COMM Lit Yellow Normal communications
Not lit A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in standby status.
ERR Lit Red A communications error has occurred.
Not lit Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
0 to 7 Lit Yellow The corresponding I/O signal is ON.
Not lit The corresponding I/O signal is OFF.
Output HOLD/CLEAR Mode
Mode Pin 1 Setting
HOLD ON Output status is maintained.
CLEAR OFF Output status is cleared when a communications error occurs.
Note: 1. Pin 1 is factory-set to OFF.
2. This function is available to Output Terminals only.
SRT-ID/OD SRT-ID/OD
27
Node Number Settings
Node number Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6
8 4 2 1
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 OFF OFF OFF ON
2 OFF OFF ON OFF
3 OFF OFF ON ON
4 OFF ON OFF OFF
5 OFF ON OFF ON
6 OFF ON ON OFF
7 OFF ON ON ON
8 ON OFF OFF OFF
9 ON OFF OFF ON
10 ON OFF ON OFF
11 ON OFF ON ON
12 ON ON OFF OFF
13 ON ON OFF ON
14 ON ON ON OFF
15 ON ON ON ON
Note: 1. The node number is factory-set to 0.
2. For node number settings, refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266).
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
SRT1-ID04 (-1)
SRT1-OD04 (-1)
SRT2-ID08 (-1)
SRT2-OD08 (-1)
(54)
27
80
48
65
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
Sixteen, M3
Mounting Holes
(20.5)
(11)
SRT-ID/OD SRT-ID/OD
28
SRT2-ID16 (-1)
SRT2-OD16 (-1)
48
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
(50)
(28)
Mounting Holes
(54)
27
50
(20.5)
(11)
105
22–M3
Installation
Internal Circuit Configuration
SRT1-ID04 SRT1-ID04-1
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Internal
circuit
Internal
circuit
24 VDC(+)
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
(–)
SRT1-OD04
Internal
circuit
24 VDC
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Voltage
stepdown
SRT1-OD04-1
Internal
circuit
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
24 VDC (P)
(P)
24 VDC (P)
(P)
Voltage
stepdown
V
V
V
1
G
0
2
G
G
V
V
V
1
V
0
2
G
SRT-ID/OD SRT-ID/OD
29
SRT2-OD08-1
Internal
circuit
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
SRT2-ID08 SRT2-ID08-1
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Internal
circuit
24 VDC(+)
Internal
circuit
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
(–)
SRT2-OD08
Internal
circuit
24 VDC
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Voltage
stepdown
SRT2-ID16
Photocoupler
Internal Photocoupler
circuit
SRT2-ID16-1
Internal
circuit
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Internal
circuit
SRT2-OD16
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Voltage
stepdown
SRT2-OD16-1
Internal
circuit
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Voltage
stepdown
24 VDC (P)
24 VDC (P)
(P)
Voltage
stepdown
(P)
24 VDC (P)
(P)
24 VDC (P)
(P)
V
V
1
0
2
G
G
V
V
1
0
2
G
V
V
1
0
2
G
SRT-ID/OD SRT-ID/OD
30
External Connections (NPN Models)
Input
Sensor 1
Blue
Brown
Black
Sensor 2
Blue
Brown
Black
Sensor 1
Blue
Brown
Black
Sensor 2
Blue
Brown
Black
Three-wired Sensors
SRT1-ID04 with NPN Output SRT2-ID08 and SRT2-ID16 with NPN Output
Two-wired Sensors
SRT1-ID04 SRT2-ID08 and SRT2-ID16
Sensor 1
Blue
Brown
Sensor 2
Blue
Brown
Sensor 1
Blue
Brown
Sensor 2
Blue
Brown
Output
SRT1-OD04 SRT2-OD08 and SRT2-ID16
L 1 L 2 L 1 L 2
Terminal Arrangement and I/O Device Connection Example (PNP Models)
Note: The connections examples shown are for PNP models.
Input
SRT1-ID04 SRT2-ID08
Output
SRT1-OD04 SRT2-OD08
Blue
Brown
Blue
Brown
Blue
Brown
Brown
Blue
Communications
path
Communications
power
supply
power
supply
power
supply
Communications
path
Communications
power
supply
Communications
path
Communications
power
supply
power
supply
Photoelectric sensor or
proximity sensor (threewired
sensor with a builtin-
amplifier)
Limit switch
(two-wired
sensor)
Solenoid, valve Solenoid
I/O Communications
path
Communications
power
supply
Photoelectric sensor or
proximity sensor (threewired
sensor with a builtin-
amplifier)
Limit switch
(two-wired
sensor)
Black
Black
SRT2-ID16
SRT2-OD16
Communications
path
Communications
power
supply
I/O
power
supply
Photoelectric sensor or
proximity sensor (threewired
sensor with a builtin-
amplifier)
Limit switch
(two-wired
sensor)
I/O
power
supply
Communications
path
Communications
power
supply Solenoid Valve Valve
power
supply
I/O
Blue
Brown
Blue
Brown
Black
I/O I/O
SRT-ID/OD SRT-ID/OD
31
External Connections (PNP Models)
Input
Three-wired Sensors
SRT1-ID04-1 with NPN Output SRT2-ID08-1 and SRT2-ID16-1 with NPN Output
Two-wired Sensors
SRT1-ID04-1 SRT2-ID08-1 and SRT2-ID16-1
Sensor 1
Blue
Brown
Black
Sensor 2
Blue
Brown
Black
Sensor 1
Blue
Brown
Black
Sensor 2
Blue
Brown
Black
Sensor 1
Blue
Brown
Sensor 2
Blue
Brown
Sensor 1
Blue
Brown
Sensor 2
Blue
Brown
Output
SRT1-OD04-1 SRT2-OD08-1 and SRT2-ID16-1
L 1 L 2 L 1 L 2
Terminal Arrangement and I/O Device Connection Example (PNP Models)
Note: The connections examples shown are for NPN models.
Input
SRT1-ID04-1 SRT2-ID08-1
Output
SRT1-OD04-1 SRT2-OD08-1
Blue
Brown
Blue
Brown
Blue
Brown
Brown
Blue
Communications
path
Communications
power
supply
power
supply
power
supply
Communications
path
Communications
power
supply
Communications
path
Communications
power
supply
power
supply
Photoelectric sensor or proximity
sensor (three-wired sensor
with a built-in-amplifier)
Limit switch
(two-wired sensor)
Solenoid, valve Solenoid
I/O Communications
path
Communications
power
supply
Photoelectric sensor or proximity
sensor (three-wired sensor
with a built-in-amplifier)
Limit switch
(two-wired sensor)
Black
Black
SRT2-ID16-1
SRT2-OD16-1
Communications
path
Communications
power
supply
I/O
power
supply
Photoelectric sensor or proximity
sensor (three-wired sensor
with a built-in-amplifier)
Limit switch
(two-wired sensor)
I/O
power
supply
Communications
path
Communications
power
Valve supply Solenoid Valve
power
supply
I/O
Blue
Brown
Blue
Brown
Black
I/O I/O
Precautions
Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using
the Unit.
For general precautions refer to page 80.
32
Remote I/O Terminal SRT1-D16T(-1)
Models with 3-tier Terminals (16 Points)
are Added to the Remote I/O Terminal
Series.
Six Models are Available Depending on
the NPN or PNP Configuration, Input
Points, I/O Points, or Output Points.
Incorporates easy-to-wire terminals each connecting
to a single wire.
Reduces designing and wiring effort.
Incorporates a removable circuit block of cassette
construction.
Ordering Information
I/O classification Internal I/O circuit
common
I/O points I/O connection method Model
Digital input NPN (+ common) 16 M3 terminal block SRT1-ID16T
PNP (– common)
6 3 e a boc
SRT1-ID16T-1
Digital I/O NPN (+ common) SRT1-MD16T
PNP (– common) SRT1-MD16T-1
Digital output NPN (– common) SRT1-OD16T
PNP (+ common) SRT1-OD16T-1
Specifications
Ratings
Inputs
Input current 6 mA max./point at 24 V and 3 mA min./point at 17 V
ON delay time 1.5 ms max.
OFF delay time 1.5 ms max.
ON voltage NPN: 15 VDC min. between V terminals and each input terminal
PNP: 15 VDC min. between G terminals and each input terminal
OFF voltage NPN: 5 VDC max. between V terminals and each input terminal
PNP: 5 VDC max. between G terminals and each input terminal
OFF current 1 mA max.
Insulation method Photocoupler
Outputs
Rated output current 0.5 A max./point
Residual voltage 1.2 V max.
ON delay time 0.5 ms max.
OFF delay time 1.0 ms max.
Leakage current 0.1 mA max.
Insulation method Photocoupler
SRT1-D16T(-1) SRT1-D16T(-1)
33
Characteristics
Communications power supply
voltage
14 to 26.4 VDC
I/O power supply voltage 24 VDC +10%/–15%
I/O power supply current 4 A max./common
Current consumption (see note) 50 mA max. at 24 VDC
Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method
Secondary branches cannot be connected to T-branch lines.
Dielectric strength 500 VAC between insulated circuits
Noise immunity Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 kV (power lines)
Vibration resistance 10 to 150 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude or 70 m/s2
Shock resistance 200 m/s2
Mounting strength No damage with 100 N pull load applied in all directions.
Terminal strength No damage with 100 N pull load applied
Screw tightening torque 0.3 to 0.5 N m
Ambient temperature Operating: –10°C to 55°C
Storage: –25°C to 65°C
Ambient humidity Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Weight 300 g max.
Note: The above current consumption is the value with all points turned ON excluding the current consumption of the external sensor connected
to the input Remote Terminal and the current consumption of the load connected to the output Remote Terminal.
Nomenclature
ERR Indicator: Indicates communications errors.
COMM Indicator: ON while the Unit is in data communication.
Power Indicator
HOLD/CLR DIP Switch
The DIP switch is on the
left-hand side under the cover
on the upper part of the Remote
I/O Terminal.
Holding or clearing output when a
communications error occurs.
Address Setting Switch
Set the rotary switch to the node
address by referring to the
following table.
I/O Indicators
M4 Mounting Screw
Terminal Cover
The Unit stops operating with the
cover opened.
I/O and I/O Device Power Supply Terminals 8 to 15
These terminals will be used as output terminals 0
through 7 if the connected device handles both input
and output signals.
I/O and I/O Device Power Supply Terminals 0 to 7
These terminals will be used as input terminals if the
connected device handles both input and output
signals.
I/O Power Supply Terminals
Connect 24-VDC I/O power supply
Fixture Track
Used for DIN track mounting.
CompoBus/S Internal Power Supply
Terminals (BS+ and BS–)
CompoBus/S Communications Cable
Terminals (BDH and BDL)
Address Setting Switch
Node address Setting (Hex)
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
Node address Setting (Hex)
8 8
9 9
10 A
11 B
12 C
13 D
14 E
15 F
SRT1-D16T(-1) SRT1-D16T(-1)
34
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
SRT1-ID16T (-1)
SRT1-MD16T (-1)
SRT1-OD16T (-1)
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
Installation
Internal Circuit Configuration
SRT1-ID16T SRT1-MD16T
SRT1-ID16T-1 SRT1-MD16T-1
SRT1-OD16T
SRT1-OD16T-1
DC-DC converter
(isolated type)
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Inputs
(0 to 7)
Inputs
(8 to 15)
DC-DC converter
(isolated type)
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Inputs
(0 to 7)
Inputs
(0 to 7)
DC-DC converter
(isolated type)
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Inputs
(0 to 7)
Inputs
(8 to 15)
DC-DC converter
(isolated type)
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Inputs
(0 to 7)
Inputs
(8 to 15)
DC-DC converter
(isolated type)
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Inputs
(0 to 7)
Outputs
(0 to 7)
DC-DC converter
(isolated type)
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Outputs
(0 to 7)
Outputs
(8 to 15)
I/O
power
supply
I/O
power
supply
I/O
power
supply
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Voltage
drop
Voltage
drop
Voltage
drop
Voltage
drop
Voltage
drop
Voltage
drop
SRT1-D16T(-1) SRT1-D16T(-1)
35
External Connections
Input (NPN Models)
SRT1-ID16T
SRT1-MD16T
Output (NPN Models)
SRT1-OD16T
SRT1-MD16T
Input (PNP Models)
SRT1-ID16T-1
SRT1-MD16T-1
Output (PNP Models)
SRT1-OD16T-1
SRT1-MD16T-1
Two-wired sensor Three-wired sensor Three-wired sensor
Solenoid, valve, etc. Solenoid, valve, etc.
Blue (Black)
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
Brown (Red)
Black (White)
Black (Black)
Blue (Red)
Brown (White)
36
Relay-mounted Remote Terminal SRT-R
Ultra-miniature 8-point and 16-point
Relay-mounted Terminals
Ultra-compact
(8-point models: 101 x 51 x 51 mm (W x H x D);
16-point models: 156 x 51 x 51 mm (W x H x D))
Power MOS FET Relay and Relay models.
DIN track mounting and screw mounting are
available.
RC
Ordering Information
Classification I/O points Rated voltage Relay coil rating Model Applicable relay
Relay output 8 points 24 VDC 24 VDC SRT1-ROC08 G6D-1A
16 points SRT2-ROC16
Power MOS FET
l t t
o e OS 8 points SRT1-ROF08 G3DZ-2R6PL
relay output 16 points SRT2-ROF16
Note: For details about connections to the Master Unit, refer to page 10.
Specifications
Ratings
Relay Output
Item SRT1-ROC08, SRT2-ROC16
Applicable relay G6D-1A (one for each output point)
Rated load 3 A at 250 VAC, 3 A at 30 VDC (resistive load)
Rated carry current 3 A (see note 1)
Max. contact voltage 250 VAC, 30 VDC
Max. contact current 3 A
Max. switching capacity 730 VA (AC), 90 W (DC)
Min. permissible load (see note 2) 10 mA at 5 VDC
Life expectancy Electrical: 100,000 operations min. (rated load, at 1,800 operations/h)
Mechanical: 20,000,000 operations min. (at 18,000 operations/h)
Note: 1. The maximum permissible current of COM0 to COM7 is 3 A.
2. This value fulfills the P reference value of opening/closing at a rate of 120 times per min (ambient operating environment and determination
criteria according to JIS C5442).
Power MOS FET Relay Output
Item SRT1-ROF08, SRT2-ROF16
Applicable relay G3DZ-2R6PL (one for each output point)
Load voltage 3 to 264 VAC, 3 to 125 VDC
Load current 100 mA to 0.3 A
Inrush current 6 A (10 ms)
SRT-R SRT-R
37
Characteristics
Power supply voltage 24 VDC +10%/–15%
Current consumption (see note) 350 mA max. at 24 VDC
Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method
Secondary branches cannot be connected to T-branch lines.
Connecting Units 8-point Units: 16 per Master
16-point Units: 8 per Master
Dielectric strength 2,000 VAC for 1 min (1-mA sensing current) between all output terminals and power supply,
between communication terminals, and between contacts of different polarities
500 VAC for 1 min (1-mA sensing current) between all output terminals and power supply,
between communication terminals, and between all power supply terminals and
communications terminals
Noise immunity Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 kV (power lines)
Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 0.75-mm double amplitude
Shock resistance Malfunction: 100 m/s2
Destruction: 300 m/s2
Mounting strength No damage when 50 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions
Terminal strength No damage when 50 N pull load was applied for 10 s
Screw tightening torque 0.6 to 1.18 N m
Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –20°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85%
Weight 8-point models: 145 g max., 16-point models: 240 g max.
Approved standards UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 14
Note: The above current consumption is a value with all the points turned ON including the current consumption of the G6D coil for the
Remote Output Terminal.
SRT-R SRT-R
38
Nomenclature
SRT2-ROC16
SRT2-ROF16
SRT1-ROC08
SRT1-ROF08
Mounting Holes
Output Terminals
I/O Power Supply Terminals
Connect 24-VDC power supply
Communications Power Supply Terminals
Connect 24-VDC power supply.
CompoBus/S Terminals
Connect the CompoBus/S communications cable.
Mounting Holes
DIP Switch
Used for node number setting and holding or
clearing outputs for communications error.
Note: Always turn off the Unit before changing DIP switch settings.
Mounting Holes
Output Terminals
I/O Power Supply Terminals
Connect 24-VDC power supply
Communications Power Supply Terminals
Connect 24-VDC power supply.
CompoBus/S Terminals
Connect the CompoBus/S communications cable.
Mounting Holes
DIP Switch
Used for node number setting and holding or clearing outputs for communications error.
0 to 15
ERR
COMM
PWR
Output HOLD/CLEAR setting (Output model only)
Baud rate setting
Node address setting
Indicators
Indicator Display Color Meaning
PWR Lit Green The communications power supply is ON.
Not lit The communications power supply is OFF.
COMM Lit Yellow Normal communications
Not lit A communications error has occurred or
the Unit is in standby status.
ERR Lit Red A communications error has occurred.
Not lit Normal communications or the Unit is in
standby status.
0 to 15
(see
note)
Lit Yellow The corresponding I/O signal is ON.
Not lit The corresponding I/O signal is OFF.
Note: The SRT1-RO08 does not have indicators 8 to 15.
SRT-R SRT-R
39
Output HOLD/CLEAR Mode
Mode Pin 1 Setting
HOLD ON Output status is maintained when a communications error occurs.
CLEAR OFF Output status is cleared when a communications error occurs.
Note: 1. Pin 1 is factory-set to OFF.
2. This function is available to the Output Terminal only.
Node Number Settings
Node number Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6
8 4 2 1
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 OFF OFF OFF ON
2 OFF OFF ON OFF
3 OFF OFF ON ON
4 OFF ON OFF OFF
5 OFF ON OFF ON
6 OFF ON ON OFF
7 OFF ON ON ON
8 ON OFF OFF OFF
9 ON OFF OFF ON
10 ON OFF ON OFF
11 ON OFF ON ON
12 ON ON OFF OFF
13 ON ON OFF ON
14 ON ON ON OFF
15 ON ON ON ON
Note: 1. The node number is factory-set to 0.
2. For node number setting, refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266).
SRT-R SRT-R
40
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
SRT1-ROC08
SRT1-ROF08
Mounting Holes
SRT2-ROC16
SRT2-ROF16
Mounting Holes
100
50
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
50
50
155
Thirty two, M3
Sixteen, M3
50 50
50
80
40
135
40
SRT-R SRT-R
41
Installation
Internal Circuit Configuration
SRT1-ROC08
SRT2-ROC16
Note: The G3DZ-2R6PL Power MOS FET Relay is inserted into
this portion of the SRT1-ROF08 and SRT2-ROF16.
Relay driver
circuit
Internal
circuit
Later
blocks
(See
note)
*
Relay driver
circuit
Relay driver
circuit
Relay driver
circuit
External Connections
Lamp
Lamp
Lamp
Lamp
Load
power
supply
Terminal Arrangement and I/O Device Connection Example
Output
SRT2-ROC16
SRT2-ROF16
Note: 1. Dotted lines indicate internal connections.
SRT1-ROC08 and SRT1-ROF08 have the 0 to 7 and COM0 to COM3 terminals only.
2. The above is a connection example of the SRT2-ROC16 with G6D Relays mounted.
G3DZ Power MOS FET Relays are mounted to the SRT1-ROF08 and SRT2-ROF16.
24-VDC
power supply
Communications
path
Load
Power
supply
Load
Power
supply
Load
Load
Load
Power
supply
Load
Power
supply
Load
Load
Load
Power
supply
Load
Power
supply
Load
Load
Load
Power
supply
Load
Power
supply
Load
Load
*(see note 2)
Precautions
Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using
the Unit.
Refer to page 80 for details.
42
Connector Terminal SRT2-VID/VOD
Compact Connector Terminals Save
Wiring Effort and Enable Long-distance
Communications
Long-distance or high-speed communications
mode is selectable.
Incorporates I/O connectors making it possible to
minimize the size.
I/O connectors save wiring effort.
Flexible DIN track mounting is possible through a
DIN track attachment.
Eight-point sensor connector models and 16-point
MIL connector models are the same size.
Features
Vertical or horizontal DIN track mounting according to the available space is possible.
Saves space and easily connects to other devices without wiring effort.
Standard mounting
(Sensor connector model)
Mounting with DIN
track attachment
Standard mounting
(MIL connector model)
Communications and
power supply connector DIN track
G7TC
Sensor connector
Indicators
Setting switch
DIN track mounting hook
MIL connector
Ordering Information
I/O classification Internal I/O circuit
common
I/O points I/O connection method Model
Digital input NPN (+ common) 8 Sensor connector SRT2-VID08S
PNP (– common)
Se so co ec o
SRT2-VID08S-1
Digital output NPN (– common) SRT2-VOD08S
PNP (+ common) SRT2-VOD08S-1
Digital input NPN (+ common) 16 MIL connector SRT2-VID16ML
PNP (– common)
6 co ec o
SRT2-VID16ML-1
Digital output NPN (– common) SRT2-VOD16ML
PNP (+ common) SRT2-VOD16ML-1
Mounting hook A SRT2-ATT01
Mounting hook B SRT2-ATT02
Note: For details about connecting the SRT2-VID or SRT2-VOD to the Master Unit, refer to page 10.
SRT2-VID/VOD SRT2-VID/VOD
43
Specifications
Ratings
Inputs
Item SRT2-VID08S
SRT2-VID08S-1
SRT2-VID16ML
SRT2-VID16ML-1
Input current 6 mA max./point at 24 V, 3 mA max./point at 17 V
ON delay time 1.5 ms max.
OFF delay time 1.5 ms max.
ON voltage 15 VDC min. (Between each input terminal and V: NPN. Between each input and G: PNP.)
OFF voltage 5 VDC max. (Between each input terminal and V: NPN. Between each input and G: PNP.)
OFF current 1 mA max.
Insulation method Photocoupler
Maximum number of inputs 8 12
Number of circuits 8 points/common, 1 circuit 16 points/common, 1 circuit
Outputs
Item SRT2-VID08S
SRT2-VID08S-1
SRT2-VID16ML
SRT2-VID16ML-1
Rated output current 0.3 A/point 0.3 A/point (2-A common) (See note.)
Residual voltage 1.2 V max.
ON delay time 0.5 ms max.
OFF delay time 1.5 ms max.
Leakage current 0.1 mA max.
Insulation method Photocoupler
Number of circuits 8 points/common, 1 circuit 16 points/common, 1 circuit
Note: When using V/G terminals in an MIL connector, ensure that the current per terminal for the V/G terminals does not exceed 1 A.
Characteristics
Communications power supply
voltage
14 to 26.4 VDC
I/O power supply voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC +10%/–15%)
I/O power supply current Sensor connector: 2.4 A max., MIL connector: 2.0 A max.
Current consumption (see note) 50 mA max. at 24 VDC
Noise immunity Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 kV (power lines)
Vibration resistance 10 to 150 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude or 70 m/s2 (50 m/s2 for SRT2-ATT02)
Shock resistance 200 m/s2
Dielectric strength 500 VAC (between insulated circuits)
Ambient temperature Operating: –10°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –25°C to 65°C
Ambient humidity Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85%
Mounting strength No damage when 100 N pull load was applied in all directions (40 N load for SRT2-ATT02)
Terminal strength No damage when the following loads were applied:
Communications connector: 100 N
Sensor connector: 40 N
MIL connector: 100 N
Screw tightening torque Communications connector: 0.25 N m
Node address setting Settings made at DIP switch (set before supplying power for Slave communications)
Weight Approx. 75 g max.
Note: The above current consumption is the value with all points turned ON excluding the current consumption of the external sensor connected
to the input Remote Terminal and the current consumption of the load connected to the output Remote Terminal.
SRT2-VID/VOD SRT2-VID/VOD
44
Nomenclature
SRT2-VID08S/SRT2-VID08S-1
SRT2-VOD08S/SRT2-VOD08S-1
(Sensor Connector Models)
SRT2-VID16ML/SRT2-VID16ML-1
SRT2-VOD16ML/SRT2-VOD16ML-1
(MIL Connector Models)
Communications
Connectors
I/O Connectors Indicators
DIP Switch
Communications
Connectors
I/O Connectors
Output HOLD/CLEAR Mode Setting
Communications Mode Setting
Node Address Setting
Reserved for System Use (Always OFF)
Indicators
Indicator Color Display Meaning
PWR Green Lit The communications power
supply is ON.
Not lit The communications power
supply is OFF.
COMM Yellow Lit Normal communications
Not lit A communications error has
occurred or the Unit is in
standby status.
ERR Red Lit A communications error
has occurred.
Not lit Normal communications or
the Unit is in standby status.
0 to 7
(for
8-point
I/O)
0 to 15
(for
16-point
I/O)
Yellow Lit The corresponding I/O
signal is ON.
Not lit The corresponding I/O
signal is OFF.
Name
Power
Communications
Communications
error
Input
(output)
Output HOLD/CLEAR Mode
SW8 (HOLD) Setting
OFF Output status is cleared.
ON Output status is maintained.
Communications Mode
SW7 (HOLD) Setting
OFF High-speed communications mode
ON Long-distance communications mode
Node Number Settings
Node number Pin 4 Pin 3 Pin 2 Pin 1
8 4 2 1
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 OFF OFF OFF ON
2 OFF OFF ON OFF
3 OFF OFF ON ON
4 OFF ON OFF OFF
5 OFF ON OFF ON
6 OFF ON ON OFF
7 OFF ON ON ON
8 ON OFF OFF OFF
9 ON OFF OFF ON
10 ON OFF ON OFF
11 ON OFF ON ON
12 ON ON OFF OFF
13 ON ON OFF OFF
14 ON ON ON OFF
15 ON ON ON ON
Note: Be sure to perform settings with the Slave
power supply OFF.
SRT2-VID/VOD SRT2-VID/VOD
45
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
SRT2-VID08S
SRT2-VID08S-1
SRT2-VOD08S
SRT2-VOD08S-1
SRT2-VID16ML
SRT2-VID16ML-1
SRT2-VOD16ML
SRT2-VOD16ML-1
SRT2-ATT01
SRT2-ATT02
Dimensions when Unit is mounted.
SRT2-VID/VOD SRT2-VID/VOD
46
Installation
Internal Circuit Configuration
SRT2-VOD08S-1
SRT2-VID08S SRT2-VID08S-1
SRT2-VOD08S
SRT2-VID16ML SRT2-VID16ML-1
SRT2-VOD16ML SRT2-VOD16ML-1
Photocoupler
Photocoupler Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Voltage
drop
Voltage
drop
Voltage
drop
Voltage
drop
SRT2-VID/VOD SRT2-VID/VOD
47
Terminal Arrangement and I/O Device Connection Examples
SRT2-VID08S SRT2-VID08S-1
SRT2-VID16ML SRT2-VID16ML-1
SRT2-VOD08S
SRT2-VOD16ML
SRT2-VOD08S-1
SRT2-VOD16ML-1
CompoBus/S
communications CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
I/O power
supply
Pin numbers
CompoBus/S
communications CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
I/O power
supply
Pin numbers
CompoBus/S
communications
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
I/O power
supply
Pin numbers
CompoBus/S
communications CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
I/O power
supply
Pin numbers
CompoBus/S
communications CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
I/O power
supply
Pin numbers
CompoBus/S
communications CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
I/O power
supply
Pin numbers
CompoBus/S
communications CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
I/O power
supply
Pin numbers
CompoBus/S
communications CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
I/O power
supply
Pin numbers
Sensor
Brown (Red)
Black (White)
Blue (Black)
Three-wired sensor
Sensor
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
Two-wired sensor
Sensor
Three-wired sensor
Sensor
Two-wired sensor
Sensor
Three-wired sensor
Sensor
Two-wired sensor
Sensor
Three-wired sensor
Sensor
Two-wired sensor
Output
device
Solenoid etc.
Output
device
Valve etc.
Output
device
Solenoid etc.
Output
device
Valve etc.
Output
device
Solenoid etc.
Output
device
Valve etc.
Output
device
Solenoid etc.
Output
device
Valve etc.
Brown (Red)
Black (White)
Blue (Black)
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
Brown (Red)
Black (White)
Blue (Black)
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
Brown (Red)
Black (White)
Blue (Black)
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
Note: 1. V terminals and G terminals are respectively connected internally.
When supplying power for I/O from communications connectors, power can be supplied to the sensor output devices from V and G
terminals.
2. When using an inductive load (solenoid, valve etc.), either use one with an internal reverse electromotive force absorption diode or
attach a diode externally.
SRT2-VID/VOD SRT2-VID/VOD
48
Precautions
Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using
the Unit.
Refer to page 80 for common precautions.
Communications Connector Pin Arrangement
24-VDC
communications
power supply
24-VDC I/O
power supply
CompoBus/S communications
The following solderless terminals are recommended.
• Manufacturer: Weidmuller
Sleeve (Part No. 046290)
Solderless
terminal
Cable
Two-wire insertion (Part No. 901851)
Solderless
terminal
Cable
The following product is a dedicated tool.
• Manufacturer: Weidmuller
PZ1.5 Crimper (Part No. 900599)
Sensor Connector Pin Arrangement
SRT2-VID08S/VID08S-1
SRT2-VOD08S/VOD08S-1
Model Cable conductor size
XS8A-0441 0.3 to 0.5 mm2
XS8A-0442 0.14 to 0.2 mm2
Note: The XS8A-0441 or XS8A-0442 Connector is not provided
with the SRT-VID or SRT2-VOD. Place an order for the connector
separately.
Calculate the cable conductor size as follows.
The following information is given on each sensor cable:
Cable dia. (Number of conductors/Conductor dia.)
Conductor size (mm2) =
(Conductor dia./2)2 x p x Number of conductors
Example: E3S-A
4 dia. (18/0.12)
Conductor size (mm2) = (0.12/2)2 x 3.14 x 18 0.20
The conductor size is 0.2 mm2. Therefore, use the XS8A-0442.
MIL Connector Pin Arrangement
SRT2-VID16ML/VID16ML-1
Function Pin No.
Pin No.
OUT0
IN0
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
OUT5
IN5
OUT6
IN6
OUT7
IN7
G
G
V
V
20
20
18
18
16
16
14
14
12
12
10
10
8
8
6
6
4
4
2
2
Function
Function
Pin No.
Pin No.
OUT8
IN8
OUT9
IN9
OUT10
IN10
OUT11
IN11
OUT12
IN12
OUT13
IN13
OUT14
IN14
OUT15
IN15
G
G
V
V
19
19
17
17
15
15
13
13
11
11
9
9
7
7
5
5
3
3
1
1
SRT2-VOD16ML/VOD16ML-1
Function
Note: 1. No cable connector is provided. Order the connector
separately.
• Applicable Connector
XG4M-2030-T
• Applicable Connector Cables
G79-O50C
G79-O25C
G79-I50C
G79-I25C
2. Refer to the following table for ordering information on
the applicable Cables.
SRT2-VID/VOD SRT2-VID/VOD
49
Applicable Cables
Connectable product Model Applicable Cable
I/O Block G7TC-OC16
G7TC-OC08
G7TC-ID16-5
G7TC-IA16-5
G79-O50C (L = 500 mm)
G7TC IA16 G7VC Series
G70A Series
G70D Series
e G79-O25C (L = 250 mm)
Connector-Terminal Conversion Unit XW2B Series
Digital Display Unit M7F
I/O Block G7TC-ID16
G7TC-IA16
e
G79-I50C (L = 500 mm)
G7TC-OC16-1
G79-I25C (L = 250 mm)
50
Sensor Terminal SRT1-D08S
Connector Connection Models that
Allows Easy Connection to Sensors and
Output Devices
Sensors with easy-to-wire connectors are easily
attached or detached.
Connects to 2-wired sensors.
Remote teaching of the Sensor Terminal is possible
with the PC by using output signals of the Sensor
Terminal.
DIN track mounting and screw mounting are
available.
Ordering Information
Classification Internal I/O circuit common I/O points Model
For input NPN (– common) 8 input points SRT1-ID08S
For I/O NPN (– common) 4 input/4 output points SRT1-ND08S
For output NPN (– common) 8 output points SRT1-OD08S
Specifications
Ratings
Input
Item SRT1-ID08S/-ND08S
Input current 10 mA max./point
ON delay time 1 ms max.
OFF delay time 1.5 ms max.
ON voltage 12 VDC min. between each input terminal and VCC, the external sensor power supply
OFF voltage 4 VDC max. between each input terminal and VCC, the external sensor power supply
OFF current 1 mA max.
Insulation method Photocoupler
Input indicator LED (yellow)
Output
Item SRT1-ND08S SRT1-OD08S
Rated output current 20 mA/point 30 mA/point
Residual voltage 1 V max. 0.6 V max.
ON delay time 1 ms max. ---
OFF delay time 1.5 ms max. ---
Leakage current 0.1 mA max.
Insulation method Photocoupler
Output indicator LED (yellow)
SRT1-D08S SRT1-D08S
51
Characteristics
Communications power supply
voltage (see note 1)
14 to 26.4 VDC
Current consumption (see note 2) 50 mA max. at 24 VDC
Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method
Secondary branches cannot be connected to T-branch lines.
Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 min (1-mA sensing current between insulated circuits)
Noise immunity Power supply normal: ±600 V for 10 minutes with a pulse width of 100 ns to 1 ms
Power supply common: ±1,500 V for 10 minutes with a pulse width of 100 ns to 1 ms
Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude
Shock resistance Malfunction: 200 m/s2
Destruction: 300 m/s2
Mounting method M4 screw mounting or 35-mm DIN track mounting
Mounting strength No damage when 50 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions (except the DIN track
directions and a pulling force of 10 N
Terminal strength No damage when 50 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions
Tighten each screw to a torque of 0.6 to 1.18 N m
Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –20°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85%
Weight SRT1-ID08S/OD08S: 100 g max., SRT1-ND08S: 80 g max.
Note: 1. The communications power supply voltage must be 20.4 to 26.4 VDC if the Unit is connected to 2-wired proximity sensors.
2. The above current consumption is a value with all the points turned OFF excluding the current consumption of the sensor connected
to the Sensor Terminal.
External Sensor Power Supply
Power supply voltage 13.5 to 26.4 VDC
Current consumption 500 mA max. in total
Nomenclature
SRT1-ID08S
SRT1-ND08S
CompoBus/S Terminals
Connect the CompoBus/S communications
cable.
Sensor Terminal
I/O Connectors
Connect the
cables from the
sensors here.
I/O Indicators
Indicate the status of each point.
(Lit when the input or output is ON.)
The SRT1-ID08S has 8 input indicators
and the SRT1-ND08S has 4
input indicators and 4 output indicators.
DIP Switch
The DIP switch’s pins have the
following functions:
Pins 1 to 4: Node number setting
Pin 5: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 6: Hold/clear outputs for communications
error
DIN Track Mounting Hook
Used when mounting the Unit
to a DIN track.
CompoBus/S Indicators
Indicate the operating status of the Slave and the status
of communications.
Mounting Screw Holes
Used when screwing the Unit to
a control panel.
Indicators
PWR
COMM
ERR
IN0 to 3
IN0 to 7
OUT0 to 3
Communications Power
Supply Terminals
Connect the communications
power supply.
SRT1-D08S SRT1-D08S
52
Indicators
Indicator Name Display Color Meaning
PWR Power supply Lit Green The communications power supply is ON.
Not lit The communications power supply is OFF.
COMM Communication Lit Yellow Normal communications
Not lit A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in standby status.
ERR Communication Lit Red A communications error has occurred.
error Not lit Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
0 to 3
(4 inputs/outputs)
Input Lit Yellow The corresponding input is ON.
0 to 7 (8 inputs) Not lit The corresponding input is OFF or the Unit is in standby status.
0 to 3
(4i t / t t )
o Output Lit Yellow The corresponding output is ON.
4 inputs/outputs) Not lit The corresponding output is OFF or the Unit is in standby status.
Switch Setting
All pins are factory-set to OFF.
Hold/Clear outputs for
Node number communications error
settings
Reserved (OFF)
Pin 5 (Reserved)
Always set pin 5 to OFF.
Output HOLD/CLEAR Mode (SRT-ND16S)
HOLD Function
OFF Output status is cleared when a
communications error occurs.
ON Output status is maintained when a
communications error occurs.
Node Number Settings
Node number 1 2 4 8
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 ON OFF OFF OFF
2 OFF ON OFF OFF
3 ON ON OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF ON OFF
5 ON OFF ON OFF
6 OFF ON ON OFF
7 ON ON ON OFF
8 OFF OFF OFF ON
9 ON OFF OFF ON
10 OFF ON OFF ON
11 ON ON OFF ON
12 OFF OFF ON ON
13 ON OFF ON ON
14 OFF ON ON ON
15 ON ON ON ON
SRT1-D08S SRT1-D08S
53
SRT1-OD08S
DIP Switch
Mounting Screw Holes
Used when screwing the Unit to a control panel.
CompoBus/S Indicators
Indicate the operating status of the Slave and the status of communications.
Output Indicators
Indicate the output status
of each channel.
Communications Terminals
Communications Power
Supply Terminals
Connect the communications
cable.
DIN Track
Mounting Hook
Used when mounting the Unit
to a DIN track.
Output Connectors
Connect the cables from
the output device.
Switch Setting
All pins are factory-set to OFF.
Hold/Clear outputs for
Node number communications error
settings
Reserved (OFF)
Pin 5 (Reserved)
Always set pin 5 to OFF.
Output HOLD/CLEAR Mode (SRT-ND16S)
HOLD Function
OFF Output status is cleared when a
communications error occurs.
ON Output status is maintained when a
communications error occurs.
Node Number Settings
Node number 4 3 2 1
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 OFF OFF OFF ON
2 OFF OFF ON OFF
3 OFF OFF ON ON
4 OFF ON OFF OFF
5 OFF ON OFF ON
6 OFF ON ON OFF
7 OFF ON ON ON
8 ON OFF OFF OFF
9 ON OFF OFF ON
10 ON OFF ON OFF
11 ON OFF ON ON
12 ON ON OFF OFF
13 ON ON OFF ON
14 ON ON ON OFF
15 ON ON ON ON
SRT1-D08S SRT1-D08S
54
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
SRT1-ID08S
Mounting Holes
SRT1-ND08S
Mounting Holes
100
Cover opening and
closing directions
Two, 4.2 dia or M4
Four, M3
50
50
70 max.
Four, M3
Cover opening and
closing directions
Two, 4.2 dia or M4
(75)
(75)
SRT1-D08S SRT1-D08S
55
SRT1-OD08S
100
Cover opening and
closing directions
(75)
2.8
37
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
7 Four, M3
50
40
92
40±0.2
92±0.2
Mounting Holes
4
6
Cable Connector for SRT1-OD08S
Applicable conductor size (mm2) Model
0.3 to 0.5 XS8A-0441
0.14 to 0.2 XS8A-0442
0.3 to 0.5 XS8B-0443
XS8B-0443
(Relay Socket )
XS8A-044
(Cable Connector)
Plug
connector
Cover
Model number
Pin number
Check window
Calculate the cable conductor size as explained below.
The following information is given on each sensor cable:
Cable dia. (Number of conductors/Conductor dia.)
Conductor size (mm2) = (Conductor dia./2)2 x p x Number of conductors
Example: E3S-A
4 dia. (18/0.12)
Conductor size (mm2) = (0.12/2)2 x 3.14 x 18 0.20
The conductor size is 0.2 mm2. Therefore, use the XS8A-0442.
SRT1-D08S SRT1-D08S
56
Installation
Internal Circuit Configuration
SRT1-ID08S SRT1-ND08S
Internal
circuit
Photocoupler
Internal
circuit
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
SRT1-OD08S
Internal
circuit
For one output
External Connections
SRT1-ID08S SRT1-ND08S
Three-wired Sensor Two-wired Sensor Sensor with Teaching Function
Sensor with External Diagnostic function
Sensor with Bank-switching Function
Three-wired Sensor
Brown
Black
Blue
Sensor
Brown
Blue
Sensor
Brown
Black
Pink
Blue
Sensor
Brown
Black
Blue
Sensor
Two-wired Sensor
Brown
Blue
Sensor
SRT1-D08S SRT1-D08S
57
Terminal Arrangement and I/O Device Connection Example
Input
SRT1-ID08S
I/O
SRT1-ND08S
Photoelectric Sensor
Proximity Sensor
(Sensor with Teaching Function, Sensor with External Diagnostic
function, Sensor with Bank-switching Function)
24 VDC
Communications
power supply
CompoBus/S
communications
CompoBus/S
communications
Communications
power supply
Blue
Brown
Blue
Black
Brown
Photoelectric Sensor
Proximity Sensor
(3-wired Sensor)
Proximity Sensor
(2-wired Sensor)
CompoBus/S
communications
Communications
power supply
CompoBus/S
communications
Communications
power supply
Brown
Brown
Blue
24 VDC
Orange
CompoBus/S
CompoBus/S
Output
SRT1-OD08S CompoBus/S
SOURCE
24 VDC
BDL BDH – +
CompoBus/S
communications
Communications
power supply
Output connector
Pin number
Solenoid, etc. Valve, etc.
Precautions
Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using
the Unit.
General Safety Precautions
Installation Environment
Do not install the Unit in the following places.
• Places with water, oil, or chemical sprayed on the Unit.
• Places with rapid temperature changes.
• Places with high humidity resulting in condensation.
• Places with intense electric and magnetic fields.
• Places with excessive vibration or shock.
Wiring
To prevent inductive noise, do not wire power lines or high-tension
lines along with or near the cables.
Make sure that the polarity of each terminal is correct.
Make sure that the communications path and power line are connected
correctly.
Secure the cables properly. Do not pull the cables with strong force,
otherwise the cables may be disconnected from the terminals or
connectors of the Unit.
Do not touch the Unit when the Unit is used in places with high ambient
temperatures because the surface temperature of the Unit may
be high.
Do not use paint thinner to clean the surface of the Unit, otherwise
the surface will be damaged or discolored.
SRT1-D08S SRT1-D08S
58
Correct Use
Use the Unit under its rated conditions.
Mount the Unit with M4 screws or to DIN tracks securely.
Typical Causes of Communications Errors
• The cables are not connected correctly.
• The node number setting is incorrect.
• The baud rate setting is incorrect.
• There is a strong noise source, such as an inverter motor, near
the Unit. Install the Unit as far as possible from the noise source
or shield the noise source.
Others
Use OMRON’s XS8A-0441 or XS8A-0442 Connectors with the
Unit.
Insert each connector into the Unit until the connector snaps in
place. Make sure that terminal number 1 of the connector is on the
lock lever side when inserting the connector.
Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) for wiring the
Unit.
59
Sensor Amplifier Terminal SRT1-D04S
Snap On to Connect and
Save Wiring Effort
The 4-channel fiber photoelectric amplifiers in
Terminals with connectors offer a low cost and
space savings.
The product lineup included Terminal Block Units
for easy connection to sensors with amplifiers, limit
switches, etc.
Connect to up to eight channels of sensors by using
Expansion Blocks.
Features
Low Cost and Space Savings with
Four-channel Fiber Connectors
Just Snap On to Connect
Connector Units
Fiber connector (1 channel)
Fiber connector (4 channels)
Terminal Block Unit
Photoelectric sensor
Various input units
can be connected.
Proximity sensor
Basic switch and limit switch
SRT1-D04S SRT1-D04S
60
Ordering Information
CompoBus/S Sensor Amplifier Terminals
Classification I/O points Model
Communications 4 SRT1-TID04S
SRT1-TKD04S
Expansion SRT1-XID04S
SRT1-XKD04S
Connector Units
Classification Specifications Model
E3X-N Connector Type General-purpose, 1 channel E3X-NT16
Multi-functional, 1 channel E3X-NT26
Long distance, high accuracy, 1 channel E3X-NH16
Multi-functional, 4 channels E3X-NM16
Terminal Block Unit One input point E39-JID01
SRT1-D04S SRT1-D04S
61
Specifications
Characteristics
CompoBus/S Sensor Amplifier Terminals
Item Communication Terminals Expansion Terminals
Model SRT1-TID04S SRT1-TKD04S SRT1-XID04S SRT1-XKD04S
Communications power
supply voltage
14 to 26.4 VDC (See note 1) --- ---
I/O points 4 input points
Connected sensors Total of four E3X-NT6
or E39-JID01
(See note 2)
One E3X-NM16
(See note 2)
Total of four E3X-NT6
or E39-JID01
One E3X-NM16
Current consumption 60 mA max. (See note 3) 10 mA max. (See note 3)
Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 min (1-mA sensing current between insulated circuits)
Noise immunity Power supply normal: ±600 V for 10 minutes with a pulse width of 100 ns to 1 ms
Power supply common: ±1,500 V for 10 minutes with a pulse width of 100 ns to 1 ms
Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude
Shock resistance Malfunction: 200 m/s2
Destruction: 300 m/s2
Mounting method M4 screw mounting or 35-mm DIN track mounting
Mounting strength No damage when 50 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions
(except the DIN track directions and a pulling force of 10 N
Terminal strength No damage when 49 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions.
Tighten each screw to a torque of 0.6 to 1.18 N m.
Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –20°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85%
Weight 70 g max. 65 g max. 45 g max. 35 g max.
Note: 1. The communications power supply voltage must be 20.4 to 26.4 VDC if the Terminal is connected to 2-wired proximity sensors.
2. When adding Connector Units, use SRT1-XID04S or SRT1-XKD04S.
3. The value doesn’t include the current consumption of Connector Units.
With E3X-N Connectors
Model E3X-NH16 E3X-NT16 E3X-NT26 E3X-NM16
Current consumption 75 mA max. 50 mA max. 150 mA
Response time 1 ms max. (4.0 ms max.
when connected to the
SRM1-D04S)
500 mS max. (2.0 ms max. when connected to the SRT1-D04S)
Timer function Not available OFF-delay timer (fixed to 40 ms)
Remote teaching input Not available Available (Remote teaching disabled)
Indicator Orange LED: Lit during output operation
Green LED: Lit with stable light reception or no light
Teaching confirmation
function
Indicators (red/green LED) and buzzer
Output Light ON and Dark ON switch selectable
Ambient illumination Sunlight: 10,000 lux max.; incandescent lamp: 3,000 lux max.
Insulation resistance 20 MW max. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC at 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Vibration resistance Destruction:10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude
Shock resistance Destruction:500 m/s2
Mounting method Connector connection to the SRT1-D04S
Mounting strength No damage when 49 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions
Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –20°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85%
Weight 30 g max. 30 g max. 30 g max. 60 g max.
SRT1-D04S SRT1-D04S
62
Terminal Block Units
Model E39-JID01
Input current 10 mA max.
ON voltage 12 VDC min. between input terminal and external sensor power supply
OFF voltage 4 VDC max. between input terminal and external sensor power supply
OFF current 1 mA max.
ON delay time 1 ms max. (connected to SRT1-D04S)
OFF delay time 1.5 ms max. (connected to SRT1-D04S)
Input indicators LED (Orange)
External sensor current capacity 50 mA max.
Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude
Shock resistance Malfunction: 200 m/s2
Destruction: 300 m/s2
Mounting method M4 screws or 35-mm DIN track mounting
Mounting strength No damage when 50 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions
(except the DIN track directions and a pulling force of 10 N
Terminal strength No damage when 49 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions.
Tighten each screw to a torque of 0.6 to 1.18 N m.
Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –20°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85%
Weight 25 g max.
SRT1-D04S SRT1-D04S
63
Nomenclature
SRT1-TID04S
SRT1-TKD04S
Mounting Screw Holes
Communications
Terminals
Communications Power Supply
Terminals
Contact 0
Contact 1
Contact 2
Contact 3
DIN Track Mounting Hook
Node Number Settings
Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266)
for details on DIP switch settings.
Mounting Screw Holes
DIN Track Mounting Hook
Contacts 0 to 3
Communications Power Supply
Terminals
Connect a 24-VDC power supply.
Communications
Terminals
Connect a communications
cable.
DIP Switch
Indicators
Indicator Name Display Color Meaning
PWR Power supply Lit Green The communications power supply is ON.
Not lit
G ee
The communications power supply is OFF.
COMM Communications Lit Yellow Normal communications.
Not lit
e o
A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in standby status.
ERR Communications Lit Red A communications error has occurred.
error Not lit
ed
Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
SRT1-D04S SRT1-D04S
64
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
SRT1-TID04
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
Two, 4.5 dia.
Mounting Holes
(75)
3.4
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
Two, 4.5 dia. SRT1-XID04S
Mounting Holes
(75)
3.4
SRT1-D04S SRT1-D04S
65
SRT1-TKD04S
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
Two, 4.5 dia.
Mounting Holes
(75)
3.4
SRT1-XKD04S
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
Two, 4.5 dia.
Mounting Holes
(75)
3.4
SRT1-D04S SRT1-D04S
66
E3X-NM16
Output indicator Stability indicator
Eight, 2.4 dia.
E3X-NT6
Output indicator Stability indicator
Two, 2.4 dia.
SRT1-D04S SRT1-D04S
67
E3X-NH16
Light level indicators
Threshold indicators
Output indicator
Two, 2.4 dia.
E39-JID01 Output indicator
Installation
Internal Circuit Configuration
E39-JID01
Internal
circuit
SRT1-D04S SRT1-D04S
68
Precautions
Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using
the Terminal.
Refer to page 80 for precautions common to all SRT1 Terminals.
General Safety Precautions
Connector Units
Use only the Connector Units listed in this data sheet for the Sensor
Amplifier Units.
E39-JID01 Terminal Block Unit
Do not apply any voltage to the Terminal Block Unit.
Correct Use
Expanding Sensor Amplifier Terminals
1. Remove the cover from the side of the SRT1-TD04S. (See
Figure 1.)
2. When the cover is removed, you can see the expansion
connector inside.
3. Connect this expansion connector to the connector located
on the side of the SRT1-XD04S. (See Figure 2.)
Figure 1
Cover
Figure 2
Connector
Attaching and Removing Connector Units
(SRT1-TID04S, SRT1-XID04S, E3X-NT6, E39-JID01)
Attaching Connector Units
1. Hook Section A of the Connector Unit onto Section B of the
Sensor Amplifier Terminal.
2. Push in the Connector Unit until Section C locks inside
Section D of the Sensor Amplifier Terminal.
Section C
Section D
Section A
Section B
Bottom View
Section A
Removing Connector Units
1. While pushing Section D, pull the Connector Unit in direction
E.
2. When Section D releases from the lock, the Connector Unit
can be removed.
Push here
Section D
SRT1-D04S SRT1-D04S
69
Attaching or Removing Connector Unit
(SRT1-TKD04S, SRT1-XKD04S, E3X-NM16)
Attaching Connector Unit
1. Hook Section A of the Connector Unit onto Section B of the
Sensor Amplifier Terminal.
2. Push in the Connector Unit until Section C locks inside
Section D of the Sensor Amplifier Terminal.
Bottom View
Section A
Section C
Section D
Section A
Section B
Removing Connector Unit
1. While pushing Section D, pull the Connector Unit in direction
E.
2. When Section D releases from the lock, the Connector Unit
can be removed.
Push here
Section D
Channel Numbers
Channel numbers 1 to 4 of the E3X-NM16 correspond to contact
numbers 0 to 3 of the SRT1-TKD04S, and to contact numbers 4 to 7
of the SRT1-XKD04S.
70
Analog Input Terminal SRT2-AD04
Compact Analog Input Model is the
Same Shape as 16-point Remote I/O
Terminals
Allows flexible input point settings up to a maximum
of four points.
Resolution: 1/6,000
Takes only 1 ms to exchange each input point.
Wide input ranges available.
105 x 48 x 50 (W x H x D)
Ordering Information
Classification I/O points Model
Analog Input Terminal 1 to 4 (selectable with DIP switch) SRT2-AD04
Note: For details about connecting the SRT2-AD04 to the Master Unit. Refer to page 10.
Specifications
Ratings
Input
Item Voltage input Current input
Max. signal input ±15 V ±30 mA
Input impedance 1 MW max. Approx. 250 W
Resolution 1/6,000 (FS)
Total 25°C ±0.3% FS ±0.4% FS
accuracy –10 to 55°C ±0.6% FS ±0.8% FS
Conversion time 4 ms/4 points, 3 ms/3 points, 2 ms/2 points, and 1 ms/1 point
Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 min between communications power supply, analog input, and communications terminals (see note)
Note: There is no insulation between analog inputs.
Characteristics
Communications power supply voltage 14 to 26.4 VDC (possible to provide through dedicated flat cable)
Current consumption 100 mA max.
Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method
Secondary branches cannot be connected to T-branch lines.
Dielectric strength 500 VAC (between insulated circuits)
Noise immunity Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 kV (power lines)
Vibration resistance 10 to 150 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude or 70 m/s2
Shock resistance 200 m/s2
Mounting strength No damage with 100 N pull load applied in all directions.
Terminal strength No damage with 100 N pull load applied
Screw tightening torque 0.3 to 0.5 N m
Ambient temperature Operating: –10°C to 55°C
Storage: –25°C to 65°C
Ambient humidity Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Weight Approx. 120 g
SRT2-AD04 SRT2-AD04
71
Nomenclature
SRT2-AD04
Mounting Screw Holes
DIN Track Mounting Hook
Terminal Block
Indicators
Indicators
Indicator Name Color Display Meaning
PWR Power supply Green Lit The communications power supply is ON.
Not lit The communications power supply is OFF.
COMM Communication Yellow Lit Normal communications
Not lit A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in standby status.
ERR Communication Red Lit A communications error has occurred.
error Not lit Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
U.ERR Unit error Red Lit An error has occurred in the Unit.
Not lit Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
DIP Switch (SW101)
(Open cover to access.)
Pin 1 Pin 2 Input points
OFF OFF 4 points (default setting)
OFF ON 3 points (inputs 0 to 2 enabled)
ON OFF 2 points (inputs 0 and 2 enabled)
ON ON 1 point (input 0 enabled)
Pin 3 Communications mode
OFF High-speed communications (default setting)
ON Long-distance communications
Pin 4 Be sure to turn OFF.
Pin No. Node address
Pin 5 23
Pin 6 22
Pin 7 21
Pin 8 20
The default setting is for all of these pins to be OFF.
DIP Switch (SW102)
(Open cover to access.)
Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Range for inputs 0, 1
Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Range for inputs 2, 3
OFF OFF OFF 0 to 5 (V) (default setting)
ON OFF OFF 1 to 5 (V)
OFF ON OFF 0 to 10 (V)
ON ON OFF –10 to 10 (V)
OFF OFF ON 4 to 20 (mA)
ON OFF ON 0 to 20 (mA)
Do not make any settings other than the ones listed above.
Pin 7 Mean value processing
OFF Without mean value processing (default setting)
ON With mean value processing (mean for 8 operations)
Pin 8 Be sure to turn OFF.
SRT2-AD04 SRT2-AD04
72
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
SRT2-AD04
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
Installation
Internal Circuit Configuration
SRT2-AD04
Isolation
DC-DC static
converter
Internal circuit
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Analog ground
Terminal Arrangement
SRT2-AD04
Note: When the input is current input, short-circuit the “V+” terminals
and the “I+” terminals. When short-circuiting, use the
short-circuiting tool provided as an accessory.
Precautions
Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using
the Unit.
For details about general precautions, refer to page 80.
Connections to the Master Unit
Connections cannot be made to the following Master Units. If the following
Master Units are connected, incorrect data may be transferred.
C200HW-SRM21 (-V1 and later versions supported)
CQM1-SRM21 (-V1 and later versions supported)
SRM1-C0, SRM1-C0-V1 (-V2 and later versions supported)
C200PC-ISA2-SRM
3G8B3-SRM0
SDD-CS1 (made by NKE Ltd.)
73
Analog Output Terminal SRT2-DA02
Compact Analog Output Model is the
Same Shape as 16-point Remote I/O
Terminals
Two output points or 1 output point is selectable.
Resolution: 1/6,000
105 x 48 x 50 (W x H x D)
Ordering Information
Classification I/O points Model
Analog Output Terminal 1 or 2 (selectable with DIP switch) SRT2-DA02
Note: For details about connecting the SRT2-DA02 to the Master Unit, refer to page 10.
Specifications
Ratings
Output
Item Voltage output Current output
External output permissible
load resistance
5 kW min. 600 W max.
Output impedance 0.5 W max. ---
Resolution 1/6,000 (FS)
Total 25°C ±0.4% FS
accuracy –10 to 55°C ±0.8% FS
Conversion time 2 ms/2 points and 2 ms/1 point
Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 min between communications power supply, analog output, and communications terminals (see note)
Note: There is no insulation between analog outputs.
Characteristics
Communications power supply voltage 14 to 26.4 VDC (power supply possible from dedicated flat cable)
Current consumption (see note) 170 mA max.
Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method
Secondary branches cannot be connected to T-branch lines.
Dielectric strength 500 VAC (between insulated circuits)
Noise immunity Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 kV (power lines)
Vibration resistance 10 to 150 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude or 70 m/s2
Shock resistance 200 m/s2
Mounting strength No damage when 100 N pull load was applied in all directions
Terminal strength No damage when 100 N pull load was applied
Screw tightening torque 0.3 to 0.5 N m
Ambient temperature Operating: –10°C to 55°C
Storage: –25°C to 65°C
Ambient humidity Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Weight Approx. 100 g
Note: The above current consumption is the value with all points turned ON excluding the current consumption of the external load.
SRT2-DA02 SRT2-DA02
74
Nomenclature
SRT2-DA02
Mounting Screw Holes
DIN Track Mounting Hook
Terminal Block
Indicators
Indicators
Indicator Name Color Display Meaning
PWR Power supply Green Lit The communications power supply is ON.
Not lit The communications power supply is OFF.
COMM Communication Yellow Lit Normal communications
Not lit A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in standby status.
ERR Communication Red Lit A communications error has occurred.
error Not lit Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
U.ERR Unit error Red Lit An error has occurred in the Unit.
Not lit A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in standby status.
DIP Switch (SW101)
(Open cover to access.)
Pin 1 Be sure to turn OFF.
Pin 2 Output points
OFF 2 points (default setting)
ON 1 point (output 0 enabled)
Pin 3 Communications mode
OFF High-speed communications (default setting)
ON Long-distance communications
Pin 4 Be sure to turn OFF.
Pin No. Node addresses
Pin 5 23
Pin 6 22
Pin 7 21
Pin 8 20
The default setting is for all of these switches to be OFF.
DIP Switch (SW102)
(Open cover to access.)
Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Range for output 0
Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Range for output 1
OFF OFF OFF 0 to 5 (V) (default setting)
ON OFF OFF 1 to 5 (V)
OFF ON OFF 0 to 10 (V)
ON ON OFF –10 to 10 (V)
OFF OFF ON 4 to 20 (mA)
Do not make any settings other than the ones listed above.
Pin 7 Pin 8 Output during communications error
OFF OFF Clear at the output lower limit when
communications error occurs. (default
setting)
OFF ON Clear at the output upper limit when
communications error occurs.
ON OFF Clear at the output lower limit when
communications error occurs (however, if
the range is –10 to 10 V, the output will be
0).
ON ON Output held when communications error
occurs.
SRT2-DA02 SRT2-DA02
75
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
SRT2-DA02
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
Installation
Internal Circuit Configuration
SRT2-DA02
Isolation
DC-DC
static
converter
Internal circuit
Output 0
Output 1
Analog ground
Terminal Arrangement
SRT2-DA02
Precautions
Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using
the Unit.
For details about general precautions, refer to page 80.
Connections to the Master Unit
Connections cannot be made to the following Master Units. If the following
Master Units are connected, incorrect data may be transferred.
C200HW-SRM21 (-V1 and later versions supported)
CQM1-SRM21 (-V1 and later versions supported)
SRM1-C0, SRM1-C0-V1 (-V2 and later versions supported)
C200PC-ISA2-SRM
3G8B3-SRM0
SDD-CS1 (made by NKE Ltd.)
76
Remote I/O Module SRT1-IDP/ODP
Module Type that Allows PCB Mounting
Compact size at 60 x 16 x 35 (W x H x D)
Lineup now includes the 16-point input model and
16-point output model.
Ordering Information
I/O classification Internal I/O circuit
common
I/O points Rated voltage I/O rated voltage Model
Input NPN (+ common) 16 24 VDC 24 VDC SRT1-ID16P
Output NPN (– common) SRT1-OD16P
Specifications
Ratings
Input (SRT1-ID16P)
Input current 2 mA max./point
ON delay time 1.5 ms max.
OFF delay time 1.5 ms max.
ON voltage 15 VDC min. between each input terminal and BS+ terminal
OFF voltage 5 VDC max. between each input terminal and BS + terminal
Output (SRT1-OD16P)
Rated output current 0.2 A/point, 0.6 A/common
Residual voltage 0.6 V max. between each output terminal and G terminal at 0.2 A
Leakage current 0.1 mA max. between each output terminal and G terminal at 24 VDC
SRT1-IDP/ODP SRT1-IDP/ODP
77
Characteristics
Communications power supply
voltage
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
I/O power supply voltage 24 VDC +10%/–15%
Current consumption (see note) 60 mA max.
Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method
Secondary branches cannot be connected to T-branch lines.
Connecting Units 8 Input Terminals and 8 Output Terminals per Master
Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 min (1-mA sensing current between insulated circuits)
5-V output current 20 mA max. (5 V 0.5 V)
LED drive current (COMM, ERR) 10 mA max. (5 VDC)
SW carry current
(ADR0 to 3, HOLD)
1 mA max.
Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –20°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85%
Weight 35 g max.
Note: The above current consumption is the value with all points turned ON excluding the current consumption of the external sensor connected
to the input model and the current consumption of the load connected to the output model.
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
SRT1-ID16P
SRT1-OD16P
Incorrect insertion
prevention pin
PCB dimensions (top view)
No cumulative tolerance allowed
16
2.54x15=38.1
27.94±0.1
2.54±0.1
2.54x15=38.1 8.95±0.1
1.53±0.1
0.63
27.94±0.1
1.6
1.6 dia.
0.63
3.5
2.54
35
60
2.2 dia. +0.1
0
32-0.9 dia. +0.1
0
SRT1-IDP/ODP SRT1-IDP/ODP
78
Installation
Internal Circuit Configuration
SRT1-ID16P SRT1-OD16P
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
External Connections
Communications
Two-wired
proximity
sensor
BS– or G
Input Module (SRT1-ID16P) Output Module (SRT1-OD16P)
Communications
Relay
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
D1: Reverse voltage prevention diode
Note: NC in parentheses is for the Input Modules.
Node Number Settings and
Output HOLD/CLEAR Mode
Internal circuit
BS– or G
Note: Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) for
details on the switch.
Indicators
R: LED current limiting resistor
LED1: LED for COMM
LED2: LED for ERR
The maximum current for LED1 and 2 is 10 mA.
Internal circuit
The 5-V Output Terminals have positive power supplies (maximum
output current of 20 mA) for the ERR and COMM LEDs. Recommended
LED colors are red for ERR and yellow for COMM.
SRT1-IDP/ODP SRT1-IDP/ODP
79
Precautions
Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using
the Unit.
Refer to page 80 for precautions common to all SRT1 Terminals.
Correct Use
Noise Protection Circuit
Add the following protection circuit if noise is generated from the
power supply, input section, or output section.
Power Supply Noise Protection Circuit
L: Coil for the common mode
Install the coil near the SRT1.
50 V
100 mF
50 V
0.1 mF
BS
L
V
BS
Input Section Noise Protection Circuit
C: 0.1 mF min.
R: Resistor for limiting current to PC
PC: Photocoupler
Input device
0 to 15
V
R
G
PC
C
Output Section Noise Protection Circuit
V1 and V2: Power supply.
R: Resistor for limiting current to PC
PC: Photocoupler
0 to 15 Load
G
V2
PC
R
V1
5-V Output Terminals
The 5-V Output Terminals have positive power supplies (maximum
output current of 20 mA) for the ERR and COMM LED. Use them as
shown below. Recommended LED colors are red for ERR and yellow
for COMM.
Wiring Method
R: LED current limiting resistor
LED1: LED for COMM
LED2: LED for ERR
The maximum current for the LED1 and 2 is 10 mA.
LED1
R R
5 VOUT
COMM
ERR
LED2
SRT SRT
80
Precautions
Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using
the Terminal.
The following precautions are the same for all SRT1 Terminals.
Refer also to the precautions specified for individual Terminals.
General Safety Precautions
Wiring
Turn OFF the Unit before wiring the Unit and do not remove the terminal
block cover or touch the terminal block while the Unit is turned
ON, otherwise an electric shock may occur.
Do not impose any voltage other than the rated voltage on the input
terminal. Doing so may result in damage to the Unit or cause the Unit
to malfunction.
Relay I/O Type
SRT1-ROC08 and SRT2-ROC16
Do not connect the Unit to loads operating at any voltage or consuming
a total current exceeding the permissible switching voltage
or current of the Unit. Doing so may result in the faulty insulation,
contact weld, or faulty contact of the relays, or damage to the relays,
or cause the relays to malfunction or burn.
The life of a relay varies with the switching condition. Test the relays
under the actual operating conditions before using the relays within
the permissible switching frequency. The use of deteriorated relays
may result in the faulty insulation of the relays or cause the relays to
burn.
Do not use the Unit in places with inflammable gas. Doing so may
result in a fire or explosion due to the heat of the relays or a spark
from the relays when they are switched.
Transistor, Power MOS FET, and SSR I/O Types
SRT1-OD04, SRT2-OD08, SRT2-OD16, SRT1-OD16P,
SRT1-ROF08, and SRT2-ROF16
Do not connect the Unit to loads consuming a total current exceeding
the rated output current of the Unit. Doing so may damage the
output element and a short or open-circuit malfunction may result.
If the Unit is connected to a DC inductive load, connect a diode to the
Unit to protect the Unit from counter-electromotive voltage, otherwise
the counter-electromotive voltage may damage the output element
and a short or open-circuit malfunction may result.
Correct Use
Replacing Relays
Use the relay removal tool to the left of the screw terminals to
replace relays.
Turn OFF the Unit to replace relays, otherwise an electric shock
may occur or the Unit may malfunction.
Installation Environment
Do not install the Unit in the following places. Doing so may result in
damage to the Unit or cause the Unit to malfunction.
• Places with direct sunlight.
• Places with ambient temperature ranges not within 0°C to 55°C.
• Places with rapid temperature changes resulting in condensation
or relative humidity ranges not within 10% to 90%.
• Places with corrosive or inflammable gas.
• Places with excessive dust, salinity, or metal powder.
• Places with vibration or shock affecting the Unit.
• Places with water, oil, or chemical sprayed on the Unit.
Screw Tightening Torques
Tighten all screws of the Unit properly, otherwise the Unit may malfunction.
• Tighten each terminal screw to a torque of 0.6 to 1.18 N m (6.2
to 12.0 kgf cm).
• Tighten each mounting screw to a torque of 0.6 to 0.98 N m (6.2
to 10.0 kgf cm).
Terminal screws
Mounting screws
Cleaning
Use alcohol or benzine to clean the surface of the Unit. Do not use
paint thinner to clean the surface, otherwise the surface will be damaged
or discolored.
Handling
Do not drop the Unit or shock or vibrate the Unit excessively. Doing
so may result in damage to the Unit or cause the Unit to malfunction.
Disassembling, Repairing, and Modifying
Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the Unit, otherwise an electric
shock may occur or the Unit may malfunction.
81
Position Driver FND-X-SRT
Advanced Servodrivers with Positioner
Functions
DIO and CompoBus/S Models are Newly
Added
Servodriver and positioner are combined into one
Unit.
Conventional U-series, U-series UE type, H-series,
and M-series AC Servomotors can be used.
Feeder control/DTP control and single operation/
automatic incremental/continuous operation are
available.
Easy to set, operate, and adjust.
Ordering Information
Specifications Model
CCoompooBuuss//SS mooddeelss For 200-VAC input 6 A FND-X06H-SRT
12 A FND-X12H-SRT
25 A FND-X25H-SRT
50 A FND-X50H-SRT
For 100-VAC input 6 A FND-X06L-SRT
12 A FND-X12L-SRT
Note: For details, refer to OMNUC FND-X-series User’s Manual (I524).
Specifications
General Specifications
Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C
Storage: –10°C to 70°C
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 90% (with no icing)
Storage: 35% to 90% (with no icing)
Operating atmosphere No corrosive gases
Dielectric strength 1,500 VACRMS for 1 min at 50/60 Hz
Insulation resistance 5 MW min. (at 500 VDC) between power input terminals and between the power terminal and
the case
Vibration resistance 10 to 150 Hz in X, Y, and Z directions with 0.10-mm single amplitude; acceleration: 9.8 m/s2
max.; time coefficient: 8 min; 4 sweeps
Shock resistance 98 m/s2 max., three times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Degree of protection Built into panel (IP00)
FND-X-SRT FND-X-SRT
82
Performance Specifications
Model (see note 1)
Item
FND-X06H-SRT FND-X12H-SRT FND-X25H-SRT FND-X06L-SRT FND-X12L-SRT
Continuous output current (0-P) 2.0 A 4.8 A 8.0 A 2.0 A 3.0 A
Momentary maximum output
current (0-P)
6.0 A 12 A 25 A 6.0 A 12 A
Input power supply Single-phase 200/240 VAC (170 to 264 V) 50/60 Hz Single-phase 100/115 VAC (85 to
127 V) 50/60 Hz
Position/speed
f db k
os o /U Series (INC) Optical Incremental encoder, 2,048 pulses/revolution
feedback U Series (ABS) Optical Absolute encoder, 1,024 pulses/revolution
U-UE Series Optical Incremental encoder, 1,024 pulses/revolution
H Series Magnetic Incremental encoder, 2,000 pulses/revolution
M Series Resolver, absolute accuracy 0.18° max.; ambient temperature 25°
Applicable load
inertia
U Series (INC) Maximum of 30 times motor’s rotor
inertia
Maximum of 20
times motor’s
rotor inertia
Maximum of 30 times motor’s rotor
inertia
U Series (ABS) Maximum of 20 times motor’s rotor
inertia
Maximum of 18
times motor’s
rotor inertia
Maximum of 20 times motor’s rotor
inertia
U-UE Series Maximum of 30 times motor’s rotor
inertia
Maximum of 20
times motor’s
rotor inertia
Maximum of 30 times motor’s rotor
inertia
H Series Maximum of 10 times motor’s rotor inertia
M Series Maximum of 10 times motor’s rotor inertia
Inverter method PWM method based on IGBT
PWM frequency 10 kHz
Weight Approx. 1.5 kg Approx. 2.5 kg Approx. 1.5 kg
Frequency response (speed
control)
100 Hz (at a load inertia equivalent to motor’s rotor inertia)
Position loop gain 1 to 200 (rad/s)
Feed forward 0% to 200% of speed reference
Pulse rate 1/32,767 (pulse rate 1 / pulse rate 2) 32,767/1
Positioning completion width 1 to 32,767 (pulses)
U Series (INC): 8,192 pulses/revolution; U Series (ABS): 4,096 pulses/revolution;
M Series 24,000 pulses/revolution
Acceleration/Deceleration time 0 to 9,999 (ms); acceleration and deceleration times set separately. Two types can be set for
each. S-curve acceleration/deceleration function available (filter time constant: 0.00 to 32.76 s).
Sequence input 19 pts. (limit inputs, origin proximity, RUN command, START, alarm reset, origin search, JOG
operation, teaching, point selection, position data, deceleration stop)
Photocoupler input: 24 VDC, 8 mA
External power supply: 24 VDC ±1 V, 150 mA min.
Sequence output 15 pts. (brake output, READY, origin search completion, origin, teaching, motor running,
positioning completion, alarm, point output, position selection, speed selection)
Open collector output: 24 VDC, 40 mA
Monitor output
(S t 2 )
o o ou pu Speed monitor 3 V/motor’s rated speed (output accuracy: approx. ±10%)
See note 2.) Current monitor 3 V/motor’s maximum current (output accuracy: approx. ±10%)
Regenerative absorption capacity 13 W + 17 J 24 W + 17 J 37 W + 22 J 13 W + 17 J 17 W + 17 J
Protective functions Overcurrent, overvoltage, voltage drop, resolver disconnection, power status error, clock
stopped, overcurrent (soft), speed amp saturation, motor overload, temporary overload,
resolver error, speed over, error counter over, parameter setting error, software limit over,
coordinate counter over, overrun, encoder disconnection, encoder communications error,
absolute encoder backup error, absolute encoder checksum error, absolute encoder absolute
error, absolute encoder over speed, encoder data not transmitted, BCD data error, present
value undetermined, PTP data not set
Note: 1. When using the 100-VAC-input Position Drivers in combination with the U-series or U-series UE type models, use 200-VAC Servomotors
(-HA, -TA , or -H models).
2. For the monitor output, the monitor items and voltage polarity can be set by parameter UP-25 (monitor output selection).
FND-X-SRT FND-X-SRT
83
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
200-VAC FND-X06H-SRT/-X12H-SRT
100-VAC FND-X06L-SRT/-X12L-SRT
200-VAC FND-X25H-SRT
80
68 150
158
170
Three, 6 dia.
158
68
Three, M5
Mounting Holes
Mounting Holes
119
150 107
158
170
Three, 6 dia.
158
Three, M5
107
Position Drivers
Item Model Continuous
output current
(0-P)
Momentary
maximum output
current (0-P)
Input power
supply
Inverter
method
PWM
frequency
Weight
200-VAC input FND-X06H-SRT 2.0 A 6.0 A Single-phase
200/240 VAC
PWM method
b d
10
kH
Approx.
1 5 k
00 C u
FND-X12H-SRT 4.8 A 12 A
S g e ase
(170 to 264 V)
e od
based on
IGBT
0
kHz
o
1.5 kg
FND-X25H-SRT 8.0 A 25 A
50/60 Hz
Approx.
2.5 kg
100-VAC input FND-X06L-SRT 2.0 A 6.0 A Single-phase
100/115 VAC (85
Approx.
1.5 kg
FND-X12L-SRT 3.0 A 12 A
to 127 V)
50/60 Hz
84
Peripheral Devices
Connectors, Cables, and
Terminal-block Terminator
Dedicated Flat Cable Allows
Communication Path Extension and
T-branching with Ease
Ordering Information
Product Appearance Model Specification
Branch Connector SCN1-TH4 ---
Extension Connector SCN1-TH4E ---
Connector Terminator SCN1-TH4T ---
Communications Cable SCA1-4F10 Flat cable, 100 m, 4 conductors
(0.75 mm2 each)
Terminal-block Terminator SRS1-T ---
Note: Branch Connectors and Extension Connectors are sold in blocks of 10 Units.
Peripheral Devices Peripheral Devices
85
Specifications
Ratings/Characteristics
Rated current 4 A
Contact resistance 20 mW max.
Insulation resistance 1,000 MW min. (at 500 VDC)
Withstand voltage 1,000 VAC for 1 min, leakage current: 1 mA max.
Cable pulling strength 50 N (5.1 kgf) min.
Operating temperature –20°C to 70°C
Materials
Housing PA66 resin (UL94V-2)
Branching and extension: Gray
Cover
Terminator: Black
Contact Phosphor bronze and nickel base, tin plated
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
SCN1-TH4 Branch Connector
SCN1-TH4E Extension Connector
SCN1-TH4T Connector Terminator
Peripheral Devices Peripheral Devices
86
SRS1-T Terminal-block Terminator
40
Two, 4.4 dia.
30±0.2
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
20
20
Mounting Holes
Precautions
Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using
the Unit.
Correct Use
The SCN1-TH4, SCN1-TH4E, and SCN1-TH4T are dedicated connectors
for CompoBus/S. Always use dedicated CompoBus/S
cables with these connectors.
Do not locate the cables in places where excessive force may be
imposed on the connectors of the cables such as an area where
cables may entangle feet.
These connectors cannot be reused once they have been attached
to cables. Use new connectors if they were not attached to cables
properly.
Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) to assemble
the connectors.
CompoBus/S CompoBus/S
87
Ordering Information
Note: Abbreviations for standards: U: UL, C: CSA, CE: EC Directive
Product Appearance Model Specifications Standards
Master Control Units SRM1-C01-V2 Stand-alone model with built-in
controller functions (without
RS-232C)
UL
CSA
CE
(see
SRM1-C02-V2 Stand-alone model with built-in
controller functions and RS-232C
note 2)
Master Units C200HW-SRM21-V1 For C200HX (-ZE), C200HG (-ZE),
C200HE (-ZE), and C200HS
CQM1-SRM21-V1 For CQM1
SYSMAC Boards C200PC-ISA02-SRM
C200PC-ISA12-SRM
For C200HX/HG/HE ---
I/O Link Unit CPM1A-SRT21 8 inputs
8 outputs
UL
CSA
CE
(see
note 2)
Remote Terminals
(Transistor Models)
SRT1-ID04
SRT1-ID04-1
SRT2-ID08
SRT2-ID08-1
SRT2-ID16
SRT2-ID16-1
SRT1-OD04
SRT1-OD04-1
SRT2-OD08
SRT2-OD08-1
SRT2-OD16
SRT2-OD16-1
4 transistor input (NPN)
4 transistor inputs (PNP)
8 transistor inputs (NPN)
8 transistor inputs (PNP)
16 transistor inputs (NPN)
16 transistor inputs (PNP)
4 transistor outputs (NPN)
4 transistor outputs (PNP)
8 transistor outputs (NPN)
8 transistor outputs (PNP)
16 transistor outputs (NPN)
16 transistor outputs (PNP)
Remote Terminals
(M3 Terminal Block Models)
SRT1-ID16T
SRT1-ID16T-1
SRT2-MD16T
SRT2-MD16T-1
SRT2-OD16T
SRT2-OD16T-1
16 transistor inputs (NPN)
16 transistor inputs (PNP)
16 transistor I/O points (NPN)
16 transistor I/O points (PNP)
16 transistor outputs (NPN)
16 transistor outputs (PNP)
CE
(see
note 2)
Remote Terminals
(Relay-mounted Models)
SRT2-ROC08
SRT2-ROC16
SRT2-ROF08
SRT2-ROF16
8 relay outputs
16 relay outputs
8 power MOS FET relay outputs
16 power MOS FET relay outputs
UL
CSA
CE
(see
note 2)
Connector Terminals SRT2-VID08S
SRT2-VID08S-1
SRT2-VOD08S
SRT2-VOD08S-1
SRT2-VID16ML
SRT2-VID16ML-1
SRT2-VOD16ML
SRT2-VOD16ML-1
SRT2-ATT01
SRT2-ATT02
8 transistor input (NPN)
8 transistor inputs (PNP)
8 transistor outputs (NPN)
8 transistor outputs (PNP)
16 transistor inputs (NPN)
16 transistor inputs (PNP)
16 transistor outputs (NPN)
16 transistor outputs (PNP)
Mounting hook A
Mounting hook B
CE
(see
note 2)
Sensor Terminals SRT1-ID08S
SRT1-ND08S
SRT1-OD08S
8 inputs (NPN)
4 automatic teaching points (NPN)
8 outputs
---
CompoBus/S CompoBus/S
88
Product Standards
Appearance Model Specifications
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
for CompoBus/S
SRT1-TID04S
SRT1-TKD04S
SRT1-XID04S
SRT1-XKD04S
--- ---
E3X-N Connector Type E3X-NH16
E3X-NT16
E3X-NT26
Long-distance, high-precision, 1
channel
General-purpose, 1 channel
Multi-functional, 1 channel
E3X-NM16 Multi-functional, 4 channels
Terminal Block Unit E39-JID01 One input point
Analog Input Terminal SRT2-AD04 1 to 4 inputs (set with DIP switch) CE
(see
note 2)
Analog Output Terminal SRT2-DA02 1 or 2 outputs (set with DIP switch)
Remote I/O Modules SRT1-ID16P
SRT1-OD16P
--- ---
Position Drivers FND-X06H-SRT 200-VAC input, momentary maximum
output current: 6.0 A
FND-X12H-SRT 200-VAC input, momentary maximum
output current: 12 A
FND-X25H-SRT 200-VAC input, momentary maximum
output current: 25 A
FND-X06L-SRT 100-VAC input, momentary maximum
output current: 6.0 A
FND-X12L-SRT 100-VAC input, momentary maximum
output current: 12 A
Branch Connector
Extension Connector
Connector Terminator
SCN1-TH4
SCN1-TH4E
SCN1-TH4T
---
Flat Cable SCA1-4F10 100 m
Terminal-block Terminator SRS1-T ---
Note: 1. Refer to the C200HS Catalog (P32).
Refer to the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE (-ZE) Catalog
2. Information on EC Directives
Individual OMRON products that comply with EC Directives conform to the common emission standards of EMC Directives. However,
the emission characteristics of these products installed on customers’ equipment may vary depending on the configuration,
wiring, layout, and other conditions of the control panel used. For this reason, customers are requested to check whether the emission
characteristics of the entire machine or equipment comply with the EMC Directives.
CompoBus/S CompoBus/S
89
Model Number Legend
SRT-
2 3 4 5 6 7
-1
1
1. Communications Mode
1: High-speed communications mode
2: High-speed/Long-distance communications mode
2. I/O Module Replacement
None: Impossible
R: Possible (Relays and power MOS FET relays)
3. I/O Specifications
I: Input
O: Output
N: Input and output (with remote teaching)
AD: Analog input
DA: Analog output
4. I/O Voltage Specifications
D: DC
C: AC/DC (contact type)
F: AC/DC (power MOS FET type)
5. I/O Points
04: 4 points
08: 8 points
16: 16 points
6. I/O Connection Method
None: Screw terminals
S: Connector
P: PCB terminals
7.
None: NPN
-1: PNP
CompoBus/S CompoBus/S
90
Notes:
Cat. No. Q103-E1-6 Note: Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan
0200-8C (0796) a
Authorized Distributor:
OMRON Corporation
Systems Components Division
66 Matsumoto
Mishima-city, Shizuoka 411-8511
Japan
Tel: (81)559-77-9633/Fax: (81)559-77-9097
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS, INC.
1 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL 60173
U.S.A.
Tel: (1)847-843-7900/Fax: (1)847-843-8568
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
83 Clemenceau Avenue,
#11-01, UE Square,
Singapore 239920
Tel: (65)835-3011/Fax: (65)835-2711
The essential guide
Harmony
Control and Signalling units
2013
Control and
signalling units
Harmony, simple and innovative solutions
for your applications
World leader in control and signalling components, Schneider Electric continues
its policy of innovation within the Harmony ranges in order to perfect the efficiency
of your dialogue solutions.
Invest with complete
peace of mind!
The right solution for your application
An offer unrivalled in content and
complementarity
Optimised cost saving solutions due
to increased flexibility of the offers,
enabling multiple combinations and
full compatibility
Quality you can rely on
Robust products that comply to the
highest quality standards
Valuable time that you save
Simple selection and quick installation
for all Harmony components
This document is a selection
of the top selling products.
For more information:
http://www.schneider-electric.com
Contents
Pushbuttons, switches, pilot lights and control stations
Ø 16, plastic bezel, Harmony XB6 .......................................................................................... 2 to 4
Ø 8 and 12, pilot lights, Harmony XVL .......................................................................................... 5
Ø 22, metal bezel, Harmony XB4 / Control stations Harmony XAP ...................................... 6 to 9
Ø 22, plastic bezel, Harmony XB5 / Control stations Harmony XAL ................................. 10 to 13
Ø 22, plastic bezel, wireless and batteryless, Harmony XB5R ........................................... 14 to 15
Ø 22, plastic bezel - Monolithic, Harmony XB7 .................................................................. 16 to 17
Ø 30, metal and plastic bezel, Harmony 9001K, 9001SK .................................................. 18 to 20
Cam switches
Harmony K series ............................................................................................................... 21 to 22
Signalling solutions
Ø 40, 60, 100 mm monolithic tower lights, Harmony XVC ........................................................... 23
Ø 45 mm monolithic beacons and tower lights, accessories, Harmony XVDLS / XVC ............... 24
Ø 70 mm modular tower lights (IP 66), Harmony XVB ................................................................ 25
Ø 70 mm modular tower lights (up to IP 54), Harmony XVE ....................................................... 26
Ø 45, 50 mm modular tower lights (up to IP 54), Harmony XVM / XVP ...................................... 27
Modular tower lights accessories, Harmony XV .......................................................................... 28
Ø 84, 106, 120, 130 mm rotating mirror beacons, Harmony XVR ............................................... 29
Accessories for rotating mirror beacons, Harmony XVR ............................................................. 30
Electronic alarms and multisound sirens, Harmony XVS ............................................................ 30
Components for hoisting applications
Pendant control stations, Harmony XAC ............................................................................ 31 to 32
Illuminated pushbuttons
Type of head Flush push
Shape of head rectangular (2)
Degree of protection IP 65 / Nema 4, 4X, 13 / Class II
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 16.2
mounting centres 24 x 18 with rectangular head, 18 x 18 with square or circular head
Dimensions (mm) W x H x D (below head) 24 x 18 x 50 with rectangular head, 18 x 18 x 50 with square or circular head
Connection (3) Tags for 2.8 x 0.5 Faston connectors or for soldering
Type of push Spring return
Complete products
12 … 24 V AC/DC
Products for user assembly
References white NO XB6DW1B1B ZB6Ep1B (1) ZB6Z1B ZB6DW1
NO + NC XB6DW1B5B ZB6Ep1B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DW1
green NO XB6DW3B1B ZB6Ep3B (1) ZB6Z1B ZB6DW3
NO + NC XB6DW3B5B ZB6Ep3B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DW3
red NC XB6DW4B2B ZB6Ep4B (1) ZB6Z2B ZB6DW4
NO + NC XB6DW4B5B ZB6Ep4B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DW4
yellow NO – ZB6Ep5B (1) ZB6Z1B ZB6DW5
NO + NC XB6DW5B5B ZB6Ep5B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DW5
Type of push Latching
References white NO – ZB6Ep1B (1) ZB6Z1B ZB6DF1
NO + NC XB6DF1B5B ZB6Ep1B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DF1
green NO XB6DF3B1B ZB6Ep3B (1) ZB6Z1B ZB6DF3
NO + NC XB6DF3B5B ZB6Ep3B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DF3
red NC XB6DF4B2B ZB6Ep4B (1) ZB6Z2B ZB6DF4
NO + NC XB6DF4B5B ZB6Ep4B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DF4
yellow NO – ZB6Ep5B (1) ZB6Z1B ZB6DF5
NO + NC – ZB6Ep5B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DF5
Pilot lights
Type of head Smooth lens cap
Shape of head rectangular (2)
Complete products Products for user assembly
12 … 24 V AC/DC
References white XB6DV1BB ZB6Ep1B (1) ZB6DV1
green XB6DV3BB ZB6Ep3B (1) ZB6DV3
red XB6DV4BB ZB6Ep4B (1) ZB6DV4
yellow XB6DV5BB ZB6Ep5B (1) ZB6DV5
blue – ZB6Ep6B (1) ZB6DV6
(1) Basic reference, to be completed by the letter B, G or M indicating the required voltage. See voltage table above.
(2) For products with a square head, replace the letter D in the reference by the letter C (XB6DW1B1B becomes XB6CW1B1B).
For products with a circular head, replace the letter D in the reference by the letter A (XB6DW1B1B becomes XB6AW1B1B).
(3) Alternative connection: 1 x 0.5 pins for printed circuit boards.
Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 16
with plastic bezel
Contact functions and light functions
with integral LED
(1):
Voltage Letter (p)
12…24 V AC/DC (15 mA) B
48…120 V AC (25 mA) G
230…240 V AC (25 mA) M
+ 0.2
0
Harmony
XB6
= + +
= +
Pushbuttons
Type of head Flush push
Shape of head rectangular (1)
Degree of protection IP 65 / Nema 4, 4X, 13 / Class II
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 16.2
mounting centres 24 x 18 with rectangular head, 18 x 18 with square or circular head
Dimensions (mm) W x H x D (below head) 24 x 18 x 50 with rectangular head, 18 x 18 x 50 with square or circular head
Connection (2) Tags for 2.8 x 0.5 Faston connectors or for soldering
Type of push Spring return
Complete products Products for user assembly
References white NO XB6DA11B ZB6Z1B ZB6DA1
NO + NC XB6DA15B ZB6Z5B ZB6DA1
black NO – ZB6Z1B ZB6DA2
NO + NC XB6DA25B ZB6Z5B ZB6DA2
green NO XB6DA31B ZB6Z2B ZB6DA3
NO + NC XB6DA35B ZB6Z5B ZB6DA3
red NO – ZB6Z1B ZB6DA4
NO + NC XB6DA45B ZB6Z5B ZB6DA4
(1) For products with a square head, replace the letter D in the reference by the letter C (XB6DA11B becomes XB6CA11B).
For products with a circular head, replace the letter D in the reference by the letter A (XB6DA11B becomes XB6AA11B).
(2) Alternative connection: 1 x 0.5 pins for printed circuit boards.
Ø 30 mushroom head Emergency stop pushbuttons (3)
Type of head Trigger action (EN/ISO 13850)
Shape of head cylindrical
Type of push Turn to release
Complete products Products for user assembly
References red 2 NC + 1 NO XB6AS8349B ZB6E2B ZB6Z5B ZB6AS834
Type of push Key release, 200
References red 2 NC + 1 NO XB6AS9349B ZB6E2B ZB6Z5B ZB6AS934
(3) Emergency stop trigger action and mechanical latching pushbuttons conform to standards EN/IEC 60204-1 and EN/ISO 13850, to Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and to standard
EN/IEC 60947-5-5.
+ 0.2
0
Contact functions
= +
= + +
Selector switches and key switches
Type of head Black handle
Shape of head rectangular (2)
Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 4, 4X, 13 / Class II
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 16.2
mounting centres 24 x 18 with rectangular head, 18 x 18 with square or circular head
Dimensions (mm) W x H x D (below head) 24 x 18 x 50 with rectangular head, 18 x 18 x 50 with square or circular head
Connection (3) Tags for 2.8 x 0.5 Faston connectors or for soldering
Type of operator Black handle
Complete products Products for user assembly
Number and type of positions 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions
stay put stay put spring return to centre
References NO XB6DD221B ZB6Z1B ZB6DD22 ZB6Z1B ZB6DD24
NO + NC XB6DD225B ZB6Z5B ZB6DD22 ZB6Z5B ZB6DD24
Number and type of positions 3 positions 3 positions 3 positions
stay put stay put spring return to centre
References NO XB6DD235B ZB6Z5B ZB6DD23 ZB6Z5B ZB6DD25
Type of operator Key, n° 200
Complete products Products for user assembly
Number and type of positions 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions
stay put stay put spring return to centre
References NO + NC XB6DGC5B ZB6Z5B ZB6DGC ZB6Z5B ZB6DGB
Number and type of positions 3 positions 3 positions 3 positions
stay put stay put spring return to centre
References NO + NC XB6DGH5B ZB6Z5B ZB6DGH ZB6Z5B ZB6DGS
Illuminated selector switches
Type of operator Coloured handle
Products for user assembly
Number and type of positions 2 positions 3 positions
stay put stay put
References white NO + NC ZB6Ep1B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DD02 ZB6DD03 ZB6YK1
green NO + NC ZB6Ep3B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DD02 ZB6DD03 ZB6YK3
red NO + NC ZB6Ep4B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DD02 ZB6DD03 ZB6YK4
(1) Basic reference, to be completed by the letter B, G or M indicating the required voltage. See voltage table above.
(2) For products with a square head, replace the letter D in the reference by the letter C (XB6DD221B becomes XB6CD221B).
For products with a circular head, replace the letter D in the reference by the letter A (XB6DD221B becomes XB6AD221B).
(3) Alternative connection: 1 x 0.5 pins for printed circuit boards.
(1):
Voltage Letter (p)
12…24 V AC/DC (15 mA) B
48…120 V AC (25 mA) G
230…240 V AC (25 mA) M
+ 0.2
0
Harmony
XB6
60° 60° 45°
60° 60° 60° 60° 45° 45°
70° 70° 45°
70° 70° 70° 70° 45° 45°
60° 60° 60°
Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 16
with plastic bezel
Contact functions and light functions
with integral LED
= +
= +
= + +
LED pilot lights With black bezel With integral lens cap
Type of head Protruding LED, Ø 8 mm Covered LED, Ø 8 mm Covered LED, Ø 12 mm
Degree of protection IP 40, IP 65 with seal (2)
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 8.2 mm Ø 8.2 mm Ø 12.2 mm
mounting centres 12.5 x 12.5 mm 10.5 x 10.5 mm 16.5 x 16.5 mm
Dimensions (mm) Ø x Depth (below head) Ø 12 x 32 Ø 10 x 34 Ø 16 x 45
Connection Tags (3) Tags (3) Threaded connectors
References (1) green XVLA1p3 XVLA2p3 XVLA3p3
red XVLA1p4 XVLA2p4 XVLA3p4
yellow XVLA1p5 XVLA2p5 XVLA3p5
Tightening key For Ø 8 mm pilot lights For Ø 12 mm pilot lights
References XVLX08 XVLX12
(1) Basic reference, to be completed by the number 1, 2, 3 or 4 indicating the required voltage. See voltage table above.
(2) For an IP 65 degree of protection, include the seals: XVLZ911 for pilot lights XVLA1pp and XVLA2pp; XVLZ912 for pilot lights XVLA3pp.
(3) Tags for 2.8 x 0.5 Faston connectors or for soldering.
Sub-assemblies & accessories for Ø 16
plastic bezel control and signalling units
Sub-assemblies Bodies for pushbuttons and
selector switches
Bodies for pilot lights
Rated operational characteristics, AC-15: Ue = 240 V and Ie = 1.5 A or Ue = 120 V and Ie = 3 A Consumption
Positive operation of contacts conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1: NC contacts with positive opening operation, 15 mA 12…24 V AC/DC
positive opening force 20 N 25 mA 48…120 V AC
25 mA 230…240 V AC
Type of Fixing collar Contacts Pilot light 12 … 24 V 48 … 120 V 230 … 240 V
contact + contacts bodies
References NO ZB6Z1B ZB6E1B White ZB6EB1B ZB6EG1B ZB6EM1B
NC ZB6Z2B ZB6E2B Green ZB6EB3B ZB6EG3B ZB6EM3B
2 NO ZB6Z3B – Red ZB6EB4B ZB6EG4B ZB6EM4B
2 NC ZB6Z4B – Yellow ZB6EB5B ZB6EG5B ZB6EM5B
NO + NC ZB6Z5B – Blue ZB6EB6B ZB6EG6B ZB6EM6B
LED pilot lights Ø 8 and 12
(1):
Voltage Number (p)
5 V (25 mA) 1
12 V (18 mA) 2
24 V (18 mA) 3
48 V (10 mA) 4
Accessories
Legend holders 24 x 28 mm (8 x 21 mm legend) 24 x 36 mm (16 x 21 mm legend)
Blank legend Background colour without legend yellow or white black or red without legend yellow or white black or red
References (10)* ZB6YD20 ZB6YD21 ZB6YD22 ZB6YD30 ZB6YD31 ZB6YD32
Blank legends for legend holders 8 x 21 mm (24 x 28 mm legend holder) 16 x 21 mm (24 x 36 mm legend holder)
Background colour – yellow or white black or red – yellow or white black or red
References (20)* – ZB6Y1001 ZB6Y2001 – ZB6Y4001 ZB6Y3001
Ø 45 mm yellow legend for mushroom head Emergency stop pushbutton
Marking Blank, for engraving EMERGENCY STOP ARRET D’URGENCE
References ZB6Y7001 ZB6Y7330 ZB6Y7130
Body/fixing collar Plate Tightening tool Dismantling tool
anti-rotation and slackening, for fixing nut for removal of contact blocks
References ZB6Y009 (10)* ZB6Y003 (10)* ZB6Y905 (2)* ZB6Y018 (5)*
Protective shutter for pushbuttons and switches Connector Blanking plug
for rectangular heads for circular and square heads Faston, female IP 65
References ZB6YD001 ZB6YA001 ZB6Y004 (100)* ZB6Y005 (10)*
* sold in lots of
Harmony
XVL
Pushbuttons, spring return
Type of head Chromium plated circular bezel
Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 4X, 13 / Class I
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 22.5 (22.4 recommended)
mounting centres 30 (horizontal) x 40 (vertical)
Depth (mm) below head 43
Connection (1) Screw clamp terminals
Type of push Flush Flush, booted
Unmarked Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly
References black NO XB4BA21 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BA2 XB4BP21 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BP2
green NO XB4BA31 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BA3 XB4BP31 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BP3
red NC XB4BA42 ZB4BZ102 ZB4BA4 XB4BP42 ZB4BZ102 ZB4BP4
yellow NO XB4BA51 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BA5 XB4BP51 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BP5
blue NO XB4BA61 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BA6 XB4BP61 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BP6
Type of push Flush
With international marking Products Complete For user assembly
References green NO XB4BA3311 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BA331 – – –
red NC XB4BA4322 ZB4BZ102 ZB4BA432 – – –
white NO XB4BA3341 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BA334 – – –
black NO XB4BA3351 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BA335 _ _ _
Type of push Projecting Mushroom head, Ø 40 mm
Unmarked Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly
References black NO – – – XB4BC21 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BC2
red NC XB4BL42 ZB4BZ102 ZB4BL4 – – –
Type of push Double-headed pushbuttons Triple-headed pushbuttons
Degree of protection IP 66 - IP 69K IP 66 - IP 69K
With international marking Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly
(A) (B)
References (A) NO + NC XB4BL73415 ZB4BZ105 ZB4BL7341 – – –
(B) NO + NC + NO – – – XB4BA711237 ZB4BZ103 +
ZBE102
ZB4BA71123
(1) Alternative connections: plug-in connector,
Faston connectors (6.35 and 2 x 2.8).
Ø 40 mm mushroom head Emergency stop pushbuttons (2)
Trigger action (EN/ISO 13850)
Type of push Push-pull NO + NC
Unmarked Products Complete For user assembly
References red NO + NC XB4BT845 ZB4BZ105 ZB4BT84
Type of push Turn to release NO + NC
References red NO + NC XB4BS8445 ZB4BZ105 ZB4BS844
Type of push Key release NO + NC
References red NO + NC XB4BS9445 ZB4BZ105 ZB4BS944
(2) Emergency stop trigger action and mechanical latching pushbuttons conform to standards EN/IEC 60204-1 and EN/ISO 13850, to Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and to standard
EN/IEC 60947-5-5.
Harmony
XB4
+ 0.4
0
Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 22
with metal bezel
Contact functions
+
= +
= +
Contact functions
Selector switches and key switches
Type of head Chromium plated circular bezel
Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 4X, 13 / Class I
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 22.5 (22.4 recommended)
mounting centres 30 (horizontal) x 40 (vertical)
Depth (mm) below head 43
Connection (1) Screw clamp terminals
Type of operator Key, n° 455
Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly
Number and type of positions (2) 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions
stay put stay put stay put stay put
References black NO XB4BG21 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BG2 XB4BG41 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BG4
Number and type of positions 2 positions 2 positions 3 positions 3 positions
spring return to left spring return to left stay put stay put
References
black NO XB4BG61 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BG6 – – –
black NO + NO – – – XB4BG33 ZB4BZ103 ZB4BG3
+ 0.4
0
Type of operator Handle
Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly
Number and type of positions 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions
stay put stay put spring return to left spring return to left
References black NO XB4BD21 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BD2 XB4BD41 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BD4
Number and type of positions 3 positions 3 positions 3 positions 3 positions
stay put stay put spring return to centre spring return to centre
References black NO + NO XB4BD33 ZB4BZ103 ZB4BD3 XB4BD53 ZB4BZ103 ZB4BD5
= +
= +
Type Double-headed pushbuttons with LED pilot light Illuminated selector switches
(1 flush green push, 1 projecting red push) (2 position stay put)
Degree of protection IP 66 - IP 69K IP 66
Light source Integral LED Integral LED
Products Complete Complete
Supply voltage 24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC 24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC
References green NO + NC – – – XB4BK123B5 XB4BK123G5 XB4BK123M5
red NO + NC – – – XB4BK124B5 XB4BK124G5 XB4BK124M5
orange NO + NC – – – XB4BK125B5 XB4BK125G5 XB4BK125M5
White NO + NC XB4BW73731B5 XB4BW73731G5 XB4BW73731M5 – – –
(1) Alternative connections: plug-in connector, Faston connectors (6.35 and 2 x 2.8), spring clamp terminal.
Harmony
XB4
Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 22
with metal bezel
Light functions
Pilot lights
Type of head Circular bezel
Smooth lens cap
Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 4X, 13 / Class I
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 22.5 (22.4 recommended)
mounting centres 30 (horizontal) x 40 (vertical)
Depth below head 43
Connection (1) Screw clamp terminals
Light source Integral LED Direct supply for BA 9s bulb (not included)
Products Complete Complete For user assembly
Supply voltage 24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC 250 V max., 2.4 W max.
References white XB4BVB1 XB4BVG1 XB4BVM1 XB4BV61 ZB4BV6 ZB4BV01
green XB4BVB3 XB4BVG3 XB4BVM3 XB4BV63 ZB4BV6 ZB4BV03
red XB4BVB4 XB4BVG4 XB4BVM4 XB4BV64 ZB4BV6 ZB4BV04
yellow XB4BVB5 XB4BVG5 XB4BVM5 XB4BV65 ZB4BV6 ZB4BV05
blue XB4BVB6 XB4BVG6 XB4BVM6 – – –
+ 0.4
0
Illuminated pushbuttons and selector switches
Type Flush push, spring return, illuminated pushbuttons
Light source Integral LED Direct supply for BA 9s bulb (not included)
Products Complete Complete For user assembly
Supply voltage 24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC 250 V max., 2.4 W max.
References white NO + NC XB4BW31B5 XB4BW31G5 XB4BW31M5 XB4BW3165 ZB4BW065 ZB4BW31
green NO + NC XB4BW33B5 XB4BW33G5 XB4BW33M5 XB4BW3365 ZB4BW065 ZB4BW33
red NO + NC XB4BW34B5 XB4BW34G5 XB4BW34M5 XB4BW3465 ZB4BW065 ZB4BW34
orange NO + NC XB4BW35B5 XB4BW35G5 XB4BW35M5 XB4BW3565 ZB4BW065 ZB4BW35
blue NO + NC XB4BW36B5 XB4BW36G5 XB4BW36M5 – – –
= +
= +
Separate components and accessories
Electrical blocks (1) (2)
Single contact blocks Light blocks with integral LED Light block, direct supply
Rated operational characteristics
AC-15, 240 V - 3 A Consumption
18 mA 24 V AC/DC
Positive operation of contacts NC contacts with positive
opening operation
14 mA 120 V AC
conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 14 mA 240 V AC
Screw clamp
terminal
Spring clamp
terminal
To combine with heads for integral LED For BA 9s bulb (not included)
24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC 250 V max., 2.4 W max.
References (5)* NC ZBE101 ZBE1015 white ZBVB1 ZBVG1 ZBVM1 ZBV6
NO ZBE102 ZBE1025 green ZBVB3 ZBVG3 ZBVM3 Colour provided by lens
red ZBVB4 ZBVG4 ZBVM4
orange ZBVB5 ZBVG5 ZBVM5
blue ZBVB6 ZBVG6 ZBVM6
Diecast metal enclosures
(Zinc alloy, usable depth 49 mm) 1 vertical row 2 vertical rows
Number of cut-outs Front face dimensions 1 2 3 4 2 4 6
References 80 x 80 mm XAPM1201 – – – XAPM1202 – –
80 x 130 mm – XAPM2202 XAPM2203 – – XAPM2204 –
80 x 175 mm – – XAPM3203 XAPM3204 – – XAPM3206
Accessories (2)
Legend holders, 30 x 40 mm, for 8 x 27 mm legends
Marking Background colour: black or red white or yellow
References (10)* Blank ZBY2101 ZBY4101
International 0 (red background) ZBY2931 I ZBY2147 AUTO ZBY2115 STOP ZBY2304 –
English OFF ZBY2312 ON ZBY2311 START ZBY2303 – –
French ARRET (red b/grnd) ZBY2104 ARRET-MARCHE ZBY2166 MARCHE ZBY2103 – –
German AUS ZBY2204 AUS-EIN ZBY2266 EIN ZBY2203 – –
Spanish PARADA (red b/grnd) ZBY2404 PARADA-MARCHA ZBY2466 MARCHA ZBY2403 – –
Legend holders, 30 x 50 mm, for 18 x 27 mm legends
Background colour black or red white or yellow
References (10)* Blank ZBY6101 ZBY6102
Ø 60 mm legend for mushroom head Emergency stop pushbutton
Background colour yellow
Marking Blank EMERGENCY STOP ARRET D’URGENCE NOT HALT PARADA DE EMERGENCIA
References ZBY9140 ZBY9330 ZBY9130 ZBY9230 ZBY9430
(1) Alternative connections: plug-in connector, Faston connectors (6.35 and 2 x 2.8), spring clamp terminal.
(2) Electrical blocks and accessories also for use with Harmony XB5 plastic range
* sold in lots of
Type of push Double-headed pushbuttons Triple-headed pushbuttons
Degree of protection IP 66 - IP 69K IP 66 - IP 69K
With international marking Products Complete
(A)
For user assembly Complete
(B)
For user assembly
References (A) NO + NC XB5AL73415 ZB5AZ105 ZB5AL7341 – – –
(B) NO + NC + NO – – – XB5AA711237 ZB5AZ103 +
ZBE102
ZB5AA71123
(1) Alternative connections: plug-in connector,
Faston connectors (6.35 and 2 x 2.8).
Harmony
XB5
Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 22
with plastic bezel
Contact functions
Pushbuttons, spring return
Type of head Circular bezel
Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 4X, 13 / Class II
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 22.5 (22.4 recommended)
mounting centres 30 (horizontal) x 40 (vertical)
Depth (mm) below head 43
Connection (1) Screw clamp terminals
+ 0.4
0
Type of push Flush Flush, booted
Unmarked Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly
References black NO XB5AA21 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AA2 XB5AP21 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AP2
green NO XB5AA31 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AA3 XB5AP31 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AP3
red NC XB5AA42 ZB5AZ102 ZB5AA4 XB5AP42 ZB5AZ102 ZB5AP4
yellow NO XB5AA51 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AA5 XB5AP51 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AP5
blue NO XB5AA61 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AA6 XB5AP61 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AP6
Type of push Flush
With international marking Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly
References green NO XB5AA3311 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AA331 – – –
red NC XB5AA4322 ZB5AZ102 ZB5AA432 – – –
white NO XB5AA3341 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AA334 – – –
black NO XB5AA3351 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AA335 – – –
Type of push Projecting Mushroom head, Ø 40 mm
Unmarked Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly
References black NO – – – XB5AC21 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AC2
red NC XB5AL42 ZB5AZ102 ZB5AL4 – – –
Ø 40 mm mushroom head Emergency stop pushbuttons (2)
Trigger action (EN/ISO 13850)
Type of push Push-pull NO + NC
Unmarked Products Complete For user assembly
References red NO + NC XB5AT845 ZB5AZ105 ZB5AT84
Type of push Turn to release NO + NC
References red NO + NC XB5AS8445 ZB5AZ105 ZB5AS844
Type of push Key release NO + NC
References red NO + NC XB5AS9445 ZB5AZ105 ZB5AS944
(2) Emergency stop trigger action and mechanical latching pushbuttons conform to standards EN/IEC 60204-1 and EN/ISO 13850: to Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and to
standard EN/IEC 60947-5-5.
+
= +
= +
10
Contact functions
Selector switches and key switches
Type of head Circular bezel
Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 4X, 13 / Class II
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 22.5 (22.4 recommended)
mounting centres 30 (horizontal) x 40 (vertical)
Depth (mm) below head 43
Connection (1) Screw clamp terminals
Type of operator Handle
Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly
Number and type of positions 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions
stay put stay put spring return to left spring return to left
References black NO XB5AD21 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AD2 XB5AD41 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AD4
Number and type of positions 3 positions 3 positions 3 positions 3 positions
stay put stay put spring return to centre spring return to centre
References black NO + NO XB5AD33 ZB5AZ103 ZB5AD3 XB5AD53 ZB5AZ103 ZB5AD5
Type of operator Key, n° 455
Number and type of positions (2) 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions
stay put stay put stay put stay put
References black NO XB5AG21 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AG2 XB5AG41 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AG4
(2) The symbol indicates key withdrawal position.
+ 0.4
0
= +
11
Harmony
XB5
Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 22
with plastic bezel
Light functions
Pilot lights
Type of head Circular bezel
Smooth lens cap
Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 4X, 13 / Class II
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 22.5 (22.4 recommended)
mounting centres 30 (horizontal) x 40 (vertical)
Depth below head 43
Connection (1) Screw clamp terminals
Light source Integral LED Direct supply for BA 9s bulb (not included)
Products Complete Complete For user assembly
Supply voltage 24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC 250 V max., 2.4 W max.
References white XB5AVB1 XB5AVG1 XB5AVM1 XB5AV61 ZB5AV6 ZB5AV01
green XB5AVB3 XB5AVG3 XB5AVM3 XB5AV63 ZB5AV6 ZB5AV03
red XB5AVB4 XB5AVG4 XB5AVM4 XB5AV64 ZB5AV6 ZB5AV04
orange XB5AVB5 XB5AVG5 XB5AVM5 XB5AV65 ZB5AV6 ZB5AV05
blue XB5AVB6 XB5AVG6 XB5AVM6 – – –
Illuminated pushbuttons and selector switches
Type Flush push, spring return, illuminated pushbuttons
Light source Integral LED Direct supply for BA 9s bulb (not included)
Products Complete Complete For user assembly
Supply voltage 24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC 250 V max., 2.4 W max.
References white NO + NC XB5AW31B5 XB5AW31G5 XB5AW31M5 XB5AW3165 ZB5AW065 ZB5AW31
green NO + NC XB5AW33B5 XB5AW33G5 XB5AW33M5 XB5AW3365 ZB5AW065 ZB5AW33
red NO + NC XB5AW34B5 XB5AW34G5 XB5AW34M5 XB5AW3465 ZB5AW065 ZB5AW34
orange NO + NC XB5AW35B5 XB5AW35G5 XB5AW35M5 XB5AW3565 ZB5AW065 ZB5AW35
blue NO + NC XB5AW36B5 XB5AW36G5 XB5AW36M5 – – –
Type Double-headed pushbuttons with LED pilot light Illuminated selector switches
(1 flush green push, 1 projecting red push) (2 position stay put)
Degree of protection IP 66 - IP 69K IP 66
Light source Integral LED Integral LED
Products Complete Complete
Supply voltage 24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC 24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC
References green NO + NC – – – XB5AK123B5 XB5AK123G5 XB5AK123M5
red NO + NC – – – XB5AK124B5 XB5AK124G5 XB5AK124M5
orange NO + NC – – – XB5AK125B5 XB5AK125G5 XB5AK125M5
white NO + NC XB5AW73731B5 XB5AW73731G5 XB5AW73731M5 – – –
(1) Alternative connections: plug-in connector, Faston connectors (6.35 and 2 x 2.8), spring clamp terminal.
+ 0.4
0
= +
= +
12
Separate components and accessories: see page 9.
Control stations
For XB5 pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights
Ø 22 with plastic bezel
Harmony
XAL
(1) Empty enclosures:
Basic reference: XALK0p, replace the p
by the number of cut-outs required (see
cut-out table above)
(1):
Number of cut-outs Number (p)
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
Complete stations with 1 pushbutton, selector switch or key switch
(light grey RAL 7035 base with dark grey RAL 7016 lid)
Degree of protection IP 65 / Nema 4X and 13 / Class II
Dimensions (mm) W x H x D 68 x 68 x 113 max. (with key release Ø 40 mushroom head pushbutton)
Fixing (mm) 2 x Ø 4.3 on 54 mm centres
Function 1 Start or Stop function 1 Start-Stop function
Marking On spring return push On legend holder and legend below head
Number and type of pushbutton/selector switch/key switch 1 flush green p/b 1 flush red p/b 1 projecting red p/b 1 2 position stay put selector switch or key switch
Black handle Key n° 455 (key withdrawal LH pos.)
References NO I XALD102 – – – –
Start XALD103 – – – –
O - I – – – XALD134 XALD144
O – XALD112 XALD115 – –
Function Emergency stop (2) (light grey RAL 7035 base with yellow RAL 1012 lid)
Number and type of mushroom head pushbutton 1 red Ø 40 head, turn to release 1 red Ø 40 head, key release
Latching mechanism Trigger action (EN/ISO 13850) Trigger action (EN/ISO 13850)
References NC XALK178 XALK188
NC + NC XALK178F XALK188F
NO + NC XALK178E XALK188E
NC + NC + NO XALK178G XALK188G
(2) Emergency stop trigger action and mechanical latching pushbuttons conform to standards EN/IEC 60204-1 and EN/ISO 13850, to Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and to
standard EN/IEC 60947-5-5.
(1) Empty enclosures:
Basic reference: XALD0p, replace the p
by the number of cut-outs required (see
cut-out table above)
Complete stations with 2 and 3 pushbuttons or 2 pushbuttons + 1 pilot light
(light grey RAL 7035 base with dark grey RAL 7016 lid)
Dimensions (mm) W x H x D 2-way control stations: 68 x 106 x 62; 3-way control stations: 68 x 136 x 87
Fixing (mm) 2-way control stations: 2 x Ø 4.3 on 54 x 68 centres; 3-way control stations: 2 x Ø 4.3 on 54 x 98 centres
Function Start-Stop functions 2 functions 3 functions
Marking On spring return push
Number and type of pushbutton/pilot light 1 flush green p/b 1 flush green pushbutton 1 flush white p/b 1 flush white p/b 1 flush white p/b
1 flush red p/b 1 flush red pushbutton 1 flush black p/b 1 flush red p/b 1 Ø 30 red mush-
1 red pilot light with integral LED 1 flush black p/b room head p/b
1 flush black p/b
24 V AC/DC 230 V AC
References NO + NC I - O XALD213 XALD363B XALD363M – – –
Start - Stop XALD215 – – – – –
NO + NO – – – XALD222 – –
NO + NC + NO – – – – XALD324 XALD328
Accessories Standard contact blocks Light blocks with integral LED, colour red
Description NO contact NC contact 24 V AC/DC 230 V AC
References ZENL1111 ZENL1121 ZALVB4 ZALVM4
13
Harmony
XB5R
Wireless and batteryless pushbuttons
Packages and components
Ready to use packs Panel mounting Mobile application
Wireless and batteryless 22mm pushbutton assembled on fixing collar Plastic head Metal head Plastic head Metal head Plastic head in handy box
Caps 1 black cap 1 set of 10 different
coloured caps
1 black cap 1 set of 10 different
coloured caps
Receiver Non configurable Configurable functions:
monostable, bistable,
stop/start
Non configurable Configurable functions:
monostable, bistable,
stop/start
Relay output 1relay output type RT 3A 2 relays output type RT 3A 1relay output type RT 3A 2 relays output type RT 3A
Voltage receiver 24 VDC 24….240 AC/DC 24 VDC 24….240 AC/DC
References XB5RFB01 XB4RFB01 XB5RFA02 XB4RFA02 XB5RMB03 XB5RMA04
The pushbutton and receiver are factory paired
Transmitter components for wireless and
batteryless pushbuttons
Plastic mushroom head Plastic head Metal head
Wireless and batteryless pushbuttons including - a transmitter fitted with fixing collar
- a spring return pushbutton head with clipped-in cap
Reference Cap colour White – ZB5RTA1 ZB4RTA1
Black – ZB5RTA2 ZB4RTA2
Green – ZB5RTA3 ZB4RTA3
White I on green background – ZB5RTA331 ZB4RTA331
Red – ZB5RTA4 ZB4RTA4
White O on red background – ZB5RTA432 ZB4RTA432
Yellow – ZB5RTA5 ZB4RTA5
Blue – ZB5RTA6 ZB4RTA6
Black ZB5RTC2 – –
Transmitter components for wireless and
batteryless rope pull switch
Rope pull switch with wireless and batteryless transmitter
Reference ZBRP1
14
Components and accessories
Configurable receivers
Description - 2 buttons (learn, parameter setting)
- 6 indicating LEDs (power ON, outputs, signal strenght)
Output function Monostable Monostable, bistable Monostable, bistable, stop/start
Output type 4 PNP outputs 200 mA / 24V 2 relay outputs type RT 3A
Receiver voltage 24 VDC 24….240 AC/DC
References ZBRRC ZBRRD ZBRRA
Configurable access point (1)
Description - 7-segment display
- jog dial
- 8 indicating LEDs (power ON, functions mode, communication status, signal strength)
- external antenna connector and protective plug
Output function Monostable
Output type 2 RS485 for Modbus RS485 serial line 1 slot for communication module ZBRCETH
Receiver voltage 24….240 AC/DC
References ZBRN2 ZBRN1
(1) Available 1st quarter 2013.
Complementary accessories Relay antennas Communication
module
Plastic empty boxes
Description 1 power-ON LED
2 LEDs reception /
transmission
1 RF connector
Modbus/TCP protocol
2 RJ45 connectors
Handy,
1 cut-out 1 cut-out 2 cut-outs
Cable lenght 5m 2m
Voltage 24….240 AC/DC
Reference ZBRA1 ZBRA2 (1) ZBRCETH (1) ZBRM01 XALD01 XALD02
(1) Available 1st quarter 2013.
15
Pushbuttons
Type of head Flush or projecting push
circular
Degree of protection IP 65, class II, NEMA type 3 and 12
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 22.4 (0 +0.1)
mounting centres 30 (horizontal) x 40 (vertical)
Dimensions (mm) Ø x Depth (below head) Ø 29 x 41.5 (Ø 40 x 41.5 for Emergency stop)
Connection Screw clamp terminals, 1 x 0.34 mm2 to 1 x 1.5 mm2
Type of push Flush, spring return Flush, push and latching
References (10)* white NO XB7NA11 –
NO + NC XB7NA15 –
black NO XB7NA21 XB7NH21
NO + NC XB7NA25 XB7NH25
green NO XB7NA31 XB7NH31
NO + NC XB7NA35 XB7NH35
red NC XB7NA42 –
NO + NC XB7NA45 –
yellow NO XB7NA81 –
Type of push Flush, spring return Projecting, spring return
References green NO XB7NA3131 –
red NC – XB7NL4232
white NO XB7NA11341 –
black NO XB7NA21341 –
NO + NC XB7NA25341 –
Selector switches and key switches
Type of operator Black handle Key, n° 455
Number and
type of positions
2 positions 3 positions 2 positions 3 positions
stay put stay put stay put stay put
References (10*) NO XB7ND21 – XB7NG21 –
NO + NC XB7ND25 – – –
2 NO – XB7ND33 – XB7NG33
Ø 40mm Emmergency Stop trigger action and mechanical latching pushbuttons (EN/ISO 13850, UL) (1)
Type of push Turn to release Push, Pull Key release (n° 455)
References* red NC XB7 NS8442 XB7 NT842 -
red NO + NC XB7 NS8445 XB7 NT845 XB7 NS9445
red 2NC XB7 NS8444 XB7 NT844 XB7 NS9444
(1) Emergency stop trigger action and mechanical latching pushbuttons conform to standards EN/IEC 60204-1 and EN/ISO 13850, to Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and to
standard EN/IEC 60947-5-5. Please consult your Customer Care Centre for a full explanation of these standards and directives.
* Sold in lots of 10.
Harmony
XB7
Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 22
with plastic bezel - Monolithic
Contact functions
16
Illuminated pushbuttons
Type of head Projecting push
circular
Degree of protection IP 65, class II, NEMA type 12
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 22.4 (0 +0.1)
mounting centres 30 (horizontal) x 40 (vertical)
Dimensions (mm) Ø x Depth (below head) Ø 29 x 41.5, (Ø 40 x 41.5 for Emergency stop)
Connection Screw clamp terminals, 1 x 0.34 mm2 to 1 x 1.5 mm2
Light source Integral LED BA 9s base fitting Incandescent bulb
direct supply (bulb not included)
Type of push Spring return
References (10)* green NO XB7NW33p1 (1) XB7NW3361
red NO XB7NW34p1 (1) XB7NW3461
NC XB7NW34p2 (1) _
orange NO XB7NW35p1 (1) –
blue NO XB7NW36p1 (1) –
clear NO XB7NW37p1 (1) –
yellow NO XB7NW38p1 (1) XB7NW3561
Type of push Push and latching
References (10)* green NO XB7NH03p1 (1) XB7NH0361
red NO XB7NH04p1 (1) XB7NH0461
NC XB7NH04p2 (1) –
yellow NO XB7NH08p1 (1) XB7NH0861
Pilot lights (2)
Light source Integral LED Ba 9s base fitting incandescent bulb Incandescent bulb
direct supply direct through resistor
(bulb not included) (bulb included)
Supply voltage 24VAC/DC or 120VAC or 230…240VAC 6 or 24 V DC, or 130 V AC 230 V AC
References (10)* clear XB7EV07pP (1) XB7EV67P XB7EV77P
green XB7EV03pP (1) XB7EV63P XB7EV73P
red XB7EV04pP (1) XB7EV64P XB7EV74P
yellow XB7EV05pP (1) XB7EV65P XB7EV75P
blue XB7EV06pP (1) XB7EV66P XB7EV76P
orange XB7EV08pP (1) XB7EV68P XB7EV78P
Incandescent bulbs, long life
BA 9s base fitting, Ø 11 mm max., length 28 mm max.
6 V (1.2 W) 24 V (2 W) 130 V (2.4 W)
References DL1CB006 DL1CE024 DL1CE130
(1) Basic reference, to be completed by the letter B, G or M indicating the required voltage. See voltage table above.
(2) Alternative connection: 1 x 6.35 and 2 x 2.8 mm Faston connectors.
* sold in lots of 10
Contact functions and light functions
(1):
Supply voltage for integral LED light source only Letter (p)
24 V AC/DC B
120 V AC G
230 V AC M
17
Pushbuttons, spring return
Type of push Flush Projecting Projecting (high guard)
Colour of push Multi-colour (set of 7 clip-in coloured caps)
Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 / Class II
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 31
mounting centres 57.2 x 44.5 (with legend 9001KN2pp), 57.2 x 50.8 (with legend 9001KN3pp)
Depth below head (mm) 42
Connection Screw clamp terminals
References CO 9001KR1UH13 9001KR3UH13 9001KR2UH13
NO 9001KR1UH5 9001KR3UH5 9001KR2UH5
Mushroom head pushbuttons, latching (1) Emergency switching off Emergency stop
Type of push Push-pull Turn-to-Release, trigger action
Ø 41 mushroom head Ø 35 mushroom head Ø 40 red mushroom head
Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 / Class II IP 66 / Nema 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 / Class III
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 31
mounting centres 57.2 x 44.5 (with legend 9001KN2pp),
57.2 x 50.8 (with legend 9001KN3pp)
57,2 x 44,5 (without legend plate),
100 x 100 ((with legend plate 9001KN8330) (2)
Depth below head (mm) 42 60
Connection Screw clamp terminals
References – – – 9001KR16
CO 9001KR9R94H13 9001KR9R20H13 –
NC 9001KR9RH6 9001KR9R20H6 –
2NO + 2NC – – 9001KR16H2
NO – – 9001KR16H13
(1) Mushroom head switching off mechanical latching pushbuttons conform to standard IEC 60364-5-53 and EN/IEC 60947-5-5. Mushroom head Emergency stop trigger action and
mechanical latching pushbuttons conforming to standard EN/IEC 60204‑1 and EN/ISO 13850, to Machinery directive 2006/42/EC and standard EN/IEC 60947-5-5.
Selector switches and key switches
Type of operator Long black handle Key, n° 455
positions (2) 3 - spring return 2 - stay put 2 - spring return 3 - stay put 2 - stay put
Number and type
of positions
Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 / Class II
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 31
mounting centres 57.2 x 44.5 (with legend 9001KN2pp), 57.2 x 50.8 (with legend 9001KN3pp)
Depth below head (mm) 42
Connection Screw clamp terminals
References NO – 9001KS11FBH5 9001KS34FBH5 – –
CO 9001KS53FBH1 – – 9001KS43FBH1 9001KS11K1RH1
(2) The symbol indicates key withdrawal position.
Harmony
9001K/SK
Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 30
with metal bezel
Contact functions
18
(2) For yellow circular Emergency Stop legend plates: see page 9
Pilot lights
Type of head Smooth lens cap
Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 / Class II
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 31
mounting centres 57.2 x 44.5 (with legend 9001KN2pp), 57.2 x 50.8 (with legend 9001KN3pp)
Depth below head (mm) 42
Connection Screw clamp terminals
Type of light block With high luminosity LED (included) Incandescent BA 9s bulb
(included)
24 V AC/DC 48 V AC/DC 120 V AC/DC 230 V AC
References green 9001KP35LGG9 9001KP36LGG9 9001KP38LGG9 9001KP7G9
red 9001KP35LRR9 9001KP36LRR9 9001KP38LRR9 9001KP7R9
yellow 9001KP35LYA9 9001KP36LYA9 9001KP38LYA9 9001KP7A9
Illuminated pushbuttons, spring return
Type of head Spring return flush push
Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 / Class II
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 31
mounting centres 57.2 x 44.5 (with legend 9001KN2pp), 57.2 x 50.8 (with legend 9001KN3pp)
Depth below head (mm) 42
Connection Screw clamp terminals
Type of light block With high luminosity LED (included) Incandescent BA 9s bulb
(included)
24 V AC/DC 48 V AC/DC 120 V AC/DC 230 V AC
References green CO 9001K3L35LGGH13 9001K3L36LGGH13 9001K3L38LGGH13 9001K2L7RH13
red CO 9001K3L35LRRH13 9001K3L36LRRH13 9001K3L38LRRH13 9001K2L7GH13
yellow CO 9001K3L35LYAH13 9001K3L36LYAH13 9001K3L38LYAH13 9001K2L7AH13
Illuminated Ø 41 mushroom head pushbuttons, latching, high luminosity LED
Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 / Class II
Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 31
mounting centres 57.2 x 44.5 (with legend 9001KN2pp), 57.2 x 50.8 (with legend 9001KN3pp)
Depth below head (mm) 42
Connection Screw clamp terminals
Type of light block With high luminosity LED (included) Incandescent BA 9s bulb
(included)
24 V AC/DC 48 V AC/DC 120 V AC/DC 230 V AC/DC
Type of head 2 position, push-pull
References red CO 9001KR9P35RH13 9001KR9P36RH13 9001KR9P38RH13 9001KR9P7RH13
Type of head 3 position, push-pull (pull: spring return, centre: stay put, push: spring return)
References red NC + NC
late break
9001KR8P35RH25 9001KR8P36RH25 9001KR8P38RH25 9001KR8P7RH25
Light functions
19
Contact blocks with protected terminals
Type of contact Single contact blocks
Connection Screw clamp terminals
References CO 9001KA1
NO 9001KA2
NC 9001KA3
CO, late break 9001KA4
NC, late break 9001KA5
NO, early make 9001KA6
Enclosures
Type Number of Ø 30 mm cut-outs NEMA ratings Reference
Aluminium 1 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, 13 9001KY1
2 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, 13 9001KY2
3 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, 13 9001KY3
4 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, 13 9001KY4
Stainless steel 1 1, 3, 4, 4X, 13 9001KYSS1
2 1, 3, 4, 4X, 13 9001KYSS2
3 1, 3, 4, 4X, 13 9001KYSS3
Legends
44 x 43 mm 57 x 57 mm Ø 60 Ø 90
Type Aluminium Plastic Plastic
Colour of legend black background white background Yellow background
Marking Blank 9001KN200 9001KN100WP 9001KN9100 9001KN8100
START 9001KN201 9001KN101WP – –
STOP (red background) 9001KN202 9001KN102RP – –
FORWARD 9001KN206 9001KN106WP – –
REVERSE 9001KN207 9001KN107WP – –
RESET 9001KN223 9001KN123WP –
PULL TO START/ 9001KN379 9001KN179WP – –
PUSH TO STOP
EMERGENCY STOP – – 9001KN9330 9001KN8330
ARRET D’URGENCE – – 9001KN9330F 9001KN8330F
PARADA DE EMERGENCIA – – 9001KN9330S 9001KN8330S
Harmony
9001K/SK
Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 30
with metal bezel
Accessories
20
Cam switches
12 and 20 A ratings
Harmony
K series
positions (°)
Cam switches, K1 / K2 series
Function Switches ON-OFF switches Stepping switches
45° switching angle 90° switching angle with “0” position
Degree of protection front face IP 65 (1) IP 65 (1) IP 65 (1)
Conventional thermal current (Ith) 12 A 20 A 12 A 20 A 12 A 20 A
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to IEC60947-1 690 V 690 V 690 V
Number of positions 2 2 2 + “0” position
Number of poles 2 2 2
Dimensions of front plate (mm) 45 x 45 45 x 45 45 x 45
Front mounting method Multifixing plate, 45 x 45 mm K1B002ALH K2B 002ALH K1B1002HLH K2B 1002HLH K1D012QLH K2D012QLH
Plastic mounting plate for Ø 22 mm hole K1B002ACH K2B 002ACH K1B1002HCH K2B 1002HCH K1D012QCH K2D012QCH
positions (°)
Cam switches, K1 / K2 series
Function Changeover switches Ammeter switches Voltmeter switches
Degree of protection front face IP 65 (1) IP 65 (1) IP 65 (1)
Conventional thermal current (Ith) 12 A 20 A 12 A 20 A 12 A 20 A
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to IEC60947-1 690 V 690 V 690 V
Number of positions 2 + “0” position 3 + “0” position 6 + “0” position (measurements
(3 circuits + “0” position) between 3 phases & N + “0” pos.)
Number of poles 2 4 7
Dimensions of front plate (mm) 45 x 45 45 x 45 45 x 45
Front mounting method Multifixing plate, 45 x 45 mm K1D002ULH K2D002ULH K1F003MLH to be compiled * K1F027MLH to be compiled *
Plastic mounting plate for Ø 22 mm hole K1D002UCH K2D002UCH K1F003MCH to be compiled * K1F027MCH to be compiled *
(1) With seal KZ73 for switch with Multifixing plate, with seal KZ65 for Ø 22 mm hole mounting switches. Seal to be ordered separately.
(*) Please consult your Schneider Electric agency.
positions (°)
Cam switches with key operated lock, K1 series
Function Stepping switches Run switches Changeover switches + “0” pos.
Degree of protection front face IP 65 IP 65 IP 65
Conventional thermal current (Ith) 12 A 12 A 12 A
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to IEC60947-1 690 V 690 V 690 V
Number of positions 2 + “0” position 3 + “0” position 2 + “0” position
Number of poles 3 2 2
Dimensions of front plate (mm) 55 x 100 55 x 100 55 x 100
Colour of handle red black red black red black
Front mounting method Ø 22 mm hole + Ø 43.5 mm hole K1F022QZ2 K1F022QZ4 K1G043RZ2 K1G043RZ4 K1D002UZ2 K1D002UZ4
12
0 45
34
1-pole
2-pole
12
0 90
34
2-pole
90
1
0 45
2345678
135 180 225
2-pole
45
1
315 0
2345678
1-pole
2-pole
180
1
234
0 90 270
56789
10
11
12
0
1
234
270 315
5678
225
9
10
45 90
11
12
135
0
1
23456789
10
11
12
60 120
123456789
10
11
12
13
14
0 60 120 180
300
1
2345678
0 60
21
positions (°)
Cam switches, K10 series
Function Switches Changeover switches Ammeter Voltmeter
60° switching angle with “0” position switches switches
Degree of protection front face IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 IP 65
Conventional thermal current (Ith) 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to IEC60947-1 440 V 440 V 440 V 440 V
Number of positions 2 2 + “0” position 3 + “0” pos. (1) 6 + “0” pos. (2)
Number of poles 1 2 3 2 3 3 3
Dimensions of front plate (mm) 30 x 30 30 x 30 30 x 30 30 x 30
Front mounting method By Ø 16 mm or 22 mm hole K10A001ACH K10B002ACH K10C003ACH K10D002UCH K10F003UCH K10F003MCH K10F027MCH
(1) (3 circuits + “0” position).
(2) (Measurements between 3 phases and N + “0” position).
positions (°)
Cam switches, K30 series
Function Switches Switches Changeover Starting Starting Reversing
ON-OFF with “0” position star-delta 2-speed
Degree of protection front face IP 40 IP 40 IP 40 IP 40 IP 40 IP 40
Conventional thermal current (Ith) 32 A 32 A 32 A 32 A 32 A 32 A
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to IEC60947-1 690 V 690 V 690 V 690 V 690 V 690 V
Number of positions 2 2 3 3 3 3
Number of poles 3 3 4 4 3 3 3
Dimensions of front plate (mm) 64 x 64 64 x 64 64 x 64 64 x 64 64 x 64 64 x 64
Front mounting method Multifixing K30C003AP(3) K30C003HP(3) K30D004HP(3) K30H004UP(3) K30H001YP(3) K30H004PP(3) K30E003WP(3)
(3) To order switches with other thermal current ratings (50, 63, 115, 150 A): replace the number 30 in the reference by 50, 63, 115 or 150 respectively.
Example: a switch with a 32 A current rating, for example K30C003AP, becomes K50 C003AP for a current rating of 50 A.
Accessories for cam switches K1/K2
Rubber seals
for IP 65 degree of protection
For use with heads with 45 x 45 mm front plate with 60 x 60 mm front plate with 45 x 45 mm front plate
Ø 22 mm hole or 4 hole front mtg. Ø 22 mm hole or 4 hole front mtg. multifixing
References* KZ65 KZ66 KZ73
* Sold in lots of 5.
Cam switches
10 to 150 A ratings
Harmony
K series
0
1
23456
60
1-pole
2-pole
3-pole
0
1
2
60
34
300
56789
10
11
12
1-pole
2-pole
3-pole
90
1
2
180
34
0 270
56789
10
11
12
300
1
2
330
34
270 0 30 60 90
56789
10
11
12
0
1
23456
60
1-pole
2-pole
3-pole
0
1
2345678
90
1-pole
2-pole
0
12
60
34
1234
300
56789
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1-pole
2-pole
3-pole
4-pole
0
12
60
34
1234
300
56789
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
1260
34 1234 300
56789
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
12
60
34
1234
300
56789
10
11
12
22
Monolithic tower lights
Ø 40, Ø 60, Ø 100 mm, complete, pre-wired
tower lights
Harmony
XVC
Ø 40 mm / Up to IP54
Complete, pre-wired tower lights Steady light Steady / Flashing light (1)
Light source (included) LEDs LEDs
Base mount Base mounting Support tube mounting, 17 mm Support tube mounting, 17 mm
Buzzer Without buzzer With buzzer + flashing light
Degree of protection up to IP54 up to IP54
Voltage 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 100-240V AC 24V AC/DC 100 - 240V AC
References (2) Red XVC4B1K XVC4B1 XVC4M1 (4) XVC4B15S XVC4M15S (4)
Red / orange XVC4B2K XVC4B2 XVC4M2 XVC4B25S XVC4M25S
Red / Orange / green XVC4B3K XVC4B3 XVC4M3 XVC4B35S XVC4M35S
red / orange / green / blue XVC4B4K XVC4B4 XVC4M4 XVC4B45S XVC4M45S
red / orange / green / blue / Clear XVC4B5K XVC4B5 XVC4M5 XVC4B55S XVC4M55S
Ø 60 mm / Up to IP54
Complete, pre-wired tower lights Steady light Steady / Flashing light (1)
Light source (included) LEDs LEDs
Base mount Base mounting Support tube mounting, 22 mm Support tube mounting, 22 mm Base mounting
Buzzer Without buzzer With buzzer + flashing light
Degree of protection up to IP54 up to IP54
Voltage 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 100-240 V AC (4) 24V AC/DC 100-240 V AC (4)
References (2) Red XVC6B1K XVC6B1 XVC6M1 (3) XVC6B15S (3) XVC6M15S XVC6M15SK
Red / orange XVC6B2K XVC6B2 XVC6M2 (3) XVC6B25S (3) XVC6M25S XVC6M25SK
Red / Orange / green XVC6B3K XVC6B3 XVC6M3 (3) XVC6B35S (3) XVC6M35S XVC6M35SK
red / orange / green / blue XVC6B4K XVC6B4 XVC6M4 (3) XVC6B45S (3) XVC6M45S XVC6M45SK
red / orange / green / blue / Clear XVC6B5K XVC6B5 XVC6M5 (3) XVC6B55S (3) XVC6M55S XVC6M55SK
Ø 100 mm / Up to IP54
Complete, pre-wired tower lights Steady / Flashing light (1)
Light source (included) LEDs
Base mount Base mounting
Buzzer Without buzzer With buzzer + flashing light
Degree of protection up to IP54 up to IP54
Voltage 24V DC (4) 100-240V AC (4) 24VDC (4) 100-240V AC (4) 24VDC (4) 100-240V AC (4)
References (2) Red XVC1B1K XVC1M1K XVC1B1SK XVC1M1SK XVC1B1HK XVC1M1HK
Red / orange XVC1B2K XVC1M2K XVC1B2SK XVC1M2SK XVC1B2HK XVC1M2HK
Red / Orange / green XVC1B3K XVC1M3K XVC1B3SK XVC1M3SK XVC1B3HK XVC1M3HK
red / orange / green / blue XVC1B4K XVC1M4K XVC1B4SK XVC1M4SK - -
red / orange / green / blue / Clear XVC1B5K XVC1M5K XVC1B5SK XVC1M5SK - -
(1) Flashing function can be simply selected/programmed by wiring
(2) The colours are listed in the same order as the mounting order of the illuminated units (from top to bottom)
(3) To order products for base mounting, add the letter K to the end of the reference (ex. XVC6M1K)
(4) NPN only
23
Monolithic tower lights and accessories
Ø 45 mm, complete illuminated beacons
Harmony
XVDLS / XVC
Ø 45 mm / IP40
Illuminated beacons XVDLS Steady light Flashing light
Light source Incandescent BA 15d bulb, 5 W max. (not included) “Flash” discharge tube, 0.5 J
Degree of protection IP 40
References (1) 24…230 V AC/DC XVDLS3p –
24 V AC/DC – XVDLS6Bp
120 V AC – XVDLS6Gp
230 V AC – XVDLS6Mp
(1) To obtain the complete reference, replace the p by the number designating the colour as follow: 3 = green , 4 = red , 5 = orange, 6 = blue, 7 = clear, 8 = yellow.
Accessories
XVDLS
Incandescent bulbs, with BA 15d base Beacons XVDLS
Description 24 V, 4 W 120 V, 5 W 230 V, 5 W
References DL1BEBS DL1BEGS DL1BEMS
XVC4 / XVC6
Mounting accessories Tower lights Ø 40 mm, XVC4 Tower lights Ø 60 mm, XVC6
Description Support tube mounting Support tube
mounting
Base mounting Support tube
mounting
Diameter (mm) Ø 90 Ø 84 – Ø 100 Ø 84 –
For use with – – – XVC6ppand
XVC6pp5S
XVC6ppK and
XVC6pp5SK
XVC6Bpand
XVC6Bpp5S,
XVC6Mpand
XVC6Mp5S
Height to be added (mm) 32 24,5 82 30 21,6 82
References Metal fixing plate XVCZ11 – – XVCZ02 XVCZ12 –
Plastic fixing plate – XVCZ01 – – – –
Wall mounting bracket – – XVCZ31 – – XVCZ32
XVC1
Mounting accessories Tower lights Ø 100 mm, XVC1
Description Vertical support
Diameter (mm) Ø 140 Ø 140 – –
For use with XVC1ppK
and
XVC1ppSK
XVC1ppHK (with siren) XVC1ppK and XVC1ppSK XVC1ppHK
(with siren)
Height to be added (mm) 300 306 – –
References Metal fixing plate (2) XVCZ13 XVCZ14 – –
Metal fixing bracket – – XVCZ23 XVCZ24
(2) Chromium plated-steel extension tube
24
Modular tower lights
Ø 70 mm, for customer assembly
Harmony
XVB
Ø 70 mm / Up to IP66
Illuminated beacons XVBL Steady light Flashing light
Light source Incandescent BA 15d bulb, Protected BA 15d LED Protected BA 15d LED “Flash” discharge tube
10 W max. (not included) (included) (included) 5 J (2)
Degree of protection IP 66
References (1) 12…250 V AC/DC XVBL3p – – –
24 V AC/DC – XVBL0Bp XVBL1Bp XVBL6Bp
120 V AC – XVBL0Gp XVBL1Gp XVBL6Gp
230 V AC – XVBL0Mp XVBL1Mp XVBL6Mp
Ø 70 mm / Up to IP66
Tower lights XVBC
comprising 2 to 5 signalling units (3)
Base units Steady light Flashing
light
“Flash”
light
Audible
units (90 db
at 1 m)
Light source – Incandescent Integral Integral “Flash” –
BA 15d bulb, 10 W protected LED protected LED discharge tube
max. (not included) 5 J (2)
Degree of protection IP 66
Base unit references with cover XVBC21 (4) – – – – –
without cover XVBC07 (5) – – – – –
References (2) 12… 230 V AC/DC – XVBC3p – – – –
24 V AC/DC – – XVBC2Bp XVBC5Bp XVBC6Bp –
120 V AC – – XVBC2Gp XVBC5Gp XVBC6Gp –
230 V AC – – XVBC2Mp XVBC5Mp XVBC6Mp –
Audible unit references 12…48 V AC/DC – – – – – XVBC9B
unidirectional 120…230 V AC – – – – – XVBC9M
(1) To obtain the complete reference, replace thep by the number designating the colour as follow: 3 = green , 4 = red , 5 = orange, 6 = blue, 7 = clear, 8 = yellow.
(2) To order a lens unit with a 10 J discharge tube, replace the number 6 by 8 in the reference (example: XVBL6Bp becomes XVBL8Bp).
(3) A tower light comprises: 1 base unit + 1 to 5 signalling units maximum.
(4) For connection on AS-Interface, order base unit XVBC21A (side cable entry) or XVBC21B (bottom cable entry with M12 connector on flying lead).
(5) For indicator banks with “flash” discharge tube unit.
25
Modular tower lights
Ø 70 mm, for customer assembly
Harmony
XVE
Ø 70 mm / Up to IP54
Illuminated beacons XVEL Steady light Flashing light
Light source Incandescent Integral “Flash” discharge tube, 1 J
BA 15d bulb, 5 W max. LED
(not included)
Degree of protection IP 42/IP 54 (with sealing kit)
References (1) 24… 240 V AC/DC XVEL3p –
24 V AC/DC – XVEL2Bp XVEL6Bp
120 V AC – XVEL2Gp XVEL6Gp
230 V AC – XVEL2Mp XVEL6Mp
Ø 70 mm / Up to IP54
Indicator banks XVEC
comprising 2 to 5 signalling units (2)
Base units Steady light Flashing
light
“Flash”
light
Audible
units (85 db
at 1 m)
Light source – Incandescent Integral Integral “Flash” –
BA 15d bulb, 5 W LED LED discharge tube
max. (not included) 1 J
Degree of protection IP 42/IP 54 (with sealing kit)
Base unit references IP 42 XVEC21 – – – – –
IP 54 XVEC21P – – – – –
Lens unit references (1) 24…230 V AC/DC – XVEC3p –
24 V AC/DC – – XVEC2Bp XVEC5Bp XVEC6Bp XVEC9B
120 V AC – – XVEC2Gp XVEC5Gp XVEC6Gp XVEC9G
230 V AC – – XVEC2Mp XVEC5Mp XVEC6Mp XVEC9M
(1) To obtain the complete reference, replace thep by the number designating the colour as follow: 3 = green , 4 = red , 5 = orange, 6 = blue, 7 = clear, 8 = yellow.
(2) A tower light comprises: 1 base unit + 1 to 5 signalling units maximum.
26
Modular tower lights
Ø 45, Ø 50 mm, complete or
for customer assembly
Harmony
XVM / XVP
Ø 45 mm / IP42
Complete, pre-wired tower light XVM (1) 2 sig. units + integral buzzer (2)
Steady light
3 signalling units + integral buzzer (2)
Steady light Steady light + “flash” (3)
Light source (included) Incandescent BA 15d Incandescent BA 15d Incandescent BA 15d
BA 15d bulb, 5 W “Super bright”
LED
BA 15d bulb, 5 W “Super bright”
LED
BA 15d bulb, 5 W “Super bright”
max. max. max. LED
Degree of protection IP 54
Signalling colours Red - Green Red - Orange - Green
References 24 V AC/DC XVMB1RGS XVMB2RGSSB XVMB1RAGS XVMB2RAGSSB XVMB1R6AGS XVMB2R6AGSSB
120 V AC/DC (bulb) - 120 V AC (LED) XVMG1RGS XVMG2RGSSB XVMG1RAGS XVMG2RAGSSB XVMG1R6AGS XVMG2R6AGSSB
230 V AC/DC (bulb) - 230 V AC (LED) XVMM1RGS XVMM2RGSSB XVMM1RAGS XVMM2RAGSSB XVMM1RA6GS XVMM2R6AGSSB
(1) Tower lights XVM are also available as separate components for customised assembly by the user: please refer to www.schneider-electric.com.
(2) To order products without an integral buzzer, delete the letter S at the end of the reference (example: XVMB2RGS becomes XVMB2RG, XVMB2RGSSB becomes XVMB2RGSB).
(3) Flash signalling colour: red - 0.8 J.
Ø 50 mm / IP65
Tower lights XVP
comprising 2 to 5 signalling units (4),
black clamping ring (5)
Base unit Steady or
flashing light
signalling
“Flash” light signalling Audible units
(55…85 dB
at 1 m)
Light source – Incandescent “Flash” “Flash” –
BA 15d bulb, 7 W discharge tube discharge tube
max. (not included) 0.3 J 0.6 J
Degree of protection IP 65
Base unit with cover XVPC21 – – – –
References (6) 250 V max. – XVPC3p – – –
24 V AC/DC (flash) - 24 V DC (buzzer) – – XVPC6Bp – XVPC09B
120 V AC – – – XVPC6Gp XVPC09G
230 V AC – – – XVPC6Mp XVPC09M
(4) A tower light comprises: 1 base unit + 1 to 5 signalling units maximum.
(5) To order products with a cream clamping ring, add the letter W to the end of the reference (example: base unit + green lens unit: XVPC21W + XVPC33W etc.).
(6) To obtain the complete reference, replace thep by the number designating the colour as follow: 3 = green , 4 = red , 5 = orange, 6 = blue, 7 = clear, 8 = yellow.
27
Bulbs Beacons and tower lights
XVB / XVP (1)
Type of light source Incandescent Incandescent LED (2) Flashing
BA 15d base BA 15d base BA 15d base LED (2)
7 W 10 W (not XVP) BA 15d base
References 12 V DL1BEJ DL1BLJ – –
24 V DL1BEB DL1BLB DL1BDBp DL1BKBp
48 V DL1BEE DL1BLE – –
120 V DL1BEG DL1BLG DL1BDGp DL1BKGp
230 V DL1BEM DL1BLM DL1BDMp DL1BKMp
(1) Tower lights XVP can be fitted with 5 W incandescent bulbs: see beacons XVDLS / XVE.
(2) To obtain the complete reference, replace the p by the number designating the colour as follow: 1 = white, 3 = green , 4 = red , 5 = orange, 6 = blue, 8 = yellow.
Bulbs Tower lights
XVM
Type of light source Incandescent LED (3) Flashing “Flash” discharge
BA 15d base BA 15d base LED (3) tube, 0.8 Joule
5 W BA 15d base BA 15d base
References 24 V DL1EDBS DL2EDBpSB DL1EKBpSB DL6BB
120 V DL1EDGS DL2EDGpSB DL1EKGpSB DL6BG
230 V DL1EDMS DL2EDMpSB DL1EKMpSB DL6BM
(3) To obtain the complete reference, replace the p by the number designating the colour as follows: 1 = white, 3 = green , 4 = red , 6 = blue, 8 = orange.
Mounting accessories Beacons and
tower lights
XVB / XVE
Tower lights Tower lights
XVP XVM
Description Aluminium tube Plastic tube Aluminium tube Aluminium tube Aluminium tube Aluminium tube
with integral black with integral black with integral black with steel fixing with integral cream with steel fixing
plastic fixing base plastic fixing base plastic fixing base bracket plastic fixing base bracket
Diameter (mm) Ø 25 Ø 25 Ø 20 Ø 20 Ø 20 Ø 20
Support tubes 60 mm XVEZ13 – – – – –
100 mm – – – XVPC02T XVMZ02 XVMZ02T
112 mm – – XVPC02 (4) – – –
120 mm XVBZ02 – – – – –
140 mm – XVDC02 – – – –
250 mm – – – XVPC03T XVMZ03 XVMZ03T
260 mm – – XVPC03 (4) – – –
400 mm – – – XVPC04T XVMZ04 XVMZ04T
410 mm – – XVPC04 (4) – – –
420 mm XVBZ03 – – – – –
820 mm XVBZ04 – – – – –
Fixing plates, for vertical support XVBC12 XVPC12 (4) –
for horizontal support XVBZ01 – XVMZ06
(4) To order an aluminium support tube with integral cream fixing base, add the letter W to the end of the reference (example: XVPC02W).
Modular tower lights accessories
For XVB, XVP, XVE, XVM
Harmony
XV
28
Rotating beacons
Ø 84, 106, 120, 130 mm rotating beacons
Harmony
XVR
Ø 84 / 106 mm
Complete, pre-wired rotating beacons Ø 84 mm Ø 106 mm
Light source (included) “ Super bright “ LEDs
Base mount 3 x Ø 05
Buzzer Without buzzer
Degree of protection IP23 (IP 65 with accessories) IP23 (IP 55 with accessories)
Voltage 12V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 12V AC/DC 24V AC/DC
References Red XVR08J04 XVR08B04 XVR10J04 XVR10B04
Orange XVR08J05 XVR08B05 XVR10J05 XVR10B05
Green XVR08J03 XVR08B03 XVR10J03 XVR10B03
Blue XVR08J06 XVR08B06 XVR10J06 XVR10B06
Ø 120 mm
Complete, pre-wired rotating beacons Ø 120 mm
Light source (included) “ Super bright “ LEDs
Base mount 3 x M5
Buzzer Without buzzer With buzzer
Degree of protection IP23
Voltage 12V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 12V AC/DC 24V AC/DC
References Red XVR12J04 XVR12B04 XVR12J04S XVR12B04S
Orange XVR12J05 XVR12B05 XVR12J05S XVR12B05S
Green XVR12J03 XVR12B03 XVR12J03S XVR12B03S
Blue XVR12J06 XVR12B06 XVR12J06S XVR12B06S
Ø 130 mm
Complete, pre-wired rotating beacons Ø 130 mm
Light source (included) “ Super bright “ LEDs
Base mount 3 x Ø 09
Buzzer Without buzzer
Degree of protection IP66 - Resistant to vibration IP66 and IP67
Voltage 12V DC 24V DC 24V AC/DC 120V AC 230V AC
References Red XVR13J04 XVR13B04 XVR13B04L XVR13G04L XVR13M04L
Orange XVR13J05 XVR13B05 XVR13B05L XVR13G05L XVR13M05L
29
Accesories for rotating mirrors Reflecting prism Rubber base Metal angle
bracket
Metal fixing plate
To be used for/with – Increasing the IP degree Horizontal support Horizontal support
Height (mm) – – – 300
References Ø 84 mm XVRZR1 XVRZ081 XVCZ23 –
Ø 106 mm XVRZR2 XVRZ082 XVCZ23 XVCZ13
Ø 120 mm XVRZR3 – XVCZ23 XVCZ13
Ø 130 mm XVRZR3 – XVR012L –
Electronic alarms and multisound sirens
Sirens and electronic alarms Sirens Multisound
sirens
pre-wired
Electronic alarms
Panel Mount DIN72
Electronic alarms
Panel Mount DIN96
Sound level 106 dB 105 dB 90 dB 96 dB
Tones 2 43 16 16
Channels – 8 4 4
Degree of protection IP 53 IP53 IP 54 IP 54
Colors White White Black White Black White
References 12/24V AC/DC XVS10BMW – XVS72BMBp (1) XVS72BMWp (1) XVS96BMBp (1) XVS96BMWp (1)
12/24V DC – XVS14BMW – – – –
120V AC XVS10GMW XVS14GMW – – – –
230V AC XVS10MMW XVS14MMW – – – –
(1) To obtain a complete reference, replace the p by the letter as follow: P = PNP, N = NPN (ex. XVS72BMBP)
Rotating beacons accessories
and sound solutions
Accessories for rotating beacons
Harmony
XVR / XVS
30
Type XACA “Pistol grip”
Degree of protection IP 65 / Nema 4, 4X / Class II
Rated operational characteristics AC 15 (240 V 3 A), DC 13
Conventional thermal current Ithe 10 A
Connection Screw clamp terminals, 1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
For control of single-speed motors 2-speed motors
Dimensions (mm) W x H x D 52 x 295 x 71 (x 85 with ZA2BS834) 52 x 295 x 71 (x 85 with ZA2BS834)
Number of operators mechanically interlocked 2 2
Emergency stop without ZA2BS834 without ZA2BS834
References XACA201 XACA2014 XACA207 XACA2074
Type XACA
For control of single-speed motors
Dimensions (mm) W x H x D 80 x 314 x 70 (x 90 with ZA2BS834) 80 x 440 x 70 (x 90 with ZA2BS844)
Number of operators mechanically interlocked between pairs 2 4
Emergency stop without ZA2BS834 without ZA2BS844
References XACA271 XACA2714 XACA471 XACA4714
For control of single-speed motors + I / O
Dimensions (mm) W x H x D 80 x 500 x 70 (x 90 with ZA2BS844) 80 x 560 x 70
Number of operators mechanically interlocked between pairs 6 8
Emergency stop without ZA2BS844 without
References XACA671 XACA6714 XACA871
Empty enclosures type XACA
Number of ways 2 3 4 5 6 8 12
References XACA02 XACA03 XACA04 XACA05 XACA06 XACA08 XACA12
Pendant control stations
for control circuits
Ready to use
Harmony
XAC
31
(1) Trigger action mechanically latching Emergency stop pushbuttons conform to standards EN/IEC 60204-32, EN/ISO 13850, Machinery directive 2006/42/EC and standard
EN/IEC 60947-5-5.
Legends, 30 x 40 mm With symbols conforming to NF E 52-124 With text
References ZB2BY4901 ZB2BY4903 ZB2BY4907 ZB2BY4909 ZB2BY4913 ZB2BY4915 ZB2BY4930 ZB2BY2303 ZB2BY2304
References ZB2BY2904 ZB2BY2906 ZB2BY2910 ZB2BY2912 ZB2BY2916 ZB2BY2918 ZB2BY2931 ZB2BY1W140
blank
white or yellow
background
Separate components (for mounting in enclosures XACA)
Booted operators
white XACA9411
black XACA9412
Mushroom head, latching, trigger action (1)
turn to release Ø 40 ZA2BS844
Ø 30 ZA2BS834
Mushroom head, latching, trigger action (1)
key release Ø 40 ZA2BS944
Ø 30 ZA2BS934
Selector switch
2 pos. stay put ZA2BD2
3 pos. stay put ZA2BD3
Key switch
key n° 455 2 pos. stay put ZA2BG4
3 pos. stay put ZA2BG5
Blanking plug
with seal and ZB2SZ3
fixing nut
Pilot light heads
white ZA2BV01
green ZA2BV03
red ZA2BV04
yellow ZA2BV05
Pilot light bodies
direct supply ZB2BV006
direct supply, through resistor ZB2BV007
Protective guard (for base mounted units)
For selector switch XACA982/983
For emergency stop pushbutton XACA984
Contact blocks
Single-speed NO ZB2BE101
Single-speed NC ZB2BE102
Contacts blocks for XACA941p
Single-speed NC+NO XENG1491
2-speed NC+NO+NO XENG1191
Contact blocks (for mounting in enclosure base)
NO XACS101
NC+NO XACS105
Isolating switch, slow break, for front mounting
Emergency stop NC+NC+NC
with positive opening operation
XENT1192
Double blocks latching, slow break
Single-speed NO+NO XENG3781
Single-speed NO+NC XENG3791
32
Notes
33
ART. 097419 01/2013 - V10.0
DIA4ED2040408EN
Head Office
35, rue Joseph Monier - CS 30323
F92500 Rueil-Malmaison Cedex
France
www.schneider-electric.com
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical
characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein. This documentation is not
intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these
products for specific user applications. It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the
appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the
relevant specific application or use thereof. Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or
subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein.
Design : IGS-CP
Photos : Schneider Electric
Print :
http://www.farnell.com/datasheets/1761538.pdf
This document was generated on 01/06/2014
PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION
Part Number: 39-01-2020
Status: Active
Overview: Mini-Fit Jr.™ Power Connectors
Description: Mini-Fit Jr.™ Receptacle Housing, Dual Row, UL 94V-2, 2 Circuits
Documents:
3D Model Product Specification PS-5556-001 (PDF)
Drawing (PDF) Test Summary TS-5556-002 (PDF)
Product Specification PS-45750-001 (PDF) RoHS Certificate of Compliance (PDF)
Agency Certification
CSA LR19980
UL E29179
General
Product Family Crimp Housings
Series 5557
Application Power, Wire-to-Wire
Comments Current = 13A max. per circuit when header is mated
to a receptacle loaded with 45750 series terminals
crimped to 16 AWG wire. . See Molex product
specification PS-45750-001 for additional current
derating information.. Glow Wire Equivalent Part.
MolexKits Yes
Overview Mini-Fit Jr.™ Power Connectors
Product Name Mini-Fit Jr.™
UPC 800753584259
Physical
Breakaway No
Circuits (maximum) 2
Color - Resin Natural
Flammability 94V-2
Gender Female
Glow-Wire Compliant No
Material - Resin Nylon
Net Weight 0.657/g
Number of Rows 2
Packaging Type Bag
Panel Mount No
Pitch - Mating Interface 4.20mm
Pitch - Termination Interface 4.20mm
Polarized to Mating Part Yes
Stackable No
Temperature Range - Operating -40°C to +105°C
Electrical
Current - Maximum per Contact 13A
Material Info
Old Part Number 5557-02R
Reference - Drawing Numbers
Product Specification PS-45750-001, PS-5556-001, RPS-5557-046
Sales Drawing SD-5557-003
Test Summary TS-5556-002
Series
image - Reference only
EU RoHS China RoHS
ELV and RoHS
Compliant
REACH SVHC
Contains SVHC: No
Low-Halogen Status
Low-Halogen
Need more information on product
environmental compliance?
Email productcompliance@molex.com
For a multiple part number RoHS Certificate of
Compliance, click here
Please visit the Contact Us section for any
non-product compliance questions.
Search Parts in this Series
5557Series
Mates With
5559 Dual Row, 5566 Vertical with Pegs,
5566 Vertical without Pegs, 5569 Right
Angle Dual Row with Flanges, 5569 Right
Angle Dual Row with Pegs, 43810 , 44068 ,
44281 , 87427 , 42404 , 42440
Use With
5556 Mini-Fit® Female Crimp Terminals,
45750 Mini-Fit® Plus HCS Crimp TerminalThis document was generated on 01/06/2014
PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION
This document was generated on 10/10/2013
PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION
Part Number: 87439-0400
Status: Active
Overview: Pico-Spox™ Wire-to-Board Connector System
Description: 1.50mm Pitch Pico-SPOX™ Wire-to-Board Housing, 4 Circuits, Off-White Housing
Documents:
3D Model RoHS Certificate of Compliance (PDF)
Drawing (PDF) Product Literature (PDF)
Product Specification PS-87437 (PDF)
Agency Certification
CSA LR19980
UL E29179
General
Product Family Crimp Housings
Series 87439
Application Signal, Wire-to-Board
MolexKits Yes
Overview Pico-Spox™ Wire-to-Board Connector System
Product Literature Order No USA-235
Product Name Pico-SPOX™
UPC 800753537224
Physical
Circuits (maximum) 4
Color - Resin Natural
Flammability 94V-0
Gender Female
Glow-Wire Compliant No
Lock to Mating Part Yes
Material - Resin Nylon
Net Weight 55.000/mg
Number of Rows 1
Packaging Type Bag
Panel Mount No
Pitch - Mating Interface 1.50mm
Polarized to Mating Part Yes
Stackable No
Temperature Range - Operating -55°C to +105°C
Electrical
Current - Maximum per Contact 2.5A
Material Info
Reference - Drawing Numbers
Product Specification PS-87437, RPS-87437, RPS-87437-001,
RPS-87437-200, RPS-87438-002
Sales Drawing SD-87439-**00
Series
image - Reference only
EU RoHS China RoHS
ELV and RoHS
Compliant
REACH SVHC
Contains SVHC: No
Low-Halogen Status
Low-Halogen
Need more information on product
environmental compliance?
Email productcompliance@molex.com
For a multiple part number RoHS Certificate of
Compliance, click here
Please visit the Contact Us section for any
non-product compliance questions.
Search Parts in this Series
87439Series
Mates With
Pico-SPOX™ Wire-to-Board Header 87437 ,
87438
Use With
87421 Pico-SPOX™ Crimp Terminal
This document was generated on 10/10/2013
PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION
PMBFJ620
Dual N-channel field-effect transistor
Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 Product data sheet
CAUTION
This device is sensitive to ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD). Therefore care should be taken
during transport and handling.
Table 1. Quick reference data
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
Per FET
VDS drain-source voltage - - 25 V
VGSoff gate-source cut-off
voltage
VDS = 10 V; ID = 1 A 2 - 6.5 V
IDSS drain current VGS = 0 V; VDS = 10 V 24 - 60 mA
Ptot total power
dissipation
Ts 90 C - - 190 mW
yfs forward transfer
admittance
VDS = 10 V;
ID = 10mA
10 - - mS
PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 2 of 14
NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620
Dual N-channel field-effect transistor
2. Pinning information
3. Ordering information
4. Marking
[1] * = p: made in Hong Kong.
* = t: made in Malaysia.
* = W: made in China.
Table 2. Discrete pinning information
Pin Description Simplified outline Symbol
1 source (1)
2 source (2)
3 gate (2)
4 drain (2)
5 drain (1)
6 gate (1)
1 2 3
6 5 4
sym034
6
3 2
4
1
5
Table 3. Ordering information
Type number Package
Name Description Version
PMBFJ620 - plastic surface mounted package; 6 leads SOT363
Table 4. Marking
Type number Marking code[1]
PMBFJ620 A8*
PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 3 of 14
NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620
Dual N-channel field-effect transistor
5. Limiting values
6. Thermal characteristics
[1] Ts is the temperature at the soldering point of the gate pins, see Figure 1.
Table 5. Limiting values
In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134).
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit
Per FET
VDS drain-source voltage - 25 V
VGSO gate-source voltage open drain - 25 V
VGDO drain-gate voltage open source - 25 V
IG forward gate current (DC) - 50 mA
Ptot total power dissipation Ts 90 C - 190 mW
Tstg storage temperature 65 +150 C
Tj junction temperature - 150 C
Table 6. Thermal characteristics
Symbol Parameter Conditions Typ Unit
Rth(j-s) thermal resistance from junction
to soldering points
single loaded [1] 315 K/W
double loaded [1] 160 K/W
(1) Double loaded.
(2) Single loaded.
Fig 1. Power derating curve.
Ts (°C)
0 50 100 150 200
001aaa742
200
100
300
400
Ptot
(mW)
0
(1)
(2)
PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 4 of 14
NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620
Dual N-channel field-effect transistor
7. Static characteristics
8. Dynamic characteristics
Table 7. Characteristics
Tj = 25 C unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
Per FET
V(BR)GSS gate-source breakdown
voltage
IG = 1 A; VDS = 0 V 25 - - V
VGSoff gate-source cut-off voltage ID = 1 A; VDS = 10 V 2 - 6.5 V
VGSS gate-source forward voltage IG = 1 mA; VDS = 0 V - - 1 V
IDSS drain-source leakage current VDS = 10 V; VGS = 0 V 24 - 60 mA
IGSS gate-source leakage current VGS = 15 V; VDS = 0 V - - 1 nA
RDSon drain-source on-state
resistance
VGS = 0 V; VDS = 100mV - 50 -
yfs common source forward
transfer admittance
ID = 10 mA; VDS = 10 V 10 - - mS
yos common source output
admittance
ID = 10 mA; VDS = 10 V - - 250 S
Table 8. Characteristics
Tj = 25 C unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
Per FET
Ciss input capacitance VDS = 10 V; VGS = 10 V; f =1 MHz - 3 5 pF
VDS = 10 V; VGS = 0 V; Tamb = 25 C - 6 - pF
Crss reverse transfer capacitance VDS = 0 V; VGS = 10 V; f = 1 MHz - 1.3 2.5 pF
gis common source input
conductance
VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 100 MHz - 200 - S
VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 450 MHz - 3 - mS
gfs common source transfer
conductance
VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 100 MHz - 13 - mS
VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 450 MHz - 12 - mS
grs common source reverse
conductance
VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 100 MHz - 30 - S
VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 450 MHz - 450 - S
gos common source output
conductance
VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 100 MHz - 150 - S
VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 450 MHz - 400 - S
Vn equivalent input noise voltage VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 100 Hz - 6 - nV/Hz
PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 5 of 14
NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620
Dual N-channel field-effect transistor
VDS = 10 V; Tj = 25 C. VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; Tj = 25 C.
Fig 2. Drain current as a function of gate-source
cut-off voltage; typical values.
Fig 3. Common source forward transfer admittance
as a function of gate-source cut-off voltage;
typical values.
VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; Tj = 25 C. VDS = 100 mV; VGS = 0 V; Tj = 25 C.
Fig 4. Common-source output conductance as a
function of gate-source cut-off voltage; typical
values.
Fig 5. Drain-source on-state resistance as a function
of gate-source cut-off voltage; typical values.
VGSoff (V)
0 −1 −2 −3 −4
mcd220
20
30
10
40
50
IDSS
(mA)
0
0 −2 −4 −8
mcd219
−6
20
0
16
12
8
yfs
(mS)
4
VGSoff (V)
0
150
100
50
0
−1 −2 −4
mcd221
−3
gos
(μS)
VGSoff (V)
0 −1 −2 −4
80
60
20
0
40
mcd222
−3
RDSon
(Ω)
VGSoff (V)
PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 6 of 14
NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620
Dual N-channel field-effect transistor
Tj = 25 C. VDS = 10 V; Tj = 25 C.
Fig 6. Typical output characteristics. Fig 7. Typical transfer characteristics.
VDS = 10 V; Tj = 25 C. VDS = 10 V; Tj = 25 C.
Fig 8. Reverse transfer capacitance as a function of
gate-source voltage; typical values.
Fig 9. Input capacitance as a function of gate-source
voltage; typical values.
VDS (V)
0 4 8 12 16
mcd217
20
10
30
40
ID
(mA)
0
(2)
(4)
(1)
(5)
(6)
(3)
−4 −3 −2 0
40
30
10
0
20
mcd214
−1
ID
(mA)
VGS (V)
−10 −4 0
4
3
1
0
2
mcd224
−8 −6 −2
Crs
(pF)
VGS (V)
−10 0
10
0
mcd223
−8 −6 −4 −2
8
6
4
2
Cis
(pF)
VGS (V)
PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 7 of 14
NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620
Dual N-channel field-effect transistor
VDS = 10 V; Tj = 25 C.
Fig 10. Drain current as a function of gate-source voltage; typical values.
Tj = 25 C.
Fig 11. Gate current as a function of drain-gate voltage; typical values.
mcd229
1
10−2
10−1
102
10
103
ID
(μA)
10−3
VGS (V)
−2.5 −2.0 −1.5 −1.0 −0.5 0
mcd230
−10
−1
−103
−102
−104
IGSS
(pA)
−10−1
VDG (V)
0 4 8 12 16
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 8 of 14
NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620
Dual N-channel field-effect transistor
Fig 12. Gate current as a function of junction temperature; typical values.
mcd231
10
1
103
102
104
IGSS
(pA)
10−1
Tj (°C)
−25 25 75 125 175
PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 9 of 14
NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620
Dual N-channel field-effect transistor
VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; Tamb = 25 C. VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; Tamb = 25 C.
Fig 13. Input admittance as a function of frequency;
typical values.
Fig 14. Forward transfer admittance as a function of
frequency; typical values.
VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; Tamb = 25 C. VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; Tamb = 25 C.
Fig 15. Reverse transfer admittance as a function of
frequency; typical values.
Fig 16. Output admittance as a function of frequency;
typical values.
mcd228
10
1
gis, bis
(mS)
10−1
102
f (MHz)
10 102 103
bis
gis
f (MHz)
10 102 103
mcd227
10
102
gfs,−bfs
(mS)
1
gfs
−bfs
mcd226
f (MHz)
10 102 103
−10−1
−1
−10
−102
brs, grs
(mS)
−10−2
brs
grs
mcd225
10
1
bos, gos
(mS)
10−1
102
f (MHz)
10 102 103
bos
gos
PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 10 of 14
NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620
Dual N-channel field-effect transistor
9. Package outline
Fig 17. Package outline.
OUTLINE REFERENCES
VERSION
EUROPEAN
PROJECTION ISSUE DATE
IEC JEDEC JEITA
SOT363 SC-88
bp w M B
D
e1
e
pin 1
index A
A1
Lp
Q
detail X
HE
E
v M A
B A
y
0 1 2 mm
scale
c
X
1 2 3
6 5 4
Plastic surface-mounted package; 6 leads SOT363
UNIT
A1
max
bp c D E e1 HE Lp Q v w y
mm 0.1
0.30
0.20
2.2
1.8
0.25
0.10
1.35
1.15
0.65
e
1.3 2.2
2.0
0.2 0.2 0.1
DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions)
0.45
0.15
0.25
0.15
A
1.1
0.8
04-11-08
06-03-16
PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 11 of 14
NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620
Dual N-channel field-effect transistor
10. Revision history
Table 9. Revision history
Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice Supersedes
PMBFJ620 v.2 20110915 Product data sheet - PMBFJ620 v.1
Modifications: • The format of this data sheet has been redesigned to comply with the new identity
guidelines of NXP Semiconductors.
• Legal texts have been adapted to the new company name where appropriate.
• Package outline drawings have been updated to the latest version.
PMBFJ620 v.1
(9397 750 13006)
20040511 Product data sheet - -
PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 12 of 14
NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620
Dual N-channel field-effect transistor
11. Legal information
11.1 Data sheet status
[1] Please consult the most recently issued document before initiating or completing a design.
[2] The term ‘short data sheet’ is explained in section “Definitions”.
[3] The product status of device(s) described in this document may have changed since this document was published and may differ in case of multiple devices. The latest product status
information is available on the Internet at URL http://www.nxp.com.
11.2 Definitions
Draft — The document is a draft version only. The content is still under
internal review and subject to formal approval, which may result in
modifications or additions. NXP Semiconductors does not give any
representations or warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of
information included herein and shall have no liability for the consequences of
use of such information.
Short data sheet — A short data sheet is an extract from a full data sheet
with the same product type number(s) and title. A short data sheet is intended
for quick reference only and should not be relied upon to contain detailed and
full information. For detailed and full information see the relevant full data
sheet, which is available on request via the local NXP Semiconductors sales
office. In case of any inconsistency or conflict with the short data sheet, the
full data sheet shall prevail.
Product specification — The information and data provided in a Product
data sheet shall define the specification of the product as agreed between
NXP Semiconductors and its customer, unless NXP Semiconductors and
customer have explicitly agreed otherwise in writing. In no event however,
shall an agreement be valid in which the NXP Semiconductors product is
deemed to offer functions and qualities beyond those described in the
Product data sheet.
11.3 Disclaimers
Limited warranty and liability — Information in this document is believed to
be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any
representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or
completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the
consequences of use of such information.
In no event shall NXP Semiconductors be liable for any indirect, incidental,
punitive, special or consequential damages (including - without limitation - lost
profits, lost savings, business interruption, costs related to the removal or
replacement of any products or rework charges) whether or not such
damages are based on tort (including negligence), warranty, breach of
contract or any other legal theory.
Notwithstanding any damages that customer might incur for any reason
whatsoever, NXP Semiconductors’ aggregate and cumulative liability towards
customer for the products described herein shall be limited in accordance
with the Terms and conditions of commercial sale of NXP Semiconductors.
Right to make changes — NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make
changes to information published in this document, including without
limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without
notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior
to the publication hereof.
Suitability for use — NXP Semiconductors products are not designed,
authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in life support, life-critical or
safety-critical systems or equipment, nor in applications where failure or
malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected
to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental
damage. NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of
NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or applications and
therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own risk.
Applications — Applications that are described herein for any of these
products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no
representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the
specified use without further testing or modification.
Customers are responsible for the design and operation of their applications
and products using NXP Semiconductors products, and NXP Semiconductors
accepts no liability for any assistance with applications or customer product
design. It is customer’s sole responsibility to determine whether the NXP
Semiconductors product is suitable and fit for the customer’s applications and
products planned, as well as for the planned application and use of
customer’s third party customer(s). Customers should provide appropriate
design and operating safeguards to minimize the risks associated with their
applications and products.
NXP Semiconductors does not accept any liability related to any default,
damage, costs or problem which is based on any weakness or default in the
customer’s applications or products, or the application or use by customer’s
third party customer(s). Customer is responsible for doing all necessary
testing for the customer’s applications and products using NXP
Semiconductors products in order to avoid a default of the applications and
the products or of the application or use by customer’s third party
customer(s). NXP does not accept any liability in this respect.
Limiting values — Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in
the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) will cause permanent
damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and (proper)
operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those given in
the Recommended operating conditions section (if present) or the
Characteristics sections of this document is not warranted. Constant or
repeated exposure to limiting values will permanently and irreversibly affect
the quality and reliability of the device.
Terms and conditions of commercial sale — NXP Semiconductors
products are sold subject to the general terms and conditions of commercial
sale, as published at http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms, unless otherwise
agreed in a valid written individual agreement. In case an individual
agreement is concluded only the terms and conditions of the respective
agreement shall apply. NXP Semiconductors hereby expressly objects to
applying the customer’s general terms and conditions with regard to the
purchase of NXP Semiconductors products by customer.
No offer to sell or license — Nothing in this document may be interpreted or
construed as an offer to sell products that is open for acceptance or the grant,
conveyance or implication of any license under any copyrights, patents or
other industrial or intellectual property rights.
Export control — This document as well as the item(s) described herein
may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior
authorization from national authorities.
Document status[1][2] Product status[3] Definition
Objective [short] data sheet Development This document contains data from the objective specification for product development.
Preliminary [short] data sheet Qualification This document contains data from the preliminary specification.
Product [short] data sheet Production This document contains the product specification.
PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 13 of 14
NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620
Dual N-channel field-effect transistor
Quick reference data — The Quick reference data is an extract of the
product data given in the Limiting values and Characteristics sections of this
document, and as such is not complete, exhaustive or legally binding.
Non-automotive qualified products — Unless this data sheet expressly
states that this specific NXP Semiconductors product is automotive qualified,
the product is not suitable for automotive use. It is neither qualified nor tested
in accordance with automotive testing or application requirements. NXP
Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of
non-automotive qualified products in automotive equipment or applications.
In the event that customer uses the product for design-in and use in
automotive applications to automotive specifications and standards, customer
(a) shall use the product without NXP Semiconductors’ warranty of the
product for such automotive applications, use and specifications, and (b)
whenever customer uses the product for automotive applications beyond
NXP Semiconductors’ specifications such use shall be solely at customer’s
own risk, and (c) customer fully indemnifies NXP Semiconductors for any
liability, damages or failed product claims resulting from customer design and
use of the product for automotive applications beyond NXP Semiconductors’
standard warranty and NXP Semiconductors’ product specifications.
11.4 Trademarks
Notice: All referenced brands, product names, service names and trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
12. Contact information
For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620
Dual N-channel field-effect transistor
© NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved.
For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
Date of release: 15 September 2011
Document identifier: PMBFJ620
Advanced Materials
Araldite® 2014-1
Structural Adhesives
TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
Araldite® 2014-1
Two component epoxy paste adhesive
Key properties Grey paste
High temperature and chemical resistance
Low shrinkage
Very resistant to water and a variety of chemicals
Gap filling, non sagging up to 5mm thickness
Description Araldite 2014-1 is a two component, room temperature curing, thixotropic paste adhesive of high strength with good
environmental and excellent chemical resistance.
Used for bonding of metals, electronic components, GRP structures and many other items where a higher than
normal temperature or more aggressive environment is to be encountered in service. The low out gassing makes this
product suitable for specialist electronic telecommunication and aerospace applications.
Product data
Property 2014-1/A 2014-1/B 2014-1 (mixed)
Colour (visual) beige paste grey paste grey paste
Specific gravity ca. 1.6 ca. 1.6 ca. 1.6
Viscosity at 25°C (Pas) ca. 100 thixotropic thixotropic
Pot Life (100 gm at 25 C) - - 60 minutes
Shelf life (2-40 C) 3 years 3 years -
Processing Pretreatment
The strength and durability of a bonded joint are dependant on proper treatment of the surfaces to be bonded.
At the very least, joint surfaces should be cleaned with a good degreasing agent such as acetone or other proprietary
degreasing agents in order to remove all traces of oil, grease and dirt.
Low grade alcohol, gasoline (petrol) or paint thinners should never be used.
The strongest and most durable joints are obtained by either mechanically abrading or chemically etching ( pickling )
the degreased surfaces. Abrading should be followed by a second degreasing treatment.
Mix ratio Parts by weight Parts by volume
Araldite 2014-1/A 100 100
Araldite 2014-1/B 50 50
Araldite 2014-1 is available in cartridges incorporating mixers and can be applied as ready to use adhesive with the
aid of the tool recommended by Huntsman Advanced Materials.
April 2007 Araldite® 2014-1 2/6
Application of adhesive
The resin/hardener mix may be applied manually or robotically to the pretreated and dry joint surfaces. Huntsman's
technical support group can assist the user in the selection of an suitable application method as well as suggest a
variety of reputable companies that manufacture and service adhesive dispensing equipment.
A layer of adhesive 0.05 to 0.10 mm thick will normally impart the greatest lap shear strength to the joint. Huntsman
stresses that proper adhesive joint design is also critical for a durable bond. The joint components should be
assembled and secured in a fixed position as soon as the adhesive has been applied.
For more detailed explanations regarding surface preparation and pretreatment, adhesive joint design, and the dual
syringe dispensing system, visit www.araldite2000plus.com.
Equipment maintenance
All tools should be cleaned with hot water and soap before adhesives residues have had time to cure. The removal of
cured residues is a difficult and time-consuming operation.
If solvents such as acetone are used for cleaning, operatives should take the appropriate precautions and, in addition,
avoid skin and eye contact.
Times to minimum shear strength
Temperature C 10 15 23 40 60 100
Cure time to reach hours 14 8 3 - - -
LSS > 1MPa minutes - - - 60 15 3
Cure time to reach hours 20 11 5 - - -
LSS > 10MPa minutes - - - 80 20 4
LSS = Lap shear strength.
Typical cured
properties
Unless otherwise stated, the figures given below were all determined by testing standard specimens made by lapjointing
114 x 25 x 1.6 mm strips of aluminium alloy. The joint area was 12.5 x 25 mm in each case.
The figures were determined with typical production batches using standard testing methods. They are provided
solely as technical information and do not constitute a product specification.
Average lap shear strengths of typical metal-to-metal joints (ISO 4587)
Cured for 16 hours at 40°C and tested at 23 C
Pretreatment - Sand blasting
0 5 10 15 20 25
Aluminium
Steel 37/11
Stainless steel V4A
Galvanised steel
Copper
Brass
MPa
April 2007 Araldite® 2014-1 3/6
Average lap shear strengths of typical plastic-to-plastic joints (ISO 4587)
Cured for 16 hours at 40 C and tested at 23 C. Pretreatment - Lightly abrade and alcohol degrease.
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
GRP
CFRP
SMC
ABS
PVC
PMMA
Polycarbonate
Polyamides
MPa
Lap shear strength versus temperature (ISO 4587) (typical average values)
Cure: (a) = 7 days /23 C; (b) = 24 hours/23 C + 30 minutes/80 C
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
°C -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
MPa
a
b
Roller peel test (ISO 4578)
Cured: 16 hours/40 C 3.0 N/mm
Glass transition temperature (DSC)
Cure: 24 hours at 23 C plus 1 hour at 80 C: ca. 85 C
Shear modulus (DIN 53445) Cure: 16 hours/40 C
50 C - 1.2 GPa
75 C - 400 MPa
100 C - 180 Mpa
125 C - 20 Mpa
E - modulus (ISO R527) at 23 C 4 GPa
April 2007 Araldite® 2014-1 4/6
Flexural Properties (ISO 178) Cure 16 hours/ 40ºC Cure 1 day/ 23°C +30mins/ 80°C tested at 23°C
Flexural Strength 61 MPa
Flexural Modulus 4355 MPa
Tensile strength (ISO R527) at 23 C 26 MPa
Elongation at break 0,7%
Lap shear strength versus immersion in various media (typical average values)
Unless otherwise stated, L.S.S. was determined after immersion for 90 days at 23 C
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
As-made value
IMS
Gasoline (petrol)
Ethyl acetate
Acetic acid, 10%
Xylene
Lubricating oil
Paraffin
Water at 23°C
Water at 60°C
Water at 90°C
30 days 60 days 90 days
MPa
Cure: 16 hour/40°C
Lap shear strength versus tropical weathering
(40/92, DIN 50015; typical average values)
Cure: 16 hours/40C Test: at 23 C
0 5 10 15 20 25
As made value
After 30 days
After 60 days
After 90 days
MPa
April 2007 Araldite® 2014-1 5/6
Lap shear strength versus heat ageing
Cure: 16 hours/40 C
0 5 10 15 20 25
As-made value
30 days/ 70°C
60 days/ 70°C
90 days/ 70°C
MPa
April 2007 Araldite® 2014-1 6/6
Huntsman
Advanced
Materials
All recommendations for the use of our products, whether given by us in writing, verbally, or to be implied from the
results of tests carried out by us, are based on the current state of our knowledge. Notwithstanding any such
recommendations the Buyer shall remain responsible for satisfying himself that the products as supplied by us are
suitable for his intended process or purpose. Since we cannot control the application, use or processing of the
products, we cannot accept responsibility therefor. The Buyer shall ensure that the intended use of the products will
not infringe any third party s intellectual property rights. We warrant that our products are free from defects in
accordance with and subject to our general conditions of supply.
Storage Araldite 2014-1A and Araldite 2014-1/B may be stored for up to 3 years at room temperature provided the
components are stored in sealed containers. The expiry date is indicated on the label.
Handling
precautions
Caution
Our products are generally quite harmless to handle provided that certain precautions normally taken when handling
chemicals are observed. The uncured materials must not, for instance, be allowed to come into contact with
foodstuffs or food utensils, and measures should be taken to prevent the uncured materials from coming in contact
with the skin, since people with particularly sensitive skin may be affected. The wearing of impervious rubber or
plastic gloves will normally be necessary; likewise the use of eye protection. The skin should be thoroughly cleansed
at the end of each working period by washing with soap and warm water. The use of solvents is to be avoided.
Disposable paper - not cloth towels - should be used to dry the skin. Adequate ventilation of the working area is
recommended. These precautions are described in greater detail in the Material Safety Data sheets for the individual
products and should be referred to for fuller information.
Huntsman Advanced Materials
(Switzerland) GmbH
Klybeckstrasse 200
4057 Basel
Switzerland
Tel: +41 (0)61 966 33 33
Fax: +41 (0)61 966 35 19
www.huntsman.com/advanced_materials
Huntsman Advanced Materials warrants only that its products meet the specifications agreed with the buyer. Typical properties,
where stated, are to be considered as representative of current production and should not be treated as specifications.
The manufacture of materials is the subject of granted patents and patent applications; freedom to operate patented processes is
not implied by this publication.
While all the information and recommendations in this publication are, to the best of our knowledge, information and belief,
accurate at the date of publication, NOTHING HEREIN IS TO BE CONSTRUED AS A WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
OTHERWISE.
IN ALL CASES, IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER TO DETERMINE THE APPLICABILITY OF SUCH INFORMATION
AND RECOMMENDATIONS AND THE SUITABILITY OF ANY PRODUCT FOR ITS OWN PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
The behaviour of the products referred to in this publication in manufacturing processes and their suitability in any given end-use
environment are dependent upon various conditions such as chemical compatibility, temperature, and other variables, which are
not known to Huntsman Advanced Materials. It is the responsibility of the user to evaluate the manufacturing circumstances and
the final product under actual end-use requirements and to adequately advise and warn purchasers and users thereof.
Products may be toxic and require special precautions in handling. The user should obtain Safety Data Sheets from Huntsman
Advanced Materials containing detailed information on toxicity, together with proper shipping, handling and storage procedures,
and should comply with all applicable safety and environmental standards.
Hazards, toxicity and behaviour of the products may differ when used with other materials and are dependent on manufacturing
circumstances or other processes. Such hazards, toxicity and behaviour should be determined by the user and made known to
handlers, processors and end users.
Except where explicitly agreed otherwise, the sale of products referred to in this publication is subject to the general terms and
conditions of sale of Huntsman Advanced Materials LLC or of its affiliated companies including without limitation, Huntsman
Advanced Materials (Europe) BVBA, Huntsman Advanced Materials Americas Inc., and Huntsman Advanced Materials (Hong
Kong) Ltd.
Huntsman Advanced Materials is an international business unit of Huntsman Corporation. Huntsman Advanced Materials trades
through Huntsman affiliated companies in different countries including but not limited to Huntsman Advanced Materials LLC in the
USA and Huntsman Advanced Materials (Europe) BVBA in Europe.
[Araldite® 2014-1] is a registered trademark of Huntsman Corporation or an affiliate thereof.
Copyright © 2007 Huntsman Corporation or an affiliate thereof. All rights reserved.
Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France
:
1.1 Identifiant du produit
1.3 Renseignements concernant le fournisseur de la fiche de données de sécurité
Adresse email de la
personne responsable
pour cette FDS
: Global_Product_EHS_AdMat@huntsman.com
Description du produit : Non disponible.
1.2 Utilisations identifiées pertinentes de la substance ou du mélange et utilisations déconseillées
SECTION 1: Identification de la substance/du mélange et de la
société/l’entreprise
Code du produit : 00057058
1.4 Numéro d’appel d’urgence
Organisme de conseil/centre antipoison national
Fournisseur
Numéro de téléphone : EUROPE: +32 35 75 1234
France ORFILA: +33(0)145425959
ASIA: +65 6336-6011
China: +86 20 39377888
Australia: 1800 786 152
New Zealand: 0800 767 437
USA: +1/800/424.9300
Système Utilisation du produit : adhésif bi-composants
Fournisseur : Huntsman Advanced Materials (Europe)BVBA
Everslaan 45
3078 Everberg / Belgium
Tel.: +41 61 299 20 41
Fax: +41 61 299 20 40
France : ORFILA 01.45.42.59.59 - Hors de France : +33.(0)1.45.42.59.59
Classification Xi; R41, R38
R43
N; R51/53
:
Dangers pour la santé :
humaine
Risque de lésions oculaires graves. Irritant pour la peau. Peut entraîner une
sensibilisation par contact avec la peau.
Dangers pour :
l’environnement
Toxique pour les organismes aquatiques, peut entraîner des effets néfastes à long
terme pour l'environnement aquatique.
Pour plus de détails sur les conséquences en termes de santé et les symptômes, reportez-vous à la section 11.
SECTION 2: Identification des dangers
2.1 Classification de la substance ou du mélange
Définition du produit : Working pack (preparation)
Voir section 16 pour le texte intégral des phrases R et mentions H déclarées ci-dessus.
Classification selon la directive 1999/45/CE [DPD]
Le produit est classé dangereux selon la directive 1999/45/CE et ses amendements.
2.2 Éléments d’étiquetage
Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 1/19
ARALDITE 2014-1
Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France
Date d'impression :
Date d'édition :
3 Août 2011
3 Août 2011
N° de FDS.
Version :
: 00057058
1
2/19
SECTION 2: Identification des dangers
Autres dangers qui ne :
donnent pas lieu à une
classification
Non disponible.
Récipients devant être
pourvus d'une fermeture
de sécurité pour les
enfants
Non applicable.
Avertissement tactile de
danger
Non applicable.
:
:
Exigences d‘emballages spéciaux
Symbole(s) de danger
Conseils de prudence S26- En cas de contact avec les yeux, laver immédiatement et abondamment avec
de l'eau et consulter un spécialiste.
S39- Porter un appareil de protection des yeux/du visage.
S61- Éviter le rejet dans l'environnement. Consulter les instructions spéciales/la fiche
de données de sécurité.
R41- Risque de lésions oculaires graves.
R38- Irritant pour la peau.
R43- Peut entraîner une sensibilisation par contact avec la peau.
R51/53- Toxique pour les organismes aquatiques, peut entraîner des effets néfastes
à long terme pour l'environnement aquatique.
Phrases de risque
Ingrédients dangereux
:
:
:
:
Irritant, Dangereux pour l'environnement
produit de réaction: bisphénol-A-épichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids
moléculaire moyen < 700)
résine époxidique à base de bisphénol F
éther diglycidique du 1,4-butanediol
N(3-diméthylaminopropyl)-1,3-propylènediamine
Indication de danger :
2.3 Autres dangers
Éléments d’étiquetage
supplémentaires
: Contient des composés époxydiques. Voir les informations transmises par le
fabricant.
Substance/préparation : Working pack (preparation)
Nom du Identifiants 67/548/CEE
produit/composant
SECTION 3: Composition/informations sur les composants
% Règlement (CE) Type
n° 1272/2008 [CLP]
Classification
produit de réaction:
bisphénol-Aépichlorhydrine;
résines époxydiques
(poids moléculaire
moyen < 700)
REACH #: 01-
2119456619-26
CAS: 25068-38-6
13 - 30 Xi; R36/38
R43
N; R51/53
Skin Irrit. 2, H315
Eye Irrit. 2, H319
Skin Sens. 1, H317
Aquatic Chronic 2, H411
[1]
résine époxidique à
base de bisphénol F
REACH #: 01-
2119454392-40
CAS: 9003-36-5
3 - 7 Xi; R36/38
R43
N; R51/53
Skin Irrit. 2, H315
Eye Irrit. 2, H319
Skin Sens. 1, H317
Aquatic Chronic 2, H411
[1]
éther diglycidique du
1,4-butanediol
REACH #: 01-
2119494060-45
CAS: 2425-79-8
1 - 3 Xn; R20/21
Xi; R36/38
Acute Tox. 4, H312
Acute Tox. 4, H332
[1]
Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 2/19
ARALDITE 2014-1
Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France
Date d'impression :
Date d'édition :
3 Août 2011
3 Août 2011
N° de FDS.
Version :
: 00057058
1
3/19
SECTION 3: Composition/informations sur les composants
Les limites d'exposition professionnelle, quand elles sont disponibles, sont énumérées à la section 8.
Dans l'état actuel des connaissances du fournisseur et dans les concentrations d'application, aucun autre ingrédient
présent n'est classé comme dangereux pour la santé ou l'environnement, et donc nécessiterait de figurer dans cette
section.
Voir section 16 pour
le texte intégral des
phrases R
mentionnées cidessus
Voir section 16 pour le
texte intégral des
mentions H déclarées
ci-dessus.
R43
R52/53
Skin Irrit. 2, H315
Eye Irrit. 2, H319
Skin Sens. 1, H317
N(3-
diméthylaminopropyl)-
1,3-propylènediamine
CAS: 10563-29-8 1 - 3 Xn; R21/22
C; R34
R43
Acute Tox. 4, H302
Acute Tox. 4, H312
Skin Corr. 1B, H314
Eye Dam. 1, H318
Skin Sens. 1, H317
[1]
diglycidylester de
l'acide téréphthalique
CAS: 7195-44-0 0.1 - 1 Xi; R36/38
R43
N; R51/53
Skin Irrit. 2, H315
Eye Irrit. 2, H319
Skin Sens. 1, H317
Aquatic Chronic 2, H411
[1]
triglycidylester de
l'acide trimellitique
CAS: 7237-83-4 0.1 - 1 Xi; R36/38
R43
N; R51/53
Skin Irrit. 2, H315
Eye Irrit. 2, H319
Skin Sens. 1, H317
Aquatic Chronic 2, H411
[1]
[1] Substance classée avec un danger pour la santé ou l'environnement
[2] Substance avec une limite d'exposition au poste de travail
[3] La substance remplit les critères des PTB selon le Règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006, Annexe XIII
[4] La substance remplit les critères des tPtB selon le Règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006, Annexe XIII
Type
Contact avec la peau
Consulter un médecin immédiatement. Rincer immédiatement les yeux à grande
eau, en soulevant de temps en temps les paupières supérieures et inférieures.
Vérifier si la victime porte des verres de contact et dans ce cas, les lui enlever.
Continuez de rincer pendant 10 minutes au moins. Les brûlures chimiques doivent
être traitées sans tarder par un médecin.
Rincer la peau contaminée à grande eau. Retirer les vêtements et les chaussures
contaminés. Laver abondamment à l'eau les vêtements contaminés avant de les
retirer, ou porter des gants. Continuez de rincer pendant 10 minutes au moins.
Consulter un médecin. En cas d'affections ou de symptômes, évitez d'exposer plus
longuement. Laver les vêtements avant de les réutiliser. Laver les chaussures à
fond avant de les remettre.
4.1 Description des premiers secours
Transporter la victime à l'extérieur et la maintenir au repos dans une position où elle
peut confortablement respirer. S'il ne respire pas, en cas de respiration irrégulière
ou d'arrêt respiratoire, que le personnel qualifié pratique la respiration artificielle ou
administre de l'oxygène. Il peut être dangereux pour la personne assistant une
victime de pratiquer le bouche à bouche. Appelez un médecin en cas de
persistance ou d'aggravation des effets néfastes sur la santé. En cas
d'évanouissement, placez la personne en position latérale de sécurité et appelez un
médecin immédiatement. Assurez-vous d'une bonne circulation d'air. Détacher tout
ce qui pourrait être serré, comme un col, une cravate, une ceinture ou un ceinturon.
En cas d’inhalation de produits de décomposition lors d’un incendie, les symptômes
peuvent être différés. La personne exposée peut avoir besoin de rester sous
surveillance médicale pendant 48 heures.
Inhalation
Contact avec les yeux
:
:
:
SECTION 4: Premiers secours
Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 3/19
ARALDITE 2014-1
Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France
Date d'impression :
Date d'édition :
3 Août 2011
3 Août 2011
N° de FDS.
Version :
: 00057058
1
4/19
SECTION 4: Premiers secours
Rincez la bouche avec de l'eau. Enlever les prothèses dentaires s'il y a lieu.
Transporter la victime à l'extérieur et la maintenir au repos dans une position où elle
peut confortablement respirer. Si une personne a avalé de ce produit et est
consciente, lui faire boire de petites quantités d’eau. Si la personne est indisposée,
cesser de la faire boire car des vomissements pourraient entraîner un risque
supplémentaire. Ne pas faire vomir sauf indication contraire émanant du personnel
médical. En cas de vomissement, maintenez la tête vers le bas pour empêcher le
passage des vomissures dans les poumons. Appelez un médecin en cas de
persistance ou d'aggravation des effets néfastes sur la santé. Ne rien faire ingérer à
une personne inconsciente. En cas d'évanouissement, placez la personne en
position latérale de sécurité et appelez un médecin immédiatement. Assurez-vous
d'une bonne circulation d'air. Détacher tout ce qui pourrait être serré, comme un col,
une cravate, une ceinture ou un ceinturon.
Note au médecin traitant En cas d’inhalation de produits de décomposition lors d’un incendie, les symptômes
peuvent être différés. La personne exposée peut avoir besoin de rester sous
surveillance médicale pendant 48 heures.
Ingestion :
:
Traitements spécifiques
Protection des sauveteurs : Aucune initiative ne doit être prise qui implique un risque individuel ou en l’absence
de formation appropriée. Il peut être dangereux pour la personne assistant une
victime de pratiquer le bouche à bouche. Laver abondamment à l'eau les vêtements
contaminés avant de les retirer, ou porter des gants.
4.2 Effets et symptômes les plus importants, aigus ou différés
Effets aigus potentiels sur la santé
Inhalation : L'exposition aux produits de décomposition peut présenter des risques pour la santé.
Les effets graves d’une exposition peuvent être différés.
Irritant pour la bouche, Ingestion : la gorge et l'estomac.
Contact avec la peau : Irritant pour la peau. Peut entraîner une sensibilisation par contact avec la peau.
Contact avec les yeux : Gravement irritant pour les yeux. Risque de lésions oculaires graves.
Signes/symptômes de surexposition
Contact avec la peau
Ingestion
Inhalation Aucune donnée spécifique.
Aucune donnée spécifique.
Les symptômes néfastes peuvent éventuellement comprendre ce qui suit:
irritation
rougeur
:
:
:
Contact avec les yeux : Les symptômes néfastes peuvent éventuellement comprendre ce qui suit:
douleur ou irritation
larmoiement
rougeur
4.3 Indication quant à la nécessité d’une prise en charge médicale immédiate ou d’un traitement spécial
: Traitement symptomatique et thérapie de soutien comme indiqué. Après une
exposition sévère le patient doit être gardé sous contrôle médical pendant au moins
48 heures.
Utiliser un agent extincteur approprié pour étouffer l'incendie avoisinant.
5.1 Moyens d’extinction
Aucun connu.
Moyens d’extinction
appropriés
:
Moyens d’extinction
inappropriés
:
SECTION 5: Mesures de lutte contre l’incendie
5.2 Dangers particuliers résultant de la substance ou du mélange
Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 4/19
ARALDITE 2014-1
Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France
Date d'impression :
Date d'édition :
3 Août 2011
3 Août 2011
N° de FDS.
Version :
: 00057058
1
5/19
SECTION 5: Mesures de lutte contre l’incendie
En présence d'incendie, circonscrire rapidement le site en évacuant toute personne
se trouvant près des lieux de l'accident. Aucune initiative ne doit être prise qui
implique un risque individuel ou en l’absence de formation appropriée. Ce produit
est toxique pour les organismes aquatiques. L'eau du réseau d'extinction d'incendie
qui a été contaminée par ce produit doit être conservée en milieu fermé et ne doit
être déversée ni dans le milieu aquatique, ni aucun égout ou conduit d'évacuation.
Risque lié aux produits de
décomposition thermique
Dangers dus à la
substance ou au mélange
Les produits de décomposition peuvent éventuellement comprendre les substances
suivantes:
dioxyde de carbone
monoxyde de carbone
oxydes d'azote
oxydes de soufre
oxyde/oxydes de métal
L’augmentation de pression résultant d’un incendie ou d’une exposition à des
températures élevées peut provoquer l’explosion du conteneur.
Les pompiers devront porter un équipement de protection approprié ainsi qu'un
appareil de protection respiratoire autonome avec masque intégral fonctionnant en
mode pression positive. Les vêtements pour sapeurs-pompiers (y compris casques,
bottes de protection et gants) conformes à la Norme européenne EN 469 procurent
un niveau de protection de base contre les accidents chimiques.
Équipement de protection
spécial pour le personnel
préposé à la lutte contre
l'incendie
:
:
:
5.3 Conseils aux pompiers
Précautions spéciales pour
les pompiers
:
6.2 Précautions pour la
protection de
l’environnement
Arrêter la fuite si cela ne présente aucun risque. Écarter les conteneurs de la zone
de déversement accidentel. S'approcher des émanations dans la même direction
que le vent. Bloquer toute pénétration possible dans les égouts, les cours d’eau, les
caves ou les zones confinées. Laver le produit répandu dans une installation de
traitement des effluents ou procéder comme suit. Contenir les fuites et les ramasser
à l'aide de matières absorbantes non combustibles telles que le sable, la terre, la
vermiculite, la terre à diatomées. Les placer ensuite dans un récipient pour
élimination conformément à la réglementation locale. Élimination par une entreprise
Évitez la dispersion des matériaux déversés, ainsi que leur écoulement et tout
contact avec le sol, les cours d'eau, les égouts et conduits d'évacuation. Informez
les autorités compétentes en cas de pollution de l'environnement (égouts, voies
d'eau, sol et air) par le produit. Matière propre à polluer l’eau. Peut-être nocif pour
l'environnement en cas de déversement de grandes quantités.
Grand déversement
accidentel
:
Arrêter la fuite si cela ne présente aucun risque. Écarter les conteneurs de la zone
de déversement accidentel. Diluer avec de l'eau et éponger si la matière est soluble
dans l'eau. Sinon, ou si la matière est insoluble dans l'eau, absorber avec un
matériau sec inerte et placer dans un conteneur à déchets approprié. Élimination
par une entreprise autorisée de collecte des déchets.
Petit déversement
accidentel
:
6.3 Méthodes et matériel de confinement et de nettoyage
SECTION 6: Mesures à prendre en cas de dispersion accidentelle
6.1 Précautions individuelles, équipement de protection et procédures d’urgence
Pour le personnel autre
que le personnel
d’intervention
:
Pour les agents
d'intervention
:
Aucune initiative ne doit être prise qui implique un risque individuel ou en l’absence
de formation appropriée. Évacuer les environs. Empêcher l'accès aux personnes
non requises et ne portant pas de vêtements de protection. NE PAS TOUCHER ni
marcher dans le produit répandu. Éviter de respirer les vapeurs ou le brouillard.
Assurer une ventilation adéquate. Porter un appareil de protection respiratoire
approprié lorsque le système de ventilation est inadéquat. Porter un équipement de
protection individuelle adapté.
Si des vêtements spécifiques sont nécessaires pour traiter le déversement,
consulter la section 8 pour les matériaux appropriés et inappropriés. Voir également
la section 8 pour plus d'informations sur les mesures d'hygiène.
:
Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 5/19
ARALDITE 2014-1
Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France
Date d'impression :
Date d'édition :
3 Août 2011
3 Août 2011
N° de FDS.
Version :
: 00057058
1
6/19
SECTION 6: Mesures à prendre en cas de dispersion accidentelle
autorisée de collecte des déchets. Les matériaux absorbants contaminés peuvent
présenter les mêmes risques que le produit répandu.
6.4 Référence à d’autres
sections
Voir section 1 pour les coordonnées d'urgence.
Voir la section 8 pour toute information sur les équipements de protection
individuelle adaptés.
Voir la section 13 pour toute information supplémentaire sur le traitement des
déchets.
:
Stocker entre les températures suivantes: 2 à 40°C (35.6 à 104°F). Stocker
conformément à la réglementation locale. Stocker dans le récipient d'origine à l'abri
de la lumière directe du soleil dans un endroit sec, frais et bien ventilé à l'écart des
matériaux incompatibles (cf. la section 10). Garder le récipient hermétiquement
fermé lorsque le produit n'est pas utilisé. Les récipients ayant été ouverts doivent
être refermés avec soin et maintenus en position verticale afin d'éviter les fuites. Ne
pas stocker dans des conteneurs non étiquetés. Utiliser un récipient approprié pour
éviter toute contamination du milieu ambiant.
SECTION 7: Manipulation et stockage
Les informations de cette section contiennent des directives et des conseils généraux. Consulter la liste des Utilisations
Identifiées de la section 1 pour toute information spécifique aux usages disponible dans le(s) scénario(s) d'exposition.
7.1 Précautions à prendre pour une manipulation sans danger
Mesures de protection :
Conseils sur l'hygiène
professionnelle en général
:
7.2 Conditions d’un
stockage sûr, y compris
d’éventuelles
incompatibilités
7.3 Utilisations finales spécifiques
Recommandations :
Solutions spécifiques au :
secteur industriel
Non disponible.
Non disponible.
Revêtir un équipement de protection individuelle approprié (voir Section 8). Les
personnes ayant des antécédents de sensibilisation cutanée ne doivent pas
intervenir dans les processus utilisant ce produit. Ne pas mettre en contact avec les
yeux, la peau ou les vêtements. Ne pas ingérer. Éviter de respirer les vapeurs ou le
brouillard. Éviter le rejet dans l'environnement. Consulter les instructions
spéciales/la fiche de données de sécurité. Garder dans le conteneur d'origine ou
dans un autre conteneur de substitution homologué fabriqué à partir d'un matériau
compatible et tenu hermétiquement clos lorsqu'il n'est pas utilisé. Les conteneurs
vides retiennent des résidus de produit et peuvent présenter un danger. Ne pas
réutiliser ce conteneur.
Il est interdit de manger, boire ou fumer dans les endroits où ce produit est
manipulé, entreposé ou mis en oeuvre. Il est recommandé au personnel de se laver
les mains et la figure avant de manger, boire ou fumer. Retirer les vêtements
contaminés et les équipements de protection avant d'entrer dans un lieu de
restauration. Voir également la section 8 pour plus d'informations sur les mesures
d'hygiène.
:
Classe de danger de
stockage Huntsman
Advanced Materials
: Classe de stockage 10, Liquide nocif pour l'ambience
Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 6/19
ARALDITE 2014-1
Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France
Date d'impression :
Date d'édition :
3 Août 2011
3 Août 2011
N° de FDS.
Version :
: 00057058
1
7/19
Procédures de surveillance
recommandées
Limites d'exposition professionnelle
Si ce produit contient des ingrédients présentant des limites d'exposition, il peut
s'avérer nécessaire d'effectuer un examen suivi des personnes, de l'atmosphère sur
le lieu de travail ou des organismes vivants pour déterminer l'efficacité de la
ventilation ou d'autres mesures de contrôle ou évaluer le besoin d'utiliser du matériel
de protection des voies respiratoires. Il importe de vous reporter à la norme
européenne EN 689 concernant les méthodes pour évaluer l'exposition par
inhalation aux agents chimiques et aux documents de politique générale nationaux
relatifs aux méthodes pour déterminer les substances dangereuses.
Protection des mains Le port de gants imperméables et résistants aux produits chimiques conformes à
une norme approuvée, est obligatoire en tout temps lors de la manutention de
produits chimiques si une évaluation des risques le préconise.
Utiliser une protection oculaire conforme à une norme approuvée dès lors qu'une
évaluation du risque indique qu'il est nécessaire d'éviter l'exposition aux projections
de liquides, aux fines particules pulvérisées ou aux poussières.
Protection oculaire/faciale
Aucune valeur de limite d'exposition connue.
:
:
:
Protection de la peau
Contrôles d’ingénierie
appropriés
: Aucune ventilation particulière requise. Une bonne ventilation générale devrait être
suffisante pour contrôler l'exposition du technicien aux contaminants en suspension
dans l'air. Si ce produit contient des composants pour lesquels des contraintes
liées à l'exposition existent, utiliser des enceintes de protection, une ventilation
locale par aspiration, ou d'autres moyens de contrôle automatiques intégrés afin de
maintenir le seuil d'exposition du technicien inférieur aux limites recommandées ou
légales.
Se laver abondamment les mains, les avant-bras et le visage après avoir manipulé
des produits chimiques, avant de manger, de fumer et d'aller aux toilettes ainsi qu'à
la fin de la journée de travail. Il est recommandé d'utiliser les techniques
appropriées pour retirer les vêtements potentiellement contaminés. Les vêtements
de travail contaminés ne devraient pas sortir du lieu de travail. Laver les vêtements
contaminés avant de les réutiliser. S'assurer que les dispositifs rince-oeil
automatiques et les douches de sécurité se trouvent à proximité de l'emplacement
des postes de travail.
8.2 Contrôles de l’exposition
Mesures d'hygiène :
Aucune DEL disponible.
Concentrations prédites avec effet
Aucune PEC disponible.
SECTION 8: Contrôles de l’exposition/protection individuelle
Les informations de cette section contiennent des directives et des conseils généraux. Consulter la liste des Utilisations
Identifiées de la section 1 pour toute information spécifique aux usages disponible dans le(s) scénario(s) d'exposition.
8.1 Paramètres de contrôle
Doses dérivées avec effet
Mesures de protection individuelles
Les limites d'exposition sur la place de travail doivent être dans les normes (poussière totale, poussière de quartz
potentiellement inhalable). Si les limites sont dépassées, portez un masque à poussière approprié.
A T T E N T I O N ! Ce produit contient du quartz, classé par l'IARC parmi les substances carcinogènes pour
l'homme (Groupe 1), pouvant causer une silicose ou un cancer des poumons par inhalation des poussières. Il est
donc important d'éviter de s'exposer à toute inhalation lors des opérations mécaniques effectuées avec le produit fini
(mouture, décapage, coupe...).
QUARTZ (CAS RN 14808-60-7):
France: TWA: 0.1 mg/m³ 8 hour(s). Form: respirable aerosol
Suisse: TWA: 0.15 mg/m³ 8 hour(s). Form: respirable dust
Belgique: TWA: 0.1 mg/m³ 8 hour(s). Form: respirable dust
Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 7/19
ARALDITE 2014-1
Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France
Date d'impression :
Date d'édition :
3 Août 2011
3 Août 2011
N° de FDS.
Version :
: 00057058
1
8/19
SECTION 8: Contrôles de l’exposition/protection individuelle
Lorsque la ventilation du local est insuffisante, porter un équipement de protection
respiratoire. Le choix de l'appareil de protection respiratoire doit être fondé sur les
niveaux d'expositions prévus ou connus, les dangers du produit et les limites
d'utilisation sans danger de l'appareil de protection respiratoire retenu.
Protection respiratoire :
L'équipement de protection personnel pour le corps devra être choisi en fonction de
la tâche à réaliser ainsi que des risques encourus, et il est recommandé de le faire
valider par un spécialiste avant de procéder à la manipulation du produit.
:
Contrôle de l'exposition
de l'environnement
: Il importe de tester les émissions provenant des systèmes de ventilation ou du
matériel de fabrication pour vous assurer qu'elles sont conformes aux exigences de
la législation sur la protection de l'environnement. Dans certains cas, il sera
nécessaire d'équiper le matériel de fabrication d'un épurateur de gaz ou d'un filtre
ou de le modifier techniquement afin de réduire les émissions à des niveaux
acceptables.
Protection corporelle :
Autre protection cutanée Des chaussures adéquates et toutes mesures de protection corporelle devraient
être déterminées en fonction de l'opération effectuée et des risques impliqués, et
devraient être approuvées par un spécialiste avant toute manipulation de ce produit.
Alcool éthylvinylique laminé (EVAL), caoutchouc butyle
néoprène, Matériaux pour gants caoutchouc nitrile
pour utilisation à court
terme/projection (10
min